HandicapMaster User Manual

HandicapMaster User Manual
HandicapMaster®
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
User Manual
HandicapMaster®
Competitions and Handicapping Software
by © HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Welcome to HandicapMaster®.
HandicapMaster® is Competitions and Handicapping
Software for Golf Clubs and Societies. We thank you for your
interest in HandicapMaster® and hope you will find this
Manual to be of help.
We always value customer feedback . If you have any
comments about this manual, please do not hesitate to
contact us.
Should you need any additional assistance with
HandicapMaster®, please do not hesitate to contact us.
Thank you.
E-mail: [email protected]
Web Site: http://www.handicapmaster.org
HandicapMaster®
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the
written permission of the publisher.
Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of the
respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks.
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume no
responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this
document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and
the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused
directly or indirectly by this document.
Printed: January 2015
4
HandicapMaster®
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 HandicapMaster
17
Chapter 2 Introduction
19
Chapter 3 How to buy HandicapMaster?
22
Chapter 4 The HandicapMaster Desktop
24
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 24
2 The
...................................................................................................................................
Desktop
25
3 Re-order
...................................................................................................................................
information in Right Hand Pane Grid
27
4 Opening
...................................................................................................................................
and Closing the Left Hand Pane
28
5 Keyboard
...................................................................................................................................
Shortcuts
29
Chapter 5 Getting Started with
HandicapMaster
32
1 Copyright
...................................................................................................................................
and Warranty
32
2 Getting
...................................................................................................................................
Started
33
3 Registration
................................................................................................................................... 34
36
Chapter 6 Maintaining Club Memberships
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 36
2 Adding,
...................................................................................................................................
modifying and deleting Membership records
37
Add a new.........................................................................................................................................................
Mem ber
37
Modify a Mem
.........................................................................................................................................................
ber record
37
Delete a Mem
.........................................................................................................................................................
ber (m ark as a Past Mem ber)
38
Recover a.........................................................................................................................................................
previously deleted Mem ber
39
Mem bership
.........................................................................................................................................................
record fields
39
Issuing a Handicap
......................................................................................................................................................... 42
Change a Handicap
.........................................................................................................................................................
Aw ard
43
Change Aw
.........................................................................................................................................................
ay Mem ber To a Hom e Mem ber
44
Change Aw
.........................................................................................................................................................
ay Mem bers Hom e Club
45
Change Hom
.........................................................................................................................................................
e Mem ber To an Aw ay Mem ber
46
Considerations
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Juniors
46
Basic Player
.........................................................................................................................................................
Subscription recording and m anagem ent
47
3 Set...................................................................................................................................
a Handicap for a Member
49
4 View
...................................................................................................................................
a Member's Handicap Record
50
5 Create
...................................................................................................................................
a Handicap Certificate for a Member
51
6 Member
...................................................................................................................................
Subscription Pools
52
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 52
Add a New.........................................................................................................................................................
Pool
52
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Contents
5
Edit an Existing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Pool
52
Mem ber Subscription
.........................................................................................................................................................
Pools Window
53
Add Mem bers
.........................................................................................................................................................
to a Pool
54
Rem ove Mem
.........................................................................................................................................................
bers from a Pool
54
7 Importing
...................................................................................................................................
or Exporting Membership records
56
About Im porting
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Exporting
56
Im port Mem
.........................................................................................................................................................
berships from an external file
56
Im port Visitors
.........................................................................................................................................................
from an external file
57
Export Mem
.........................................................................................................................................................
bership Records to an external file
58
Form at of .........................................................................................................................................................
the Im port File
58
Im porting.........................................................................................................................................................
Handicaps from another Handicap System
63
Form at of .........................................................................................................................................................
the Export File
65
8 Change
...................................................................................................................................
a Member to a Visitor
69
9 Change
...................................................................................................................................
a Member to 'No Handicap'
70
10 Synchronise
...................................................................................................................................
with External Membership System
71
Chapter 7 Maintaining Visitor Records
73
1 About
...................................................................................................................................
Visitors
73
2 Add
...................................................................................................................................
a new Visitor
74
3 Modify
...................................................................................................................................
a Visitor record
76
4 Delete
...................................................................................................................................
a Visitor record
77
5 Recover
...................................................................................................................................
a previously deleted Visitor
78
6 Update
...................................................................................................................................
a Handicap of a Visitor
79
7 Change
...................................................................................................................................
a Visitor to a Member
80
Chapter 8 Working with E-mail and Letters
82
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 82
2 Working
...................................................................................................................................
with E-mail
83
E-m ail Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 83
E-m ail Settings
......................................................................................................................................................... 83
The New Message
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Recipients Window s
86
E-m ail Log......................................................................................................................................................... 88
Change the
.........................................................................................................................................................
covering text sent w ith e-m ails
89
Change the
.........................................................................................................................................................
'From ' E-m ail address used
90
E-m ailing Handicap
.........................................................................................................................................................
Certificates
90
E-m ailing the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Report Aw ay Players' Scores to their Hom e Clubs Report
91
E-m ailing Subscriptions
......................................................................................................................................................... 91
E-m ailing Overdue
.........................................................................................................................................................
Subscriptions
92
E-m ailing Letters
......................................................................................................................................................... 92
E-m ailing Reports
......................................................................................................................................................... 93
E-m ailing Mem
.........................................................................................................................................................
bers, Aw ay Mem bers and Visitors
93
E-m ailing Past
.........................................................................................................................................................
Mem bers or Past Visitors
94
E-m ailing Golf
.........................................................................................................................................................
Clubs
94
3 Writing
...................................................................................................................................
Letters to Members
96
Letters Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 96
Write a new
.........................................................................................................................................................
Letter
96
Resend a Saved
.........................................................................................................................................................
Letter
97
Delete a Saved
.........................................................................................................................................................
Letter
98
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
6
HandicapMaster®
Write a Letter
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Introduction for a Mem ber
98
Change the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Font used in Letters
99
Configure.........................................................................................................................................................
the Layout of Letters
99
Change the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Salutation used in Letters
100
Using Fields
.........................................................................................................................................................
in Letters
100
Add Letterheads
.........................................................................................................................................................
to Letters
103
Sending Letters
.........................................................................................................................................................
by em ail
104
4 Distribution
...................................................................................................................................
Lists
105
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 105
Add a new
.........................................................................................................................................................
Distribution List
106
Edit a Distribution
.........................................................................................................................................................
List
108
Delete a Distribution
.........................................................................................................................................................
List
109
Add and Change
.........................................................................................................................................................
Entries in a Distribution List
110
Rem ove Entries
.........................................................................................................................................................
from a Distribution List
110
Address .........................................................................................................................................................
Labels from a Distribution List
111
Chapter 9 Setting System-wide Options
114
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 114
2 Global
...................................................................................................................................
Options
115
3 Accounting
...................................................................................................................................
Options
120
Chapter 10 Userids and Passwords
123
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 123
2 Users
...................................................................................................................................
and Access
124
Users and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Access
124
Properties
.........................................................................................................................................................
of a Userid
124
Types of .........................................................................................................................................................
Access
125
Custom Access
......................................................................................................................................................... 125
3 Add
...................................................................................................................................
a User
129
4 Remove
...................................................................................................................................
a User
130
5 Change
...................................................................................................................................
the Access Granted to a User
131
6 Changing
...................................................................................................................................
the Password
132
Chapter 11 Reports
135
1 Viewing,
...................................................................................................................................
Printing, E-mailing and Saving Reports
135
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 135
The Reports
.........................................................................................................................................................
Toolbar
135
Print a Report
......................................................................................................................................................... 136
E-m ail a Report
......................................................................................................................................................... 137
Save a Report
.........................................................................................................................................................
to File
137
Change the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Size of Report on Screen
138
Export a report
.........................................................................................................................................................
to Microsoft Excel
138
2 Customising
...................................................................................................................................
Reports
140
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 140
Custom ising
.........................................................................................................................................................
appearance of Reports
140
Add a Club
.........................................................................................................................................................
Logo to Reports
141
Rem ove a
.........................................................................................................................................................
Club Logo from Reports
142
Configure
.........................................................................................................................................................
layout of Handicap Certificate
142
Configure
.........................................................................................................................................................
layout of Handicap List
143
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Contents
7
Configure
.........................................................................................................................................................
Most Im proved Golfer Report
144
Generate.........................................................................................................................................................
Letter to player autom atically w hen Handicap First Aw ard or General Play adjustm ent
145
Configure
.........................................................................................................................................................
'Players Not Played Near Handicap' Report
146
Configure
.........................................................................................................................................................
Com petition Reports
146
Configure
.........................................................................................................................................................
'Handicap Record' Report
147
Configure
.........................................................................................................................................................
Displaying of Mem ber's Nam es
147
Turn off Warnings
.........................................................................................................................................................
w hen Printing Reports
148
3 Viewing
...................................................................................................................................
Charts
149
The Charts
.........................................................................................................................................................
Toolbar
149
4 Summary
...................................................................................................................................
of Available Reports
150
Chapter 12 Working with Golf Courses
155
1 Add
...................................................................................................................................
a New Golf Course
155
2 Enter
...................................................................................................................................
Golf Course Details
156
3 Enter
...................................................................................................................................
Club Contact Details and Addresses
157
4 Operating
...................................................................................................................................
two or more courses at the Home Club
158
5 Change
...................................................................................................................................
name of 'Other' Region
159
6 Delete
...................................................................................................................................
a user added Golf Course
160
Chapter 13 Working with Competitions
162
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 162
2 Types
...................................................................................................................................
of Stroke-play competitions supported
163
3 Run
...................................................................................................................................
a Stroke-play Competition - Overview
164
4 Competition
...................................................................................................................................
Templates
165
Introduction
.........................................................................................................................................................
to Com petition Tem plates
165
Add a new
.........................................................................................................................................................
Com petition Tem plate
165
Modify a .........................................................................................................................................................
Com petition Tem plate
165
Copy a Com
.........................................................................................................................................................
petition Tem plate
166
Delete a Com
.........................................................................................................................................................
petition Tem plate
166
The Com.........................................................................................................................................................
petition Tem plate Wizard
167
Mixed Com
.........................................................................................................................................................
petitions
172
5 Opening
...................................................................................................................................
Competitions
174
Open a New
.........................................................................................................................................................
Com petition
174
Delete an.........................................................................................................................................................
Opened Com petition
174
Change an
.........................................................................................................................................................
Opened Com petition
174
The Open.........................................................................................................................................................
a New Com petition Wizard
175
6 Booking
...................................................................................................................................
Future Competitions (Optional step)
178
7 Starting
...................................................................................................................................
Sheets (Optional step)
179
Create a .........................................................................................................................................................
Starting Sheet
179
The Start.........................................................................................................................................................
Sheet Wizard
179
Add Players
..................................................................................................................................................
to the Start Sheet Grid
181
Auto-Fill Start
..................................................................................................................................................
Sheet
182
Reorder Players
..................................................................................................................................................
in Start Sheet Grid
183
How a Balanced
..................................................................................................................................................
Draw is calculated
184
View a Starting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Sheet Report
185
Print Labels
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Scorecards
186
Design Custom
.........................................................................................................................................................
Start Sheet Labels
187
Cancel a .........................................................................................................................................................
Starting Sheet
189
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
8
HandicapMaster®
8 Enter
...................................................................................................................................
Scores
190
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 190
Enter Com
.........................................................................................................................................................
petition Scores
190
The Enter.........................................................................................................................................................
Scores Toolbar
191
Enter a Score
......................................................................................................................................................... 191
Edit a Score
.........................................................................................................................................................
previously entered
192
Delete a Score
.........................................................................................................................................................
previously entered
192
Find a player
.........................................................................................................................................................
in the com petition
193
Scorecard
.........................................................................................................................................................
Entry Window
193
The Scorecard
.........................................................................................................................................................
Toolbar
194
Review Scores
.........................................................................................................................................................
entered for a Com petition
194
Change how
.........................................................................................................................................................
an Opened Com petition is being played
195
The Am end
.........................................................................................................................................................
Com petition w indow
195
Change how
.........................................................................................................................................................
scores are entered onto Scorecard w indow
198
9 Apply
...................................................................................................................................
Scores - Calculate results and adjust Handicaps
199
10 View
...................................................................................................................................
Results
201
11 2's
...................................................................................................................................
returned by competitors
204
12 Create
...................................................................................................................................
a copy of a Closed Competition
205
13 Competitions
...................................................................................................................................
played over more than one round
206
Overview......................................................................................................................................................... 206
Run a Multiple-round
.........................................................................................................................................................
Com petition
207
Run an Alternative
.........................................................................................................................................................
Day Com petition
208
Run a Best-of
.........................................................................................................................................................
Series Com petition
209
Run num.........................................................................................................................................................
ber of Birdies, Tw os, etc Com petition
211
Gross and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Nett Results from m ultiple round com petitions
213
14 Suspending
...................................................................................................................................
Players from Competitions
215
15 Managing
...................................................................................................................................
Competition Entry Fees
216
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 216
Set a Fee.........................................................................................................................................................
Structure for a Com petition
217
View and.........................................................................................................................................................
process Fees
217
The Manage
.........................................................................................................................................................
Com petition Fees w indow
218
Prevent entry
.........................................................................................................................................................
to com petition if insufficient funds in m em ber's account
219
Chapter 14 The Player Entry System
224
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 224
2 Run
...................................................................................................................................
the Player Entry System
225
3 Change
...................................................................................................................................
the way Player Entry system works
226
4 The
...................................................................................................................................
Configure Player Entry Wizard
227
5 Choose
...................................................................................................................................
Competitors
232
6 Entry
...................................................................................................................................
of competitors scores
233
7 Enter
...................................................................................................................................
a Missing Card as 'No Return'
234
8 Automatic
...................................................................................................................................
Login to the Player Entry System
235
9 Setting
...................................................................................................................................
a Password to exit Player Entry System
236
10 Command
...................................................................................................................................
Line Options
237
11 Run
...................................................................................................................................
a Leader Board
238
12 Display
...................................................................................................................................
Messages on the Player Entry Terminal
239
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Contents
9
13 Change
...................................................................................................................................
choice of Profile for a specific computer
241
14 Adding
...................................................................................................................................
Visitors
242
Chapter 15 Bookings
244
1 Competition
...................................................................................................................................
Entry
244
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 244
Bookings.........................................................................................................................................................
Tem plates
245
Introduction
..................................................................................................................................................
to Bookings Templates
245
Create a ..................................................................................................................................................
Bookings Template
246
Modify a ..................................................................................................................................................
Bookings Template
246
Delete a Bookings
..................................................................................................................................................
Template
246
The Bookings
..................................................................................................................................................
Template Wizard
247
Prepare a.........................................................................................................................................................
Com petition to receive Bookings
248
Modify Booking
.........................................................................................................................................................
Arrangem ents
249
Cancel Booking
.........................................................................................................................................................
Arrangem ents
250
The Bookings
.........................................................................................................................................................
Wizard
250
Opens Com
.........................................................................................................................................................
petitions; Players paying online to enter com petition
251
Manage Bookings
.........................................................................................................................................................
w ithin HandicapMaster
252
The Bookings
.........................................................................................................................................................
Toolbar
253
Manage Bookings
.........................................................................................................................................................
using Player Entry System
254
Online Bookings
......................................................................................................................................................... 254
Enable the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Bookings Function in Player Entry System
254
View History
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Bookings Received
255
Cancellation
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Bookings
255
2 Group
...................................................................................................................................
Bookings
257
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 257
Record a.........................................................................................................................................................
Group Booking
257
Modify a .........................................................................................................................................................
Group Booking
258
Update paym
.........................................................................................................................................................
ent status for Group Booking
258
Delete a Group
.........................................................................................................................................................
Booking
258
The Group
.........................................................................................................................................................
Bookings Wizard
259
Create a .........................................................................................................................................................
booking confirm ation report
260
Create a .........................................................................................................................................................
report of Catering reservations
260
Create a .........................................................................................................................................................
copy of (duplicate) a Group Booking
261
Stop a Group
.........................................................................................................................................................
Booking show ing on Fixture Lists
261
3 Calendar
...................................................................................................................................
Notes
262
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 262
Add a note
.........................................................................................................................................................
to the Bookings Calendar
262
Edit a note
.........................................................................................................................................................
on the Bookings Calendar
263
Rem ove a
.........................................................................................................................................................
note from the Bookings Calendar
263
Print a note
......................................................................................................................................................... 263
Create a .........................................................................................................................................................
copy of (duplicate) a note
264
Stop a note
.........................................................................................................................................................
show ing on Fixture Lists
264
4 Create
...................................................................................................................................
a Fixture List report
265
Chapter 16 Match-Play Competitions
267
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 267
2 Performing
...................................................................................................................................
a Knockout Draw
268
3 Add,
...................................................................................................................................
change or remove players from the Draw
271
4 Players
...................................................................................................................................
booking into a KO Draw
272
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
10
HandicapMaster®
5 Ordering
...................................................................................................................................
of Players in KO Draw
274
6 The
...................................................................................................................................
Knockout Draw Chart
275
7 Re-run
...................................................................................................................................
a Knockout Draw
276
8 Enter
...................................................................................................................................
results of a Match
277
9 Clear
...................................................................................................................................
a result from a Match
279
10 Re-print
...................................................................................................................................
the Draw
280
11 Change
...................................................................................................................................
a player listed in the Draw
281
12 Add
...................................................................................................................................
a player in place of a Bye
282
13 Change
...................................................................................................................................
a Player to a Bye
283
14 Change
...................................................................................................................................
the last date for a round to be played by
284
15 Edit
...................................................................................................................................
Knockout Competition Notes
285
16 Delete
...................................................................................................................................
a Knockout competition
286
Chapter 17 Ladies Medals
288
1 Ladies
...................................................................................................................................
Medals
288
2 Identify
...................................................................................................................................
a competition as a Ladies' Medal qualifier
289
3 Report
...................................................................................................................................
Ladies Medal results
290
Chapter 18 Order of Merit and Eclectic
Competitions
292
1 Order
...................................................................................................................................
of Merit Competitions
292
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 292
Creating .........................................................................................................................................................
an Order of Merit Com petition
292
The Order
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Merit Com petition Wizard
293
Set up an.........................................................................................................................................................
Order of Merit Plan
295
Adding or.........................................................................................................................................................
updating scores to an Order of Merit
296
The Update
.........................................................................................................................................................
Order of Merit Scores w indow
297
Change form
.........................................................................................................................................................
at of an Order of Merit Com petition
298
Edit Order
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Merit Com petition Notes
299
Delete an.........................................................................................................................................................
Order of Merit Com petition
299
2 Eclectic
...................................................................................................................................
Competitions
301
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 301
Eclectic Com
.........................................................................................................................................................
petitions
301
Creating .........................................................................................................................................................
an Eclectic Com petition
302
The Eclectic
.........................................................................................................................................................
Com petition Wizard
303
Adding or.........................................................................................................................................................
updating scores to an Eclectic
305
The Update
.........................................................................................................................................................
Eclectic Scores w indow
306
Edit Eclectic
.........................................................................................................................................................
Com petition Notes
307
Change form
.........................................................................................................................................................
at of an Eclectic Com petition
307
Delete an.........................................................................................................................................................
Eclectic Com petition
308
Disqualified
.........................................................................................................................................................
Scores and Eclectics
308
Chapter 19 Handicapping
310
1 General
...................................................................................................................................
Play and other Handicap amendments
310
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 310
Change a.........................................................................................................................................................
Player's Handicap under General Play
310
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Contents
11
Turn off General
.........................................................................................................................................................
Play and Handicap First Aw ard Letters
311
Reprint a.........................................................................................................................................................
General Play, Handicap First Aw ard or Annual Review Letter
311
Print Exceptional
.........................................................................................................................................................
Scoring Reduction Letter
311
Update the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Handicap of an Aw ay Player
312
Enter an Aw
.........................................................................................................................................................
ay score for a Player
312
Adjusted.........................................................................................................................................................
Gross Scores
314
Im porting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Aw ay Scores
315
About Importing
..................................................................................................................................................
Aw ay Scores
315
Import Aw..................................................................................................................................................
ay Scores from a file
315
Format of..................................................................................................................................................
the Import File
316
Late reporting
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Aw ay CSS (CONGU Handicapping Only)
317
Order of .........................................................................................................................................................
events in m em bers' handicap records
318
Record a.........................................................................................................................................................
Handicapping Note for a Player
318
2 The
...................................................................................................................................
CONGU® Unified Handicapping System
320
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 320
Setting CONGU®
.........................................................................................................................................................
Handicapping Options
320
Supplem.........................................................................................................................................................
entary Scores
320
CONGU® .........................................................................................................................................................
Annual Handicap Review
321
Introduction
.................................................................................................................................................. 321
CONGU®..................................................................................................................................................
Annual Review of Handicaps
322
Identifying
..................................................................................................................................................
Players for Annual Review
322
Adjust Players'
..................................................................................................................................................
Handicaps after Annual Review
322
Print a report
..................................................................................................................................................
of Handicap adjustments made at Annual Review
323
'Com petition'
.........................................................................................................................................................
Handicap Status
323
ENGLAND
..................................................................................................................................................
and WALES
323
Introduction
...........................................................................................................................................
(England & Wales)
323
Handicap ...........................................................................................................................................
Status Regulations (Wales)
324
Override Handicap
...........................................................................................................................................
Status (Wales)
325
Players Exempt
...........................................................................................................................................
from Non-Competition Handicaps (Wales)
326
Stop players w ith Non-Competition Handicaps entering a competition
(Wales) ........................................................................................................................................... 326
SCOTLAND
.................................................................................................................................................. 327
Reassessing
...........................................................................................................................................
Handicap Statuses after 1st March (Scotland)
327
Restoring...........................................................................................................................................
a Handicap to Competition status (Scotland)
327
Reporting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Qualifying scores by 'AWAY' Mem bers to their Hom e Clubs
328
'Exceptional
.........................................................................................................................................................
Scoring' Reductions
328
Low Handicap
.........................................................................................................................................................
Players Audit
329
Issue a Disability
.........................................................................................................................................................
Handicap
330
Com petition
.........................................................................................................................................................
Scratch Scores - Decision 3(a)
330
Running a
.........................................................................................................................................................
CONGU® 9 Hole Handicap Com petition
331
3 The
...................................................................................................................................
EGA Handicap System
332
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 332
Enter an Extra
.........................................................................................................................................................
Day Score
332
EGA Annual
.........................................................................................................................................................
Handicap Review s and Inactive Handicaps
333
Annual Handicap
..................................................................................................................................................
Review
333
Restoring..................................................................................................................................................
an Inactive Handicap
334
Enter a Handicap
..................................................................................................................................................
Score (Inactive Handicaps)
334
View Players
..................................................................................................................................................
w ith Inactive handicaps
335
4 List
...................................................................................................................................
Players within a Handicap Range
336
5 Handicap
...................................................................................................................................
Records for Players within a Handicap Range
337
6 Suspending
...................................................................................................................................
Players' Handicaps
338
7 Golf
...................................................................................................................................
Society Handicapping (Society Edition Only)
339
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
12
HandicapMaster®
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 339
Change the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Handicapping Rules used
339
The Configure
.........................................................................................................................................................
Handicapping Rules Wizard
340
8 Handicapping
...................................................................................................................................
of Competitions played over less than 18 holes
342
How num.........................................................................................................................................................
ber of Strokes Received is calculated
342
Stroke Index
.........................................................................................................................................................
allocation and w here Handicap Strokes are received
342
Chapter 20 Subscriptions, Invoices and
Payments
345
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 345
2 Preparation
...................................................................................................................................
- Payment Items
347
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 347
Methods.........................................................................................................................................................
of Paym ent
347
Paym ent .........................................................................................................................................................
Categories
348
Paym ent .........................................................................................................................................................
Item s
349
The Paym.........................................................................................................................................................
ent Item Window
349
3 Subscriptions
................................................................................................................................... 351
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 351
Create a .........................................................................................................................................................
Subscription Tem plate
351
Assign a.........................................................................................................................................................
Subscription Tem plate to a Mem ber
352
Edit a Subscription
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tem plate
353
Copy a Subscription
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tem plate
353
Delete a Subscription
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tem plate
354
Raise a Subscription
......................................................................................................................................................... 355
The Raise.........................................................................................................................................................
Subscription Wizard
355
View a Mem
.........................................................................................................................................................
ber's Subscription
358
Am end Subscription
.........................................................................................................................................................
Notes
358
Find Overdue
.........................................................................................................................................................
Subscriptions
359
Reprint Subscription
.........................................................................................................................................................
Invoices
359
Address .........................................................................................................................................................
Labels for Subscriptions
360
Resend a.........................................................................................................................................................
Subscription Invoice by E-m ail
361
Raise an .........................................................................................................................................................
Overdue Subscription
362
The Overdue
.........................................................................................................................................................
Subscriptions Wizard
362
Void Multiple
.........................................................................................................................................................
Subscriptions
364
Managing.........................................................................................................................................................
Annual Subscription Run
364
4 Invoices
................................................................................................................................... 366
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 366
Create an.........................................................................................................................................................
Invoice Tem plate
366
Edit an Invoice
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tem plate
367
Copy an Invoice
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tem plate
367
Delete an.........................................................................................................................................................
Invoice Tem plate
368
Raise an .........................................................................................................................................................
Invoice
368
The Raise.........................................................................................................................................................
Invoices Wizard
368
View an Invoice
......................................................................................................................................................... 370
Am end Invoice
.........................................................................................................................................................
Notes
371
Find Overdue
.........................................................................................................................................................
Invoices
371
Reprint an
.........................................................................................................................................................
Invoice
372
Resend an
.........................................................................................................................................................
Invoice by E-m ail
372
Void Multiple
.........................................................................................................................................................
Invoices
373
5 Subscription
...................................................................................................................................
and Invoice Templates Window
374
6 Payments
................................................................................................................................... 375
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Contents
13
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 375
Record a.........................................................................................................................................................
single Subscription or Invoice Paym ent
376
The Subscriptions,
.........................................................................................................................................................
Invoices and Ad-hoc Paym ents Wizard
376
Adding Paym
.........................................................................................................................................................
ent Item s to an Ad Hoc Paym ent
380
View a Paym
.........................................................................................................................................................
ent
380
Am end Paym
.........................................................................................................................................................
ent Notes
381
Reprint a.........................................................................................................................................................
Receipt
381
Reprint a.........................................................................................................................................................
range of Receipts
381
Resend a.........................................................................................................................................................
Receipt by E-m ail
382
7 Refunds
...................................................................................................................................
and Cancellations
383
Refund a.........................................................................................................................................................
Subscription or Invoice Paym ent
383
The Refund
.........................................................................................................................................................
a Subscription or Invoice Window
383
Refund a.........................................................................................................................................................
Paym ent
384
Cancel (Void)
.........................................................................................................................................................
a Paym ent
384
8 Account
...................................................................................................................................
Balance and Transaction History
386
9 Exporting
...................................................................................................................................
Subscriptions, Invoices or Payments
387
10 Reports
................................................................................................................................... 390
Chapter 21 Correcting Mistakes
392
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 392
2 Undo
................................................................................................................................... 393
3 Undoing
...................................................................................................................................
and amending Handicap Brought Forward or First Award
394
4 Undoing
...................................................................................................................................
a Supplementary Score
395
5 Undoing
...................................................................................................................................
a General Play, Annual Review or Exceptional Scoring Reduction
396
6 Undoing
...................................................................................................................................
and amending competition results
397
7 Undoing
...................................................................................................................................
an Away Score
398
8 Change
...................................................................................................................................
the Name of a Competition
399
Chapter 22 Publishing to Internet
401
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 401
2 The
...................................................................................................................................
Publish to Internet Wizard
402
3 MasterScoreboard.co.uk
................................................................................................................................... 403
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 403
About MasterScoreboard.co.uk
......................................................................................................................................................... 403
Request .........................................................................................................................................................
set up on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
404
Publish data
.........................................................................................................................................................
to MasterScoreboard.co.uk
405
Stop a Mem
.........................................................................................................................................................
ber's Nam e show ing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
405
Reset a Mem
.........................................................................................................................................................
ber's Passw ord on Master Scoreboard
406
Stop a Com
.........................................................................................................................................................
petition show ing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
406
Stop a Knock
.........................................................................................................................................................
Out Draw show ing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
407
Stop an Eclectic
.........................................................................................................................................................
show ing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
408
Stop an Order
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Merit show ing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
408
Stop a Best
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Series Show ing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
409
4 UK
...................................................................................................................................
and Ireland CDH services
410
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 410
Using the.........................................................................................................................................................
CDH for the first tim e
412
Obtain a National
.........................................................................................................................................................
Num ber for a Player
414
Publish the
.........................................................................................................................................................
latest records to the CDH
415
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
14
HandicapMaster®
CDH Validation;
.........................................................................................................................................................
Rem oving unknow n records from CDH
416
Releasing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Mem bers w ho have resigned their m em bership
417
Aw ay Mem
.........................................................................................................................................................
bers
417
Visitors ......................................................................................................................................................... 418
Find a player
.........................................................................................................................................................
on the CDH
418
Player w ith
.........................................................................................................................................................
National Num ber joins club
419
Add Visitors
.........................................................................................................................................................
through Player Entry
420
Verify a Handicap
.........................................................................................................................................................
of a Visitor
421
Verify the.........................................................................................................................................................
Handicaps of Multiple Visitors
421
Reporting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Problem s w ith the CDH service
422
Com m on.........................................................................................................................................................
Error codes returned by the CDH
422
Review ing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Aw ay Scores Received
423
5 Kenya
...................................................................................................................................
Golf Network
424
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 424
Using the.........................................................................................................................................................
Kenya Golf Netw ork for the first tim e
424
6 'Unrecognised'
...................................................................................................................................
Golf Courses
425
7 My
...................................................................................................................................
Golf Ranking
427
About My.........................................................................................................................................................
Golf Ranking
427
Publish results
.........................................................................................................................................................
to My Golf Ranking
428
Chapter 23 Managing the Database
430
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 430
2 The
...................................................................................................................................
function of Housekeeping
431
3 Protection
...................................................................................................................................
of the data
433
4 Backing
...................................................................................................................................
up the Database
434
5 Restoring
...................................................................................................................................
the Database
435
6 Automatic
...................................................................................................................................
Backups
436
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 436
Restoring
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Database from an Autom atic Backup
436
Change the
.........................................................................................................................................................
num ber of Autom atic Backups retained
437
7 Using
...................................................................................................................................
more than one copy of HandicapMaster
438
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 438
Create tw.........................................................................................................................................................
o copies of HandicapMaster on the sam e Com puter
438
Add or m.........................................................................................................................................................
odify the Databases
438
Share a Database
.........................................................................................................................................................
betw een different Users
439
Database.........................................................................................................................................................
Configuration
439
The Database
.........................................................................................................................................................
Wizard
440
Choosing.........................................................................................................................................................
a copy of HandicapMaster to use
441
8 Online
...................................................................................................................................
Backup and Restore
442
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 442
Online Backup
......................................................................................................................................................... 442
Online Restore
......................................................................................................................................................... 443
Chapter 24 Keeping HandicapMaster
Software up to date
446
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 446
2 Check
...................................................................................................................................
for Program Updates
447
3 Automatically
...................................................................................................................................
update HandicapMaster software
448
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Contents
Chapter 25 Integrating HandicapMaster with
Other Systems
15
450
1 Linking
...................................................................................................................................
to Other Membership Systems
450
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 450
How loading
.........................................................................................................................................................
Mem bership inform ation by CSV file w orks
450
Layout of.........................................................................................................................................................
the CSV File
451
How loading
.........................................................................................................................................................
Mem bership inform ation by Rem ote Requests w orks
453
Activating
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Configuring the Integration Facility
455
Load Mem
.........................................................................................................................................................
berships from CSV File w indow
456
Report Account
.........................................................................................................................................................
ID values in use
457
2 Linking
...................................................................................................................................
Competition Fees to External Accounting or Till Systems
459
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 459
3 Linking
...................................................................................................................................
to BRS, Ez-Runner or MyTeeTime Online Tee Bookings
460
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 460
Configure
.........................................................................................................................................................
link w ith BRS Online
460
Configure
.........................................................................................................................................................
link w ith Ez-Runner
461
Configure
.........................................................................................................................................................
link w ith MyTeeTim e
461
Publish m
.........................................................................................................................................................
em bers' details to BRS Online
462
Publish m
.........................................................................................................................................................
em ber's details to MyTeeTim e
462
Im port Com
.........................................................................................................................................................
petition Bookings onto a Start Sheet
462
Chapter 26 Menu Options and Toolbar
Buttons
466
1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 466
2 Menu
...................................................................................................................................
Options and Toolbar Buttons
467
Chapter 27 Appendix
477
1 Council
...................................................................................................................................
of National Golf Unions
477
2 Maximum
...................................................................................................................................
Handling Capacity of the Software
478
3 Send
...................................................................................................................................
Diagnostic Files to Support
479
Index
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
481
Chapter
HandicapMaster
1
HandicapMaster
1
HandicapMaster
HandicapMaster
®
Online Help System
HANDICAPMASTER LIMITED
15 Adlington Drive
Sandbach
Cheshire
CW11 1DX
www.handicapmaster.org
[email protected]
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
17
Chapter
Introduction
2
Introduction
2
19
Introduction
Welcome to HandicapMaster. HandicapMaster is a windows-based 'point and click' program for Golf
Club or Society Competition and Handicap Secretaries to help them administer Competitions and Golf
Handicaps.
There are seven editions of HandicapMaster. These are
Society Edition,
Club Edition,
Premier Edition,
Network Edition,
EGA-Club Edition,
EGA-Premier Edition and
EGA-Network Edition.
This help system covers all editions.
HandicapMaster and Master Scoreboard are the Registered Trademarks of HandicapMaster Ltd.
The Club, Premier and Network Editions
The Club, Premier and Network Editions are designed to be compliant with 'The Unified Handicapping
System' published and administered by the Council of National Golf Unions Ltd (CONGU) (revision 1st
January 2012).
The Club, Premier and Network Editions are licensed by CONGU under license number F-1201.
The CONGU® Unified Handicapping System
All rights in the handicap system embodied in the CONGU Handicap editions are owned by The
Council of National Golf Unions Limited and are used under licence from The Council of National Golf
Unions Limited.
HandicapMaster Limited has been licensed by the Council of National Golf Unions Limited to operate
the Unified Handicapping System 2012 although the Council of National Golf Unions Limited does not
endorse, approve, evaluate or warrant in any way the Software or any use of the Software.
The Trade Mark "CONGU" is owned by the Council of National Golf Unions Ltd and is used by
HandicapMaster Ltd under Licence from the Council of National Golf Unions Ltd.
The Club, Premier and Network Editions may only be installed and operated by authorised
Handicapping Authorities as defined by the Council of National Golf Unions Limited.
The EGA-Club and EGA-Premier Handicap Editions
These editions are designed to be compliant with 'The EGA Handicap System' published and
administered by the European Golf Association (revision 2012).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
20
HandicapMaster®
The Society Edition
The Society Edition allows the Society Handicap Secretary to configure the rules for Handicapping
within the Society.
All reports may be viewed on screen, printed to a page printer or saved to disk in a number of different
formats.
Historical competition results can be viewed at any time.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
21
Chapter
3
How to buy HandicapMaster?
22
3
HandicapMaster®
How to buy HandicapMaster?
Product Summary
http://www.handicapmaster.org/products
Direct Order Link
http://www.handicapmaster.org/shop
Home page
http://www.handicapmaster.org/home.php
E-mail Support
[email protected]
Address
HandicapMaster Limited,
15 Adlington Drive,
Sandbach,
Cheshire.
CW11 1DX.
United Kingdom
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
23
Chapter
4
The HandicapMaster Desktop
24
HandicapMaster®
4
The HandicapMaster Desktop
4.1
Introduction
HandicapMaster is known for its neat and intuitive user interface. The heart of the program is the
Task or Folder pane alongside the Main Window pane. This is situated in the HandicapMaster
desktop.
Toolbars
The most common tasks in HandicapMaster may be accomplished using the buttons along the
top of the main desktop.
Other Toolbars become available for printing reports, writing letters, etc.
Context sensitive help
HandicapMaster has an extensive, context-sensitive help system. These can easily be accessed
by pressing Function Key F1 or clicking buttons labelled 'Help'
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
The HandicapMaster Desktop
4.2
25
The Desktop
Below is the main HandicapMaster desktop. Scroll down for a detailed description.
Main Toolbar
The Main Toolbar, situated across the top of the HandicapMaster desktop, provides access to
the most common tasks such as creating a list of handicaps, producing a Handicap Certificate,
etc.
Tasks/Explorer Tab
The Tasks/Explorer Tab lets you choose between displaying quick access to Tasks you may
wish to perform in HandicapMaster, or searching your records using a Windows Explorer style
Tree (not shown in the picture). Both of these are shown in the Left Hand Pane.
Left Hand Pane
This pane shows either
Tasks you may wish to perform, or
Explorer Tree to search and locate records in the database.
When showing Tasks you may wish to perform (as shown above), the 'popular' tasks from a given
subject i.e Handicapping, Membership or Competitions are displayed in the upper box. Click over any
Task listed, to initiate the task. The lower box shows links to other subjects in HandicapMaster.
For a more detailed view of the records in the database, click the Explorer tab. The left hand
pane now shows an Explorer Tree, with records categorised into folders and collections. Click
any item in the tree to display the applicable records in the Right Hand Pane.
Right Hand Pane
The Right Hand Pane shows the records in the HandicapMaster database. Depending upon the
task being undertaken, the data may be shown
as a list (as shown above) in a grid.
in a report that can be printed, for example, or
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
26
HandicapMaster®
pictorially, as a graph on screen.
See Also
Re-order information in Right Hand Pane Grid
Opening and Closing the Left hand Pane
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
The HandicapMaster Desktop
4.3
27
Re-order information in Right Hand Pane Grid
The order of records displayed in the grid in the Right Hand Pane may be changed, if desired.
Change the order of records in the Grid
1.
Click over a heading above a chosen column. The grid will be re-ordered alphabetically
according to the data in the chosen column.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
28
4.4
HandicapMaster®
Opening and Closing the Left Hand Pane
The Left Hand Pane (Tasks and Explorer Pane) may be hidden if required. This may help when
displaying reports on a low screen resolution, for example.
To Open or Close the Left Hand Pane
1.
Do one of the following:
On the View menu, click Open Task & Explorer Pan or Close Task & Explorer Pane, or
Press shortcut key F6
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
The HandicapMaster Desktop
4.5
29
Keyboard Shortcuts
You can quickly accomplish tasks you perform frequently by using shortcut keys — one or more keys
you press on the keyboard to complete a task.
General Shortcuts
F1
F6
CTRL+P
Display HandicapMaster Help.
Open or Close the Left Hand Pane.
Set up the Printer
Membership Shortcuts
CTRL+N
Add a new Member
CTRL+E
Edit a Member record
CTRL+D
Delete a Member record
CTRL+T
Write a Letter to Members
When displaying the ALL MEMBERS list:
INSERT
Add a new Member
ENTER
Edit the selected Member
DELETE
Delete the selected Member
Competition Shortcuts
CTRL+C
Set up a Template
CTRL+V
View Results
CTRL+Z
Undo a Competition or Handicapping Event
When displaying the COMPETITION TEMPLATES list:
INSERT
Add a Competition Template
ENTER
Edit the selected Competition Template
DELETE
Delete the selected Competition Template
ENTER
View results of the selected Competition
DELETE
Undo the selected Competition
When displaying the CLOSED COMPETITIONS list:
When displaying the KNOCK-OUT COMPETITIONS list:
INSERT
Add a new Knock-out Competition
ENTER
Update KO Competitions with match results
DELETE
Delete the selected Knock-out Competition
Handicapping Shortcuts
CTRL+G
CTRL+A
CTRL+L
CTRL+O
SHIFT+F1
SHIFT+F2
SHIFT+F3
Enter a General Play Change for a Player
Enter an Away Competition Score for a Player
Show Handicap List Report
Run Order of Merit
View a Player's Handicap Record in tabular format
View a Player's Handicap Record in printable report format
View a Player's Handicap Record in graphical format
Reports Shortcuts
Shortcuts when writing Letters
CTRL+Z
Undo
CTRL+X
Cut
CTRL+V
Paste
CTRL+F
Insert Field
When displaying the LETTERS list:
INSERT
Write a new Letter
ENTER
Edit and re-send an existing Letter
DELETE
Delete the selected Letter
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
30
HandicapMaster®
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
31
Chapter
5
Getting Started with HandicapMaster
32
HandicapMaster®
5
Getting Started with HandicapMaster
5.1
Copyright and Warranty
Please carefully read the terms and conditions before using this software. Unless you have a
different licence agreement signed by HandicapMaster Limited your use of this software indicates
your acceptance of this licence agreement and warranty.
Registered Version
A registered version may be freely replicated provided all uses of the copies remains with the sole
purpose of processing on behalf of the registered party.
Reverse Engineering
You may not reverse engineer, de-compile or disassemble the software without prior agreement
of the author.
Database access
You may not access the HandicapMaster database other than in the manner intended by using
the software provided. Direct access to the database using Microsoft Access or other software
without the authors prior consent is forbidden.
Disclaimer of Warranty
THIS SOFTWARE AND ACCOMPANYING FILES ARE PROVIDED 'AS IS' AND WITHOUT
WARRANTIES AS TO PERFORMANCE OR MERCHANTABILITY OR ANY OTHER
WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESSED OR SUPPLIED. Because of the various hardware and
software environments into which HandicapMaster may be put, no warranty of fitness for a
particular purpose is offered. Good data processing procedure dictates that any program be
thoroughly tested with non-critical data before relying on it. The user must assume the entire risk
of using the program. Any liability of the seller will be limited exclusively to product replacement
or refund of any purchase price.
The Unified Handicapping System
© Copyright 2012 The Council of National Golf Unions Ltd
Not to be reproduced by any means without prior permission.
All rights in the handicap system embodied in this software are owned by The Council of National Golf
Unions Limited and are used under licence from The Council of National Golf Unions Limited. CONGU
Ltd does not endorse, approve, evaluate or warrant in any way the Software or any use of the
Software.
The EGA Handicap System
© Copyright 2012 European Golf Association.
All rights reserved.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Getting Started with HandicapMaster
5.2
33
Getting Started
How to Start HandicapMaster
1.
Do one of the following:
Select HandicapMaster from the Start Bar, or
double-click over the Icon on the Desktop, or
double-click over HandicapMaster.EXE from within Windows Explorer.
How to Log on to HandicapMaster
1.
Users are normally required to log on to HandicapMaster. The default password is not set,
however.
2.
The password may be changed by choosing the Change Password option from the File
menu.
If you have lost the Password
1.
In the event of the password being lost or forgotten, please contact the supplier.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
34
5.3
HandicapMaster®
Registration
It is requested that you run HandicapMaster with a valid Registration Code.
Enter your Registration code in the Registration window.
To Enter your Registration Code
1.
On the File menu, Choose Change Registration.
2.
Enter the name of your club or organisation (this will be displayed on all of the
HandicapMaster reports).
TIP: Type the name of your Organisation in Title Case for the best presentation on reports. E.
g. type 'Garden Golf Club' rather than 'GARDEN GOLF CLUB'
3.
Choose the applicable HandicapMaster Edition and any available options.
4.
If you have a registration code, please enter it in the appropriate section.
If the Registration Code is not accepted
Please ensure the details entered for the name of your Organisation is the same as that given when
you registered. The registration code will have been derived from this information. If you alter or change
this field, this will invalidate the registration code.
If you believe you have entered this correctly and still cannot get the registration code accepted, please
contact the supplier.
Click OK to continue.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
35
Chapter
6
Maintaining Club Memberships
36
HandicapMaster®
6
Maintaining Club Memberships
6.1
Introduction
Managing the Membership Records
In order to manage Member's Handicaps, it is necessary for you to maintain a list of Members.
As a minimum, this list must contain the names of the Members and their Handicaps. In
addition, the club handicapping scheme requires additional information such as those clubs at
which your Members also hold a membership.
The information relating to any one Member is called the 'membership record'. This chapter
describes those steps required to maintain the membership records for your club and gives a
description of each of the items of information that can be recorded.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
6.2
Adding, modifying and deleting Membership records
6.2.1
Add a new Member
37
To add a new Member to HandicapMaster
1.
On the Players menu, click New Member.
2.
Enter the Membership Information using the membership record fields provided.
Notes
TIP: It is recommended that the member's name should be entered in 'titled case' - that is, Capital First
letter and lower case secondary letters. This will improve the appearance of the reports.
I.e. 'Smith' rather than 'SMITH'.
The combination of First Name + Middle Initials + Last Name + Home Club must be unique for each
member.
You should change the Gender box if the member is a lady.
You should select "Junior" in the Age Group box if the member is under adult age. In the Club, Premier
and Network Editions of HandicapMaster, if the member is a junior, this will allow handicaps to be
allocated up to 54 in accordance with Appendix J of the CONGU® Unified Handicapping System.
Two of the Age Groups provided may be renamed using Options.
Home Club
This field is set to the nominated system Home Club by default. Should the member be an 'away'
member, select an alternative club by clicking the Handicapping tab and selecting Another Club.
If the member belongs to any other clubs, these may be added to the Also A Member Of list by clicking
Add Club to List.
6.2.2
Modify a Member record
To modify the details of an existing membership record
1.
Do one of the following:
In the Players list, select a Member and press Enter Key, or
In the Players list, select a Member, then on the Players menu, click Edit Member, or
On the Players menu, click Edit Member and select a Member from the list displayed.
2.
Modify the Membership Information using the membership record fields provided.
To modify the details of a Past Member
1.
Do one of the following:
In the Past Members list, select a Member and press Enter Key,
In the Past Members list, select a Member right click and select Edit from the popup menu.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
38
HandicapMaster®
In the Past Members list, select a Member right then select Edit a Membership record from the
Previous Member Tasks
2.
Modify the Membership Information using the membership record fields provided.
Notes:
When editing Past Member records a reduced range of of membership record fields are available.
6.2.3
Delete a Member (mark as a Past Member)
If a person has ceased their membership with your club you will have to delete their membership
record. They will be marked as a Past Member in the database.
To delete a Member or an away Member
1.
Do one of the following:
In the All Members or Away Members list, select a Member and press Delete Key, or
In the All Members or Away Members list, select a Member, then on the Players menu, click
Delete Member, or
On the Players menu, click Delete Member and select a Member from the list displayed.
To delete multiple Members
1.
In the All Members or Away Members list, right-click and select Delete Multiple Members.
2.
Tick the box along side those visitors to be deleted
3.
Click OK and confirm the deletion.
To delete ALL Member records
1.
In the All Members or Away Members list, right-click and select Delete Multiple Members.
2.
Click Select All
4.
Click OK and confirm the deletion
Notes:
It should be noted that when you delete a member using this option, the membership record is not
removed from the system. Rather it is marked as 'deleted', although the information is still held
within HandicapMaster. By viewing the 'Past Members and past Visitors' list, all of the deleted
membership records are displayed.
Past Members may be e-mailed.
When HandicapMaster is linked to an external membership system it is not possible to delete
members. The member must be deleted or 'resigned' in the external membership system, which will
place the record in the 'Past Members and past Visitors' list.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
6.2.4
39
Recover a previously deleted Member
A 'Past Member' record may be recovered and returned to current membership status.
To recover a previously deleted membership record
1.
On the Players menu, click Undelete.
2.
Choose a Member or Visitor to recover.
Notes:
When HandicapMaster is linked to an external membership system it is not possible to undelete
members. The member must be undeleted or 'reinstated' in the external membership system, which
will move the record in the 'Past Members and past Visitors' list to the 'All Members' list.
6.2.5
Membership record fields
The following information may be recorded for each member (Fields shown in red are compulsory
fields).
Details Tab
First Name
The member's Given name (Christian name).
Middle Initials
The initials of the member.
Last Name
The member's Surname (last name).
Title
The title of the member.
Gender
Whether the member is Male or Female.
Date of Birth
If checked, identifies the members' Date of Birth.
To enter a Date of Birth, tick the box and then update the date. The date fields may be over
typed, or click Day, Month or Year and and use the spin buttons.
Age Group
Identifies the age group of the member.
If a Date of Birth is provided for the member then the Age Group will be pre-selected. It can be
changed if required. Available values are Junior, Adult, Senior or two 'others'. The 'Others' Age
Groups may be renamed using Options.
Member No.
The number of the member's membership. Documentary only.
Player Identification Number (PIN)
A three to six digit number that players may use to enter their competition scores.
Randomly generated number that can be overridden, but must be unique for each player. By
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
40
HandicapMaster®
default, number will be 4 Digits in length.
Address, Town, County, Postcode.
The address of the member. Used when producing letters to be addressed to the member.
Telephone:
The telephone number of the member. Documentary only.
Mobile:
The mobile telephone number of the member. Documentary only.
Other Tel:
The telephone or Fax number of the member. Documentary only.
E-mail:
The E-mail address of the member. Documentary only.
Category
The category of the member's membership. Used when producing the Handicap List to
categorise members.
Position on Committee
Used to identify whether the member currently holds a position on a club committee.
Documentary only.
Handicapping Tab
This Player's Handicap is maintained at
Used to indicate whether the Player is a "Home" or "Away" player for handicapping
purposes. That is, where their Handicap records are maintained.
Home Club
Shows the member's handicap Home Club.
Select Home Club...
This button is displayed if the Player has been identified as an "Away" player and is used to
identify the Player's Home Club.
Player is Eligible for a Disability Handicap (Not Society or EGA Handicap Editions)
This allows you to indicate that the Player is eligible for a Disability Handicap. The
maximum handicap that may be allocated to such a Player is 54.
The Rules of Golf recognise five categories of disability:
Blind golfers
Amputee golfers
Golfers requiring Canes or Crutches
Golfers requiring Wheelchairs
Golfers with Learning Disabilities
For further details of the Disability Handicap please view Appendix K of the CONGU®
Unified Handicapping System.
Handicap Status
The type of handicap (or status) held by the member, and their current handicap (if
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
41
applicable).
Issue Handicap...
This button is displayed if the Player has not previously been allocated a Handicap on the
system. Use this button to award a Handicap to the Player. The Issue Handicap window is
displayed.
Note: The Handicap award is not recorded until the whole membership record is saved by
clicking the OK button.
Also a member of
A list of all other clubs (other than the member's Home Club) to which this member belongs.
MasterScoreboard.co.uk Tab
Hide Name of Member using Member's Membership Number or 'Name Withheld'
Masks the player's name on the MasterScoreboard.co.uk web site, if data is uploaded to
MasterScoreboard.co.uk web site.
Set player's password on Master Scoreboard
You may use this link to set a player's password on Master Scoreboard, if you have the
Master Scoreboard 'Individual passwords' feature turned on.
Cards and Locker Tab (Not Society Edition)
Has National Number
If checked, identifies that the player has been given a Membership card for a national Central
Database of Handicaps system (such as Golfing Union of Ireland's 'GOLFnet' handicap
database).
Player National Number
The Member Number for the National Central Database of Handicaps. Should be an eight
digit number in Ireland and 10 digit number in England.
Has Other GOLF Membership Card
If checked, identifies that the player has been given a Membership card for his club.
Card Number
The Membership Card Number for this player. Used for players entering their competition
scores using Magnetic 'Swipe' Cards.
Locker Number
The number of the Locker assigned to this player.
Subscriptions Tab
Date Joined
If checked, allows a date to be recorded representing when the Member joined the club.
Date Renewed
If checked, allows a date to be recorded representing when the Member last renewed their
membership.
Date Expires
If checked, allows a date to be recorded representing when the Member's membership is due to
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
42
HandicapMaster®
expire.
Date Subscription Paid
If checked, allows a date to be recorded representing when the Member paid their subscription for
the current year.
Method of Payment
Identifies the method by which the Member paid their subscription for the year. Click List to
change the titles used.
Amount Paid
Itemises the amount paid by the Member.
If the Subscriptions Option is installed then there are additional features:
Send Subscriptions, Invoices, Receipts by E-mail
If checked, enables subscriptions, invoices and receipts to be sent to this member by e-mail.
Account balance is ... adjust balance by:
This displays the current gross balance for the member, and offers the option to adjust the
balance by recording a gross payment. Typically this may be useful when a member joins
and you wish to set an initial opening balance. Note that if the VAT rate is non zero then the
VAT amount will be calculated from the gross value entered.
Note: That some of the above fields are set automatically when the Subscriptions Option is
installed.
Notes Tab
Allows general information to be recorded about the Member.
User-defined Fields
In addition, three "user-defined fields" are available. These are three fields available for general
data (up to 100 characters each) that could be used for any local purpose. Data held in these fields
is reported on the 'Membership Notes' report and also included in the output file created by the
Export option.
You may change the title for each of the three fields to your own preferred names through Global
Options.
6.2.6
Issuing a Handicap
The following fields are required to allocate a Handicap to a player:
Exact Handicap or Playing Handicap
Used to enter the first handicap awarded to this member.
Note: You may type the player's Handicap directly into this box.
Date this Handicap starts in these records
Enter the date when a first handicap is awarded.
This award is a ...
either
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
43
First Award (if this is the first handicap the player has ever had, or first for 6 months or
more), or
Continuation of a previous Handicap (if this is a handicap transferred from another club, or
a handicap transferred from another handicapping database, etc).
The following additional fields may also be required, depending upon the format of Handicapping
employed and whether "Continuation of a previous Handicap" has been selected:
Player's Handicap Status (Active/Inactive) or (Competition/Non-Competition)
For CONGU Unified handicapping in countries employing Active/Inactive handicaps, whether
this handicap is Active or Inactive.
For CONGU Unified handicapping in countries employing Competition/Non-Competition
handicaps, whether this handicap is a Competition or Non-Competition Handicap.
Number of Qualifying Scores previously returned by this player
For CONGU Unified handicapping in countries employing Active/Inactive or Competition/NonCompetition handicaps, the number of qualifying scores already returned during the current
handicap status period. Depending upon this answer, also the number of qualifying scores
returned during the previous handicap status period.
Notes:
The Date this Handicap starts in these records date specifies the Starting date for the Handicap
Records for the player. Use a date prior to the first competition that you intend to enter scores for this
Player. Note that competition scores prior to the selected starting date cannot be entered for a player as
the Handicap of the player at the date of the competition will be unknown.
In Scotland Competition/Non-Competition handicaps will NOT require details of the number of
Qualifying scores in the current or previous seasons.
6.2.7
Change a Handicap Award
Change a previously allocated Handicap award
1. Do one of the following:
In the Places box, choose Handicapping and select All Handicapping Events, or
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then All Handicapping Events.
2. Select the First Award or Handicap Brought Forward for this player, right-click and select Undo in the
pop-up menu.
3. Select Change the 'FIRST AWARD/Handicap Brought Forward' Entry and click OK.
The following fields are required to change a previously allocated Handicap for a player:
Exact Handicap or Playing Handicap
Used to enter the first handicap awarded to this member.
Note: You may type the player's Handicap directly into this box.
Awarded on
Enter the date when a first handicap is awarded.
Document as
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
44
HandicapMaster®
Identifies the first entry in the Handicap Record for this member as either 'First Award' or
'Handicap Brought Forward'. For Handicap Brought Forward entries, the handicap may be
marked as Lapsed, or previous qualifying scores in the current season may be identified.
Notes:
The Awarded on date specifies the Starting date for the Handicap Records for the player. It should be
noted that competition scores from competitions prior to the starting date cannot be entered for a
player, as the Handicap of the player at the date of the competition will not be known.
Use an Awarded on date prior to the first competition that you intend to enter for this Player.
6.2.8
Change Away Member To a Home Member
To Change an Away Member to a Home Member
1.
Do one of the following:
In the Players list, select a Member and press Enter Key, or
In the Players list, select a Member, then on the Players menu, click Edit Member, or
On the Players menu, click Edit Member and select a Member from the list displayed.
2.
Click on the Handicapping tab
3.
Under the This Players' Handicap in maintained at: section you will see that Another Club - is
'Away' Player is selected.
4.
Select "Club Name" - is 'Home' Player, where "Club Name" is the name of your club
5.
Click OK.
A Change of Home Club message is displayed. You will be informed that a NEW record for the
member will be created, if you do not accept this then you will be unable to change the member from
Away to Home.
6.
A message about the previous member record being moved and renamed as well as being
marked as a deleted member is displayed. Click OK
7.
Issue a handicap for the member.
Notes:
IMPORTANT CHANGE IN BEHAVIOUR
In previous editions of HandicapMaster it was recommended that a new Handicap record should be
created because of the following reasons:
Previous away scores for the player in question would be seen as home club handicap record
entries unless a new record is started!
Where your handicapping authority operates a National Database System then there may be a
conflict of data between the data you send and that from the member's previous home club.
CONGU Licensed software is required to only hold playing handicaps of away players (not exact
handicaps). Handicaps must not be recalculated as scores are recorded (only the Home club is
allowed to do this). Therefore changing an Away player to Home player can suddenly cause problems
when the existing scores start counting towards handicap recalculations.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
45
With the widespread introduction of National Database Systems the reasons for starting a new record
have become greater and to prevent possible data conflict on these National systems it is no longer
optional.
The original away record is preserved in HandicapMaster as a “past member”.
Note when a new record is created this will for example have an impact on eclectics, best of series etc.
Where your handicapping authority operates a National Database System it is recommended that you
re-publish after making membership changes to ensure that the membership changes are reflected
on the National Database System.
6.2.9
Change Away Members Home Club
To Change an Away Member's Home Club
1.
Do one of the following:
In the Players list, select a Member and press Enter Key, or
In the Players list, select a Member, then on the Players menu, click Edit Member, or
On the Players menu, click Edit Member and select a Member from the list displayed.
2.
Click on the Handicapping tab
3.
Under the This Players' Handicap in maintained at: section you will see that Another Club - is
'Away' Player is selected.
4.
Click Select Home Club and select the new home club of the player
5.
Click OK.
If the new home club is in a different country from the previous home club of the away member
and the countries operate a National Database Systems the following steps will apply:
A Change of Home Club message is displayed. You will be informed that a NEW record
for the member will be created, if you do not accept this then you will be unable to change
the member's home club.
A message about the previous member record being moved and renamed as well as
being marked as a deleted member is displayed. Click OK
A message about the Players national ID being reset is displayed. Click OK
You may then need to enter the player's new national ID as allocated by the players new
home club if appropriate
Notes:
When the new home club of the away member is in a different country from the previous home club and
the countries operate a National Database the following applies:
With the widespread introduction of National Database Systems the reasons for starting a
new record have become greater and to prevent possible data conflict on these National
systems it is no longer optional.
The original away record is preserved in HandicapMaster as a “past member”.
Note when a new record is created this will for example have an impact on eclectics, best
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
46
HandicapMaster®
of series etc.
Where your handicapping authority operates a National Database System it is
recommended that you re-publish after making membership changes to ensure that the
membership changes are reflected on the National Database System.
Away Members moving to a new home club within the same country will not be affected and a new
record will not be started and their National ID will remain unchanged.
6.2.10 Change Home Member To an Away Member
To Change a Home Member to Away Member
1.
Do one of the following:
In the Players list, select a Member and press Enter Key, or
In the Players list, select a Member, then on the Players menu, click Edit Member, or
On the Players menu, click Edit Member and select a Member from the list displayed.
2.
Click on the Handicapping tab
3.
Under the This Players' Handicap in maintained at: section select Another Club - is 'Away'
Player
4.
Click Select Home Club and then choose the appropriate Home Club
5.
Click OK. A message about away Players handicaps being whole numbers is displayed, click OK
Notes:
Where your handicapping authority operates a National Database System it is recommended that
you re-publish after making membership changes to ensure that the membership changes are
reflected on the National Database System.
Due to differences between the countries a new record will be started where the AWAY member’s
new HOME club is in a different country. Additionally if a player has a national ID this will be cleared
out. A new national ID will need to be allocated by the new home club in the other country.
Members moving to a new home club within the same country will NOT be affected and their
National ID will remain unchanged.
6.2.11 Considerations for Juniors
This page relates only to the Club, Premier and Network Editions of HandicapMaster.
Handicapping Juniors
Provision for handicapping Juniors is included in HandicapMaster Club, Premier and Network
Editions.
Automatic Handicapping is in accordance with the CONGU recommendations as laid out in Appendix J
of the Unified Handicapping System.
Essentially, the CONGU recommendations advise that handicaps should be available to Juniors
starting at 54 and reducing until 28 (for boys) or 36 (for girls), whereby they will fall under the normal
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
47
CONGU regulations. Whilst a Junior has a handicap greater than 28 [36], his handicap is defined as a
'Club Handicap', not a CONGU handicap.
To Identify a member as a Junior
Select "Junior" as the Age Group on the Add or Edit Member window for the Member .
Notes:
Once a handicap is reduced to 28 or below (or 36 or below for girls), the handicap will no longer be
identified as a 'Club Handicap' and normal CONGU handicapping continues.
The Handicap Record report identifies 'Club Handicaps' by prefixing the letter J to the front of the
Current Exact Handicap.
The Handicap List report identifies 'Club Handicaps' by prefixing the letter J to the front of the Exact
Handicap. If one or more Club Handicaps are listed, the following text is appended to the foot of the
Handicap List:
"J = Junior 'Club' Handicap (not CONGU® Handicap)."
6.2.12 Basic Player Subscription recording and management
When the Subscriptions Option is NOT installed then there are some basic subscription
recording facilities included in HandicapMaster
Introduction
This facility allow a simple annual payment record to be maintained.
Three items may be recorded
Subscription
Locker Rent
Other
In addition the method of payment can be recorded.
Add a New Payment method
On the Players menu, click Subscriptions and click Add
Enter the description and click OK
Edit an existing Payment Method
On the Players menu, click Subscriptions and click once on one of the entries to highlight it.
Click Edit
Amend the description and click OK
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
48
HandicapMaster®
Delete a Payment Method
On the Players menu, click Subscriptions and click once on one of the entries to highlight it.
Click Delete
click OK
Note: If the payment method is allocated to one or more members then it cannot be deleted
Clearing Basic Subscription Payments
To delete all basic subscription payments do the following:
On the Players menu, click Subscriptions and click Clear All Payments
Confirm you wish to clear all payments
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
6.3
49
Set a Handicap for a Member
To award a member a handicap
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players menu, click Edit Member to award an existing Member a Handicap, or
On the Players menu, click New Member to award a Handicap as part of adding a new Member
to the database
2.
Click the Handicapping tab.
3.
Click the Issue Handicap button. This will display the Issue Handicap window,
4.
In the Exact Handicap (or Playing Handicap) box, enter the Member's starting Handicap
5.
In the Date this handicap starts in these records box, select the date when the Handicap was
awarded, or the earliest date you wish to record this handicap in the system.
6.
In the This award is a ... section, select either
First Award (if this is the first handicap the player has ever had, or first for 6 months or more), or
Continuation of a previous Handicap (if this is a handicap transferred from another club, or a
handicap transferred from another handicapping database, etc).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
50
6.4
HandicapMaster®
View a Member's Handicap Record
A player's Handicap Record is a record of all Handicap Qualifying Scores returned by that player along
with any adjustments made to the player's handicap as a result.
There are three ways to view a Handicap Record. These are
In tabular form,
As a printable report, or
As a graph.
To View a Member's Handicap Record (Table format)
1.
Do one of the following:
Click the Records button on the main Toolbar and select a Member from the list if displayed.
In the Players list, select a Member, then on the Reports menu, click Handicap Record, then
click View As Table
On the Reports menu, click Handicap Record, then click View As Table and select a Member
from the list if displayed.
To View a Member's Handicap Record (Report format)
1.
Do one of the following:
In the Players list, select a Member, then on the Reports menu, click Handicap Record, then
click View As Report
On the Reports menu, click Handicap Record, then click View As Report and select a Member
from the list if displayed.
To View a Member's Handicap Record (Graphical format)
1.
Do one of the following:
In the Players list, select a Member, then on the Reports menu, click Handicap Record, then
click View As Graph
On the Reports menu, click Handicap Record, then click View As Graph and select a Member
from the list if displayed.
To view the Handicap Records for a Past Member
1.
In the Past Players list, select a Player, then click with the Right Hand Mouse Button and select
Handicap Record.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
6.5
Create a Handicap Certificate for a Member
To create a Handicap Certificate for a member
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Reports menu, click Player Handicap Certificate.
Click the Certificate button on the main Toolbar.
2.
If the Select a Player window is displayed, choose the applicable Member.
Notes:
Handicap Certificates are only available for Home Club players.
See Also
Add a Club Logo to Reports
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
51
52
HandicapMaster®
6.6
Member Subscription Pools
6.6.1
Introduction
Member Subscription Pools are only available when the Subscriptions Option has been
installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions Option may
not be installed.
It is possible to place members in a Member Subscription Pools for subscription purposes. This
pooling does not affect the handicapping aspects of members.
Pools may have a member or non-member as their contact for correspondence by printed letter or by email.
Possible uses of pools are:
Group a number of family members together so that the renewal letters are sent to one individual.
Provide corporate membership where you wish to invoice a company for a number of members.
Place a junior member in a pool with a non member contact (e.g. a parent or guardian) so the
renewal letter is sent to the pool contact rather than the junior member.
Notes:
If the Pool Contact does not have an e-mail address then it is NOT possible to send
subscriptions and invoices by e-mail to the members of the membership group, even if the
individual members have e-mail addresses.
Contents
Add a Group
Edit a Group
Add Members to a Group
Remove Members from a Group
6.6.2
Add a New Pool
Member Subscription Pools are only available when the Subscriptions Option has been
installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions Option may
not be installed.
To add a new Member Subscription Pool to HandicapMaster
6.6.3
1.
On the Accounting menu, click Member Subscription Pools, then New Pool.
2.
Add the Member Subscription Pools using the Member Subscription Pools window.
Edit an Existing Pool
Member Subscription Pools are only available when the Subscriptions Option has been
installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions Option may
not be installed.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
53
To edit an existing Member Subscription Pool
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu, click Member Subscription Pools, then Edit Pool. Select the
Pool to edit and click OK.
In the Member Subscription Pools List, select the Pool to edit, Right-click and select Edit
Pool.
2.
6.6.4
Edit the Member Subscription Pool using the Member Subscription Pools window.
Member Subscription Pools Window
Member Subscription Pools are only available when the Subscriptions Option has been
installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions Option may
not be installed.
The Member Subscription Pools window allows you to create a new or edit existing Member
Subscription Pool.
The Pool Contact is the person to whom subscription renewals for pool members are addressed and
sent to.
The member Subscription Pools Window
In the Pool Name box enter the name to be given to the Member Subscription Pool. .
In the Pool Description box you may enter a description for this Pool; this is optional.
Select Member or Other to assign a Pool Contact. A Pool Contact is the person to whom subscription
correspondence is addressed.
Select Member then click the Change button to select a member who is to be the Pool Contact.
Select Other to specify a non member as the Pool contact. You may then enter the Title, First Name,
Last Name e-mail address and the Address details for the Contact.
Notes:
Where the Pool Contact is a member then subscription e-mails will ONLY be sent if that member
has been selected to receive subscriptions and invoices by e-mail. You may select the members
who have opted to receive subscriptions by e-mail on the Subscriptions Tab of the Edit Member
facility.
Select Other when you require a non member as a Pool Contact e.g. corporate membership
contact, or a parent of a junior member.
If Other is selected as the Pool Contact then if the E-mail address is filled in then this will be used
if you send the subscriptions by e-mail. Leave this blank if you do NOT wish to send subscriptions
by e-mail to the pool contact.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
54
6.6.5
HandicapMaster®
Add Members to a Pool
Member Subscription Pools Window are only available when the Subscriptions Option has
been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions Option
may not be installed.
To add a member to a Member Subscription Pool
1.
Do one of the following:
In the Players list, select the Member and press Enter Key, or
In the Players list, select the Member, then on the Players menu, click Edit Member, or
On the Players menu, click Edit Member and select the Member from the list displayed.
2.
In the Member Subscription Pool box, select the Pool to add this member to.
To add more than one member to a Member Subscription Pool
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu, click Member Subscription Pools, then Manage Pool
Members. Select a Pool.
In the Member Subscription Pools List, select the Pool and press the Enter Key.
2.
Do one of the following:
Press the Insert key and select the members to add to the Pool.
Right-click and select Add Member To Pool.
3.
6.6.6
Tick the box alongside those Members to be added to the Pool and click OK.
Remove Members from a Pool
Member Subscription Pools are only available when the Subscriptions Option has been
installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions Option may
not be installed.
To remove a member from a Member Subscription Pool
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players menu, click Edit Member and select the Member from the list displayed. In the
Member Subscription Pool box, select Not In A Pool.
In the Member Subscription Pools List, select the Pool and press the Enter Key. Select the
Member to be deleted and press the Delete key.
To remove all members from a Member Subscription Pool
1.
Do one of the following:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
On the Accounting menu, click Member Subscription Pool, then Manage Pool
Members. Select a Pool.
In the Member Subscription Pools List, select the Pool and press the Enter Key.
2.
Right-click and select Remove ALL Members From Pool.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
55
56
HandicapMaster®
6.7
Importing or Exporting Membership records
6.7.1
About Importing and Exporting
Importing
Membership records may be added from an external file in one operation using the Import facility. In
addition, handicaps for existing members within the HandicapMaster database may be updated.
If the membership record does not currently exist, a record is added to the database and a Handicap
Brought Forward entry is made in the Member's handicap record.
If the membership record already exists, then the Membership record details (such as Address Fields,
etc.) are updated. Then the current actual handicap is checked. Should this differ to that currently
recorded in the HandicapMaster database, a CORRECTION entry is added to the Member's handicap
record, adjusting the actual and playing handicaps for this member.
Importing from a Spreadsheet
When importing from spreadsheets it is critical to enter your records precisely. HandicapMaster will
reject any characters or even spaces that do not exactly match the records in the database.
Reasons for rejecting data include:
an extra space in the column header, or within the column
golf club names not entered exactly as in the HandicapMaster list of Golf Clubs. For example, if you
entered St Andrews Major and included commas or apostrophes HandicapMaster will reject it.
required fields left blank.
Duplicate PIN numbers, each entry must have a unique PIN Number.
HandicapMaster will tell you which column or record is rejected.
Before continuing it is helpful to write down the rejected fields. HandicapMaster informs you the
number of the relevant record. This is one more than the number of the row on the spreadsheet since
the column header occupies row number one.
How HandicapMaster identifies whether a membership record already exists
HandicapMaster will attempt to match up the name of the Member with any entry held in the database.
The name is defined as the "First Name + Middle Initials + Surname".
Exporting
Membership records that are currently held within the HandicapMaster database can be exported to an
external file in one operation using the Export facility.
The external file will be created in a 'Comma-separated file', suitable for importing into Microsoft Word
or Excel.
6.7.2
Import Memberships from an external file
To import membership records
1.
Using an external product such as Microsoft Excel, create an import file conforming to the required
layout.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
57
2.
On the Players Menu, click Import.
3.
In the Import window, enter the full file name and location in the Location and name of Import File
box (or click the Browse button to locate a file)
4.
Select the date on which Handicaps will be adjudged to have been 'Brought Forward' in the Mark
all First awards and Handicap Alterations as from box.
5.
Tick the Update Existing Membership Records option if you wish to import changes to existing
membership records. The default is for this to be un-ticked to prevent accidental updating of
existing membership records.
6.
Click the Import button.
Notes:
To import a member who does not have a handicap, enter the HANDICAP field as a non-numeric
string of letters or leave blank.
If the import file contains entries with the exact same member names only a single membership
record will be created.
You will need to tick the Update Existing Membership Records box in order to change any existing
membership records.
See Also
Import Visitors from an external file
6.7.3
Import Visitors from an external file
To import 'Visitors' (Non-Members) into HandicapMaster
Follow Import Memberships from an external file, ensuring
1.
The HOME/AWAY/VISITOR column must be present and set to a value of "V".
2.
The HOME CLUB column must be present (with the Home Club for this Visitor).
3.
The CURRENT EXACT HANDICAP column must be present. If the players' current exact handicap
is not known, enter their current Playing Handicap.
When importing only Visitors, the following columns are required (all other columns are optional):
SURNAME
MIDDLE INITIALS
FIRST NAME
GENDER
CURRENT EXACT HANDICAP
HOME/AWAY/VISITOR (must be set to V)
HOME CLUB
Notes:
If a Visitor PIN range has been allocated then do NOT import PIN values when importing
visitors as any visitors with PIN values outside the range will be rejected by the import.
If HandicapMaster is integrated with an external membership system then only visitors may be
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
58
HandicapMaster®
imported. Any non visitor entries in the import file are ignored.
To import Visitors using the CDH [England, Scotland and Wales only]
Club, Premier and Network Editions only.
Follow Import Away Scores from an external file, ensuring that a working internet connection is
available.
When importing only Visitors
only the PLAYERID column is required in the import file
competition details do not need to be supplied unless scores are included in the import
6.7.4
Export Membership Records to an external file
To export membership records
1.
On the Players menu, click Export.
2.
In the Export Window, enter the full file name and location of the file to be created in the Location
and name of Export file box (or click the Browse button to select a file name).
3.
Select the required set of membership records from the Export records for the following
categories of members list.
4.
Click the Export button.
Notes:
The number of membership records that will be exported for each specific category of member is
displayed in brackets alongside the entry in the list.
A file in the Export format will be created
Past Member details may be exported to be used with an external "mail merge" facility to send
correspondence to past Members.
6.7.5
Format of the Import File
Required format of the Import File
The file must be a "Comma-Separated File" which is typically suffixed .CSV. This format can, for
example, be saved from a spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel.
The file must be an ASCII text file,
There must be one membership record per record in the file,
There must be a special 'Header' record as the first record in the file (see below).
Each field within each record must be separated by a comma.
Unsupported fields will be ignored.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
59
NOTE: some of the fields have different uses or may not be required depending on the handicapping
system in use.
The Header Record
The first record in the file must be a Header record. This consists of the names of each of the columns
(fields) within the file. Not all the columns are required. The minimum required are ‘Surname’ and
‘First Name’ which must be unique.
The fields supported are as follows:
Surname
Member's Surname
This field is required
Middle Initials
Member's Middle Initials
First Name (or Given Name)
Member's Given Name
This field is required
Gender (or Sex)
The gender of the member expressed as 'M' or 'Male' for Male or 'F' or 'Female' for Female.
Alternatively, if this field is missing, the CATEGORY of the member must include the text "Gent" or
"Lady".
Default: Male.
Age Group
This is the age group into which the member should be assigned. If this field is not set then the
import facility will use the Date of Birth value for the member and assign an appropriate Age
Group to the member.
If this value is set it will override the value calculated from the Data of Birth field.
Default: Adult.
Possible values are:
For Juniors: ‘JUNIOR, ‘Junior’, ‘J’ or ‘j’
For Adults: ‘ADULT’, ‘Adult’, ‘A’ or ‘a’
For Seniors: ‘SENIOR’. ‘Senior’, ‘S’ or ‘s’
For User-defined Age Group 1: "OTHER1", "Other1", "1" or Age Group Description
For User-defined Age Group 2: "OTHER2", "Other2", "2" or Age Group Description
Two of the Age Groups provided may be renamed using Options.
Exact Handicap (or Handicap, or Current Exact Handicap)
The current actual (exact) handicap for the member.
NOTE: For European Golf Association (EGA) handicapping for "Active" Handicaps, use a suffix of
"*" for the Handicap. For example, "18.5*". Do NOT use "*" suffix when importing CONGU
handicaps.
Default: No Handicap.
For more details, see Importing Handicaps from another Handicap System.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
60
HandicapMaster®
Scores Previous Season (or Previous Season)
The number of Qualifying scores returned by the player during the previous season.
Only required for CONGU handicapping in countries where Active/Inactive handicapping is in
operation and used to set the Active/Inactive Handicap Status for the player.
Only used when allocating a handicap award for a player (not when updating an existing
handicap).
Default: 0.
For more details, see Importing Handicaps from another Handicap System.
Scores Current Season (or Current Season)
The number of Qualifying scores returned by the player during the current season.
Only required for CONGU handicapping in countries where Active/Inactive handicapping is in
operation or where Lapsing of Handicaps is in operation and used to set the Active/Inactive
Handicap Status for the player.
For countries where Lapsing of Handicaps is in operation, this represents the number of
qualifying scores returned by the player since the previous Annual Review..
Only used when allocating a handicap award for a player (not when updating an existing
handicap).
Default: 0.
For more details, see Importing Handicaps from another Handicap System.
Disability Handicap
Indicates if the member has a Disability Golf Handicap. “Y” ,”Yes” or “True” to indicate that the
member has a Disability Golf Handicap. For details of Disability Golf handicaps see Appendix K of
the CONGU UHS handbook.
Default: No Disability Golf Handicap.
Note: This only applies to Club, Premier and Network editions of HandicapMaster.
Home/Away/Visitor
Whether the member has this club as their Home Club ('H' or 'Home') or this is an Away club for
them ('A' or 'Away'). If this player is a Visitor (I.e. a Non-member), use 'V' or 'Visitor' and see
considerations below.
Default: Home Club Member.
Home Club
The name of the players' Home Club. The club name must already be known to the
HandicapMaster database. Note: This column is ignored if the membership 'HOME/AWAY/
VISITOR' column is Home.
PIN
Player's PIN number, used for keypad only competition score entry.
Default: Random (unique) 3 to 6 digit number.
PIN numbers MUST be unique. Duplicates are not permitted. An entry with a duplicated PIN will
not be imported.
Note: if Visitor PIN's are enabled then when importing you may be prompted that a value is not
valid for the member or visitor being imported. You may then either continue the import or cancel it.
Title
The Title of the member, expressed as one of the recognised abbreviations accepted by
HandicapMaster. These are "Mr", "Mrs", "Miss", "Master", "Ms", "Dr", "Sir", "Lady", "Lord", "Rt.Hon" or
"H.R.H"
Default: No title.
Address Line 1 (or Address 1)
The first line of the Member's address
Address Line 2 (or Address 2)
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
61
The second line of the Member's address
Address Line 3 (or Address 3)
The third line of the Member's address
Address Line 4 (or Address 4)
The fourth line of the Member's address
Postcode (or Post Code, or Address 5)
The Post Code of the Member's address
Home Phone (or Telephone 1)
The Member's first telephone number
Mobile Phone (or Telephone 2)
The Member's second telephone number
FAX (or Telephone 3)
The Member's third telephone number
E-Mail Address
The Member's e-mail address
Membership No (or Club Number)
The Membership number or code for this member
Default: No Membership Number or Code.
Category
The Membership category to which the member belongs to.
Default: Category of "Unknown".
Officer Title
The Position on the Committee held by this Member.
Default: Not on Committee..
Date Joined
The date the Member joined
Date Renewed
The date the Member last renewed his or her membership. Not applicable if Subscriptions Option
installed.
Date Expires
The date the Member's current membership expires. Not applicable if Subscriptions Option
installed.
Date Subscription Paid
The date when the member paid their subscription fees. Not applicable if Subscriptions Option
installed.
Method Of Subscription Payment
A note of how the member paid their fees. Not applicable if Subscriptions Option installed.
Amount Subscription Paid
The amount of money paid when settling subscription fees. Not applicable if Subscriptions Option
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
62
HandicapMaster®
installed.
Amount Locker Rent Paid
The amount of money paid when settling Locker Rent fees. Not applicable if Subscriptions Option
installed.
Amount Other Paid
The amount of money paid when settling other subscription fees. Not applicable if Subscriptions
Option installed.
Junior
Whether the member is a Junior. If supplied, must be 'Y', 'Yes' or 'TRUE' if the member is a Junior,
else 'N', 'No' or 'FALSE' if not.
Default: Not Junior.
Note: This field is deprecated and is only retained for backward compatibility. It is recommended
that the “Age Group” field be used instead.
National Number (or "GOLFnet Number")
The player's national number if they are a member of the Golfing Unions of Ireland's GOLFnet
national handicap database system or the England Golf's, Scottish Golf Union's or Golf Union of
Wales's Central Database of Handicaps. 8 digits for player's in Ireland and 10 digits for players in
England, Scotland or Wales.
Card Number
The player's membership card number. This matches field 'Has Other Membership Card' in
membership record.
Date of Birth (or DOB)
Member's Date of Birth.
Locker Number (or Locker No)
The Member's Locker Number.
Default Payment Method
This defines the default method of payment that is used to record this member’s subscriptions.
Note this is only used if the HandicapMaster Subscriptions Option is installed.
Default: No Payment Method
Send Invoice By
This defines if Subscriptions should be sent by Letter or E-mail to this member.
Note this is only used if the HandicapMaster Subscriptions Option is installed.
Possible values are:
For Letters: 'L' or 'LETTER'
For E-mail: 'E', 'EM', 'EMAIL' or 'E-MAIL'
Default: Letter
Balance Adjustment
This will allow an initial balance to be set of a new member, or record an adjustment to an
existing member's account balance. E.g. If an existing member has an account balance of 100
then a balance adjustment of 50 will result in a balance of 150.
Note this is only used if the HandicapMaster Subscriptions Option is installed.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
63
Default: No balance adjustment
Negative adjustments are possible.
The value is the GROSS adjustment, and if the VAT rate is non-zero the Nett and VAT amounts will
be calculated.
User1, User2, User3
Values for the three User-defined fields in the membership records. If the columns have been
renamed through Global Options, then the names of the fields may also be used.
Account ID ( or Contact ID)
This is the unique identifier that links the membership details between the external system and
HandicapMaster.
Note: This field is only applicable when there is an external membership system.
This field will only apply for Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions and is only
imported when the import is run as an ADMIN user.
Default value is “ “
The fields in the header record must be spelt exactly as in the table above in order to be recognised.
It is necessary for the GIVEN NAME and SURNAME fields to be included, as a minimum. The
remainder of the fields are optional.
The fields must follow the order of the header record, but items within the header record can be in any
order.
Including a Comma in the data to import
If the data to be imported in to HandicapMaster includes a comma itself, the field should be enclosed
in double quotes. For example, to import an address field with a comma, the field should be entered
as
"1 High Street,"
This is how Microsoft Excel will export any data containing a comma when a spreadsheet is saved in
"Comma-separated File" format.
To clear a date field in an existing Membership Record
If you wish to clear a date field (such as Date Subscriptions Paid, etc.) use the word CLEAR in the date
column in the import file. HandicapMaster will clear the date from the existing membership record.
Word CLEAR may also be used to remove a previous Title field value from an existing member record
or a National Number field value.
6.7.6
Importing Handicaps from another Handicap System
When importing player’s handicaps from another handicapping system, it may be necessary to set the
handicap status of “Active” or “Inactive” or "Competition" or "Non-Competition" along with the handicap
value of the player.
Whether this is necessary depends upon the handicapping regulations in force in the country where
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
64
HandicapMaster®
the club is based.
These notes provide guidance on setting initial handicaps by using the HandicapMaster “Import”
facility, and differ depending upon the country of the Home Club.
Importing Handicaps for clubs in England, Wales, Kenya and Tanzania
In England, Wales, Kenya and Tanzania, Handicaps have an “Inactive” or "non-competition" status if a
player does not have 3 qualifying scores on his handicap record either one of the current year or the
previous year.
In order to import handicaps so that HandicapMaster may be able to set the handicap status correctly
for the rest of the current season, and next season too, it is necessary to populate the following
columns in the Import file:
HANDICAP
The current handicap of the player. For “Home” members, handicap is to one decimal place. For
“Away” members, handicap is a whole number.
SCORES PREVIOUS SEASON
Number of qualifying scores in the player’s handicap record in the preceding year to the “Handicap
Import Date”. This number may be set to either 0 or 3, depending if the player had 3 or more scores
in his record in that year, or otherwise.
This column is ignored for “Away” members and “Visitors”.
Default: 0.
SCORES CURRENT SEASON
Number of qualifying scores in the player’s handicap record in the same year as the “Handicap
Import Date”. This number should be set to 0, 1, 2 or 3 as applicable. 3 may be used to represent “3
or more” if required.
This column is ignored for “Away” members and “Visitors”.
Default: 0.
“Handicap Import Date” is the date selected in the Mark all First Awards and Handicap Alterations as
from box when running Import.
Note: Where players have enough scores to warrant an active handicap from the preceding year, but
not enough in the current year, then their handicaps will be marked as “Active” (or "Competition") by
using the “override” facility.
Importing Handicaps for clubs in Scotland
In Scotland, Handicaps have a status of “Non-Competition" if a player does not have 3 qualifying
scores on his handicap record either one of the current year or the previous year.
In order to import handicaps so that HandicapMaster may be able to set the handicap status correctly
for the rest of the current handicap review period, it is necessary to populate the following columns in
the Import file:
HANDICAP
The current handicap of the player. For “Home” members, handicap is to one decimal place. For
“Away” members, handicap is a whole number.
Where a player current holds a "non-competition" handicap, append an star (“*”) to the handicap
value in this column. E.g. 18.3*
SCORES CURRENT SEASON
The number of qualifying scores in the player’s handicap record since the last Annual Review. This
number should be set to 0, 1, 2 or 3 as applicable. 3 may be used to represent “3 or more” if
required.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
65
This column is ignored for “Away” members and “Visitors”.
Default: 0.
Importing Handicaps for clubs in Ireland
Neither Active/Inactive nor "Competition/Non-Competition" Handicap Status is in operation in Ireland.
Use the following column in the Import file when importing handicaps:
HANDICAP
The current handicap of the player. For “Home” members, handicap is to one decimal place. For
“Away” members, handicap is a whole number.
Importing Handicaps for clubs using the EGA Handicap system
The EGA Handicap system uses a notation of "active" or "inactive" for the status of a player's handicap.
Use the following column in the Import file when importing handicaps:
HANDICAP
The current handicap of the player. For "active" handicaps, append an star (“*”) to the handicap value
in this column. E.g. 18.3*.
6.7.7
Format of the Export File
Format of the Export File
The export file will be:
an ASCII text file,
one membership record per record in the file,
a special 'Header' record will be the first record in the file (see below).
each field within each record will be separated by a comma.
The Header Record
The first record in the file will be a Header record. This consists of the names of each of the columns
(fields) within the file.
The fields will be ordered as follows:
Surname
Member's Surname
Middle Initials
Member's Middle Initials
First Name
Member's Given Name
Gender
The gender of the member expressed as a single character of 'M' for Male or 'F' for Female.
Alternatively, if this field is missing, the CATEGORY of the member must include the text "Gent" or
"Lady"
Age Group
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
66
HandicapMaster®
The the age group to which the member is assigned.
Current Exact Handicap
The current actual (exact) handicap for the member
Current Playing Handicap (Not applicable for EGA Handicap editions)
The current Playing Handicap for the member
Disability Handicap (Not applicable for EGA Handicap editions or Society Edition)
‘Y’ Indicates if the member has a Disability Golf Handicap. For details of Disability Golf handicaps
see Appendix K of the CONGU UHS handbook.
Home/Away/Visitor
Whether the member has this club as their Home Club ('H') or this is an Away club for them ('A'). If
this player is a Visitor (I.e. a Non-member), "V" is used.
Home Club
The name of the players' Home Club. The club name must already be known to the
HandicapMaster database.
PIN
Player's PIN number, used for keypad only competition score entry.
Title
The Title of the member, expressed as one of the recognised abbreviations accepted by
HandicapMaster. These are "Mr", "Mrs", "Miss", "Master", "Ms", "Dr", "Sir", "Lady", "Lord", "Rt.Hon" or
"H.R.H"
Address 1
The first line of the Member's address
Address 2
The second line of the Member's address
Address 3
The third line of the Member's address
Address 4
The fourth line of the Member's address.
Address 5
The Post Code of the Member's address.
Telephone 1
The Member's first telephone number.
Telephone 2
The Member's second telephone number.
Telephone 3
The Member's third telephone number.
E-Mail Address
The Member's e-mail address.
Club Number
The Membership number or code for this member.
Category
The Membership category to which the member belongs to.
Officer Title
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
67
The Position on Committee currently identified for this member.
Date Joined
The date the Member joined .
Date Renewed
The date the Member last renewed his or her membership.
Date Expires
The date the Member's current membership expires.
Date Subscription Paid
The date when the member paid their subscription fees.
Method Of Subscription Payment
A note of how the member paid their fees.
Amount Subscription Paid
The amount of money paid when settling subscription fees
Amount Locker Rent Paid
The amount of money paid when settling Locker Rent fees.
Amount Other Paid
The amount of money paid when settling other subscription fees.
National Number
The player's national number if they are a member of the Golfing Unions of Ireland's GOLFnet
national handicap database system or the England Golf's, Scottish Golf Union's or Golf Union of
Wales's Central Database of Handicaps. 8 digits for player's in Ireland and 10 digits for players in
England, Scotland and Wales.
Card Number
The player's membership card number. This matches field 'Has Other Membership Card' in
membership record.
Date of Birth
Member's Date of Birth.
Locker Number
The Member's Locker Number.
Default Payment Method
The default method of payment that is used to record this member’s subscription payments.
Note this is only used if the HandicapMaster Subscriptions Option is installed.
Account Balance
The amount of money in the members account.
Note this is only used if the HandicapMaster Subscriptions Option is installed.
Send Invoice By
This defines if Subscriptions should be sent by Letter or E-mail to this member.
Note this is only used if the HandicapMaster Subscriptions Option is installed.
Notes
The membership notes (if any) associated with the member. Note: that notes have any new lines
converted to spaces to ensure one line in the export file per member.
Date Deleted
When exporting 'Past members' this field will be included in the export file with the date the
member was deleted.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
68
HandicapMaster®
User1, User2, User3
Values for the three User-defined fields in the membership records. If the columns have been
renamed through Global Options, then the names of the fields will be used.
Account ID
This is the unique identifier that links the membership details between the external system and
HandicapMaster.
Note: This field is only applicable when there is an external membership system.
This field will only appear for Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions and is
only exported when the export is run as the ADMIN user.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
6.8
Change a Member to a Visitor
To change a Member to a Visitor
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Players place
2.
Select All Members
3.
Select the Member to be changed then right-click.
4.
On the pop-up menu, select Change Member to Visitor.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
69
70
6.9
HandicapMaster®
Change a Member to 'No Handicap'
To change a Member to 'No Handicap' (Eg. change from playing to social membership)
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Players place
2.
Select All Members
3.
Select the Member to be changed then right-click.
4.
On the pop-up menu, select Change Member to 'No Handicap'.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Club Memberships
6.10
71
Synchronise with External Membership System
HandicapMaster includes an option to load and maintain Membership information from an external
source, via a Comma-separated Values (CSV) file or by processing “Remote Requests” via a program
interface (“API”). In this situation, membership information in HandicapMaster becomes read-only.
This option is configured through an Administrator-only option. See Integrate HandicapMaster with
Other Systems for more information.
Notes:
This option is only available in the Premier, Network and EGA Handicap editions of
HandicapMaster
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Chapter
7
Maintaining Visitor Records
Maintaining Visitor Records
7
Maintaining Visitor Records
7.1
About Visitors
73
Visitors are Players who may play in the competitions, but who are not members of the Club or Society.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
74
7.2
HandicapMaster®
Add a new Visitor
There are four ways to add a Visitor to the database:
To add a new Visitor to HandicapMaster
New Visitor menu option
1. On the Players menu, click New Visitor.
2. Enter the Player's name in the Surname, Middle Initials and First Name fields.
3. Optionally, enter a Title for the player.
4. Select the Gender and Age Group of the player. Two of the Age Groups provided may be renamed
using Options.
5. Click Choose Home Club to select the appropriate Home Club for the Visitor
6. In the Handicap box, enter the Visitors current Handicap (and handicap status where applicable).
7. Tick the Has National Number box if the Visitor has a number on a national Central Database of
Handicaps system (such as Ireland's GOLFnet system or the England Golf CDH).
8. The Look Up Players Details button is made available to users of the some editions, which may be
used to gather details of Visitors from available national systems (see Tip below).
9. Do one of the following
Click Save and More if you have further Visitors to add to the database, or
Click OK to save this Visitor record
Tip
Users of the CONGU handicap editions in England, Scotland, Wales or Ireland may receive the Visitor
details from the Central Database of Handicaps server by entering the Visitor's national ID in the
National Number box and clicking Look Up Players Details button. You will need at active Internet
connection to use this facility.
To add a Visitor using the Player Entry system
If you have HandicapMaster linked to a Central Database of Handicaps (England, Scotland, Wales and
Ireland), you may configure Player Entry so that when a Visitor types their national ID or swipes a
magnetic card with their National ID on it, they can automatically be added to the HandicapMaster
database using the CDH service.
See Add Visitors through Player Entry for further details.
To add more than one Visitor in one action
You may add one or more Visitors based upon a list of player details included in an external file.
Import from an external File (where you have player's names and details)
See Importing and Exporting Membership Records, where Visitor records may be added in bulk from
a file containing names and player details.
Import from an external File (where you have player's CDH Lifetime ID's)
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Visitor Records
75
Users of the CONGU handicap editions in England, Scotland or Wales may create an import file of
CDH numbers and import these players into HandicapMaster using the "Away scores' Import facility.
To do this, it is not necessary to have Away scores to import. Create a file with the PLAYERID column
(only) and Import this through the Record Away Scores option. Visitors will be added, without any
away scores being recorded.
Notes:
PIN numbers for Visitors are allocated automatically. It is possible to select one of a number of predefined ranges for Visitor PIN numbers.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
76
7.3
HandicapMaster®
Modify a Visitor record
To modify the details of an existing Visitor record
1.
Do one of the following:
In the Visitors list, select a Visitor and press Enter Key, or
In the Visitors list, select a Visitor, then on the Players menu, click Edit Visitor, or
On the Players menu, click Edit Visitor and select a Member from the list displayed.
2.
Modify the Visitor record accordingly.
To modify the details of a Past Visitor
1.
Do one of the following:
In the Past Members list, select a Visitor and press Enter Key,
In the Past Members list, select a Visitor right click and select Edit from the popup menu.
In the Past Members list, select a Visitor right then select Edit a Membership record from the
Previous Member Tasks
2.
Modify the Visitor record accordingly.
Notes:
When viewing and editing Past Visitor records a reduced range of information is available.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Visitor Records
7.4
77
Delete a Visitor record
To delete a Visitor
1.
Do one of the following:
In the Visitors list, select a Visitor and press Delete Key, or
In the Visitors list, select a Visitor, then on the Players menu, click Delete Visitor, or
On the Players menu, click Delete Visitor and select a Visitor from the list displayed, or
In the Visitors list, right click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.
To delete multiple Visitors
1.
In the Visitors list, right-click and select Delete Multiple Visitors.
2.
Tick the box along side those visitors to be deleted
3.
Click OK and confirm the deletion.
To delete ALL Visitor records
1.
In the Visitors list, right-click and select Delete Multiple Visitors.
2.
Click Select All
4.
Click OK and confirm the deletion.
Notes:
It should be noted that when you delete a Visitor using this option, the record is not removed
from the system. Rather it is marked as 'deleted', although the information is still held within
HandicapMaster. By choosing the 'Past Members' folder (click Show Folders button if Tasks
are currently displayed), all of the deleted membership records are displayed.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
78
7.5
HandicapMaster®
Recover a previously deleted Visitor
A Visitor record may be recovered and returned to current status, allowing that Visitor to enter further
competitions.
To recover a previously deleted Visitor record
1.
On the Players menu, click Undelete.
2.
Choose a Member or Visitor to recover.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Maintaining Visitor Records
7.6
79
Update a Handicap of a Visitor
To update the Handicap of a Visitor
1.
Modify the Visitor record
2.
In the Handicap box, enter the revised Handicap (and handicap status where applicable).
3.
Click OK
Tip
Users of the CONGU handicap editions in England, Scotland, Wales and Ireland may receive the
Visitor details from their Central Database of Handicaps server by entering the Visitor's national ID in
the National Number box and clicking Look Up Players Details button. This could be used to receive
the Visitors latest known handicap. You will need at active Internet connection to use this facility. It is
also possible to update the handicaps of a number of visitors in a single operation. See Verify a
Handicap of a Visitor for more information.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
80
7.7
HandicapMaster®
Change a Visitor to a Member
To change a Visitor to a Member
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Players place
2.
Select Visitors
3.
Select the Visitor to be changed then right-click.
4.
On the pop-up menu, select Change Visitor to Member.
Notes:
The facility is not available when Linking to Other Membership systems
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
81
Chapter
8
Working with E-mail and Letters
82
HandicapMaster®
8
Working with E-mail and Letters
8.1
Introduction
HandicapMaster may be used to communicate with members, clubs and other recipients using
e-mail and letters.
This chapter describes these types of communication and the use of distribution lists.
Note
To be able to send e-mails directly from HandicapMaster, there are minimum requirements.
Contents
Working with E-mail
Writing Letters to Members
Distribution Lists
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
8.2
Working with E-mail
8.2.1
E-mail Introduction
83
Using E-mail to send information from HandicapMaster.
This chapter deals with how to set-up HandicapMaster to be able to send reports, Letters, etc, by email directly from HandicapMaster.
Do one of the following to send an e-mail
On the File menu, select E-mail
Use Shortcut keys CTRL + M together
When configured, reports may be sent easily by clicking the E-mail button on the Reports Toolbar.
Reports are automatically added to the e-mail as PDF attachments.
To assist with the managing of sending e-mails a Distribution Lists feature is available.
System requirements for sending e-mail from HandicapMaster
To be able to send e-mails directly from HandicapMaster, you will need
Windows XP, Vista, Seven or Eight.
An e-mail account with an SMTP Server for outgoing e-mail.
Note: Some ISP's limit the number of e-mails that may be sent in one session.
Contents
Configuring HandicapMaster to send E-mails
View E-mail Result Log
Change the covering text created in the body of an e-mail for selected reports
Change the 'From' e-mail address used
E-mailing Handicap Certificates to Members
E-mailing the Report Away Players' Scores to their Home Clubs report
E-mailing Subscriptions
E-mailing Overdue Subscriptions
8.2.2
E-mail Settings
Before you can send e-mail messages in HandicapMaster, you must first set up and configure e-mail
settings.
In the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions, a separate e-mail configuration is
stored for each HandicapMaster Userid.
To configure e-mail settings in HandicapMaster
If you have not previously entered any e-mail settings into HandicapMaster, then the Configure E-mail
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
84
HandicapMaster®
Settings wizard will be displayed, otherwise the existing settings will be shown.
Configure E-mail Settings Wizard
1. Do one of the following
Select Send E-mail using, choose your Internet Service Provider from the list and click Next, or
Select Manually configure E-mail settings, click Next and skip to section Existing E-mail
Settings below.
2. In the Display Name box, type your name as you want it to appear to other people (E.g. "John Smith"
or "Example Golf Club") and click Next.
3. In the E-mail Address box, type the complete e-mail address assigned by your mail administrator or
ISP. Make sure to include your user name, the @ symbol, and the domain name, for example
"[email protected]", and click Next.
4. In the Your Credentials section, enter the username and password provided by your Internet Service
Provider. You may tick the Show Password box to show the password as you enter it.
5. Complete the wizard. You will be taken to the Existing E-mail Settings section where you can confirm
the settings and use the Test Account Settings button to test the settings that you have entered.
Existing E-mail Settings
1. In the Your Name box, type your name as you want it to appear to other people (E.g. "John Smith" or
"Example Golf Club").
2. In the E-mail Address box, type the complete e-mail address assigned by your mail administrator or
ISP. Make sure to include your user name, the @ symbol, and the domain name, for example
"[email protected]"
3. In the Mail Server box, type the full name of the server provided by your ISP or mail administrator.
Often this is mail. followed by your domain name, for example, mail.myISP.com. (see below).
4. Optionally, click More Settings to set an SMTP Port Number and/or set a Username and Password if
your ISP instructs you to do this.
5. Click Test Account Settings. This will send an e-mail to the e-mail address in "Your E-mail
Address" to verify that the settings are correct and working.
If you wish to return to the Configure E-mail Settings wizard, click Clear Settings link to start again.
Locating your 'Outgoing Mail Server' settings in popular e-mail systems
If you wish to look up your current settings in your e-mail software, here are some instructions for
common e-mail clients:
Outlook Express
Outlook 2007
Outlook 2003
Outlook 2000
Windows Mail
Thunderbird
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
85
Outlook Express
a) In Outlook Express, on the toolbar click on Tools and then Accounts from the pull-down menu.
b) Click the Mail tab.
c) Highlight your e-mail account and click Properties.
d) Click Servers tab. The value for Mail Server box in HandicapMaster is the value displayed in
Outgoing mail (SMTP).
e) To check whether Authentication is configured, see My server requires authentication. If it
does, click Settings for details.
f) Click Advanced tab. The value for SMTP Port box in HandicapMaster is the value displayed in
Outgoing mail (SMTP).
g) To check whether the e-mail server requires an encrypted connection, click Advanced tab. See
This server requires a secure connection (SSL).
Outlook 2007
a) In Outlook, from the main menu, choose Tools and then Account Settings.
b) Select E-mail tab.
c) Highlight your e-mail account in the list and click Change.
d) The value for Mail Server box in HandicapMaster is the value displayed in Outgoing mail server
(SMTP).
e) To check whether Authentication is configured, click More Settings, then Outgoing Server tab.
See My outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication.
f) To check the value for SMTP Port box in HandicapMaster, click More Settings, then Advanced
tab. See Outgoing mail (SMTP) box.
g) To check whether the e-mail server requires an encrypted connection, click More Settings, then
Advanced tab. See Use the following type of encrypted connection [SSL].
Outlook 2003
a) In Outlook, from the main menu, choose Tools and then E-mail Accounts.
b) Select View or change existing e-mail accounts and click Next.
c) Highlight your e-mail account in the list and click Change.
d) The value for Mail Server box in HandicapMaster is the value displayed in Outgoing mail server
(SMTP).
e) To check whether Authentication is configured, click More Settings, then Outgoing Server tab.
See My outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication.
f) To check the value for SMTP Port box in HandicapMaster, click More Settings, then Advanced
tab. See Outgoing mail (SMTP) box.
g) To check whether the e-mail server requires an encrypted connection, click More Settings, click
Advanced tab. See This server requires a secure connection (SSL).
Outlook 2000
Please follow the instructions about how to set up Outlook Express above.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
86
HandicapMaster®
Windows Mail
a) In Windows Mail, from the main menu, choose Tools and then Accounts.
b) Select E-mail tab.
c) Highlight your e-mail account in the list and click Properties.
d) Click Servers tab. The value for Mail Server box in HandicapMaster is the value displayed in
Outgoing mail (SMTP).
e) To check whether Authentication is configured, see My server requires authentication. If it
does, click Settings for details.
f) Click Advanced tab. The value for SMTP Port box in HandicapMaster is the value displayed in
Outgoing mail (SMTP).
g) To check whether the e-mail server requires an encrypted connection, click Advanced tab. See
This server requires a secure connection (SSL).
Thunderbird
a) In Thunderbird, from the main menu, choose Tools and then Account Settings.
b) In the left hand column, select Outgoing Server (SMTP).
c) Select the account in the upper list. The value for Mail Server box in HandicapMaster is the value
displayed alongside Server Name.
d) The value for SMTP Port box in HandicapMaster is the value displayed alongside Port.
e) If authentication is not being used, "<not specified>" will be displayed alongside User Name.
f) if your e-mail server does not require an encrypted connection, Server Connection will show as
None.
8.2.3
The New Message and Recipients Windows
The New Message window allows you to set-up an e-mail. This includes selecting recipients adding a
title to the e-mail, adding a file as an attachment and defining a footer or signature text.
To send an E-mail
1. Click the To or CC buttons to select a recipient for the e-mail. When you click on either of these
buttons a Recipients Window will appear that will allow you to select the recipients. When you return
to the New Message Window the names of the recipients will be displayed alongside the To or CC
buttons.
Note:
If you add more than one recipient to the e-mail To or CC lists and send the e-mail, a separate email will be sent to each recipient showing only their own e-mail address. This eliminates the
need for using a Blind Copy (BCC) list of recipients (which is therefore not provided).
2. Title of the e-mail
Enter a title for the e-mail in the Subject box.
3. Insert previous e-mail
From File menu select Insert Previous E-mail Text, this will list the subject and a summary of the text
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
87
of e-mails that were sent within the last 6 months. Select the one that you wish to insert in to the text
box.
4. Attach a File
You may attach one or more files or attachments to the e-mail as follows:
Click on the Attach File button
in the toolbar, or
From File menu select Attach File, or
Press the SHIFT + INSERT keys
On the windows displayed click ADD to add a new file, select REMOVE to remove a file and REMOVE
ALL to clear the list.
5. Enter your message text in the main box of this window.
6. To receive a copy of the e-mail to your own e-mail account, tick the Send a Copy to.... box.
Recipients Window
The Recipients Window allows you to select the recipients of the e-mail.
The list of recipients is a combination of
Distribution Lists
Members who have an e-mail address
'Other E-mail Recipient' addresses (to which new entries may be added)
To select a recipient tick the box alongside the name of the recipient.
To select all recipients in the list click Select All button.
To clear your selection either remove the tick from the box along side a name or click the Clear
All button to clear all recipients.
To add an 'Other E-mail Recipient' enter the name and e-mail address of the recipient in the
appropriate boxes and click the Add Recipient button.
The new recipient will be added to the list and be ticked automatically. This 'Other E-mail
Recipient' will be available for use in future e-mails.
To prevent sending the e-mail to an added recipient remove the tick alongside their name.
Editing 'Other' recipients
In the Recipient list, click once to highlight and select an 'Other' recipient
Right click and select Edit Recipient from the popup menu
You may now edit the name or e-mail address of the 'Other' recipient. Click OK to save the changes.
Deleting 'Other' recipients
In the Recipient list, click once to highlight and select an 'Other' recipient
Do one of the following
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
88
HandicapMaster®
Right click and select Delete Recipient from the popup menu
Press the Delete key on the keyboard
Note: It is not possible to delete distribution lists or members.
Amend E-mail Footer or Signature text
It is possible to set up a footer or signature text to be automatically added to an e-mail.
Click on the E-mail Signature button
in the toolbar, or
From File menu select Signature
Enter the signature text.
Note if you amend an existing signature this will be changed in the e-mail automatically.
The signature will be used in all future e-mails.
Notes:
The first time that you send an e-mail , you will be asked to enter your e-mail settings. These are
required to configure HandicapMaster to send e-mail.
When e-mailing a report the report will be attached automatically and sent as a PDF attachment to
the e-mail. This is indicated by the word "Report;" at the start of the Attached line. You may attach an
additional file which may be in any other format.
When sending an e-mail to a Distribution List only entries of the distribution list with a valid e-mail
address will receive the e-mail.
The list of recipients displayed alongside the To and CC buttons is for information only. To see full
details of the recipients please click the To or CC button to view the Recipients Window.
The Recipients window may be resized to make it easier to view large lists of recipients.
If you are e-mailing the Report Away Player's Scores to their Home Clubs report, there are special
considerations.
See System Requirements to see if you are able to send e-mails from your computer.
In the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions, a separate e-mail footer is stored
for each HandicapMaster Userid.
When an e-mail is sent to one or more recipients, a copy of the text of the e-mail is saved for use at a
future date.
8.2.4
E-mail Log
This report allows you to review the status of e-mails created by HandicapMaster.
The data in the log is automatically house kept so that older data is removed after a number of months.
To view the e-mail results log
1.
Do one of the following:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
89
On the Reports menu, click Membership Reports, and click E-mail Log
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Reports, then select the Membership tab in
the right-hand pane and select E-mail Log.
2.
Select a suitable date range for the data you wish to view.
Notes:
In the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions the name of the user who sent the email is also displayed in the log.
8.2.5
Change the covering text sent with e-mails
When e-mailing copies of some reports in HandicapMaster, standard text is sent in the body of the email automatically.
You may change the text send for these reports.
To change the covering text e-mailed
1. Do one of the following:
On the File drop-down menu, click Options. Select Letters tab and click E-mail Text...,
On the File drop-down menu, click E-mail. On the New Message window, click File menu, then
Edit default covering text...
2. In the Report drop-down list, choose the report for which you wish to amend the covering text.
3. Amend the text to be used when e-mailing this report.
Using Field codes in the covering text
HandicapMaster will substitute 'special' words (known as Fields) in the e-mail body text for relevant
information when the e-mail is sent.
The following tags are recognised and, if present in the text body, will be substituted when the e-mail is
sent:-
Tag
Text Substituted
<Name>
The full name of the addressee
<Surname>
The Surname of the addressee
<GivenName>
The First (or Given) name of the addressee
<MemberTitle>
The title (Mr, Mrs, etc) of the addressee
<ExactHandicap>
The current exact handicap of the addressee or 'No handicap
award' if the addressee does not have a current handicap
<PlayingHandicap>
The current playing handicap of the addressee or 'No handicap
award' if the addressee does not have a current handicap. (i) for
Inactive handicap, or (*) for lapsed handicap may be appended
where applicable.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
90
8.2.6
HandicapMaster®
<CurrentTime>
The time when the e-mail is created
<CurrentDate>
The date when the e-mail is created
Change the 'From' E-mail address used
If you need to change the From e-mail address used when sending out e-mails, or other settings
related to sending e-mails, you may do this through the e-mail settings window.
To change the 'From' e-mail address
If you have HandicapMaster configured to request a user and password on start-up, login with the
applicable user. A separate set of e-mail settings is maintained for each user login.
1. Do one of the following
On the File menu, select E-mail
Use Shortcut keys CTRL + M together
2. Do one of the following in the New Message window
On the File menu, select E-Mail Settings
Click the Configure E-mail Settings button on the toolbar (shown with a spanner icon)
3. Change the settings as required. See E-mail Settings.
8.2.7
E-mailing Handicap Certificates
When you click the E-mail Report button to e-mail the Handicap Certificate report, the behaviour of
HandicapMaster changes.
In this situation, HandicapMaster creates e-mails with the handicap certificate as attachments to the email. This is in place of the report on screen.
Notes:
The Handicap Certificate is automatically added to the e-mail as PDF attachment.
Certificates will only be sent to those members with a valid e-mail address
Members will only receive their own Handicap Certificate.
The Signature on the Handicap Certificate attachment may be set in the global options by setting the
Signatory on Letters
You will be prompted to decide if you wish to receive a copy of each handicap certificate e-mail sent.
If you select Yes then you may receive many e-mails in your inbox
You may change the covering text created in the body of the e-mail
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
8.2.8
91
E-mailing the Report Away Players' Scores to their Home Clubs Report
When you click the E-mail Report button to e-mail the Report Away Players' Scores to their Home
Clubs report, the behaviour of HandicapMaster changes.
In this situation, HandicapMaster creates e-mails with the away scores listed in the body of the e-mail.
This is in place of the report on screen being attached as a PDF document.
To send Scores to Away clubs by e-mail
1.
2.
3.
Enter the e-mail addresses for the recipients at the away clubs, by recording the contact details
for the golf clubs.
Generate the Report Away Players' Scores to their Home Clubs report
Click the E-mail Report button on the Reports Toolbar. A copy of each e-mail sent will also be
sent to the User's e-mail account.
Notes:
Each away club will only receive the scores for its members. The whole report is not sent by email to each away club.
8.2.9
E-mailing Subscriptions
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
When you click the E-mail Report button to e-mail the Subscriptions , the behaviour of HandicapMaster
changes.
In this situation, HandicapMaster creates e-mails with the subscription invoices as attachments to the
e-mail. This is in place of the report on screen.
At the end of the sending of the e-mails there is an option to print the subscriptions for those members
who either do not have an e-mail address or who have not opted to receive subscriptions by e-mail.
To send Subscriptions by e-mail
1. Select the members who have opted to receive their subscriptions by either:
selecting Send Subscriptions, Invoices, Receipts by E-mail on the Subscriptions Tab of the Edit
Member facility.
or on the Accounting menu select Configure and select Members who receive correspondence by
e-mail and select the required members
2. Run the Raise Subscription Wizard
3. Click the E-mail Report
button on the Reports Toolbar.
4. You will be prompted to add an attachment file in addition to the subscription. Click Yes and then
browse and select the file you wish to attach. This may be a document of any format.
5. If there are any members who either do not have an e-mail address or who have not opted to receive
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
92
HandicapMaster®
subscriptions by e-mail Click Yes at the prompt that will be displayed and select the required printer
to print the subscriptions.
6. A summary of the e-mails sent will then be displayed.
Notes:
The subscription is automatically added to the e-mail as PDF attachment.
8.2.10 E-mailing Overdue Subscriptions
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
When you click the E-mail Report button to e-mail the overdue Subscriptions , the behaviour of
HandicapMaster changes.
In this situation, HandicapMaster creates e-mails with the overdue subscription invoices as
attachments to the e-mail. This is in place of the report on screen.
At the end of the sending of the e-mails there is an option to print the overdue subscriptions for those
members who either do not have an e-mail address or who have not opted to receive subscriptions by
e-mail.
To send Subscriptions by e-mail
1.
Select the members who have opted to receive their subscriptions by e-mail on the Subscriptions
Tab of the Edit Member facility.
2.
Run the Overdue_Subscriptions_Wizard
3.
Click the E-mail Report button on the Reports Toolbar.
4.
To print the overdue subscriptions for those members who either do not have an e-mail address
or who have not opted to receive subscriptions by e-mail Click Yes at the prompt and select the
required printer.
Notes:
The overdue subscription is automatically added to the e-mail as PDF attachment.
8.2.11 E-mailing Letters
When you have written a letter it is possible to send the letter by e-mail to recipients who have a valid email address.
1. Click the E-mail Report button
on the Reports Toolbar.
2. You will be prompted to add an attachment.
3. Select Yes to add an external document to the e-mail.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
93
4. The letter for each recipient will be will be sent to that recipients e-mail account.
5. To print the letters for those members who do not have an e-mail address click Yes at the prompt
and select the required printer.
A typical example of a letter to be sent may be to advise members of future dated competitions that
have been configured in HandicapMaster.
Notes:
The letter is automatically added to the e-mail as PDF attachment.
To send an e-mail without a letter on the File menu, select E-mail
8.2.12 E-mailing Reports
Reports may be sent easily by clicking the E-mail button on the Reports Toolbar. Reports are
automatically added to the e-mail as PDF attachments. This is indicated by the word "Report;" at the
start of the Attached line. You may attach an additional file.
Notes:
For some reports e.g. Handicap Certificates only the section of the report relevant to a member will
be sent by e-mail.
For Subscriptions, Overdue Subscriptions at the end of sending by e-mail there is an option to print
out those letters for members who do not opt to receive subscriptions by e-mail.
For Letters at the end of sending by e-mail there is an option to print out those letters for members
without e-mail addresses.
For some reports, you may change the covering text created in the body of the e-mail
8.2.13 E-mailing Members, Away Members and Visitors
To e-mail an individual Member, Away Member or Visitor
1.
Do one of the following:
Go to the appropriate member list either All Members, Away Members, or Visitors
In the list, select a Member and press Enter Key,
or, select a Member right click and select Edit from the popup menu.
2.
Enter an e-mail address if required and then click the Send E-mail button
NOTE
If the Member, Away Member or Visitor already has an e-mail address then:
In the appropriate list click once to highlight their name, right click and select Send E-mail
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
94
HandicapMaster®
To e-mail to multiple Members, Away Members or Visitors
You may either:
Use a Distribution List of Members, Away Members or Visitors and select this as the recipient of the
e-mail.
Export the Member or Visitor membership details and use an external "mail merge" facility to send
correspondence to past Members.
8.2.14 E-mailing Past Members or Past Visitors
To e-mail an individual Past Member or Visitor
1.
Do one of the following:
In the Past Members list, select a Member and press Enter Key,
In the Past Members list, select a Member right click and select Edit from the popup menu.
In the Past Members list, select a Member right then select Edit a Membership record from the
Previous Member Tasks
2.
Enter an e-mail address if required and then click the Send E-mail button
NOTE
If the Past Member or Past Visitor already has an e-mail address then:
In the Past Members list click once to highlight their name, right click and select Send E-mail
To e-mail to multiple Past Members or Past Visitors
You may either:
Use a Distribution List of Past Members or Past Visitors and select this as the recipient of the e-mail.
Export the Past Member or Past Visitor membership details and use an external "mail merge"
facility to send correspondence to past Members.
8.2.15 E-mailing Golf Clubs
To e-mail an individual Golf Club
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players menu, click Golf Courses, then Golf Club Contact Details and choose the
applicable Golf Club from the Golf Courses lists.
In the Golf Course list, select an existing Golf Course and click the Golf Club Contact Details
task.
2.
Enter the e-mail address for this club if required
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
3.
Click the Send E-mail button
4.
When you send the e-mail click the OK button to save the details.
95
To e-mail to multiple Golf Clubs
Create a Distribution List of Golf Clubs
Select this distribution list as the recipients of the e-mail.
Notes:
You will need to supply the e-mail address of the Golf Club before it may be added to a Distribution
List.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
96
HandicapMaster®
8.3
Writing Letters to Members
8.3.1
Letters Introduction
HandicapMaster provides a convenient way of producing formatted letters to members, automatically
picking up the correct name and address (or names and addresses) for the member(s). The body of
text for the Letters are maintained in the HandicapMaster database for future re-use.
Letters that have been produced may either be printed or may be e-mailed to members with a valid email address.
The letter text may be formatted in a number of ways and different fonts may be mixed in a letter.
Letters may contain 'clipart' or bit-mapped image files (with some limitations).
8.3.2
Write a new Letter
To write a new letter
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players menu, click Letters, and click New if the Select A letter window is shown
In the Letters list, select any existing letter and press ENTER key. On the Letters Window, click
File menu then New.
2.
Enter a title for this letter in the Title box. This title will be used to index the letter in the
HandicapMaster database.
3.
Select one or more recipients for the Letter by ticking the applicable boxes in the
Recipients list.
You may swap between the Member and Category Recipients and the Distribution List
Recipients. Both lists will be used when creating letters.
4.
Click the Body of Letter tab
5.
Write the letter in the Body of Letter box, as required.
6.
Click Run Letter.
Notes:
Do not include the address or name of the intended recipient, or the greeting (i.e. the 'Dear Sir'). Only
include the body of the text.
If you select recipients that are both in the Member and Category Recipients and the Distribution
List Recipients only a single letter for the recipient will be created.
It is only possible to send letters to Distribution Lists for Members and Past Members. Other types of
distribution list are not available as letter recipients.
'clipart' or bit-mapped image files may be pasted into letters provided the size of the image file is
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
97
smaller than 512 Kbytes (1/2 Mbyte)
Images if entered into a middle of a paragraph in the letter, will still be drawn left-aligned (effectively
as a new paragraph).
See Also
Change the Font used in Letters
Configure the Layout of Letters
Change the Salutation ("Dear") line used in Letters
Add Letterheads to Letters
Using Fields in Letters
Sending Letters by E-Mail
8.3.3
Resend a Saved Letter
To send an existing letter to a member
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players menu, click Letters, and choose the letter to resend if the Select A letter window
is shown
In the Letters list, select any existing letter and press ENTER key
3.
Select one or more recipients for the Letter by ticking the applicable boxes in the
Recipients list.
You may swap between the Member and Category Recipients and the Distribution List
Recipients. Both lists will be used when creating letters.
4.
Click the Body of Letter tab
5.
Make any amendments to the letter in the Body of Letter box, as required.
6.
Click Run Letter.
See Also
Change the Font used in Letters
Configure the Layout of Letters
Add Letterheads to Letters
Using Fields in Letters
Sending Letters by E-Mail
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
98
8.3.4
HandicapMaster®
Delete a Saved Letter
To Delete a Letter previously saved in the HandicapMaster database
1.
Select the letter to be deleted. Do one of the following:
On the Players menu, click Letters, and choose the letter to be deleted if the Select a Letter
window is displayed.
In the Letters list, select the letter to be deleted.
2.
Delete the selected letter. Do one of the following:
Select Delete an existing Letter task in the task bar.
Right-click the selected letter and choose Delete.
In the Letters list, press the DELETE key.
Edit the selected letter, then, on the File menu, click Delete
8.3.5
Write a Letter of Introduction for a Member
HandicapMaster will generate a letter of introduction for a member that automatically details that
member's current handicap.
To produce a Letter of Introduction
1.
On the Players menu, click Letter of Introduction
2.
If the Select a Player window is displayed, choose the applicable Member (must be a Home Club
player)
HandicapMaster creates a letter like
Dear Secretary,
Re: John Smith
May I introduce you to John Smith who is a member in good standing of this
club. Currently, John has a Playing Handicap of 17 (Exact Handicap 16.9).
Any courtesies you are able to extend to him will be much appreciated.
Yours Sincerely,
Notes:
The font selected for the salutation is also used for text of the Letter of Introduction this may be
changed by adjusting the Salutation font
You may paste bitmap files (.BMP) into the letter text. There is a file size limit of 512KB.
See Also
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
99
Change the Font used in Letters
Configure the Layout of Letters
Add Letterheads to Letters
8.3.6
Change the Font used in Letters
To change the Font in the body of the Letter
1. Write or edit any existing Letter.
2. Select the text you wish to have its font changed
3. On the Format menu, click Font.
4. Choose the font attributes, as required.
5. Click OK.
Or select the Font and size and attributes using the toolbar
See Also
Address and Date font
Salutation font
Notes:
You may select text using the mouse to click and press to select text, or double click a section of text.
You may use different fonts and attributes within different sections of the body of the letter.
8.3.7
Configure the Layout of Letters
It is possible to reposition where then main items on letters are written (address field, date and body of
letter) in the event of the default setting not being suitable. This may be in the circumstance when the
Address field is overprinting the club Letterhead, for example.
To change the positioning of letter items
1.
Write or edit any existing Letter.
2.
On the Format menu, click Layout.
3.
In the Layout window, enter the appropriate distances to be used by HandicapMaster as detailed
on the window. Valid values are 0 to 15 cm's inclusive.
4.
Click OK.
To reset the values back to HandicapMaster defaults
1.
Write or edit any existing Letter.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
100
HandicapMaster®
2.
On the Format menu, click Layout.
3.
In the Layout window, click Reset.
4.
Click OK.
To select the Font for Address and Date information
8.3.8
1.
Write or edit any existing Letter.
2.
On the Format menu, click Layout.
3.
In the Layout window, click Set Font to use for address and date. Chose the required font and
click OK
4.
Click OK.
Change the Salutation used in Letters
By default, HandicapMaster automatically includes a salutation line of "Dear <Name>" in each letter,
where <Name> is the first name of the recipient.
It is possible to change the way HandicapMaster generates the "Dear <Name>" line in the Letter (or
turn off the automatic generation of this line altogether).
To change the Salutation Line
1.
Write or edit any existing Letter.
2.
On the Format menu, click Salutation.
3.
In the Layout window, chose and appropriate layout for your letters.
4.
Click OK.
To select the Font for the Salutation Line
1.
Write or edit any existing Letter.
2.
On the Format menu, click Salutation.
3.
In the Layout window, click Set Font to use for salutation line. Chose the required font and click
OK
4.
Click OK.
NOTE
The selected salutation font will also be used for the main text of the Letter of Introduction
and the General Play Letter
8.3.9
Using Fields in Letters
HandicapMaster will substitute 'special' words (known as Fields) in the body of the letter for relevant
information when the letter is produced.
If one or more names are ticked in the recipients box then the relevant information relating to that field
will be substituted for the Text between the tags. Thus if John Smith is selected in the recipients letters
window, any text in the body of the letter with the word <NAME> will come up as John Smith or if
<SURNAME> then if will come up as Smith.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
101
If for example 6 recipients boxes are selected, then 6 letters will be printed each with the relevant
information substituted for the individual recipient.
The following tags are recognised and, if present in the body of a letter, will be substituted:-
Tag
Text Substituted
<Name>
The full name of the addressee.
<GivenName>
The First (or Given) name of the addressee.
<Surname>
The Surname of the addressee.
<MemberTitle>
The title (Mr, Mrs, etc) of the addressee.
<DOB>
The Date of Birth of the addressee, 'not known' will be
displayed if there is no date of birth information for the
addressee
<EmailAddress>
The Email address of the addressee.
<TelephoneNo>
The Telephone number of the addressee.
<MobileNo>
Mobile Telephone number of the addressee.
<FaxNo>
The Fax Number or Other Telephone Number of the addressee
<MemberAddress>
The address of the addressee.
<ExactHandicap>
The current exact handicap of the addressee or 'No handicap
award' if the addressee does not have a current handicap
<PlayingHandicap>
The current playing handicap of the addressee or 'No handicap
award' if the addressee does not have a current handicap. (c) for
compitition handicap, or (*) for lapsed handicap may be appended
where applicable.
<MembershipCardNo>
Member's membership card number.
<Category>
The Membership Category of the addressee.
<LockerNo>
The Locker Number of the addressee.
<MembershipNo>
The Membership number of the addressee.
<PinNo>
The PIN number of the addressee.
<NationalNumber>
The National Number of the addressee (allocated to the player
on the National Database of Handicaps)
<FutureCompetitions>
A list of future dated competitions including date and venue.
<FutureCompsLadies> A list of future dated competitions including date and venue
only open to Ladies.
<FutureCompsMen>
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
A list of future dated competitions including date and venue
only open to Men.
102
HandicapMaster®
<ClubAddress>
The address of the Club as defined in the Include Address and
Second Line of the letterhead. This may be useful if you wish to
add a "tear off" slip to the letter with the club contact details.
<NewPage>
If included, will force a skip to a new page in the Letter.
<AmountsPaid>
Where the Subscriptions Option is NOT installed this field will
display the date paid and the amounts recorded for a single
subscription payment, locker fee and other amount along with the
total.
The angle brackets ('<' and '>') denote the beginning and end of a tag and are required for the tag to be
recognized. The Tags are not case sensitive. That is, <NAME> and <name> will both be substituted.
Example of a letter being sent to John Smith
Letter body of 'This is a letter to be sent to <Name>.' will be produced as 'This is a letter to be sent to
John Smith.'
Subscription Related Fields in Letters
Additional subscription related fields are available when the Subscriptions Option has been installed
as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions Option may not be installed.
Tag
<AccountBalance>
Text Substituted
The Account Balance of the member's account.
<Subscription>
A summary table of the member's subscription. This
includes a list of the Payment Items, their value and the total
value of the subscription.
<FirstPayment>
The gross amount due in the first payment. If the
subscription has an annual payment schedule (i.e. 1
payment) this will equal the Gross Total. If another payment
schedule is selected then this is the initial payment to be
made by the member
<PaymentMethod>
Member's default method of payment
<NumberOfPayments>
The number of payments that the member is due to
make to pay the subscription.
<NumberOfOtherPayments> The number of subsequent payments due after the initial
payment is made. If the subscription has an annual
payment schedule (i.e. 1 payment) this will be value 0.
<OtherPayments>
The gross amount due for any subsequent payments. If the
subscription has an annual payment schedule (i.e. 1
payment) this will be value 0. If another payment schedule
is selected then this is the gross value of each subsequent
payment after the initial first payment.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
<PaymentSchedule>
A table listing the payment schedule which includes
amounts and payment due dates for the subscription.
<GrossTotal>
The Gross total of the subscription.
<VATTotal>
The VAT total for the subscription.
<NettTotal>
The nett total of the subscription.
<Transactions>
A member's transaction history for all dates.
103
The angle brackets ('<' and '>') denote the beginning and end of a tag and are required for the tag to be
recognized. The Tags are not case sensitive. That is, <SUBSCRIPTION> and <subscription> will both
be substituted.
Notes:
When the subscription involves multiple payments the first payment may be different from
subsequent payments. This is to cope with the situation where the total amount is not exactly
divisible by the number of payments to be made.
8.3.10 Add Letterheads to Letters
HandicapMaster may automatically generate a Letterhead on any Letter that is created. If selected, the
Letterhead will consist of the Club name on the top line and two additional lines are entered.
To add Letterheads to Letters
1.
On the File menu, click Options.
2.
Click the Letters tab.
3.
Tick the Add Letterhead to Letters box.
4.
Enter Address information into the Include Address and Second Line boxes, as required
5.
Click OK.
To include a picture (or logo) in the Letterhead
1.
Add a picture to the reports in HandicapMaster by selecting Reports menu, then Layout and
Options.
2.
On the File menu, click Options.
3.
Click the Letters tab.
4.
Tick the Include Picture in Heading box to include the picture in the Letterhead.
5.
Tick the Align Picture Left box to have the picture left-aligned on the letter page.
Note:
It is possible to show a picture or logo in the letter heading, without text. To do this, tick the Include
Picture in Heading box and do not tick the Add Letterhead to Letters box.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
104
HandicapMaster®
8.3.11 Sending Letters by email
When you have written a letter it is possible to send the letter by e-mail to recipients who have a valid email address.
1. Click the E-mail Report button on the Reports Toolbar.
2. You will be prompted to add an attachment.
3. Select Yes to add an external document to the e-mail.
4. The letter for each recipient will be will be sent to that recipients e-mail account.
Notes:
The letter is automatically added to the e-mail as PDF attachment.
It is only possible to send letters by e-mail to Distribution Lists for Members and Past
Members. Other types of distribution list are not available as the recipient of letters by e-mail.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
8.4
Distribution Lists
8.4.1
Introduction
105
Distribution Lists are designed to assist with communication by Letter or E-mail.
To allow for management of different recipients the following types of distribution list are available.
Members
Past members
Visitors
Past visitors
Golf clubs
Other e-mail recipients
Some possible uses of Distribution Lists are:
Send e-mails to a number of Golf Clubs, e.g. details of a local area competition.
Send a report by e-mail to recipients in a Distribution List . For example send competition
results by e-mail.
Contact Past Visitors with details of open competitions.
Contact Past Members with details of membership "offers".
Address a Letter to a distribution list. Each member of the 'Members' or 'Past Members'
distribution list will get a letter addressed to them as an individual. (Other distribution lists are
not available when sending letters)
Produce address labels for 'Members', 'Past Members', 'Visitor', 'Past Visitor' and 'Club'
distribution lists
Only 'Members', 'Past members', 'Visitors' and 'Past visitors' types of distribution list are available when
sending letters.
All types of distribution lists may be used when sending e-mails.
Member, Past Member, Visitor and Past Visitor distribution lists allow section by one or more of the
following:
Gender
Age Group
Handicap Range
In addition Member and Past Member distributions lists also allow selection by
Membership Category
In addition Member and Visitor distributions lists also allow selection by
'Competition' or 'Non-competition' Handicap Status - Only applicable to CONGU editions of
HandicapMaster in England, Wales and Scotland
Member, Past Member, Visitor and Past Visitor distribution lists may also be defined to Automatically
add and maintain entries in list. Meaning that when a member detail changes e.g. age group they will
be added/removed automatically from a distribution list where they no longer meet, or now meet the
selection criteria.
These distribution lists may be used when sending e-mail or in the letter writer. In these situations they
will be updated automatically if the Automatically add and maintain entries in list option is selected.
Contents
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
106
HandicapMaster®
Add A Distribution List
Edit A Distribution List
Delete A Distribution List
Add and Change Members in a Distribution List
Remove Members from a Distribution List
Address Labels from a Distribution List
Notes:
When sending an e-mail to members of a Distribution List only members of the distribution list with
a valid e-mail address will receive the e-mail.
'Members', 'Past members', 'Visitors' and 'Past visitors' distribution list are available when sending
letters. Other types of distribution list are not available for use when sending letters.
8.4.2
Add a new Distribution List
To add a new Distribution List to HandicapMaster
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players drop-down menu, click Distribution Lists
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select Distribution Lists.
2.
Existing Distribution Lists are displayed.
Select Add a New List from the Distribution Lists Tasks or press the INSERT key to add
a new Distribution List
3.
Enter the name of the Distribution List
4.
Select the type of distribution list to be created from one of the following
Members
Past Members
Visitors
Past Visitors
Golf Clubs
Other E-mail Recipients
5.
For Golf Clubs and Other E-mail Recipients distribution lists click Finish.
6.
For Member, Past Member, Visitor and Past Visitor distribution lists click NEXT >>
7.
To restrict the distribution list to a single gender un-tick the appropriate gender.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
107
8.
Tick Automatically add and maintain entries in list if you wish the list to be automatically updated
by HandicapMaster based on the selection criteria selected. If you do not tick this option then you
may manually adjust the entries in the distribution list.
9.
To limit the distribution list to a selection of Age Groups tick Only Members in selected Age
Groups. Then select the appropriate age groups from the items displayed
10. To limit the distribution list to a selection of Membership Categories tick Only Members in
selected Membership Categories. Then select the appropriate Membership Categories from the
items displayed
Note this option is not availab le for Visitor or Past Visitor distrib ution lists.
11. To limit the distribution list to a range of handicaps tick Only Members with a handicap within a
selected range. Then either type or use the up/down arrows to set the Handicap From and to
values.
12. To limit the distribution list to 'Competition' Handicap Status tick Include members with
'Competition' handicap status.
Note: Only applicab le to CONGU editions of HandicapMaster in England, Wales and Scotland
13. To limit the distribution list to 'Non-Competition' Handicap Status tick Include members with
'Non-Competition' handicap status.
Note: Only applicab le to CONGU editions of HandicapMaster in England, Wales and Scotland
14. Click Finish to save the Distribution list
Notes:
Once a distribution list has been added, the type of data contained in the distribution list
may not be changed.
For Member, Past Member, Visitor and Past Visitor distribution lists if the Automatically add and
maintain entries in list option is not selected then members added to HandicapMaster at a later
date or existing members that are edited and then meet the distribution list selection criteria are
NOT automatically added to these distribution lists, but may be added manually.
nly 'Members', 'Past Members', 'Visitor' and 'Past Visitor' types of distribution list are available
when sending letters.
If a handicap range has been selected, then this will exclude members or past members without
a handicap.
If the Automatically add and maintain entries in list is selected then HandicapMaster will update
the distribution list automatically under the following situations:
1.
When you view the distribution lists
2.
When you send e-mails
3.
When you start the Letter Writer.
Member and Visitor distributions lists also allow selection by
'Competition' or 'Non-competition' Handicap Status - Only applicable to CONGU editions of
HandicapMaster in England, Wales and Scotland.
Where 'Competition' or 'Non-competition' Handicap Status is an option if neither are ticked then
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
108
HandicapMaster®
the distribution list will be limited to members without a handicap. In this case the 'handicap range'
option will be unavailable.
8.4.3
Edit a Distribution List
To edit a Distribution List in HandicapMaster
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players drop-down menu, click Distribution Lists
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select Distribution Lists.
2.
Existing Distribution Lists are displayed.
Highlight the list you wish to edit. Then select Edit List, from the Distribution Lists Tasks or
right click with the mouse and select Edit List.
Depending on the type of distribution list you will be able to edit various settings.
3.
For Golf Clubs and Other E-mail Recipients distribution lists you may edit the name and then click
Finish to save the change.
4.
For Member, Past Member, Visitor and Past Visitor distribution lists you may edit the various
items as follows:
5.
To restrict the distribution list to a single gender un-tick the appropriate gender or to change to
both genders tick both boxes.
6.
Tick Automatically add and maintain entries in list if you wish the list to be automatically updated
by HandicapMaster based on the selection criteria selected. If you do not tick this option then you
may manually adjust the entries in the distribution list.
7.
To limit the distribution list to a selection of Age Groups tick Only Members in selected Age
Groups. Then select the appropriate age groups from the items displayed
8.
To limit the distribution list to a selection of Membership Categories tick Only Members in
selected Membership Categories. Then select the appropriate Membership Categories from the
items displayed
Note this option is not availab le for Visitor or Past Visitor distrib ution lists.
9.
To limit the distribution list to a range of handicaps tick Only Members with a handicap within a
selected range. Then either type or use the up/down arrows to set the Handicap From and to
values.
10. To limit the distribution list to 'Competition' Handicap Status tick Include members with
'Competition' handicap status.
Note: Only applicab le to CONGU editions of HandicapMaster in England, Wales and Scotland
11. To limit the distribution list to 'Non-Competition' Handicap Status tick Include members with
'Non-Competition' handicap status.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
109
Note: Only applicab le to CONGU editions of HandicapMaster in England, Wales and Scotland
12. Click Finish to save the edited Distribution list
Notes:
Once a distribution list has been added, the type of data contained in the distribution list
may not be changed.
For Member, Past Member, Visitor and Past Visitor distribution lists if the Automatically add and
maintain entries in list option is not selected then members added to HandicapMaster at a later
date or existing members are edited and then meet the distribution list selection criteria are NOT
automatically added to these distribution lists, but may be added manually.
Only 'Members', 'Past Members', 'Visitor' and 'Past Visitor' types of distribution list are available
when sending letters.
If a handicap range has been selected, then this will exclude members or past members without
a handicap.
If the Adjust Distribution List automatically is selected then HandicapMaster will update the
distribution list automatically under the following situations:
1.
When you view the distribution lists
2.
When you send e-mails
3.
When you start the Letter Writer.
Member and Visitor distributions lists also allow selection by
'Competition' or 'Non-competition' Handicap Status - Only applicable to CONGU editions of
HandicapMaster in England, Wales and Scotland.
Where 'Competition' or 'Non-competition' Handicap Status is an option if neither are ticked then
the distribution list will be limited to members without a handicap. In this case the 'handicap range'
option will be unavailable
8.4.4
Delete a Distribution List
To delete a Distribution List in HandicapMaster
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players drop-down menu, click Distribution Lists
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select Distribution Lists.
2.
Existing Distribution Lists are displayed. Highlight the list you wish to delete. Then delete
the list using one of the following:
Select Delete a List from the Distribution Lists Tasks
Right click with the mouse and select Delete
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
110
HandicapMaster®
Press the DELETE key on the keyboard.
3.
8.4.5
Confirm the deletion.
Add and Change Entries in a Distribution List
Note the following instructions do NOT apply to distributions lists where the Automatically add and
maintain entries in list option is selected.
To add an entry to a Distribution List
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players drop-down menu, click Distribution Lists
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select Distribution Lists.
2.
Existing Distribution Lists are displayed.
Highlight the list you wish to add entries to and press Enter Key, or double click the appropriate
list
.
The list of current entries in the Distribution List will be displayed.
3.
Select Add an Entry from the Distribution Lists Tasks or press the INSERT key to add a
new entry to the Distribution List.
4.
Select the entries you wish to add by ticking the box to the left hand side of their name.
Notes:
The entries that may be selected will be different depending on the type of distribution list.
For Golf Club distribution lists only clubs with contact details will be listed in the entries that may be
added.
The entries window may be resized to make it easier to view large lists of entries.
Click on the column header to sort the entries by that column. Click the column header a second
time to reverse the sort order.
You may remove existing entries by removing the tick against their name.
8.4.6
Remove Entries from a Distribution List
Note the following instructions do NOT apply to distributions lists where the Automatically add and
maintain entries in list option is selected.
To remove an entry from a Distribution List
1.
Do one of the following:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with E-mail and Letters
111
On the Players drop-down menu, click Distribution Lists
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select Distribution Lists.
2.
The current entries in the Distribution List will be displayed.
3.
To remove an entry do one of the following:
Click on the entry in the list to highlight them, then:
press the DELETE key
right click and select Remove Entry
select Remove an Entry from the Distribution Lists Tasks
4.
Confirm the removal.
To remove all entries from a Distribution List
Note the following instructions do NOT apply to distributions lists where the Adjust Distribution List
automatically option is selected.
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players menu, Distribution Lists
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select Distribution Lists.
2.
Existing Distribution Lists are displayed.
Highlight the list you wish to removal all entries from and Select Remove all Entries from
the Distribution Lists Tasks or right click with the mouse and select Remove all Entries.
3.
Confirm the removal of all entries. The distribution list will remain but have no entries.
Notes:
To remove all the entries and the distribution list delete a distribution list.
8.4.7
Address Labels from a Distribution List
Address labels may be produced for 'Members', 'Past members', 'Visitors', 'Past visitors' and 'Golf club'
distribution lists.
These labels may be printed to sheets of labels and then placed on envelopes removing the need for
windowed envelopes.
Note.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
112
HandicapMaster®
The facility to print Address Labels is included in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster.
To produce address labels from a Distribution List in HandicapMaster
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players drop-down menu, click Distribution Lists
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select Distribution Lists.
2.
Existing Distribution Lists are displayed. Highlight the list from which you wish produce
address labels.
Select Address Labels from the Distribution Lists Tasks or right click with the mouse and
select Address Labels
If you have selected a Member, Past Member, Visitor or Past Visitor distribution list then the option
to limit the address labels to those members without an e-mail address will be offered. Click Yes to
accept this option.
3.
Choose the type of Label you will be using in the Label Type box.
4.
In the Start at Label boxes, select a Row and Column where the labels are to be printed from.
This can be useful if a partially used page of labels is to be re-used, as it allows position of used
labels to be skipped. Not applicable where labels on rolls are being used.
5.
Click OK.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
113
Chapter
9
Setting System-wide Options
114
HandicapMaster®
9
Setting System-wide Options
9.1
Introduction
Settings which can be changed which affect the overall operation of HandicapMaster
You should consider the following 'global' options which affect the operation of HandicapMaster.
This Chapter describes these options, which are
1.
Setting which club is considered the 'System Home Club'.
2.
Setting the Font used in HandicapMaster screens.
3.
Removal of personal information when a member is deleted.
4.
Identification of Signatory on Letters.
5.
Addressing, Tilting and Contact information on Press Release reports.
6.
Database and Diagnostics.
7.
National Database parameters (Club, Premier and Network Editions)
Contents
Setting global options.
Changing the system password
Changing the Competition Score Entry Administration Area password
Accounting Options
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Setting System-wide Options
9.2
115
Global Options
To amend a Global Option
1.
On the File menu, click Options
The options are categorised into 'pages' accessed by clicking an appropriate 'Tab'.
System Home Club Tab
System Home Club
Change Home Club
This allows you to explicitly choose the club that will be recognised as your Organisation's Home
Club. Any member who has this club as their own Home Club (in their Membership record) will be
a Home member for your organisation.
National Federation (EGA Editions only)
EGA handicaps may only be issued by clubs or societies which are affiliated to one of the member
federations of the European Golf Association. The handicap certificate shows the National
Federation to which the club or society is affiliated (if any).
Change National Federation
To change the National Federation to which the club or society is affiliated click the Change
Federation… button.
Select the appropriate Federation (or Not Affiliated) from the list and click the OK button. The
Federations are grouped into regions, but the list can be sorted alphabetically by clicking on the
column heading.
General Tab
Start up in this Folder
Choose which Folder should be displayed when HandicapMaster is first started.
Golf Courses
Choose whether to record length of holes (Yards or Metres) when entering course details. If
selected, any distances entered will be included in the 'Scorecards for a Competition' report. It is
optional whether length of holes are recorded.
Membership Tab
PIN Numbers
Set the number of digits to be used for Membership PIN numbers. May be between 3 to 6 digits
inclusive. PIN numbers are used for selecting names from the Competition Score Entry list when
using a Keypad or terminal in place of a Keyboard.
Allocate Visitor PIN numbers in range:
Select the range of PIN numbers that should be used for Visitors. This may be especially useful
when HandicapMaster is linked to other membership systems.
Note: If this range is changed and there are visitors with their PIN outside this range or or
Members with their PIN in the new Visitor range the option to "Adjust Members and Visitor PINS
to take account of the new Visitor PIN range" is offered.
Set PIN numbers to current Membership numbers
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
116
HandicapMaster®
Allows the PIN numbers for current members to be set the same as their Membership Numbers
(where possible). The Membership numbers must be numeric and not using more digits than
previously saved using PIN Numbers option. If the Membership number of a player has already
been used as a PIN number for a Visitor, then the PIN Number for the member will not be set.
Adjust age groups automatically
Tick this box if you wish HandicapMaster to automatically adjust a member's age group
automatically. This will then allow you to select the basis which should be used to adjust the age
group of members automatically.
Adult From Age
Set the age from which a member is considered an adult. This age is used when Members are
added manually or automatically loaded or imported into the database to set the appropriate ‘Age
Group’ of the member to Adult, provided that a Date Of Birth is supplied for the member.
On
If Adjust age groups automatically is ticked then select either Date or Birthday. If Date is
selected please select the day and month within the year that you wish age groups of members
to be updated. If Birthday is selected then the member's birthday will be used. The first time
HandicapMaster is run on or after the selected criteria it will automatically check member's date
of birth and if the member's age group should be changed to Adult this will occur.
Senior From Age
Set the age from which a member is considered a senior. This age is used when Members are
added manually or automatically loaded or imported into the database to set the appropriate ‘Age
Group’ of the member to Senior, provided that a Date Of Birth is supplied for the member.
On
If Adjust age groups automatically is ticked then select either Date or Birthday. If Date is
selected please select the day and month within the year that you wish age groups of members
to be updated. If Birthday is selected then the member's birthday will be used. The first time
HandicapMaster is run on or after the selected criteria it will automatically check member's date
of birth and if the member's age group should be changed to Senior this will occur.
Title of Age Group
You may name two of the Age Groups used by HandicapMaster by entering their titles in these
boxes.
User-Defined Fields
You may name each of the 'User-defined' fields in the membership records.
Letters Tab
Add Letterhead to Letters
This section allows you to configure HandicapMaster to automatically generate a Letterhead on
any Letter that is created. If selected, the Letterhead will consist of the Club name on the top line
and two additional lines as entered in the Address Line 1 box and Address Line 2 boxes.
Include picture in heading
HandicapMaster may be configured to include a graphic (picture) in the title of all of its reports and
letters. This allows organisations to include their motif or emblem in the reports or letters.
Tick the Include picture in heading box to include the picture in the letter heading.
The picture, if included, is by default placed on the right hand side of the letter heading. To align
the graphic to the left hand side tick the Align Picture Left box.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Setting System-wide Options
117
Tick the Use full name in recipient address box to include the full name of the recipient in the
recipient address section of the letter. If this option is not selected the recipient name will be
composed of the first letter of the recipients name , middle initials and surname.
Layout
Click the Layout button to set the positioning of the Address, date and body of the letter details on
the printed page. This may be useful to avoid overprinting any text on pre-printed Letterheads. You
may also Set Font to use for address and date.
Salutation
Click the Salutation button to choose the format of the recipient's name on the "Dear..." line in the
letter. You may also Set Font to use for salutation line.
Signatory on Letters
This section allows you to pre-set the name of the signature to be put to the bottom of Letters
(Letter of Introductions and General Play Letters and Handicap Certificates when send by e-mail).
Competitions Tab
Competitions
Tick the Use strokes taken for gross results in Stableford and Par competitions box if you wish
the Gross Scores (I.e. No Handicap Allowance) results to be based on the number of strokes
taken, even if the competition format is Stableford or Par. If this box is not ticked, the Gross Scores
results will be based on the number of Stableford points won (without handicap) or Par result
(without handicap) accordingly. This setting is applied when competitions are applied (closed).
Tick the Cursor moves down before across when entering multiple column scores onto
scorecard box if you wish to change the way scores are entered for team competitions where
more than one column of scores have to be entered (such as with Four Ball Better Ball
competitions). When this box is ticked, scores for Player A have to be entered before any scores for
Player B, etc. That is, the cursor moves down column-by-column, rather than across row-by-row.
After changing this option, reselect Enter Competition Scores or restart Player Entry system for the
change to take affect.
Press Release
This section allows you to set titling and contact information on the heading of Press Release
reports.
Competition Fees
Tick the Use Set Folder and File Names when Exporting Competition Fees box if you are intending
to use the Manage Competition Fees option and wish HandicapMaster to create export files in the
same folder (without prompting for a file name each time). Click Folder button to select the folder
where the files shall be created.
Export files will be named "Comp_Fees_Sales_yyyy_mm_dd_nn.csv" or
"Comp_Fees_Refunds_yyyy_mm_dd_nn.csv" depending whether unprocessed fees payable or
unprocessed refunds are being exported (where yyyy_mm_dd is the date the file is created and nn
a sequence number from 01 upwards for that day).
Tick the When reporting fees payable, include players' competition handicaps and divisions
played in box if you wish to extend the fees payable report and export file to include the handicap
and competition division for each player. The division is reported as 0 when divisions have not
been used for the competition. Note: This option is not available in all editions of HandicapMaster.
Database Tab
Show Description in Title Bar
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
118
HandicapMaster®
Enter a Description for this database in the Show in Title Bar box, if you would like to differentiate
between more than one copy of HandicapMaster running on the same PC. The text will be
displayed in the Title Bar of the main HandicapMaster window.
Configure...
This button, if clicked, will allow additional copies of the HandicapMaster database to be created
or copied.
Compact Database (Not Network Edition)
This button, if clicked, will compact the current HandicapMaster database file , often reducing it in
size.
Recover the database to how it was at an earlier date using an automatic Backup
This link, if clicked, will allow the HandicapMaster database to be restored back to a previous
position using one of the 'automatic' backups that HandicapMaster maintains.
Create an automatic Backup now
This link, if clicked, will request that HandicapMaster takes an immediate backup of the
database, as an 'automatic' backup.
Number of Automatic backups retained (Not Network Edition)
HandicapMaster will save a copy of the database each time HandicapMaster is exited. The copies
are made to directory \Backup under the HandicapMaster directory.This number dictates how
many copies should be retained. Valid values are 0 to 99 inclusive.
Integration Tab (Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions Only)
Configure Integration...
This button allows configuration of interfaces to and from other systems.
This facility should only be changed after discussion with the supplier of your external Membership
system.
Note this is only visible when logged on as the HandicapMaster “admin” user.
Report Account ID's
This button, if clicked, will create a text file listing the Account ID's currently used in the
membership records in the database.
Edit Member's Account ID
This button, if clicked, will allow for the viewing and editing of a Current Member's Account ID in the
database.
Edit Past Member's Account ID
This button, if clicked, will allow for the viewing and editing of a Past Member's Account ID in the
database.
Bookings Tab (Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions Only)
Bookings will be collected using...
The selected item in the list defines the method or service by which bookings into future
competitions will be collected. When changed, is applied to competitions subsequently configured
for Bookings. Options are:
HandicapMaster Player Entry System
Bookings are collected through the player Entry system. See Configure Player Entry for
switching on Future Bookings in the Player Entry System.
Master Scoreboard web site
Bookings are collected through the Master Scoreboard web site only (i.e. all bookings taken
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Setting System-wide Options
119
online).
Requires Master Scoreboard to be set up for "individual passwords", so each member log's in
with their own password on the web site.
Player Entry and Master Scoreboard web site together
Bookings are collected either through Player Entry screens or through the Master Scoreboard
web site simultaneously (i.e. players can book in the clubhouse or online).
Requires Master Scoreboard to be set up for "individual passwords", so each member log's in
with their own password on the web site.
Export/Import by File
Bookings are collected from an external booking system, using local files to receive entries.
Players may cancel their bookings for future competitions
Tick this box if you wish to allow Players to be able to remove their names from bookings in future
competitions, where they have previously booked in.
Bookings may also be downloaded from
Tick this box if you have an account with BRS Golf or Ez-Runner for online bookings and wish to be
able to import competition bookings to a Start Sheet from these systems. See Import Competition
Bookings onto a Start Sheet for further details.
If using BRS Golf, enter your BRS Golf Sitecode into the section shown on the "integration" tab.
If using Ez-Runner, enter your Ez-Runner web site reference in the box shown lower on the
screen.
If using MyTeeTime, enter your MyTeeTime Club Code reference in the box shown lower on the
screen.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
120
9.3
HandicapMaster®
Accounting Options
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
The Accounting Options allows you to configure and adjust accounting options for your organisation.
To amend an Accounting Option
1.
On the Accounting menu, click Options
Note:
This item is only available when the Subscriptions Option has been installed as a registered
option.
Value Added Tax
This section is used to configure the VAT details of your organisation.
Tick the Use VAT box if your organisation is registered for VAT.
In the VAT Number box enter your organisation's VAT number, this will be printed on receipts and
invoices.
In the VAT Rate (%) box enter the current VAT Rate.
Subscriptions and Invoices
This section is used to configure options related to Subscriptions and invoices
Tick the Print Raised Invoices Automatically box to turn on the automatic printing of an invoice
when an invoice is raised.
Tick the E-mail Raised Invoices box to turn on the e-mailing of an invoice when an invoice is
raised.
In the Days before an Invoice or Subscription is Overdue box enter the number of days grace
before an invoice or subscription is considered to be overdue. The default value is 30 days.
In the When raising subscriptions allow voiding of unpaid subscriptions raised within the last
days box you may enter the number of days that HandicapMaster will check back in time and
automatically allow you to void any unpaid subscriptions when raising new subscriptions. This
may be useful where you have recently conducted a subscription run, and then realised that some
changes to subscriptions are required and you wish to void these incorrectly raised
subscriptions.The default value is 45 days.
Tick the Prompt for confirmation when adding members to a start sheet if their subscription is
overdue box if you wish the subscriptions option to determine if players being added to the start
sheet have an overdue subscription. In this case HandicapMaster will prompt if the player should
be added to the start sheet.
By default the Cancel un-paid subscriptions and invoices when deleting members will be ticked.
When using the Subscriptions Option to manage competition fees if you wish to retain
resigned member's account balances as they were just prior to their resignation then un-tick
this box.
Receipts
This section is used to configure options related to Receipts
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Setting System-wide Options
121
Tick the Automatically Print Receipt for Payment Transactions box to turn on the automatic
printing of receipts for financial transactions.
Tick the E-mail Receipts box to turn on the e-mailing of receipts for financial transactions.
In the Footnote to add to Receipts box enter any text that you wish to add to the end of a receipt.
Notes:
If the rate of VAT is changed then adjust the VAT Rate (%) value. The new value will be used in all
future subscriptions, invoices etc. Existing records will use the historic value.
If you wish the Invoices or subscriptions to be overdue immediately from the date of issue, then
please set the Days before an Invoice or Subscription is Overdue to be 0, before raising invoices or
subscriptions.
The receipt footnote text will be added to all receipts until you edit or delete the text.
When E-mailing subscriptions, Invoices and Receipts account will be taken of individual member
setting to receive such information by e-mail. If this is not set then that member will NOT receive any
such correspondence by e-mail.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Chapter
10
Userids and Passwords
Userids and Passwords
10
Userids and Passwords
10.1
Introduction
123
Users may be configured to HandicapMaster to grant access to all or some of the features of
HandicapMaster.
Note:
The option to Add and Remove different Users is only available in the Premier, Network and EGAPremier Handicap editions of HandicapMaster.
Contents
About Users and Access
Types of Access
Custom Access categories
How to Add a User
How to Remove a User
How to change the Access granted to a User
Changing the Password
Changing the Competition Score Entry Administration Area password
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
124
10.2
HandicapMaster®
Users and Access
10.2.1 Users and Access
You may set-up and configure separate Users to HandicapMaster, giving people varying access to the
facilities and data in HandicapMaster. This is only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and
EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster.
Tick the Users must enter a User Name and Password to use HandicapMaster box if you wish users
to be required to log on to HandicapMaster when starting HandicapMaster. In order for different Userids
to be used, it is necessary to request Users log on to HandicapMaster.
Click the Add button to add a new User to HandicapMaster. Enter the User name, Description and
Access rights in the User Properties window.
Highlight a User in the HandicapMaster Users list and click the Remove button to remove a User from
HandicapMaster.
Highlight a User in the HandicapMaster Users list and click the Properties button to change the User
Name, Description or Access for a User.
Highlight a User in the HandicapMaster Users list and click the Set Password button to set or change
the password for a User.
Notes:
If Users are not asked to log on, the ADMIN user will always be used.
The Remove and Properties buttons are not available for the ADMIN user, which is a built in Use
To clear a password, select the User and enter a blank Password into Set Password option.
10.2.2 Properties of a Userid
The following Properties of a User Account may be chosen:
User Name
The Name the Userid.
Use this Name to log on with this Userid.
Description
A description of the User account, such as the full name of the User.
This User is Active (may be used to Log on)
Whether this Userid may be used to Log on to HandicapMaster.
Access
There are three types of user accounts available in HandicapMaster: Full, Guest and Custom:
Note:
The option to Add and Remove different Users is only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier
and EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Userids and Passwords
125
10.2.3 Types of Access
There are three types of user accounts available in HandicapMaster: Full, Guest and Custom:
Full Access
The User has full access to all facilities in HandicapMaster. The User may add, amend or delete any
data or settings in the system.
Guest Access
The User may view all data and reports in HandicapMaster, but may not amend any data or settings.
Custom Access
The User is granted a mixture of access rights to different facilities in HandicapMaster. The user may
Update, View or be granted No Access to each of the subjects in HandicapMaster. Read about
Custom Access rights
10.2.4 Custom Access
With Custom access, the User is granted a mixture of access rights to different facilities in
HandicapMaster. The user may Update, View or be granted No Access to each of the facilities in
HandicapMaster.
Facilities restricted by Access Categories (minimum access required shown in brackets)
Users Category
View and Amend User Accounts [Update]
System Utilities Category
Change Registration (FILE menu) [Update]
Backup HandicapMaster Database [View]
Restore HandicapMaster Database [Update]
Check for Updates Online: the option 'Check for Program Updates when HandicapMaster is
started.' [Update]
Send Diagnostic Files to Support from another PC [Update]
Configuration Category
Change Options (FILE menu) [Update]
Change Layout and Options (REPORTS menu) [Update]
Men - Members or Ladies - Members Category As Applicable
View Member Records [View]
Add New, Edit or Delete Member Records [Update]
Undelete Members [Update]
Change Members to Visitors [Update] (also requires Visitors [Update] access)
Suspend Player from Competitions
Membership Utilities Category
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
126
HandicapMaster®
View Membership Categories, Subscription Categories and Officer Position Titles [View]
Add, Edit or Delete Membership Categories, Subscription Categories and Officer Position Titles
[Update]
Import Member Records [Update]
Export Member Records [View]
Clear Subscription Payments [Update]
Publish to BRS Online Tee Booking [update]
Visitors Category
View Visitor Records [View]
Add, Edit or Delete Visitor Records [Update]
Find Player on CDH [View]
Update Visitors from CDH [Update]
Change Visitors to Members [Update] (also requires Members (Men or Ladies) [Update]
access)
Publish to Internet Category
Publish to Master Scoreboard [Update]
Publish to Central Database of Handicaps (GOLFnet in Ireland) [Update]
Publish to MyGolfRanking [Update]
Accounting Category (Available when Subscriptions Option installed)
View Subscription [View]
Print Subscription [View]
View Invoice [View]
Print Invoice [View]
View Payment [View]
Print Receipt [View]
(All other Accounting Menu items [Update])
Housekeeping (of accounting data) [Update]
Men - Handicapping or Ladies - Handicapping Category As Applicable
Allocate an initial Handicap for a player [Update]
View Handicapping Reports [View]
Create Handicap Certificate [View]
Enter AWAY Competition Score [Update]
Enter General Play Handicap Adjustment [Update]
Update AWAY Player's Handicap [Update]
Enter a Handicap Note [Update]
UNDO Handicapping Event (GP change, Away Score etc.) [Update]
Housekeeping (FILE menu) [Update]
Handicapping Utilities Category
Update AWAY CSS [Update]
CONGU Configure Handicapping [Update]
Lapse/Restore Handicaps [Update]
Configure Layout of Handicap List [Update]
Suspend/Reinstate Handicaps [Update]
Annual Review - EGA Editions [Update]
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Userids and Passwords
127
Housekeeping [Update]
Golf Courses Category
View Course Details [View]
Add, Edit or Delete Course Details [Update]
View Golf Course Contact Details [View]
Add, Edit or Delete Golf Course Contact Details [Update]
Add a New Club [Update]
Delete a Club [Update]
Edit a Club [Update]
Rename 'Other' Region [Update]
Men - Competitions or Ladies - Competitions Category As Applicable
View Competition Reports [View]
Add, Edit or Delete Competition Templates [Update]
Open a New Competition [Update]
Create a Start Sheet [Update]
Enter Competition Scores [Update]
Apply Competition Scores [Update]
UNDO Competition [Update]
Knock-out Draws [Update]
Knock-out Matchplay Results [Update]
Set and change Admin Password [Update]
Re-configure opened competition [Update]
Change Closed Competition Name [Update]
Change Ladies Medal Status of Closed Competition [Update]
Change whether include Closed Competition on Master Scoreboard [Update]
Edit or Cancel a Scorecard [Update]
Cancel an Open Competition [Update]
View Best of Series report [View]
Best-of Series [Update]
Men - Bookings or Ladies - Bookings Category As Applicable
Add, Edit or Delete Competition Booking Templates [Update]
Create new bookings arrangements for a competition [Update]
View Competition Bookings [View]
Add, move or remove players from competition bookings [Update]
Re-configure or cancel bookings arrangements for a competition [update]
View Bookings reports (Bookings Received, History of Bookings, Online Payments) [View]
View competitions listed on Bookings Calendar [View]
Bookings (Groups) Category
Add, Edit or Delete Group Bookings [Update]
Eclectics/Order Of Merit Category
Eclectic Results [Update]
Number of 'Good' Holes Played [Update]
Order of Merit [Update]
Player Entry Category
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
128
HandicapMaster®
Create, edit and delete Settings Profiles [Update]
Run Player Entry from HandicapMaster [Update]
Administration Button Password [Update]
Create, edit and delete Player Entry Messages [Update]
Clear Player Entry Profile Assignments [Update]
Email Category
Create, edit and delete Email Settings and send Email (FILE menu and Report toolbar)
[Update]
Send E-mails (FILE menu and Report toolbar) [View]
Prevent all e-mail access [No Access]
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Userids and Passwords
10.3
129
Add a User
To add a User to HandicapMaster
1.
On the File menu, select Users
2.
Click Add... button
3.
Select the Properties for this User
Note:
The option to Add and Remove different Users is only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier
and EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
130
10.4
HandicapMaster®
Remove a User
To remove a User from HandicapMaster
1.
On the File menu, select Users
2.
Select a User in the HandicapMaster Users list
3.
Click Remove button
Notes:
The ADMIN user may not be removed
It is not possible to remove the User who is currently logged on
The option to Add and Remove different Users is only available in the Premier, Network, EGAPremier and EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Userids and Passwords
10.5
131
Change the Access Granted to a User
To change the access granted to a User
1.
On the File menu, select Users
2.
Select a User in the HandicapMaster Users list
3.
Click Properties button
4.
In the Access box, select Full access, Guest access or Custom access.
Note:
The option to grant access to different Users is only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier
and EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
132
10.6
HandicapMaster®
Changing the Password
The Password is the password that must be entered on the opening screen in order to gain access to
HandicapMaster.
To change the Password
1.
On the File menu, click Change Password.
2.
In the Old Password box, type the current (existing) password, if one exists.
3.
In the New Password box, enter the new password.
4.
In the Confirm New Password box, repeat the new password.
5.
Click OK
Note
The following rules apply to Passwords:
Passwords must be at least 4 characters long
Any character, number or symbol can be used
Passwords are not case-sensitive.
Requiring Users to Logon to HandicapMaster (Premier and Network editions only)
It is necessary to require Users to logon on to HandicapMaster, in order for a Userid and password to
be prompted at Start-up. To set this
1.
On the File menu, click Users.
2.
Tick the Users must enter a User Name and Password to use HandicapMaster box.
To Remove (clear) the Password
It is possible to reset or remove the password by:
1.
In the Old Password box, type the current (existing) password, if one exists.
2.
Clear (leave empty) the New Password and Confirm New Password boxes.
To reset a User's Password (Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions only)
1.
On the File menu, click Users.
2.
Highlight a User in the HandicapMaster Users list
3.
Click Change the password of User '<Name>' link.
If you have lost the Password
In the event of a lost or forgotten password, please contact the supplier.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Userids and Passwords
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
133
Chapter
Reports
11
Reports
11
Reports
11.1
Viewing, Printing, E-mailing and Saving Reports
135
11.1.1 Introduction
Navigating around the reports windows.
This Chapter describes how to operate the report generator in HandicapMaster.
Contents
The Reports Toolbar
Print the Report
E-mail a Report
Save a Report to File
Change the size of Report on Screen
Export a report to Microsoft Excel
Customising Reports
Customising appearance of Reports
Add a Club Logo to Reports
Remove a Club Logo from Reports
Configure layout of Handicap Certificate
Configure layout of the Handicap List report
Configure 'Most Improved Golfer' report
Configure 'Players Not Played Near Handicap' Report
Configure Competition Results Report
NOTE
A list of reports is available.
11.1.2 The Reports Toolbar
When a report is requested, the report is first 'printed' to the screen within a Reports window. The
following Toolbar is displayed along the top of the report.
Report Buttons
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
136
HandicapMaster®
On the bar are the buttons as follows:
Button
Type
Description
E-mail
E-mail the report as a PDF attachment
Printer
Prints report
Save
Saves report to file in one of a number of different
formats
My Golf Ranking
Displayed if the report is a competition results reports
(some editions). Allows results from the selected
competition to be published to MyGolfRanking web site.
Zoom
Zooms in or out of report
Left Arrow
Displays first page of the report
Left Arrow
Displays previous page of the report
Right Arrow
Displays next page of the report
Right Arrow
Displays last page of the report
Copy Text
Copies the text from the document into the windows
clipboard. Use PASTE in Excel to view and work with the
text.
Find Text
Searches for one or more occurrences of some text in
the document. It is possible to jump to the page where
the text occurs by clicking the entry in the results list.
11.1.3 Print a Report
To Print a Report
You may print the current report by clicking the Print Report button
on the Reports
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Reports
137
Toolbar.
See Also
Turn off Warnings when Printing Reports
11.1.4 E-mail a Report
To E-mail a Report
1.
Generate the report in HandicapMaster, so that it is the currently displayed report.
2.
Click the E-mail Report button
3.
The New Message window will be displayed where you may set-up the e-mail.
on the Reports Toolbar.
The report will be sent as a PDF attachment to the e-mail.
Notes
The first time that you click the e-mail report button, you will be asked to enter your e-mail settings.
These are required to configure HandicapMaster to send e-mail.
If you are e-mailing the Report Away Players' Scores to their Home Clubs report, there are special
considerations.
See System Requirements to see if you are able to send e-mails from your computer.
11.1.5 Save a Report to File
To Save a Report to File
You can save the current report to a file by clicking the Save Report button
Toolbar. This will save the report to a file in your chosen file format. This can be
on the Reports
Portable Document Format (*.PDF)
OpenDocument Spreadsheet (*.ODS)
Word Format (Rich Text Format (*.RTF))
Comma-separated Values (*.CSV)
To change the default file format used
You may change HandicapMaster so that the default format of file used when saving reports is Word
Format (Rich Text Format (*.RTF)). To do this..
1. On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options
2. Click the General Tab
3. Choose your preferred file format in Default file format when saving reports box.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
138
HandicapMaster®
Notes:
Some formatting information may not be preserved when you save a report to the various formats.
This is a limitation of the destination document format.
Please note that it may take some time ranging from many seconds to a few minutes to save the
report to some formats. This is especially true for larger reports.
See also
Export a report to Microsoft Excel
11.1.6 Change the Size of Report on Screen
To change the size of the report on the screen
You can change the size of the report on the screen by clicking one of the Zoom buttons
on the Reports Toolbar, shrinking or enlarging the report on the screen.
Alternatively, enter the percentage size in the applicable box.
See Also
Opening and Closing the Left Hand Pane
11.1.7 Export a report to Microsoft Excel
You may choose to export a report to Excel (or similar spreadsheet program). Depending upon the
information required, you may do this as follows:
Create a spreadsheet with font styles preserved
If you require to create a spreadsheet with the font styles preserved, do the following:
1. Generate the report in HandicapMaster, so that it is the currently displayed report.
2. Click the Save Report button
on the Reports Toolbar.
3. Choose a folder to save the report file to, and enter a name for the file. Change Save as Type box to '
OpenDocument Spreadsheet (*.ods)' and click Save.
4. You will be offered the option to view the file created in your spreadsheet program.
Notes
The OpenDocument format is supported in Microsoft Office 2010 and later versions of Microsoft
Office. It is also supported by a number of other Office suites.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Reports
139
The font styles and data from the report will be included in the spreadsheet, but other formatting
such as borders and columns widths, etc, will not be set.
Create a spreadsheet with just data from the report
If you just require to export the data from the report into a spreadsheet, do the following:
1. Generate the report in HandicapMaster, so that it is the currently displayed report.
2. Start a new spreadsheet in your spreadsheet program.
3. Click the Copy Text from Document button
on the Reports Toolbar.
4. Switch to your spreadsheet program and select Paste (Eg. Press CTRL + V keys together).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
140
11.2
HandicapMaster®
Customising Reports
11.2.1 Introduction
Settings which can be changed to affect the appearance of reports.
This chapter describes settings which affect the appearance of reports.
Contents
Customising appearance of Reports
Add a Club Logo to Reports
Remove a Club Logo from Reports
Configure layout of Handicap Certificate
Configure layout of the Handicap List report
Configure 'Most Improved Golfer' report
Generate Letter to player automatically when Handicap First Award or General Play adjustment
Configure 'Players Not Played Near Handicap' Report
Configure 'Competition Results' Report
Configure 'Handicap Record' Report
Change the default file format used when saving reports
Change the way a member's name is displayed in reports
Turn off Warnings when Printing Reports
11.2.2 Customising appearance of Reports
The appearance of reports may be customised. Customisation includes choosing fonts to be
used in selected areas of reports (such as headings), adding a graphic to the report, etc.
To customise the appearance of reports,
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options
Customisation is achieved by setting the attributes of how items of text are to be displayed.
These items of text are called 'categories'.
To change the Font used for a category
1.
Click the Fonts tab,
2.
In the Choose a Category list, choose the category of text you wish to customise,
3.
Click the Fonts Settings. . . button and change the settings.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Reports
141
To change the Background colour for the category
1.
Click the Fonts tab,
2.
In the Choose a Category list, choose the category of text you wish to customise,
3.
Click the Background Colour. . . button and choose the colour.
To set or remove a border around the text in a category
1.
Click the Fonts tab,
2.
In the Choose a Category list, choose the category of text you wish to customise,
3.
In the Category Border list, Choose a border style. To remove a border, select 'None'.
4.
To set the colour of how a border is displayed, click the Change. . . button and choose the
colour.
5.
To set the thickness of border lines, enter a width in the Width box.
Note
Some border settings are not retained when saving reports in the Web Page format.
To set a paragraph indent for all text in a category
1.
Click the Paragraphs tab,
2.
In the Choose a Category list, choose the category of text you wish to customise,
3.
Enter a size of paragraph indent in the Left and Right boxes. This size is measured in
millimetres.
To set spacing before and after paragraphs for all text in a category
1.
Click the Paragraphs tab,
2.
In the Choose a Category list, choose the category of text you wish to customise,
3.
Enter a size of paragraph spacing in the Before and After boxes. This size is measured in
millimetres.
To reset all attributes for text in a category back to original settings
1.
Click the Fonts tab,
2.
In the Choose a Category list, choose the category of text you wish to customise,
3.
Click the Restore to Factory Defaults button. All font, border and paragraph attributes will
be reset back to their original installation settings, for the selected Category.
11.2.3 Add a Club Logo to Reports
HandicapMaster may be configured to include a graphic (picture) in the title of all of its reports. This
allows organisations to include their motif or emblem in the reports.
The graphic, if included, is by default placed on the right hand side of the report heading (or centred in
the Handicap Certificate report).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
142
HandicapMaster®
To include a graphic in the report headings
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options
2.
Click the Picture tab
3.
Place a tick in the Include picture in Report Headings box and supply a bitmap file name
containing the graphic to be displayed.
4.
To align the graphic to the left hand side tick the Align Picture Left box
Notes:
The graphic file must be a windows 'Bitmap' file (extension .BMP).
It is recommended that the bitmap be prepared as a picture about 6cm (wide) by 4cm (high) in size
(this size is the optimised size for HandicapMaster report headings).
The graphic will be included as actual size, unless its width is greater than 40% of the width of the
page. In this circumstance, HandicapMaster will attempt to shrink the graphic proportionally into a
size 6cms wide.
Microsoft's Paint program can be used to create a bitmap of a specified size.
The Align Picture Left option is a 'per user' setting and may be different for each user id. (User id's
are only available in the Premier, Network and EGA-Premier Handicap editions of HandicapMaster.)
11.2.4 Remove a Club Logo from Reports
To remove a graphic from report headings
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options
2.
Click the Picture tab
3.
Remove the tick from the Include picture in Report Headings box.
11.2.5 Configure layout of Handicap Certificate
To change the size of the Handicap Certificate
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Handicap Reports tab.
3.
Under the Handicap Certificate section, tick the Small Certificates (3 per Page) box to reduce the
certificate reports from full page to one third page size.
To choose whether the Club Logo is included in the Handicap Certificate report
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Handicap Reports tab.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Reports
3.
143
Under the Handicap Certificate section, tick the Include Picture (when available) box to include
the club Logo in the Handicap Certificate.
Note:
A Logo must have been configured into HandicapMaster previously for it to be included in the
Certificate. To configure a Logo, see Add a Club Logo to Reports.
This option is not available when Small Certificates has been selected.
To change the top Margin used for the Handicap Certificate report
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Handicap Reports tab.
3.
Under the Handicap Certificate section, amend the Top Margin value to change the vertical
positioning of text on the Certificate.
Note:
This option is not available when Small Certificates has been selected.
To change the way Names are displayed on the Certificate
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Handicap Reports tab.
3.
Under the Handicap Certificate section, tick the Format Names like 'Mr A. N. Other' box to
change the way names are displayed on the Certificate from, for example, Andrew N. Other to Mr.
A. N. Other.
11.2.6 Configure layout of Handicap List
Various layouts for the master Handicap List are available. These include selecting whether members
without handicaps are included, order of names in the list, use of one or two columns etc.
To change the layout of the Handicap List Report
1.
On the Reports Menu, choose Configure layout of Handicap List.
Tick the Members without Handicaps box, to include non-playing members in the Handicap List.
This option is only valid when ordering the report alphabetically within Membership Category (other
orderings are based upon value of handicap and therefore members without handicaps cannot be
included).
Tick the Away Members box to include the playing handicaps and home clubs of Away Members
in the handicap list report.
Tick the Reminder for Away Members to report Handicap changes box to include the appropriate
reminder notice for Away members to be included at the bottom of the report(*). NOTE: this option
is only available if the Away Members box is ticked.
In the Include with Names list, select whether to include in the report players'
Membership Numbers,
Primary Telephone Numbers, or
PIN Numbers.
These options are restricted when 2 or more columns are used, due to the lack of available space.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
144
HandicapMaster®
In the Exclude Membership Category list, select a category of membership if you wish to exclude
these members from the Handicap List.
It is possible to add your own notes to the bottom on the report by including text in the Add
comments to bottom of the report box. It is not recommended to go above 200 characters for this
section.
Tick the Left Justify Names, showing Last name first box to display names in <Surname, First
name> order.
Tick the Include Page Numbers box to include Page Numbers in the footer of each page.
In the Order names in the list list, select the order for displaying Members. These include
Option
Description
Alphabetical within Membership
Category
Members are listed alphabetically by Surname
within groups according to their Membership
Category.
Alphabetical within Handicap Category
Members are listed alphabetically by Surname
within groups according to Handicap Category, as
defined within the Handicap Schemes.
By increasing Handicap
Members are listed by increasing Playing
Handicap (I.e. Exact Handicap within Playing
Handicap).
In the Number of Columns list, choose how many columns to be used for names on each page.
When using three columns, it may be necessary to reduce the font size of characters used in the
report.
See Customising layout of Reports to amend the font used in the report.
Notes:
Each HandicapMaster User has their own configuration of the Handicap List report.
(*) The Away Member reminder is as follows:
Where the handicap is indicated as 'AWAY', the Member's Handicap is administered by
another club. Number shown is latest Playing Handicap reported to this club. Members are
reminded of their obligation under the Handicapping scheme to notify their 'AWAY' clubs
whenever their Playing Handicap changes.
11.2.7 Configure Most Improved Golfer Report
To change how the Most Improved Golfer calculation is performed
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Reports
2.
145
Click the Handicap Reports tab.
3.
Under the Most Improved Player Report section, select either Use Relative Improvement in
Handicap (USGA Method) , Use Golf World Ranking, or Use Percentage Improvement in Handicap.
Notes:
The following formulae are used to calculate the Most Improved Golfer
USGA Method
The improvement ranking is calculated using the following formula:
Ranking = (Original Handicap + 12) divided by (Current Handicap + 12)
This ranking is recommended by the United States Golf Association (see Appendix H of the
USGA Handicapping system).
Golf World Ranking
The improvement ranking is calculated using the following formula:
Ranking = (2 x Original Handicap) less (3 x Current Handicap)
Percentage Improvement in Handicap
The ranking is based on a percentage change in Handicap. The following formula is used:
Ranking = ( (Original Handicap - Current Handicap) / Original Handicap) x 100
Members who do not have an 'Original Handicap' prior to the start date selected for the report are
automatically excluded from the report.
11.2.8 Generate Letter to player automatically when Handicap First Award or
General Play adjustment
To automatically generate a letter when a player is awarded a handicap or a General
Play adjustment
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Handicap Reports tab.
3.
Under the General Play Changes and Handicap First Awards section, Tick the Generate Letter
to Player if this is required.
Notes:
It is possible to reprint a General Play adjustment or , Handicap First Award letter.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
146
HandicapMaster®
11.2.9 Configure 'Players Not Played Near Handicap' Report
To change the number of strokes over Handicap used by this report:
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Handicap Reports tab.
3.
In the Number of Strokes Above Handicap box, select the required number.
11.2.10 Configure Competition Reports
To enlarge the Font size used in the Competition Results Reports (hiding Countback
scores)
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Competition Reports tab.
3.
Remove the tick in the Countback Scores (display scores in small font) box
To configure Total Score as first column in Multiple Round Results
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Competition Reports tab.
3.
Place a tick in the Multiple Round Results: Total Score as First column box
To separate results from each division of the same competition onto a separate page
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Competition Reports tab.
3.
Place a tick in the Page breaks between Divisions box
To display Match Results on Knock-out Competition Draw Sheets
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Competition Reports tab.
3.
Place a tick in the Show results of matches box
To display Member Telephone Numbers on Knock-out Competition Draw Sheets
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Competition Reports tab.
3.
Place a tick in the Show telephone numbers (using ... when available) box. Where more than one
telephone number is recorded for a player, the number in the selected field will be shown on the report
by preference. If a player does not have a telephone number in that field, the first number located for the
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Reports
147
player in the sequence "Telephone", then "Mobile", then "Other Tel" will be displayed on the report.
To print Knock-out Competition Draw Sheets to A3 paper size
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Competition Reports tab.
3.
Place a tick in the Use A3 size paper box.
Note: The Knock-out Draw report will only be created for A3 sized paper provided there is at least one
printer attached that supports using A3 paper.
To extract a list of Competitors to CSV file when Applying Scores (Premier, Network,
EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions Only)
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Competition Reports tab.
3.
Place a tick in the Extract a List of Competitors to CSV file when Applying Scores box
4.
Under the Format section, select an appropriate value from those listed.
5.
Supply the name of the file to which the output is to be written.
Notes:
See printing considerations for gaining the best results when printing the Knock-out Draw Sheet.
11.2.11 Configure 'Handicap Record' Report
To include Non-Qualifying Competition Scores on this report:
1. On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2. Click the Handicap Reports tab.
3. Tick the Include Non-Qualifying Competition Scores (Singles Competitions Only) if this is required.
11.2.12 Configure Displaying of Member's Names
You may change HandicapMaster so that the display of member's names in reports is either 'forward
or 'reverse'. default. To do this..
1. On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options
2. Click the General Tab
3. Tick the Names on reports, show last name first reports box if you wish member's names to be
displayed in Reverse order
Notes:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
148
HandicapMaster®
Forward order is First Name Middle Initials Surname
Reverse order is Surname, Middle Initials First name
11.2.13 Turn off Warnings when Printing Reports
When you print reports from HandicapMaster, warnings will be displayed if the printer is using paper of
a size that does not match the document being printed.
If you find that your printer still manages to correctly print the documents despite this warning, you may
turn off the warnings from HandicapMaster. To do this..
1. On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options
2. Click the General Tab
3. Tick the Silently ignore printer warnings box.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Reports
11.3
149
Viewing Charts
11.3.1 The Charts Toolbar
W
hen a chart is requested, the following Toolbar is displayed along the top of the report.
Chart Buttons
On the bar are the buttons as follows:
Button
Type
Description
Hide / ShowHide or Show the left hand pane.
Print
Print the current Chart
Save
Save the Chart to a file
Copy
Copies the Chart to the Windows Clipboard.
Left Arrow Display graph of Previous Player in All Members list
Players
Select a new player's record to display
Right Arrow Display graph of Next Player in All Members list
Timeframe Select the timeframe to include in the Graph
X-axis
Plot the x-axis as a sequence of entries in the Player's Handicap Record (i.
e. with even spacing between each point).
X-axis
Plot the x-axis showing points relative to the date when they occurred,
creating a timeline.
Buttons on Charts Toolbar
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
150
11.4
HandicapMaster®
Summary of Available Reports
There are 5 main categories of reports within in HandicapMaster.
Membership
Competitions
Bookings
Handicapping
Accounting
The Bookings reports are only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions. The Accounting reports are only available when the Subscriptions Option has been installed
as a registered option.
To view a list or the reports with a brief description of each report do the following:
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Tasks and then in the PLACES box , select the Reports item. On the
list displayed select one of the tabs
Membership, Competitions, Bookings, Handicapping or Accounting
A list of the reports and a description will be displayed.
The following is a typical list of the reports available. In some cases some reports may not be available
depending on the edition of HandicapMaster. installed. Or may have slightly different names.
Membership Reports
Report
Description
Membership Summary
Summary of Membership details.
Membership Contact Summary
Names and Addresses
List of Member names, telephone numbers and e-mail
address.
List of Official's names, telephone numbers and e-mail
address.
List of Member's Names and Addresses.
Telephone Numbers
List of Member's Telephone Numbers.
E-mail Addresses
National ID's and Membership
Card Numbers
Locker Numbers
List of Member's E-mail Addresses and how invoices are to
be sent.
List of PIN numbers used when Players enter their
Competition scores.
List of National System ID's and Membership Card
numbers.
List of Members Locker numbers
Notes
Notes entered against Membership Records.
Joining Dates
Dates when Members joined.
Renewal Dates
Dates Member's Membership was last renewed.
Expiry Dates
Dates when each Member's Membership next expires.
Age of Members
Date of Birth and Age of Members along with Age Group
assigned to each Member.
Dates when Membership Subscriptions were last paid by
Officer Contact Summary
Player Identification Numbers
Subscription Paid Dates
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Reports
Report
151
Description
each Member.
Away Members
List of Away Members and their Home Club.
Visitors
List of Visitors.
Distribution Lists
Entries in Distribution Lists.
E-mail Log
Log of E-mails sent.
Competition Reports
Report
Description
View Competition Results
Results of a Competition.
Analysis of Scores Entered
(Opened competition)
Analysis of Scores Entered
(Closed competition)
Closed Competitions
Analyse scores entered, but not yet processed, for an
Opened Competition.
Analyse scores entered for Closed Competition.
Scorecards from a
Competition
Competition Scratch Score
Scores entered for each competitor in a Competition.
Best Scores Analysis
Competition Scoring
Analysis
Competition Winners
Summary of Closed Competitions.
Calculations used to compute the Competition Scratch
Score for a Competition.
Analysis of best scoring over front/back nines, Par 3's etc.
in a Competition.
Analysis of how the Golf Course was played in
Competition(s).
List of the Winners of Competitions.
England Golf (Ladies)
Medals
Players suspended from
Competitions
Player Hole-by-Hole
Analysis
Callback Log
England Golf Medal Winners.
Order of Merit
Runs an Order of Merit ('Golfer of the Year').
Number of 'Good' Holes
Played
Number of Birdies (or Pars, or Twos, etc) scored by
Players.
Players currently Banned from entering Competitions.
Analyse a Players' scores hole-by-hole.
Log of transactions with external payment system.
Bookings Reports
The Bookings reports are available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions.
Report
Description
Competition Bookings
Forward booking entries.
History of Bookings (Opened
competition)
History of players booking into a currently opened
competition.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
152
HandicapMaster®
History of Bookings (Closed
competition)
History of players booking into a closed competition.
Online Payments Received
(Opened Competition)
Details of Online Payments received from entrants into a
club Open Competition (currently opened).
Online Payments Received
(Closed Competition)
Details of Online Payments received from entrants into a
club Open Competition (now a closed competition).
Group Bookings
(Confirmation of Reservation)
A booking confirmation form for a Group Booking
Forthcoming Group Bookings
List of Group Bookings
Handicapping Reports
Report
Description
Handicap Record
Record of a Players' Handicap changes.
Handicap Records (Selected
Range of Handicaps)
Handicap List
Handicap Records of Players with a Handicap within a
selected range.
List of Players' current Handicaps.
Handicap List (Selected Range
of Handicaps)
CONGU® 9 Hole Competition
Handicap Allowances
Playing Handicap Changes
List of Players' current Handicaps, limited to a selected
range.
Conversion chart for CONGU® 9 Hole Competition
Handicap Allowances.
Recent changes of Playing Handicaps.
General Play Changes
General Play Changes recorded.
Annual Review Adjustments
Adjustments as a result of an Annual Review recorded.
Exceptional Scoring Reductions
Exceptional Scoring Reductions recorded.
First Awards
First Awards recorded.
Away Scores (Report to Home
Clubs)
Away Scores (Recorded)
Report competition scores by Away Members or Visitors,
listed by Home Club for sending by letter or E-mail.
Away Competition Scores recorded for Home Players.
Supplementary Scores
(Eligibility)
Supplementary Scores
(Recorded)
Number of Scores Returned
List of players who are eligible to submit Supplementary
Scores.
Supplementary Scores recorded.
Non-Competition Handicaps
(List of Players)
Non-Competition Handicaps
(Possible Candidates)
List of players with Non-Competition Handicaps.
Non-Competition Handicaps
(Overrides applied)
Lowest Handicap Held during
Previous Season
Handicap Range
Players not played near
Number of Scores each Player has returned.
List of players who may have completed insufficient
qualifying scores to maintain a Handicap status of
'Competition'.
List of players who have their Handicap status manually
overridden.
Lowest Handicap each player held during the previous
season.
Minimum and Maximum Handicap each player held
during selected period.
Players who have not returned any scores close to their
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Reports
153
Handicap
Handicap or better.
Union Audit of Low Handicap
Players
Summary of Scores
Audit handicap records of low handicap Players
Most Improved Golfer
Handicap Notes
Rating of how each player has improved over the review
period.
Handicapping Notes entered about each Player.
Players without Handicaps
Players not yet allocated a Handicap.
Summary of Handicap Scores returned by each Player.
Accounting Reports
The Accounting reports are only available when the Subscriptions Option has been installed as a
registered option.
Report
Description
Income Received
Summary of Income received.
Member Account Statement
Statement of Account for a Member.
Member Transaction History
List of Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments recorded for
one or more Members.
List Account Balance for a Member.
Account Balances
(Summary)
Members Without a
Subscription Template
Member Subscription Pools
Member Subscription Pools
and Members
Payments (Summary)
List of Members who have not been assigned a
Subscription Template.
List of Member Subscription Pools. (A Pool has a single
billing contact.)
List of Member Subscription Pools, and their Members.
Summary list of all Payments recorded for a time period.
Payments (Summary, by
Method of Payment)
Payments (Full Details)
Income received, totalled by Method of Payment.
Payments (by Member)
List of Payments recorded for a Member.
Payments (Default Method
of Payments)
Subscriptions (Summary)
List of default Method of Payments for Members.
Subscriptions (Summary of
Overdue)
Subscriptions (Valid)
Summary of Overdue Subscriptions including outstanding
amounts due.
List of Valid Subscriptions.
Subscriptions (Overdue)
Invoices (Overdue)
Overdue Subscription details including payment items
and schedule.
List of Subscription template details and members
assigned to template.
List of Overdue Invoices.
Audit Log
Report of all financial transactions.
Subscriptions (Full Details)
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
List of all Payments recorded for a time period.
List of members and their subscription templates.
Chapter
12
Working with Golf Courses
Working with Golf Courses
12
Working with Golf Courses
12.1
Add a New Golf Course
155
To add a new Golf Course
To add the name of a course that is not already displayed in HandicapMaster, do the following:
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players menu, click Golf Courses, then Add a New Club
In the Golf Courses Task list, select Add a New Club
2.
Enter the name of the Golf Course and choose the most applicable Region.
3.
Tick the This is another Course at the Home Club box if the club you are adding is
representing a second course at your own club. This will instruct HandicapMaster to treat
this club as a Home Club course for the purpose of the Handicapping Systems (Not
applicable to Society edition).
4.
Click the OK button to save the details.
See Also
Operating Two or more Courses at the Home Club
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
156
12.2
HandicapMaster®
Enter Golf Course Details
Before competition scores may be entered, it is necessary to enter the 'Card of the Course'. This
identifies the Par and Stroke Index for each hole and the Scratch Score for the course.
Note
Once entered, the details for a specific course are remembered and need only be changed if an
alteration to the course is made.
To enter or change the 'Card of the Course'
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players menu, click Golf Courses, then Course Details and choose the applicable Golf
Course.
In the Golf Course list, select an existing Golf Course and press ENTER key
2.
Enter the Par and Stroke Index details for each of the eighteen holes. When entering a
Stroke Index of 1, type 1 then TAB to move to the next hole.
3.
In the Scratch Score box, enter the Scratch Score for the course. In the European Golf
Association (EGA) Handicapping editions of HandicapMaster, enter the Course Ratings and
Slope Ratings of the course. Only the 18 Hole ratings are obligatory, although the 9 Hole
ratings will be required if 9-hole qualifying competitions are to be processed.
4.
If you wish to use the same details for all of the Tee Colours, click Copy Details to All Tees
button.
5.
Click the OK button to save the details.
Notes
HandicapMaster will check that each hole has a unique Stroke Index value (i.e. all numbers
between 1 and 18 inclusive have been used), This is to prevent mistakes when entering
details.
Additional Tee Colours "Black" and "Green" are available in the Premier and Network
Editions and "Black" and "Orange" in the EGA Handicap editions.
The length of each hole may be recorded along with the course details. To record length of
holes, turn this feature on using the Golf Courses option in the Global Options window. If
length of holes is recorded, these will be included in the 'Scorecards from a competition'
report.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Golf Courses
12.3
157
Enter Club Contact Details and Addresses
You may record details of contacts (such as Handicap Secretary or Convener) for other golf clubs into
HandicapMaster
The Address will then be used in the Report Away Players' Scores to their Home Clubs report for
sending letters to other Golf Clubs.
Any e-mail address recorded will be used when e-mailing away scores to the other clubs.
To enter Contact Details for a Golf Course
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Players menu, click Golf Courses, then Golf Club Contact Details and choose the
applicable Golf Course.
In the Golf Course list, select an existing Golf Course and click the Golf Club Contact Details
task.
2.
Enter the applicable details for this club.
3.
Click the OK button to save the details.
Notes:
HandicapMaster will use the Contact and Address fields when creating the Report Away Players'
Scores to their Home Clubs report.
If an e-mail address is supplied then this golf club may be added to a Golf Courses Distribution
List.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
158
12.4
HandicapMaster®
Operating two or more courses at the Home Club
If your club has two or more courses, then each course will be considered a 'Home' course for
Handicapping purposes. It will be necessary to add the second and subsequent courses to
HandicapMaster and 'link' these as Home Club courses.
To add a second 'Home' club course
1.
If the second course has not already been added to the list of courses in HandicapMaster, do one
of the following:
On the Players menu, click Golf Courses, then Add a New Club
In the Golf Courses Task list, select Add a New Club
If the course has already been added to the list, locate the second course and right-click over the
course name. Select Edit from the pop-up menu.
2.
Enter the name of the Golf Course and choose the most applicable Region.
3.
Tick the This is another Course at the Home Club box to designate this as a second course at
your own club (not applicable to Society edition).
4.
Click the OK button to save the details.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Golf Courses
12.5
Change name of 'Other' Region
To change the name of the 'Other' region of courses
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Golf Courses place
3.
Select ANY golf course in the list and right-click.
4.
On the pop-up menu, select Rename Region 'Other'.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
159
160
12.6
HandicapMaster®
Delete a user added Golf Course
To delete a user added Golf Course
To delete a course that has been previously added
1.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Golf Courses item.
2.
Locate the course, it will have a red flag against it.
3.
Click Once to highlight the club and then either
Right click and select Delete
Press the DELETE key
Notes:
You may not delete System defined courses, those with yellow flags.
If a user added course is referenced by HandicapMaster e.g. there are competition records for this
course then it may not be deleted.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
161
Chapter
13
Working with Competitions
162
HandicapMaster®
13
Working with Competitions
13.1
Introduction
How to enter a Strok e-play competition into HandicapMaster
Competitions form the backbone of both the handicapping system. Handicap systems take
account of every score returned 'under Medal Play conditions'. HandicapMaster, therefore,
provides the tools to process Competition scores.
This chapter discusses the necessary actions required to process stroke play competitions.
Note
Match Play competitions are discussed in a subsequent chapter.
Contents
The type of Stroke Competitions supported by HandicapMaster
Overview of Competitions
Setting up competitions
Inputting golf course details
Opening a new competition
Entering competition scores
Processing competition scores (including updating handicaps)
Viewing competition scores
2's returned by competitors
Competitions played over more than one round
Suspend players from Competitions
Manage Competition Entry Fees
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
13.2
163
Types of Stroke-play competitions supported
The following is a list of the formats of competitions which can be processed by HandicapMaster.
Singles Stroke Play competitions (Medal play, Stableford and Par),
Doubles Stroke Play competitions (Medal play or Stableford as Foursomes, Four Ball Better Ball,
Greensomes or 2-player Am-Am style),
Texas Scrambles (3 or 4 man teams),
Various 3 player team competitions
Various 4 player team competitions
Singles and Doubles Match Play competitions
Handicap Qualifiers and Non-Handicap Qualifiers
Varying methods of presenting results (winners, etc.) such as Divisions, etc.
Multiple round competitions (i.e. 36, 54 or 72 hole competitions)
'Best of' (or 'league') competitions played over a sequence of rounds
Competitions played over 9, 12 and 18 hole courses
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
164
13.3
HandicapMaster®
Run a Stroke-play Competition - Overview
HandicapMaster requires you to process competition scores in six stages:
To run a Stroke-play Competition
1.
Set up a Template. A Template describes the Format of the Competition.
2.
Enter Golf Course Details. The Par and Stroke Index values for the course used in the competition
must be entered if they are not already in the database.
3.
Open a New Competition. Makes the Competition available for Score Entry
4.
Enter Scores
5.
Apply Scores
6.
View Results
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
13.4
165
Competition Templates
13.4.1 Introduction to Competition Templates
'Setting Up' of a competition requires you to identify certain characteristics of the competition prior to
entering scores. This is in much the same way that rule 33-1 of the Rules of Golf requires the
Committee to define the conditions of a competition prior to play.
Once a competition has been 'set up', the format is held on the database for future reference. This is
known as a Template If you choose the competition name at a later date, the same settings will be
used again; providing a level of consistency when running re-occurring competitions such as Medals.
See Also
Add a new Competition Template
Modify a Competition Template
Copy a Competition Template
Delete a Competition Template
The Competition Template Wizard
Running Multiple-round and Alternative Day Competitions
13.4.2 Add a new Competition Template
To create a new Competition Template
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions drop-down menu, click Set up a Template.
On the left hand task pane, select Competitions place. Click Set up a Template in the
competition tasks box..
2.
Select the template Information using the Competition Template Wizard provided.
See Also
Modify a Competition Template
Copy a Competition Template
Delete a Competition Template
13.4.3 Modify a Competition Template
To modify the details of an existing Competition Template
1. On the left hand task pane, select Competitions place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Templates.
3. Do one of the following:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
166
HandicapMaster®
Select a Template and press ENTER Key, or
Double-click the Template entry in the list.
4. Modify the template Information using the Competition Template Wizard provided.
Note
When a competition is opened through the Open a New Competition wizard, the template properties
are applied to that competition. Changing the template does not automatically update the settings of
existing competitions.
If there are any opened competitions based on the template being changed, HandicapMaster asks if
these should be updated. There is then an option to update the configuration for each competition in
turn, based on the amended template.
Alternatively, the template properties applied to an opened (or undone closed competition) can be
modified through the Config button on the Enter Scores Toolbar. This method updates the template
and that competition only.
See Also
Add a new Competition Template
Copy a Competition Template
Delete a Competition Template
13.4.4 Copy a Competition Template
To copy a Competition Template
1. On the left hand task pane, select Competitions place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Templates.
3. Do one of the following:
Select a Template and click Copy Template in the Competition Tasks box, or
Right-click over a selected Template, then select Copy Template.
See Also
Add a new Competition Template
Modify a Competition Template
Delete a Competition Template
13.4.5 Delete a Competition Template
To delete an existing Competition Template
1. On the left hand task pane, select Competitions place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Templates.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
167
3. Do one of the following:
Select a Template and press DELETE Key, or
Right-click over a selected Template, then select Delete.
Notes
If the Competition Template has already been used for existing competitions, then the Template
cannot be deleted. In this situation, the template will be hidden from view instead.
To restore to view all hidden Templates
1.
In the Competition Templates list, right-click over any existing Templates, then select Restore
Hidden Templates and then select one or more templates to be restored.
See Also
Add a new Competition Template
Modify a Competition Template
Copy a Competition Template
13.4.6 The Competition Template Wizard
The Competition Template Wizard steps through the stages of configuring a competition.
Nature of Competition - Type of Competition
Choose the format and nature of the competition.
1.
In the Name box, select an appropriate name for this Template. For example, "Monthly Medal"
would be a suitable name. "Medal 15/4/2004" would not be a good name, as it would prevent the
template being used for future Medal Competitions.
2.
In the Format box, select the format of the competition from the available options:
Singles
Pairs - Foursomes
Pairs - Greensomes
Pairs - Four ball Best-Ball
Pairs - Aggregate Scores
Pairs - Scramble (sometimes call 'Ambrose')
Pairs - A selection of best scores from each hole
3 or 4 Players - Texas Scramble (sometimes call 'Ambrose')
3 Players - Best 1 score each hole to count
3 Players - Best 2 scores each hole to count
3 Players - All 3 scores each hole to count
3 Players - Best 1 score over first six holes, best 2 scores over next six holes, then all 3
scores over last six holes each hole to count
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
168
HandicapMaster®
3 Players Waltz - Best 1 score 1st hole, best 2 scores 2nd hole, all 3 scores 3rd hole,
best 1 score 4th hole, repeating to count
3 Players - A selection of best scores from each hole
4 Players - Best 1 score each hole to count
4 Players - Best 2 scores each hole to count
4 Players - Best 3 scores each hole to count
4 Players - All 4 scores each hole to count
4 Players - Best 2 scores over first six holes, best 3 scores over next six holes, then all 4
scores over last six holes each hole to count
4 Players - All 4 scores over first six holes, best 3 scores over next six holes, then best 2
scores over last six holes each hole to count
4 Players - A selection of best scores from each hole
3.
In the Nature box, select the Nature of play from the available options. These are Medal (Stroke
Play), Stableford and Par (Bogey) (Also called vPar).
4.
In the Each round will be played over box, select the number of holes each round will be played
over. May be 9 through 18 holes.
Holes being Played
If the number of holes selected for the round is 'A Selection of Holes', choose the holes to be played by
ticking the application boxes. A minimum of 9 holes is required.
2, 3 or 4 Player Team Competitions
If the format of the competition is either Pairs - A selection of b est scores from each hole or 3 Players A selection of b est scores from each hole or 4 Players - A selection of b est scores from each hole,
choose the number of 'best' scores that will count for each team on each hole. For example, if the best
3 scores from 4 count on hole 1, select 3 for this hole.
You may be creative with the arrangement of best scores counting, creating 'Waltzes', or more scores
counting on Par 3's than other holes, etc!
Nature of Competition - Who is eligible to play in the Competition
You may restrict who is eligible to play in the competition. This will influence which players are offered
as entrants to competitions.
Tick the Men box if gentlemen are eligible to play.
Tick the Ladies box if ladies are eligible to play.
If the competition is an "open" competition (I.e. Non-members may enter), tick the Visitors box.
In the 'Other restrictions on entry' section,
Tick Only players in selected age groups box if some players in selected age groups are not
eligible to enter. Only players who are in one of the selected Age Groups (as defined in their
Membership Record) will be allowed to be entered into the Competition. Two of the Age Groups
provided may be renamed using Options.
Tick Only members in selected membership categories box if some players in selected
membership categories are not eligible to enter. Select which of the membership categories are
eligible to enter.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
169
Tick Only players with a handicap within a selected range box if there is a restriction on who may
enter based upon the player's handicap (e.g. "Only players with a handicap of 18 or over may enter").
Enter the range of handicaps allowed to enter in the Handicaps from / to boxes.
Note: When checking if a player is eligible to enter the competition, the player's current handicap held
on the system will be checked (which could differ from the handicap held by the player at the date of
the competition when entering scores into a past competition).
Note:
At least one of Men/Ladies boxes must be selected.
Users operating HandicapMaster with CONGU Handicapping in countries with "active/inactive"
handicaps may elect to allow or disallow players from entering competitions if they hold an 'Inactive'
handicap:
To allow players with inactive handicaps to enter, but not win any prizes, select Enter, but not win
prizes. When selected, players with inactive handicaps will be listed separately in the competition
results report. This option is only available for singles competitions.
To stop players with inactive handicaps from entering, select Not enter'.
Handicap Allowances
You may choose to restrict the number of Handicap Strokes competitors in this competition will receive
('Strokes Received').
Handicap strokes received my be limited by either
a reduced proportion of their handicap (such as ¾ handicap), and/or
a maximum number of strokes.
1.
Click the Change button to restrict the handicap allowance.
2.
In the Handicap Allowance box, select a restricted Handicap Allowance
In qualifying competitions the full Playing Handicap is used (where applicable) for handicapping
purposes but the Strokes Received is applied for competition ranking purposes only when the
competition is closed.
3.
Tick the Set a Limit to the Number of Strokes that may be Received box if the competition is to
be played off a restricted maximum handicap.
Choose whether this limit is applied before or after any restricted Handicap Allowance.
Example:
if a competition is 3/4 handicap, with 18 strokes maximum, then this can mean for a player
with a 28 handicap either
BEFORE setting:
28 is higher than 18 so limit is 18. Then (3/4 * 18) = 13.5, so player receives 14 strokes.
(Limit of 18 is applied "before" calculating 3/4 handicap)
AFTER setting:
(3/4 * 28) = 21, but maximum 18 so player receives 18 strokes
(Limit of 18 is applied "after" calculating 3/4 handicap)
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
170
HandicapMaster®
Note: When the handicap allowance is "full allowance", the Before or After setting makes no
difference.
Enter the handicap limits in the Men and Ladies boxes (or Team box).
Example:
if a competition is 3/4 handicap, with 18 strokes maximum, then this can mean for a 28
handicapper that he is restricted to 18 strokes (instead of receiving 21 strokes):
(3/4 * 28) = 21, but maximum 18 so player receives 18 strokes
(Limit of 18 is applied "after" calculating 3/4 handicap)
When the handicap allowance is "full allowance", this setting makes no difference.
4.
Tick the Calculate Handicaps (Strokes Received) to one decimal place box if you would like
handicaps to be calculated to one decimal place. This may be applicable for Foursomes Medal
competitions, and is not displayed for some competition formats.
Mixed Competition
Note
This page is only displayed if the competition has been set up with both Ladies and Gentlemen eligible
to play, and is not applicable to the EGA Handicap system.
Where the competition is open to Ladies and Gentlemen, it may be applicable to make an adjustment
to handicaps to take into account differences in the Scratch Score of the Men's and Ladies courses.
1.
Tick the Adjust Competition Handicaps box to change handicap allowances to take account of
differences in the Scratch Score of the Men's and Ladies courses.
Handicap Adjustments
Handicap Qualifying Competitions are competitions where handicaps of the competitors will be
revised automatically after the close of the competition. The handicapping authorities restrict the
formats of competitions that are allowed to be qualifying. These are typically limited to competitions that
meet all of the following criteria:
Stroke play, Stableford or Par competitions played by individuals ('singles')
18 hole competitions
9 Hole competitions (in some cases).
HandicapMaster will identify whether a competition format selected may be chosen as a Qualifying
Competition.
1.
Tick the Handicap Qualifier box if the competition is Handicap Qualifying.
Ladies Medal qualifiers
Tick the Ladies Medal Competition box if the competition counts towards the England Golf, SLGA,
GUW or ILGU Medal competitions (only displayed for Club, Premier and Network Editions where the
competition is a Stroke-play competition).
Set Competition Entry Fees
Tick the Set Competition Entry Fee(s) box to configure entry fee(s) for the competition.
Enter an Entry Fee in the Fee box. If your accounting system uses Accounting or Product codes, enter
the code in the Accounting Code box.
Tick the 2, 3, 4 or 5 box to add additional fees for this competition. Enter a suitable description for this
item along with a Fee and Accounting Code (if applicable). Select Mandatory or Optional. Where a fee
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
171
is optional, HandicapMaster will mark the fee as payable only where a Player (or team) chooses to
select the fee when they sign in to a competition.
Presentation of Results
This page describes how the competition results will be generated and presented. In particular, this
describes how the winners will be identified (highlighted).
Overall Winners are identified as the best scores from all of the cards processed. The players at the
top of the results will be identified with 'Overall Winner', 'Overall Runner-Up', 'Overall Third', etc.
Divisional winners are identified from three subsets of the competitors. Ranges of handicaps
determine these subsets. The division into which a specific competitor falls depends upon the
handicap of that competitor. The divisions are called DIVISION 1, DIVISION 2, DIVISION 3 and DIVISION
4, with Division 1 accepting the lowest handicapped competitors.
Divisional winners are calculated after the Overall Winners have been determined (Overall Winners are
excluded from the divisions).
Divisions are not available for pairs competitions.
1.
In the Number of Overall Winners box, enter the number of winners to be highlighted. This may
be from 0 to 999 inclusive.
2.
In the Number of Winners in each Division box, enter the number of Divisional winners to be
highlighted in each division. This may be from 0 to 999 inclusive.
3.
If 1 or more Divisional Winners are to be highlighted, Identify the maximum handicap for each of
the first three divisions in the Division 1, Division 2, and Division 3 boxes. Competitors whose
handicaps are greater than the ' Division 3' box will automatically fall into Division 4.
4.
Tick the Match Score Cards ("Countback") like Rules of Golf Appendix I box to cause
HandicapMaster to automatically resolve ties using a Card Count back.
With this option selected, scorecards are compared for the last 9 holes, then 6 holes, 3 holes and
the last hole in an attempt to split the tie.
If the option is not selected, or if count-back has not produced a result, HandicapMaster prompts
for the tie to be decided manually (by whatever means the competition organisers have previously
declared). In this case, ties are only decided for the overall prize-winning positions.
5.
Tick the Show top ... position only box to limit the displaying of results to the top X positions.
Enter a suitable value for the number of positions to display results to.
NOTE: the same value applies to overall winners and to divisions if presentation by divisions is
also selected.
6.
Tick the List Two’s on Results Report box to cause HandicapMaster to display a list of the
players who scored Two’s (or better!) on the results report.
Note: This is not available for Four Ball Better Ball Competitions.
TIP:
HandicapMaster splits the field into four divisions. It is possible, however, to simulate only two or three
divisions by setting the Maximum Handicap In Division 2 and/or 3 value higher than the highest
handicap allowed in the competition. This will cause no competitors to fall into the higher divisions and
these Divisions will therefore not be displayed.
Notes:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
172
HandicapMaster®
When presentation of results are limited to the top X positions the limit value applies to overall
winners and to divisions if presentation by divisions is also selected.
The limit will be automatically applied on the MasterScoreboard.co.uk service if this is being used by
your organisation.
It is possible to temporarily override the limit when viewing results in HandicapMaster. This override
does NOT apply to the MasterScoreboard.co.uk service
See Also
Add a new Competition Template
Modify a Competition Template
Copy a Competition Template
Delete a Competition Template
Running Multiple-round and Alternative Day Competitions
13.4.7 Mixed Competitions
How HandicapMaster processes handicaps for Mixed Competitions
In mixed events, there can be a discrepancy between Men's and Ladies' handicaps if there is a
difference in the Standard Scratch Score and/or Par between the courses being played by each
gender.
Note: This does not apply to the EGA Handicap editions of HandicapMaster.
HandicapMaster will adjust the handicaps of either the men or the ladies, if Adjust Competition
Handicaps option is selected in the competition template.
These adjustments are applied to the competition results only, not to any handicapping adjustments.
HandicapMaster will adjust Handicaps using the recommendations of CONGU (Appendix O of the
CONGU Unified Handicapping System). For full details, and examples, please refer to Appendix O of
the CONGU Unified Handicapping System manual.
Where a player's competition handicap is adjusted, this will be displayed in brackets alongside the
player's Playing Handicap on the scorecard screen.
In summary, these adjustments are:
Singles Competitions
Stroke-play (Medal) Competitions
In mixed events where there is a difference between the Standard Scratch Score of the Men's
and Ladies' courses, players playing off the tees with the higher Standard Scratch Score will
have their Competition Handicap increased by the difference between the Standard Scratch
Scores.
Example. Let us assume that one player plays off the red tees, SSS 70 and the other the white
tees SSS 68. If both players score a nett 68 then one of them will have played to their handicap
and the other 2 below. 2 shots would be added to the Competition Handicap of the player
playing off the red tees to compensate for the increased difficulty of the course.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
173
Stableford or Par/Bogey Competitions
In mixed events where there is a difference between the "Par less Standard Scratch Score" value
of the Men's and Ladies' courses, players playing off the tees with the lower "Par less Standard
Scratch Score" value will have their Competition Handicap increased by the difference between
the respective "Par less Standard Scratch Score" values.
Foursomes, Greensome and other Team Competitions
Handicap adjustments in Foursomes, Greensome and other team competitions will be made before
the competition scorecards are entered, and are applied to the calculation of the team allowance.
Stroke-play (Medal), Stableford or Par/Bogey Competitions
In mixed events where there is a difference between the Standard Scratch Score of the Men's
and Ladies' courses, players playing off the tees with the higher Standard Scratch Score will
have their Competition Handicap increased by the difference between the Standard Scratch
Scores.
Selecting the Pars and Stroke Indexes to use for scoring
In both Stableford and Par / Bogey competitions all players must have the same scoring potential on
each hole, (as it is not pre-determined which player’s score may count on any one hole). This is
achieved by equalising handicaps as above and then requiring all players to play against a common
Par and Stroke Index, i.e., that applying to one of the two courses being used (either the men’s or
ladies’ tees).
For club events CONGU strongly recommended that the ladies’ values be used, otherwise ladies may
be required to score against a higher Par than recommended.
Where the competition is a mixed team competition, HandicapMaster offers the option to choose
whether the Pars and Strokes indexes from the Men's or the Ladies scorecard is to be used, when
opening the competition.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
174
13.5
HandicapMaster®
Opening Competitions
13.5.1 Open a New Competition
Before entering Competition Scores, it is necessary to Open the competition. Competitions may be
opened in advance of their date, or opened as and when the competition official is ready to enter the
scores.
To Open a New Competition
1.
On the Competitions drop-down menu, click Open a New Competition
2.
Configure the competition using the Open a New Stroke-play Competition Wizard.
Notes
The Competition Template must already be set up.
13.5.2 Delete an Opened Competition
To completely remove a competition from the Opened Competitions list
1. On the left hand task pane, select Competitions place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Opened Competitions.
3. Do one of the following:
Select the Competition and press DELETE Key, or
Right-click over the competition, then select Cancel Competition.
Notes:
All scores entered for the competition will be deleted.
13.5.3 Change an Opened Competition
To change a competition previously opened
1. On the left hand task pane, select Competitions place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Opened Competitions.
3. Double-click the competition to be changed.
4. Click the Config button on the Enter Scores Toolbar.
5. Change the Opened Competition using the Configure Opened Competition window.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
175
13.5.4 The Open a New Competition Wizard
The Open a New Stroke Play Competition Wizard steps through the stages of starting a competition.
Competition Template
1.
In the Use Template box, choose the applicable Template for this Competition.
Note: The Competition Template must already have been created using the Competition Template
Wizard.
Name of Competition
2.
In the Name box, choose a name for this Competition (if the Template name is not applicable).
Date and Venue
3.
In the Played (or to be played) on box, choose the date when the competition is played. If the
competition is a second round or second competition on the same day, select PM.
4.
Click the Select Alternative Venue button to choose where the competition was played. This
would normally be at the venue of the Home Club and as such is the default.
5.
Using the Competitors play from these Tee Markers boxes, Select the tees used for this
competition.
Note: If a gender's tees are not displayed this indicates that the template chosen has excluded
that gender.
6.
If the Competition is a Mixed Team Competition, in the Use Pars and Stroke Indexes on box,
choose whether to use the Pars and Stroke Indexes on the Men's or the Ladies' Scorecard.
7.
Click Next >
Multiple-round Competitions (E.g. 27, 36, 54 or 72 Holes)
If the competition is a 27, 36, 54 or 72 competition, it may be necessary for players to use their
handicaps as they were on the first day of the competition (rather than have their handicaps change
from round to round). This would be determined by the organising committee.
If this is the second, third or subsequent round of the competition and Handicaps are to be held
throughout the competition, then
8.
Select Second, Third or Subsequent Round of Competition.
9.
Tick the Use First Round Handicaps box, and select the date of the first round of the competition
in the First Round Date boxes.
For more information about running competitions over more than one round, see Run a Multiple Round
Competition.
10. Click Next >
Second and subsequent rounds of Multiple-round Competitions
If you have selected that this competition is a Second, Third or Sub sequent Round of Competition (on
the previous page of the wizard) and the competition is a singles competition, you may choose to link
this competition to other competition rounds.
By choosing to "aggregate" this round at this stage, the Player Entry leader board will be able to display
the combined scores for the competition, as scores are entered.
11. Choose whether to aggregate the round as an Alternative Day competition or a Multiple-round
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
176
HandicapMaster®
competition (see Competitions played over more than one round for further details), then select the
previous round from the pop-up list of competitions.
12. You may choose to give an overall name to the competition (to encompass all rounds) by clicking
Set an overall name for this competition link.
Options
13. Tick the Players to record their Score Card Issue Number box, if score cards have been
allocated to players each with a unique number. By recording the Issue Number of each card as the
score is input, it is possible to locate missing cards (I.e. cards that have not been returned) more
quickly. Use the 'Analyse Score Cards Entered' list to sort scores returned, by their issue number, to
locate missing cards after scores have been entered. Note: This option is ignored if Printing of Score
Cards as players sign in is activated (see Configure Player Entry).
14. Tick the Players to Sign In before play box if you wish players to acknowledge their entry in the
competition prior to play. Players will be asked to sign in, with the time that they do recorded, so that
missing cards may be more easily identified and time on the course analysed. Use the 'Analyse Score
Cards Entered' list to locate players who have signed in, but failed to input their scores.
When Applying Scores, any player who has signed in but has not entered their score will
automatically be allocated a 'No Return' score.
15. Tick the Restrict Score Entry/Sign In to Players/Teams Listed on a Start Sheet box to limit which
players will be able to Sign In or enter a Score for the competition to those listed on a Start Sheet. In the
event that a Player is not on the Start Sheet, the Start Sheet will need to be amended to allow the player
to enter their score.
For team competitions, limiting players to those already added to a Start Sheet will enable
HandicapMaster to automatically recognise the partners within a team. Only one player in the team will
need to identify themselves at Sign In or Score Entry time.
16. Tick the Restrict Score Entry/Sign In to these Times only box to limit the time period on the
competition day that players may sign in or enter their scores. This may be helpful where two rounds of
a competition are due to be played on the same day.
17. Tick the Show On Leaderboard box to allow this competition to show on the Player Entry
Leaderboard, if it is configured to be used. Where the competition is being played as singles strokeplay (Medal) format, you may choose whether to show the Nett scores, Gross scores, or both on the
Leaderboard.
18. Tick the Use Bookings box to arrange for entries to be taken for this competition, using
HandicapMaster.
19. If you wish to save the current selections for when you next run the Open a New Competition
wizard, click Save as Defaults button.
20. Click Next >
Competition Entry Fees
If competition entry fees have been configured in the competition template, these will automatically be
applied to the competition.
21. Un-tick the Charge Competition Entry Fee(s) box if you wish to cancel applying fees to this
competition. For example, if this is the second round of a competition, you may wish to only charge
fees for entry into the first round.
The fees being applied to the competition will be displayed by the wizard.
22. Click Next >
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
177
23. Click Finish to complete the Open a New Stroke Play Competition Wizard
Booking arrangements
24. If Use Bookings box was ticked, a Bookings template may be selected to configure
HandicapMaster to collect entries into this competition.
To modify any existing template or set up a new template, click Edit Templates button.
Note:
The Players to Sign In before play, Restrict Score Entry/Sign In to Players/Teams Listed on a Start
Sheet, Restrict Score Entry/Sign In to these Times only, Competition Fees and Bookings options
are only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions of
HandicapMaster.
The Show on Leaderboard option is only available when the Player Entry option is installed.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
178
13.6
HandicapMaster®
Booking Future Competitions (Optional step)
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
The Bookings facility allows players to book into future opened competitions (automating the
Competition Entry sheet on the Clubhouse wall).
The booking list can, if required, be incorporated into a start list once bookings for a competition has
closed.
You may allow bookings to be accepted through the Player Entry system in the Clubhouse and/or
through the Master Scoreboard web site (online).
For full details, see Bookings chapter.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
13.7
179
Starting Sheets (Optional step)
13.7.1 Create a Starting Sheet
For some competitions, the Committee may have set a closing date with a view to issuing a Starting
Sheet (with drawn start times and pairings). A Starting Sheet can be produced by entering tee time
details and then entering names using the Starting Sheet wizard.
Alternatively, if Competition Booking has been run for a forthcoming Competition, details of bookings
received may be imported into a Starting Sheet.
Entry of Competition Scores may, optionally, be restricted to only those Players who have been
previously added to a Starting Sheet (Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions only).
It is necessary to Open a Competition before a Starting Sheet can be created.
To Create a Starting Sheet
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions Menu, choose Start Sheets... and select the Opened Competition, or
In the Opened Competitions list, select the competition and click with the right-hand
button. Click Start Sheet.
Create the Starting Sheet using the Start Sheet Wizard.
13.7.2 The Start Sheet Wizard
The Start Sheet Wizard steps through the stages of creating a Starting Sheet.
If you have bookings enabled for the competition then the first time you run the Start Sheet Wizard you
will be offered to option to import the bookings into the start sheet.
Type of Start Sheet
1.
Choose the type of Start Sheet required for this competition. Select either:
One or Two Tee Starting Sheet
This is a 'traditional' Start Sheet where games start from the same Tee at different times. Can
also be a 'Two Tee' start, where some games start at a second tee (the 10th Tee, for
example).
Multiple Tee (Shotgun) Starting Sheet
This is a Start Sheet where all games start at the same time, but from separate Tees. This is
often called a Shotgun start, as play is traditionally started from all Tees across the course
with the sounding of a Shotgun or Klaxon.
2.
In the Players Per Group box, select the number of players in each Game. Can be 2, 3 or 4., For
Pairs competitions, this will show as 2 'Teams per Group'..
3.
Tick the Allow Players Without Handicaps box if you wish to include players without Handicaps
(or players with Lapsed Handicaps, for example) on the Start Sheet. Such players will be ignored when
Entering or Applying Competition Scores.
4.. Tick the Include on MasterScoreboard.co.uk box if you wish this Start Sheet to be included when
running the publish to Master Scoreboard wizard, so the starting times will be displayed on the Master
Scoreboard web site.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
180
HandicapMaster®
5.
Click Next >
Format and Layout of Start Sheet
6.
Choose the settings that describe the Start Sheet.
For a One or Two Tee Starting Sheet,
a. In the Games Start from box, select the Tee used for this Competition.
b. In the First Game starts at box, enter the Time when the first Game will start play.
c. In the Interval between Games box, enter the number of minutes to allow between each
Game starting.
d. In the Number of Games box, enter the number games (I.e. Tee Times) to display in the
grid. Games may subsequently be added or removed using the Amend Games button on
the Start Sheet Grid page.
e. Tick the Create Two Tee Start Sheet box if a second Tee is to be used. For example, where
play will be from the 1st and 10th Tees.
If a second Tee is to be used, then
f. In the Change To Tee box, select which alternative/other tee is to be used. (A common
practice is to play off the 1st and 10th tees, in which case the alternative tee will be the
10th)
g. Once you know how many games are to be played off the 1st tee:
In the From Game box choose the Game Number at which the games switch to the
alternative tee. This can be amended at any time by the use of the back button
further on in the set-up.
In the Times Restart At box, enter the Time which the first game starting at the
second designated Tee will start.
h. If you wish to save the current selections for future Start Sheets, click Save as Defaults
button. A separate selection of defaults may be saved for Singles, Pairs and Texas
Scramble competitions.
For a Multiple Tee (Shotgun) Starting Sheet - to order games in game order
If you wish to have games 1 to 18 followed by extra games at the end of the list of games we
recommend:
a. In the All Games Start At box, enter the time when play will start (when the Shotgun or
Klaxon will be sounded to start play).
b. In the Use Tees boxes, select the range of Tees to be used (for example, on a 9 hole
course, select 1st to 9th).
c. In the Number of Games box, enter the number games (I.e. Tee Times) to display in the
grid. Games may subsequently be added or removed using the Amend Games button on
the Start Sheet Grid page.
d. If you wish to save the current selections for future Start Sheets, click Save as Defaults
button.
For a Multiple Tee (Shotgun) Starting Sheet - to order games in tee order with multiple games per
tee
if you wish to display the games in tee order we recommend the following approach:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
181
a. In the All Games Start At box, enter the time when play will start (when the Shotgun or
Klaxon will be sounded to start play).
b. In the Use Tees boxes, select a range of 18 Tees to be used (or on a 9 hole course, select
1st to 9th).
c. In the Number of Games box, enter the number of tees e.g. 18 or 9 games (I.e. Tee Times)
to display in the grid. So the games are on tee order.
d. Now insert games using the Amend Games button on the Start Sheet Grid page and
select Insert new game before: e.g. if you wished to have a second game on tees 1 to 9
you would repeat this for tees 1 to 9.
e. If you wish to save the current selections for future Start Sheets, click Save as Defaults
button.
7.
Click Next >
Start Sheet Grid
8.
Add the Competitors in this competition to the grid. There are various ways to select Players from
the HandicapMaster database.
Use the Amend Games button to insert or delete Games from the grid. Note that when a
player is inserted into the last available slot on the last game, HandicapMaster will
automatically add a row to the grid. It is not necessary to add all of the games before adding
Players.
Use the Auto Fill > button to automatically populate the Start Sheet using players from a
previous competition. This may be applicable when creating a Start Sheet for the second
round of a 36 hole competition, for example.
Use the Reorder > button to shuffle the players in the grid. Players may be shuffled
randomly, or into Playing Handicap order.
Use the Unavailable button to mark a selected Cell, Game or Block of Games as
unavailable to the competition. These cells will not be included on the Start Sheet reports.
Use the Save button at any time to save the Start Sheet as it currently is shown, to the
database. This can help protect from unexpected computer, power or software failure.
9.
Click Next >
Complete the Start Sheet Wizard
10. Tick the View Start Sheets Report box to view the Start Sheet report after the Wizard has closed.
11. Tick the View Scorecard Labels Report box to view a report to print labels for players on the Start
Sheet after the Wizard has closed.
Note:
The View Scorecard Labels Report option is only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and
EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster.
13.7.2.1 Add Players to the Start Sheet Grid
To add a Player to the Start Sheet Grid
1.
Select a cell by doing one of the following:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
182
HandicapMaster®
Double-click the required cell, or
Move to the cell using the arrow keys on the keyboard and press ENTER key.
2.
Select a player by typing the first letters of the required player's last name.
To include a Visitor who is not already known to the HandicapMaster system
1. Select the applicable cell and press ENTER key.
2. Click the New Visitor button to add a Visitor to the HandicapMaster database (displayed if the
competition is an Open competition). This Visitor will be added to the selection window and can
then be chosen for the grid.
Notes
It is possible to swap Players around in the grid using Window's 'Drag and Drop' facility. See Reorder
Players in Start Sheet Grid for further details.
If a cell is marked as Unavailable you may change this as follows:
Double-click the required cell, and select the player
Move to the cell using the arrow keys on the keyboard and press DELETE key to make the cell
available, or right-click over the cell and select Clear in the pop-up menu.
If the Subscriptions Option has been installed as a registered option then there is an option in the
Accounting Options to check if players being added to the start sheet have an overdue subscription.
In this case HandicapMaster will prompt if the player should be added to the start sheet.
13.7.2.2 Auto-Fill Start Sheet
When creating a Start Sheet for a second or subsequent round of a competition, typically it will be
necessary to populate the Start Sheet using Players from the previous round of the competition.
HandicapMaster provides options to import Players from a previously applied competition round,
or from another Start Sheet.
To fill the Start Sheet grid with players from a previous competition
1. Click the Auto-Fill > button.
2. Select Previous Competition.
3. In the Leaders Go Out box, select First or Last.
4. In the Based On box, select Nett Scores or Gross Scores.
Note that the Gross Scores option is only applicable for Stroke-play (Medal) competition scores.
5. Tick Limit to Top and enter a number in the Players box if you need to limit the number of Players
imported from the previous competition. This may be applicable where a cut is applied to the
competition and only the leading players qualify to play the final round(s).
6. Tick the Use Aggregated Scores for Multi-round Competitions box if the players should be ordered
by their position after two or more rounds of the same competition (i.e. their overall position in the
previous competition).
7. Tick the Retain Players in Divisions where used box if the previous competition was played in
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
183
Divisions and players should be banded in their divisions within the Start Sheet.
8. Click Next Button and select the applicable Competition.
To fill the Start Sheet grid with players from another Start Sheet
1. Click the Auto-Fill > button.
2. Select Another Start Sheet.
3. Tick the Keep Players in same Games box if you would like the players to be imported into the same
(relative) position in the grid, keeping players in the same games (i.e. same pairings).
4. Click Next Button and select the applicable Competition.
13.7.2.3 Reorder Players in Start Sheet Grid
To swap two players around in the Grid
1.
Select the first cell, so that it become highlighted.
2.
Whilst holding the SHIFT key down, click a second cell. The players in the two cells will be
swapped over.
To randomly shuffle the players in the Grid
1.
Click the Reorder > button
2.
Select Randomise Players and Groups option
3.
Select one of
Randomise All Games, or
Randomise Games From and To
4.
For Pairs competitions, tick the Keep Partners Together box to limit the re-ordering of players to
swapping teams around. Remove the tick from Keep Partners Together box to create random partners
for the competition.
5.
Click Next > button
Note
When players are randomised in the grid, HandicapMaster will ensure, where possible, no player is
left on their own for a specified tee time. Where possible, at least two players will be allocated to
each game that has players.
When players positions in the Start Sheet have been randomised, HandicapMaster will then re-order
the games so that those games containing the fewest players are moved to the start of the sheet
(not applicable for 'Shotgun' Starting Sheets). This will ensure smaller groups are those first out. Any
game where one or more cells are marked as 'Unavailable' will not be moved.
To reorder the players into their Handicap order
1.
Click the Reorder > button
2.
Select Reorder Players by Handicaps option
3.
Select one of
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
184
HandicapMaster®
Lowest Handicaps First, or
Lowest Handicaps Last, or
Low-High-Low-High Handicap Sequence
4.
Click Next > button
Note
When the 'Low-High-Low-High Handicap Sequence' option is used, HandicapMaster reorders the
Start Sheet as follows:
Cell 1: Lowest Handicap Player
Cell 2: Highest Handicap Player
Cell 3: Second Lowest Handicap Player
Cell 4: Second Highest Handicap Player
Cell 5: Third Lowest Handicap Player
...and so on.
To reorder the players into 'balanced' groups
See how a balanced draw is created for further information about this option.
1.
Click the Reorder > button
2.
Select Reorder Players into 'Balanced' Groups option
3.
Click Next > button
Note
If some individual cells have been marked as 'Unavailable', this may affect the accuracy of the results
of the reordering.
To move Players up in the grid to fill any spaces
1.
Click the Reorder > button
2.
Select Move Players up in Grid to Fill Spaces option
3.
Click Next > button
Note
Cells in the grid that have been filled using the "Unavailable" descriptor are not moved.
13.7.2.4 How a Balanced Draw is calculated
The Start Sheets re-order option Reorder Players into 'Balanced' Groups is designed to reorder the
players so that each group has players with a low, a medium and a high handicap, etc. That is, each
group has broadly the same mix of player abilities.
How HandicapMaster creates a balanced draw
The calculation is based on the handicaps of those players already added to the Start Sheet grid.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
185
1. The first column in the grid is filled with players with the lowest handicaps.
2. The last column is filled with players with the highest handicaps.
3. Any middle columns are filled with players with handicaps in the best range(s) possible.
4. Players in each column are then randomly shuffled (column by column), to create a more random
spread across the games.
Pairs Competitions
Where the Start Sheet is for a pairs competition (such as Foursomes, FBBB, etc), HandicapMaster will
balance the players in each team pairing (rather than across all four players in each Tee Time).
Effectively, one player from the 50% of players with lower handicaps will be paired with one player from
the 50% with higher handicaps.
Notes
Once players have been re-ordered so there is one player from each range of handicaps in each
group, no attempt is made to balance up the total handicaps group by group.
If some individual cells have been marked as 'Unavailable', this can affect the accuracy of the results
of the reordering. It is not recommended that a balanced draw is attempted if the grid contains
isolated "unavailable" cells.
13.7.3 View a Starting Sheet Report
To View a Starting Sheet Report
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions Menu, choose Start Sheets... and run the Start Sheet Wizard. When
completing the Start Sheet Wizard, tick the View Start Sheet Report box, or
In the Opened Competitions list, select the competition and click with the right-hand
button. Click View Start Sheet Report.
2.
Choose the layout and presentation of the Start Sheets report.
In the Style of Report box, choose one of
Game Order. This is a traditional start sheet with players listed in their games, with one player
per line.
Game Order (Spreadsheet layout). This layout shows all of the players for games on a single
line, in the same layout format as the grid used in the Start Sheet Wizard.
Player Order. This layout lists all of the players of the competition in alphabetical order,
alongside their Game number and Tee time.
Tick the Show Handicaps box to include the Player's handicap (as at the date when the report is
generated) in the Start Sheet.
Tick the Show Home Clubs box to include the names of the players Home Clubs alongside each
player in the report.
Tick the Save Start Sheet details to CSV File box if you wish the contents of the Start Sheet to be
saved to a comma-separated file whilst the report is being run. The resultant file can then be
opened with a program such as Microsoft® Excel. (Option available in Premier, Network, EGAPremier and EGA-Network Editions only)
In the Add Notes to Bottom of Report box enter any comments for inclusion on the Start Sheet
report. By default this will contain details of the competition format, handicap allowance and the
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
186
HandicapMaster®
tees being used.
3.
Click OK.
13.7.4 Print Labels for Scorecards
It is possible to use a previously created Start Sheet as the basis for printing labels to stick to the
competition Scorecards. There are a number of standard layouts and also a custom layout option.
Standard layout option labels can include the Player's Handicap, as well as details about the starting
Tee and Time for each player.
Custom Labels can include these and a number of other items such as national ID and strokes
received.
Note.
The facility to print Scorecard Labels is included in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGANetwork Editions of HandicapMaster.
To Print Scorecard Labels
1. Do one of the following:
On the Competitions Menu, choose Start Sheets... and run the Start Sheet Wizard. When
completing the Start Sheet Wizard, tick the View Scorecard Labels Report box, or
In the Opened Competitions list, select the competition and click with the right-hand button.
Click Labels for Scorecards.
2. Choose the type of Label you will be using in the Label Type box.
3. Select either Standard Layout or Custom Layout
Standard Layout
1. Choose the content of the Labels:
Tick the Players Handicaps box to include the Handicaps of the Players (as at the date when the
Labels are printed) on the Labels
Tick the Start Time box to include player's Start Times on the Labels (Please Notes below for
limitations).
Tick the Tee box to include which Tee player's shall start from on the Labels (Please Notes below
for limitations).
Tick the Match Number box to include the number of the player's game on the Labels (Please
Notes below for limitations).
Tick the Home Club box to include the home club of the player. (Please Notes below for
limitations).
2. In the Start at Label boxes, select a Row and Column where the labels are to be printed from. This
can be useful if a partially used page of labels is to be re-used, as it allows position of used labels to
be skipped. Not applicable where labels on rolls are being used.
3. Click OK and the start sheet labels report will be displayed on the screen.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
4. Click the Print Report button
187
to print the labels.
Custom Layout
1. Click Design Label to review and use the Custom label Designer to arrange the layout of items on
the custom label.
2. Click OK
3. If one or more of the items on the label design are positioned outside the edge of the selected Label
Type then a message indicating that "Some item(s) were positioned beyond the edge of the label!"
is displayed. These items will be automatically excluded from the label when it is printed. Click OK to
acknowledge this message.
4. Select the printer to which the custom labels should be printed. The labels are sent direct to the
printer and not displayed on screen.
5. Click OK
Notes for Standard Layout
The Start Time, Tee and Match Number content options may not be available for some team
competition and label size combinations due to limitations of space on the label.
The Home Club content option is only available when:
The competition is open to Visitors
The label size selected has sufficient space to include this information.
The competition is a singles competition, it is not available for team competitions
Notes for Custom Layout
1. The font that is used for the Custom labels may be adjusted as follows:
On the REPORTS menu select LAYOUT AND OPTIONS
In the Choose a Category box scroll down and select Start Sheet: labels
Then select the required font.
13.7.5 Design Custom Start Sheet Labels
It is possible to use a previously created Start Sheet as the basis for printing labels to stick to the
competition Scorecards. There are some standard layouts and also a custom layout option.
Custom Labels include a range of items for each Player (Up to 4 players maximumn) and some
common items such as Competition name, Competition date etc.
Where a label contains details for Player A to D these player details will only be printed if the
competition is a multi-player competition.
For a singles competition you would just have Player A details printed, whereas for a greensome you
would see player A and B, and for a 4 player Texas Scramble you would see player A to D details on the
label, if you have selected these.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
188
HandicapMaster®
Designing a Custom Label
1.
Select each item to be printed on the label. Tick Include to include this item when printing. Enter
the distance from top left corner of the label (in Millimetres) to position the item, or drag and drop it
on the example layout.
2.
Tick the Include Titling when Printing box if you would like titling to be added to the items included
on the label to be printed. For Example with this option ticked, handicaps will be printed as "H'cap:
24" instead of "24", Strokes received will be printed "Strokes: 24" instead of "24" etc. This can
improve the appearance when printing to Labels.
3.
Some printers are unable to print to the edge of the paper. In this case you will need to enter the
"hard" margin values for your printer. Each printer may have different values! Determining the actual
value may require you performing a test print.
In the Printer Top Margin enter the number of millimetres from the top of the paper that
the printable area on the paper starts e.g. 3.8.
You may type in the value or use the up and
down arrows.
In the Printer Left Margin enter the number of millimetres from the top of the paper that
the printable area on the paper starts e.g. 1.2.
You may type in the value or use the up and
down arrows.
4.
Click the Perform a test print using this layout link to print some test data to the selected printer.
5. Click OK to save any changes to the design, or cancel to abandon any changes.
6. Click OK to start to print the labels
7. If one or more of the items on the label design are positioned outside the edge of the selected Label
Type then a message indicating that "Some item(s) were positioned beyond the edge of the label!"
is displayed. These items will be automatically excluded from the label when it is printed. Click OK to
acknowledge this message.
8. Select the printer to which the custom labels should be printed.
9. Click OK
NOTES
If your print will not print from the edge of the paper then if you select a label format that does not
have margin you may find that some text is not printed. there are two options:
1. Select a different label format that has a margin
2. Move the items on the label down and to the right from the edge in the label designer. This will
mean all labels printed will be positioned away from the top and left edge of each label.
To determine the printer "hard" margins you may need to print a sheet of labels and measure the
position of the text if you are unable to find the details in the printer documentation.
The font used for the start sheet labels is configured in the Reporting Layout And Options and by
selecting the Start Sheets: Labels category.
If the competition is a team competition e.g. a greensome, four ball better ball etc, then the "Player A
Strokes", Player B strokes" etc will contain the combined handicap for the format of the competition.
For small label sizes the use of the titling option may limit the number of items that can be included
on the label.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
189
13.7.6 Cancel a Starting Sheet
To Cancel a Starting Sheet
If you wish to remove all the entrants and cancel a starting sheet from a future competition
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions Menu, choose Start Sheets... and select the Opened Competition, or
In the Opened Competitions list, select the competition and click with the right-hand
button. Click Start Sheet.
2.
Click Next >
3.
Select Clear Start Sheet and Start Again and click Next >
4.
Click Cancel
5.
At the prompt Cancel without saving changes? Select YES. The start sheet will be cancelled.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
190
13.8
HandicapMaster®
Enter Scores
13.8.1 Introduction
How to enter player's scores returned in a Strok e-play competition into HandicapMaster
HandicapMaster offers two alternatives for entering player's scores. These are
the built-in Enter Scores windows available by clicking the ENTER SCORES button on the Toolbar, or
the separate 'Player Entry' system
The built-in windows have been optimised for Competition Administrators to enter scores, providing
options such as editing a scorecard already entered. The Player Entry system is designed for Player's
to enter their own scores, typically at a publicly available PC.
This chapter discusses entering scores using the built-in Administrator windows.
See Entering Scores using the Player Entry System for information about running and operating the
Player Entry system.
Notes:
The Player Entry system is available as an option when registering HandicapMaster.
Contents
Enter a Score
Edit a Score
Delete a Score previously entered
Review scores entered
Amend an Opened Competition
13.8.2 Enter Competition Scores
To enter competitors scores from a competition
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions menu, click Enter Scores, or
Click the Enter Scores Button on the Main Toolbar.
2.
Choose an Opened Competition
3.
Enter scores and administer the Competition using the Players and Analyse Scores Entered
lists
Notes:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
191
It is necessary to Open the Competition before entering scores.
Competition scores may also be entered using the Player Entry Program
13.8.3 The Enter Scores Toolbar
When Enter Scores is selected and an Open Competition is chosen, the following Toolbar is
displayed:
Toolbar Buttons
On the bar are the buttons as follows:
Button
Enter
Description
Analyse
Analyse, and edit, scores already entered for this competition.
Find
Search for a player in the Players or Analyse Scores Entered lists (or report
why a player is not listed).
Apply
APPLY SCORES for this competition (I.e. Close the Competition).
Config
Change the configuration and set-up of the Competition.
Access
Run the public Player Entry screens.
Enter a Score for the Player highlighted in the list.
13.8.4 Enter a Score
To enter a score for a player in an Opened Competition
1.
Do one of the following:
Click the Enter Scores button on the Toolbar and choose the Open Competition if prompted.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place, choose the Open Competition in the
list, then select Enter Scores in the Competition Tasks list.
2.
Highlight the Player who has returned the scorecard (or use the Find button to locate the player).
3.
Do one of the following:
Double-click the Player in the Players list
Click the Enter button on the mini-toolbar.
Right-click with the mouse. On the pop-up menu, select Enter Score.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
192
HandicapMaster®
4.
If the competition is a pairs, or team competition, repeat step (3) to select the remaining
members of the team.
See Also
The Scorecard Toolbar
Find a player in the competition
13.8.5 Edit a Score previously entered
To edit a previously entered score for a player in an Opened Competition
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place, then select Analyse Scores Entered
in the Competition Tasks list.
Click the Enter Scores button on the Toolbar, choose the Open Competition if prompted, then
click Analyse button.
2.
Highlight the Score to be deleted with a single click.
3.
Do one of the following:
Click the Edit button on the mini-toolbar.
Right-click with the mouse. On the pop-up menu, select Edit Score.
13.8.6 Delete a Score previously entered
To completely remove a score for a player from an Opened Competition
1.
Do one of the following
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place, then select Analyse Scores Entered in
the Competition Tasks list.
Click the Enter Scores button on the Toolbar, choose the Open Competition if prompted, then
click Analyse button.
2.
Highlight the Score to be deleted with a single click.
3.
Do one of the following:
Click the Cancel Score button on the mini-toolbar.
Right-click with the mouse. On the pop-up menu, select Cancel Selected Score Card.
Press the DELETE key on the keyboard.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
193
13.8.7 Find a player in the competition
When Enter Scores is selected and an Open Competition is chosen, you may use the Find button on
the Enter Scores toolbar to locate a player in the list.
If the player has already signed-in or entered a score, their name will have been moved to the Analyse
Scores Entered list. The Find option will take you to the Analyse list and locate the player in that list
instead.
If the player is not eligible to enter the competition, then the Find option will advise why this player is not
eligible (and therefore not listed). In some situations, you may override the ineligibility criteria and
proceed to enter a score for the player.
13.8.8 Scorecard Entry Window
Competitors scores are entered using the Score Entry window.
To enter the scores for a competitor (or team)
1.
Check that the Handicap indicated for Strokes Received on the Scorecard is correct for the
competitor. Should this be a Stroke-play competition, the number of strokes can be adjusted
to suit.
2.
Enter the player's scores hole-by-hole. The Nett score, number of Stableford points or Par
result for each hole are shown.
3.
To save the scorecard, press the ENTER key or click the Save and Close button.
Entering a Hole in One
Press 1 key followed by ENTER key.
Entering a score for a hole over 9 strokes
Press 1 then the second digit. For example, to enter a score of 12, press the 1 key followed by
2.
Entering a score for a hole 20 strokes or higher
Click the 20+ button and enter the applicable score.
Entering a No Return for a hole
If the player does not complete a hole, use the ZERO (0) or FULL STOP (.) key to enter a No
Return.
To correct a mistake
Use the UP and DOWN keys on the Keyboard to correct previous holes entered, as indicated
alongside the buttons on the right of the screen. Over-type a score with a revised number as
appropriate. Alternatively, click the hole score in error and then retype the score.
See Also:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
194
HandicapMaster®
The Scorecard Toolbar
13.8.9 The Scorecard Toolbar
When the Scorecard window is displayed, the following Toolbar is displayed above the
Scorecard.
Toolbar Buttons
On the bar are the buttons as follows:
Button
Button
Save
Description
Reduce
Handicap
Change the Player or Team's Handicap (applies to this
competition only)
Save this Scorecard
Enter Score Enter a Score 20 or over for a Hole
20 or over
Print
Print a picture of the current Scorecard window
Cancel
Cancel entering this Scorecard
Help
Read help about entering the Scorecard
13.8.10 Review Scores entered for a Competition
To review the scores entered for a competition
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions menu, click Analyse Scores, and choose an Opened Competition,
or
Click the Enter Scores Button on the Main Toolbar,c hoose an Opened Competition and
click the Analyse button, or
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place, then Analyse Scores Entered and
choose an Opened Competition.
Notes
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
195
The scores entered may be printed by selecting Report on the mini-toolbar immediately above the
list of scores. Alternatively, select Reports menu, then Competition Reports, then Analysis of
Scores Entered.
Competition scores may also be entered using the Player Entry Program
13.8.11 Change how an Opened Competition is being played
To change the configuration of an Opened Competition
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place
2.
Select Opened Competitions
3.
Double-click the competition to be changed.
4.
Click the Config button on the Enter Scores Toolbar.
5.
Change the Opened Competition using the Amend Competition window.
13.8.12 The Amend Competition window
Details Tab
Competition Name
To change the name of the competition, in the Competition Name box, enter a new name.
Date of Competition
To change the date of the competition, in the Date of Competition box, enter the revised date.
Note:
It will only be possible to change the date of the competition if all player's for whom there is a
competition score already recorded have a valid handicap on the revised date.
If scores have already been entered, it is not possible to revise the date if the competition is a
Four-Ball Better Ball competition.
Played At
To change the venue of the competition, click the Select Alternative Venue button and choose a
different golf course.
Competitors Play from these Tee Markers
To change the Tees used for the competition, select alternative Men and Ladies tee values
Handicapping Tab
Use First Round Handicaps
If the competition is a 36, 54 or 72 competition, it may be necessary for players to use their handicaps
as they were on the first day of the competition (rather than have their handicaps change from round to
round). This would be determined by the organising committee.
If this is the second, third or subsequent round of the competition and Handicaps are to be held
throughout the competition, then tick the Use First Round Handicaps box, and select the date of the first
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
196
HandicapMaster®
round of the competition in the First Round Date boxes.
For more information about running competitions over more than one round, see Run a Multiple Round
Competition.
Note
The Handicapping Tab is only available if the competition is a Singles competition.
Options Tab
Scorecard Issue Number
To change whether players are to record their Scorecard Issue number when returning scores to the
competition, amend the Players to record their Scorecard Issue Number box.
Players Sign-in before Play
To change whether players are to sign in to the computer before play, amend the Players to Sign-in
before play box.
Entrants restricted to Players listed on Start Sheet
Tick the Restrict Score Entry/Sign In to Players/Teams Listed on a Start Sheet box to limit which
players will be able to Sign In or enter a Score for the competition to those listed on a Start Sheet. In the
event that a Player is not on the Start Sheet, the Start Sheet will need to be amended to allow the player
to enter their score.
For team competitions, limiting players to those already added to a Start Sheet will enable
HandicapMaster to automatically recognise the partners within a team. Only one player in the team will
need to identify themselves at Sign In or Score Entry time.
Score Entry Times
To change the times that players are able to sign in and or enter scores for this competition, amend
the Restrict Score Entry/Sign In to these times only boxes.
Leader board
Tick the Show On Leaderboard box to allow this competition to show on the Player Entry Leaderboard,
if it is configured to be used. Where the competition is being played as singles stroke-play (Medal)
format, you may choose whether to show the Nett scores, Gross scores, or both on the Leaderboard.
Note
The Players to Sign-in before play, Restrict Score Entry/Sign In to Players/Teams Listed on a Start
Sheet and Restrict Score Entry/Sign In to these times only options are only available in the Premier,
Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster.
Fees Tab
Tick the Set Competition Entry Fees box, to declare entry fees for this competition. Where fees are
declared, HandicapMaster can maintain a list of fees payable (and refunds needed if competitions are
undone).
Enter an Entry Fee in the Fee box. If your accounting system uses Accounting or Product codes, enter
the code in the Accounting Code box.
Tick the 1 or 2 boxes to add additional fees for this competition. Enter a suitable description for this
item along with a Fee and Accounting Code (if applicable). Select Mandatory or Optional. Where a
fee is optional, HandicapMaster will mark the fee as payable only where a Player (or team) chooses
to select the fee when they sign in to a competition.
Note
The Fees tab is only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions of
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
197
HandicapMaster.
Template Tab
Amend Template
Some aspects of how the competition is processed are determined by the Competition Template
selected when the competition is opened. Click the Amend Template button to re-run the Competition
Template Wizard. This will allow the Competition Template to be updated and applicable changes to
be made to the opened competition.
Changes to the following template items will be reflected in the Opened Competition:
Eligibility of Men, Ladies or Visitors to play in the competition
The Nature of Competition (Stroke-play, Stableford or Par)
Handicap Allowance
Mixed Competition Handicap Adjustment
Use of Fractional Handicap Allowances
Note
It is not possible to amend the template if one or more scores have already been input or players
already signed in, in the following circumstance:
The change is to the number of holes played for each round
The format of the competition is not compatible e.g. original template is singles the selected
template is a team competition
Use Different Template
Some aspects of how the competition is processed are determined by the Competition Template
selected when the competition is opened. Click the Use Different Template button to change the
template being used by the opened competition if an incorrect template was used when the
competition was originally opened.
Changes to the following template items will be reflected in the Opened Competition:
Eligibility of Men, Ladies or Visitors to play in the competition
The Nature of Competition (Stroke-play, Stableford or Par)
Handicap Allowance
Mixed Competition Handicap Adjustment
Use of Fractional Handicap Allowances
Note
It is not possible to use a different template if one or more scores have already been input or players
already signed in, in the following circumstance:
The change is to the number of holes played for each round
The format of the competition is not compatible e.g. original template is singles the selected
template is a team competition
Bookings Tab
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
198
HandicapMaster®
If Bookings have not been configured for this competition, click the Configure Bookings button to set up
arrangements for players booking into this competition (using a Booking Template).
If Bookings arrangements have already been set up, click Amend Bookings to change the
arrangements. Alternatively, click Cancel Bookings to cancel the arrangements for booking into this
competition (warning: any bookings received for this competition will be deleted).
Note
The Bookings tab is only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions of
HandicapMaster.
Multi-round Competitions Tab
If the competition has been configured as a singles competition, then the Multi-round competitions tab
will be displayed. You may choose to aggregate (or change the aggregation) of this round with other
competitions, as part of a multiple-round competition. By choosing to "aggregate" this round at this
stage, the Player Entry leader board will be able to display the combined scores for the competition, as
scores are entered.
Choose whether to aggregate the round as an Alternative Day competition or a Multiple-round
competition (see Competitions played over more than one round for further details), then select the
previous round from the pop-up list of competitions.
You may choose to give an overall name to the competition (to encompass all rounds) by clicking Set
an overall name for this competition link (or Change the name of the overall competition link if an
overall name is already set).
13.8.13 Change how scores are entered onto Scorecard window
By default, when entering scorecards that have more than one column of players scores on them (such
as Four Ball Better ball scorecards), HandicapMaster will prompt for each player’s scores for Hole 1 to
be entered before requesting Hole 2 scores, etc.
However, this behaviour may be modified so that all of the scores for Player A are entered before Player
B, etc. That is, the behaviour of the cursor when entering scores may be changed from row-by-row entry
to column-by-column entry.
To change the behaviour of HandicapMaster when scores are being entered
1. On the File menu, click Options.
2. Click the Competitions tab.
3. Tick the Cursor moves Down before Across when entering Multiple Column scores onto
Scorecard box.
4. Click OK.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
13.9
199
Apply Scores - Calculate results and adjust Handicaps
The final stage is to apply the scores to produce competition results and adjust handicaps.
To apply scores
1.
On the Competitions menu, click Apply Scores
This opens the Apply Scores for Stroke-Play Competitions wizard.
The Apply Scores wizard
Competition Status
Qualifier Status
Handicap Qualifying Competitions are competitions where handicaps of the competitors will be
revised automatically after the close of the competition. The handicapping authorities restrict the
formats of competitions that are allowed to be qualifying.
HandicapMaster will identify whether a competition format selected may be chosen as a Qualifying
Competition.
2.
Tick the Handicap Qualifier box if the competition is Handicap Qualifying.
Completion of Competition
3.
Check the Competition Was Abandoned box if there was cause to abandon the competition (I.e.
unable to complete the competition). For CONGU handicapping, this will have the affect of making the
Competition Scratch Score equal to the Standard Scratch Score and "reductions only".
4.
Click Next >
Disqualified Scores
5.
You may choose to mark any players (or teams) as Disqualified.
To mark a player as disqualified:.
1. Click Add > button
2. Choose the Player or team to be disqualified in the list and click Next > button
3. Choose the reason for disqualification. The rule number will be displayed on the
competition results report. If the required rule is not displayed in the list, or you do not wish
to display the rule, select Other, or Do Not Document
4. If the competition is a qualifier and the CONGU Handicapping system is being used, identify
whether the score for the player is to be considered a 'correct' score for handicapping
purposes. See CONGU Unified Handicapping System Appendix P for further details.
5. Click Next >
To remove a player from the list of disqualified players
1. Highlight the player or team in the list and click Remove button
6.
Click Next >
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
200
HandicapMaster®
Overall Results from Multiple-round Competitions
7.
If the competition has previously been linked ("aggregated") to other competitions, choose
whether to Retain this link. Alternatively where the competition is played over more than one round,
choose whether to aggregate these scores with a previous round that has already been applied.
8.
Use the Aggregate Competition Name box to assign a name to appear on the aggregated results
reports. This would be the name of the overall competition. If left blank the name of the first competition
in the aggregation will be used.
CONGU Unified Handicapping System - Decision 3(a) (Club, Premier and Network Editions editions
only)
9.
Where more than one competition of the same format is run on the same day, CONGU UHS
Decision 3(a) requires a single Competition Scratch Score to be calculated (in some circumstances).
When HandicapMaster recognises this situation may exist, this page is displayed. If decision 3(a)
requires you to combine the competition with a previous one for the purpose of calculating a CSS, tick
the Combine Competitions to calculate a Single Competition Scratch Score box. Tick the box
alongside those competitions that you would like to combine this with to create the common CSS.
Note: Combining the competition with another already processed may have the affect of changing
handicap adjustments made with the previous competition.
10. If calculating a Single CSS adjustment (using Men's and Ladies Scores) and some competition
scores for the same day have been processed using a different handicapping system (say on another
computer), tick the Some Competition Scores have been kept on a different database box and enter
the required statistics for the other scores.
Process Results
12. Click Finish to continue.
The Competition results and any Handicap changes required will automatically be calculated at this
time. The Competition will be added to the list on the Closed Competitions list.
If the competition was a CONGU handicap qualifier, the Competition Scratch Score window (or
windows) are displayed. This details the calculations undertaken to determine the Competition Scratch
Score for the day. Likewise, in the EGA Handicap editions, if the competition was an 18 hole qualifier,
the Competition Stableford Adjustment window will be displayed.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
201
13.10 View Results
To view the results of a competition
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions menu, click View Competition Results, or
In the Closed Competitions list, select a competition and double-click or press Enter
In a Player's Handicap Record (Table format), select a competition and double-click or press
Enter
The View Competition Results window will be displayed.
The available reports and options are categorised into 'pages' accessed by clicking an
appropriate 'Tab'.
Results Tab
You may choose which competition results reports to view. HandicapMaster will create a list of
available reports that can be generated from the competition. You may select any number of these
reports to view, by checking the appropriate box.
Aggregated Results
This section is ONLY displayed for Multi-round or aggregated competitions.
You may select one or more of the following results reports of the aggregated competition by checking
the appropriate box.
Nett (or Stableford or Par if appropriate) Scores
Gross results
Selected Round Only
You may select one or more of the following result reports by checking the appropriate box.
Nett (or Stableford or Par if appropriate) Scores
Gross Scores
First 9 Holes result
Last 9 Holes Result
Options
Add or Amend Notes on Report
You may add free form text to the Competition results reports by selecting the Add or Amend Notes
on Report option.
For any Competition Results report, the free form text will be applied to the selected competition,
For example, if the competition is a Multiple-round competition, the notes will be applied to the
particular round that was selected in the events window, when View Competition Results was
chosen.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
202
HandicapMaster®
Include Home Clubs of Players
You may have the Home Club of each player listed under their entry in the reports. This may be
applicable when producing the results of an Open Competition, say.
Create as a Press Release
You may generate the results in the format of a Press Release. To configure contact details, see
Global Options.
Show Visitors in Blue
You may choose to highlight scores returned by Visitors (displayed in Blue). This may be
applicable when comparing scoring by Members to scoring by Visitors in an Open competition.
Show All Positions
Where a limit to display results to the 'top X' positions was selected in a competition template then
this option will be displayed. Selecting this option will temporarily override the limit to allow you to
view and print a full set of results.
Statistics Tab
You may select the following competition statistical reports
Competition Scoring Analysis
Scorecards from a a Competition
Best Scores Analysis
Competition Scratch Score
Highlighting tab
You may choose to highlight in colour on the results report a selection of players based on ONE of
the following criteria
(None) - No highlighting the default
Home Players
Away Players
Visitors
Gentlemen
Ladies
Juniors
Adults
Seniors
Other (1)
Other (2)
When any value other than (None) is selected the choice of colour to use for the highlighting is
displayed and you may choose as appropriate.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
203
Notes:
If you are viewing multiple reports, then please use the big green BACK and FORWARD buttons on
the main HandicapMaster toolbar near the top left of the HandicapMaster window to navigate
through the reports.
The back and forward arrow buttons in the report toolbar allow you to move forward and back within
the pages of an individual report
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
204
HandicapMaster®
13.11 2's returned by competitors
HandicapMaster will produce a list of those competitors who have scored twos during their rounds.
These details are automatically appended to the end of the competition results reports, if selected in
the competition template.
It should be noted, however, that twos information can only be displayed if the 'hole-by-hole' scores are
still retained in the database. See section "The function of Housekeeping" later in this manual for
further information on housekeeping hole-by-hole scores.
Reporting the most number of Twos scored over a Series of Competitions
You may report the players scoring the most number of twos (or better!) over a series of competitions
using the Number of Good Holes Played report.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
205
13.12 Create a copy of a Closed Competition
You may wish to create a copy of a closed competition and its score cards to allow you to use the score
cards in a separate competition for prize results purposes.
To Create a copy of a Closed Competition
1. Locate a competition in the closed competitions list, right click and select Create Copy
2. You will be asked to confirm the copy request.
3. At the end of the Copy the name of the copied competition will be displayed Click OK
4. You will then be taken to the open competitions list where you may use the copy of the competition
as required.
Notes:
If the copied competition was a handicap qualifier a warning message will indicate this as
follows:
"The competition was a handicap qualifying competition.
To avoid duplicating handicap adjustments, remember to un-tick 'HandicapQualifying'
when closing the competition copy."
If you wish to remove some of the copied score cards then delete the score cards
You may also wish to Use a Different Template if you need to change the format of the
competition.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
206
HandicapMaster®
13.13 Competitions played over more than one round
13.13.1 Overview
HandicapMaster can process the competition results for competitions that run over more than one day.
The following types of competitions are supported:
Multiple-round Competition
This competition format is
a 27, 36, 54 or 72 hole stroke-play competition,
each competitor is expected to play every round, and
the winner is the player with the lowest strokes (or highest points) aggregated from all rounds.
An example of this is the competition type which professional golfers play regularly such as the Open
Championship. Here, the winner is the competitor with the lowest medal aggregate score over four
rounds.
HandicapMaster can accommodate a cut or competitors withdrawing (but not competitors joining the
competition half way through).
HandicapMaster recognises this type of competition as a 'Multiple Round Competition'.
See Run a Multiple-round Competition.
Alternative-Day Competition
This competition format is
a singles competition,
each competitor has the option to play on one or other of two days,
each competitor may play on only one of the days, and
the winner is the player with the lowest strokes (or highest points), taken from the scores from
both days together.
An example of this is the traditional Ladies Medal, where competitors can choose to play either the Midweek or Weekend day (but cannot play both).
Another example of this is where there are too many entrants to play the competition in a single day.
Consequently, two days of competition are run with each competitor playing one or other of the days.
HandicapMaster recognises this type of competition as 'Alternative Day Competition'.
See Run an Alternative Day Competition.
Best-of Series
This competition format is
a series of rounds played,
typically (but not necessarily), each round is a competition in its own right,
each competitor has the option to play as many or as few of the rounds as he chooses,
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
207
the overall winner is the player with the lowest strokes (or highest points), taken by aggregating
the scores across all rounds, or a limited number of rounds using only the player's best
rounds.
a singles competition (Best-of series results for Team competitions is not available).
Many clubs give prizes for an overall winner of a number of competitions, such as the best 6 rounds in
a Stableford competition or the best 5 rounds in a Medal, as examples.
Often, a 'Winter league' format allows for players to play a minimum number of rounds, but they are not
required to play every weekend.
HandicapMaster recognises this type of competition as 'Best of a Series'
See Run a Best-of Series Competition.
13.13.2 Run a Multiple-round Competition
To process a Multiple-round Competition
1. Create a Competition Template
Create a Competition Template.
2. Enter and complete the first round scores
Enter and complete the first round scores, continuing as though it is a single round competition.
To do this,
1. Open a New Competition
2. Enter Scores
3. Apply Scores
When Applying Scores and the Overall Results from Multiple-round Competitions page is
displayed, select Do not Aggregate.
3. Enter and complete the second and subsequent rounds
Repeat the steps undertaken for the first round, but with the following considerations:
a) When Opening a New Competition for the second round:
1. If both rounds are played on the same day, select PM alongside the date when opening the
second round competition.
2. Select the Second, Third or Subsequent Round of Competition.
3. If competitors are to play off the same handicap for each round in the competition (I.e retain
their starting Handicap), tick Use First Round Handicaps, and select the date of the first
round of the competition in the First Round Date boxes.
4. Choose to aggregate the round as a Multiple-round competition, then select the previous
round from the pop-up list of competitions.
5. You may choose to give an overall name to the competition (to encompass all rounds) by
clicking Set an overall name for this competition link.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
208
HandicapMaster®
b) When Applying Scores, choose the Retain this link when asked, to retain the aggregation with
the previous round(s).
Notes
It is necessary for each Competition to have been entered as the same Format and Nature (E.g. both
Stableford).
If the competition is identified as a handicap qualifier, a Competition Scratch Score will be calculated
and handicaps will be adjusted accordingly. Separate handicapping adjustments are made for each
of these rounds based on the scores for only the one round in question at a time.
13.13.3 Run an Alternative Day Competition
To process an Alternative Day Competition
1. Create a Competition Template
Create a Competition Template.
2. Enter and complete the first round scores
Enter and complete the first round scores, continuing as though it is a single round competition.
To do this,
1. Open a New Competition
2. Enter Scores
3. Apply Scores
When Applying Scores and the Overall Results from Multiple-round Competitions page is
displayed, select Do not Aggregate.
3. Enter and complete the second and subsequent rounds
Repeat the steps undertaken for the first round, but with the following considerations:
a) When Opening a New Competition for the second round:
1. If both rounds are played on the same day, select PM alongside the date when opening the
second round competition.
2. Select the Second, Third or Subsequent Round of Competition.
3. Choose to Aggregate as an ALTERNATIVE DAY Competition, then select the previous
round from the pop-up list of competitions.
4. You may choose to give an overall name to the competition (to encompass all rounds) by
clicking Set an overall name for this competition link.
b) When Applying Scores, choose the Retain this link when asked, to retain the aggregation with
the previous round(s).
Notes
It is necessary for each Competition to have been entered as the same Format and Nature (E.g. both
Stableford).
If the competition is identified as a handicap qualifier, a Competition Scratch Score will be calculated
and handicaps will be adjusted accordingly. Separate handicapping adjustments are made for each
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
209
of these rounds based on the scores for only the one round in question at a time.
13.13.4 Run a Best-of Series Competition
A Best-of Series is defined as the overall total from 2 or more rounds, or separate competitions, played
as a series. Players may be limited to how many of their rounds played count toward their total (their
'Best' scores).
To run a Best-of-Series Competition
1.
Do one of the following:
From the Competitions menu, click Best-of Series Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Best-of Series Competitions.
Press CTRL + B keys together.
2.
Select the Create a New Series task, or press the INSERT key on the keyboard.
Title of Series
3.
4.
5.
In the Name box, enter a title for this series.
In the Description box, enter a description for this series. The description will be displayed on the
Best-of Series Competitions list.
Click Next >
Base Series on Competitions of designated type
6.
Select a Type of Competition to base this Series on (Stroke-play, Stableford or Par),
7.
Select whether the competitions that will form the basic of the series will be those allowing Men to
play, Ladies to play, or both.
8.
Click Next >
Which Competitions to include
9.
Tick the Box alongside each Competition that you would like to include in this Series.
Click Select All to quickly tick all listed Competitions.
Click Clear All to quickly remove the ticks from all listed Competitions.
10. Click Next >
Options
11. In the Number of Best Scores to Count box, enter the maximum number of scores that will count
to each Player's Series total.
12. Tick the Use Gross Scores rather than Nett Scores box to base the Player's totals on their Gross
rather than Nett scores in each competition (Stroke-play competitions only).
13. Tick the Show 'Best' Scores for Players box to display the best rounds for each Player is the
results report, rather than their Maximum and Minimum counting scores only.
14. Tick the Place Competitors in Divisions box if you wish players to be split into categories based
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
210
HandicapMaster®
on their handicap at the time the report is run.
15. Tick the Split &ties by card matching (Last 9, 6, 3, then 1 hole(s) from best scores combined)
box if you wish players with the same total score to be ordered by card matching ("count back").
When ticked, ties are resolved as per the Rules of Golf Appendix I, with scores over the last 9
holes being matched (combined from each of the player's best scores). If a tie still exists,
scores over the last 6 holes are matched. Then last 3 holes and finally last hole.
When not ticked, players will be displayed in alphabetical order, sharing the same "overall
position".
16. Tick the Include Past Members box if Past Members are to be included in the results.
17. Tick the Include Visitors box if Visitors are to be included in the results.
18. Tick the Include on MasterScoreboard.co.uk box to allow this series to be uploaded to the
MasterScoreboard service (when publishing to the MasterScoreboard web site).
19. In the Add Notes to Report box, enter any text that you would like to display at the bottom of the
results report.
20. Click Next >
Divisions
If you have selected Place Competitors in Divisions box in the options, choose how to configure the
divisions for the report:
21. Tick the Show Overall Winners taken from any Division box if you wish to separate out the
leading players in the Order of Merit (irrespective of the Division they are placed in). Enter the number of
overall winners to be separated out.
22. Identify the maximum handicap for each of the first three divisions in the Division 1, Division 2,
and Division 3 boxes. Competitors whose handicaps are greater than the ' Division 3' box will
automatically fall into Division 4.
TIP:
HandicapMaster splits the field into four divisions. It is possible, however, to simulate only two
or three divisions by setting the Maximum Handicap In Division 2 and/or 3 value higher than
the highest handicap allowed in the competition. This will cause no competitors to fall into the
higher divisions and these Divisions will therefore not be displayed.
23. Click Next >.
Completing the Best-of Series Wizard
24. Click Finish to run the report.
To update an existing series
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions menu, click Best-of Series Competitions
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Best-of Series Competitions.
Press CTRL + B keys together.
2.
Do one of the following:
Double-click the chosen series
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
211
Highlight the chosen series and click Update a Series in the Best-of Series Tasks
Right-click the chosen series and select Update Series.
To delete a series
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions menu, click Best-of Series Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Best-of Series Competitions.
Press CTRL + B keys together.
2.
Highlight the series to be deleted.
3.
Do one of the following:
Click Delete a Series in the Best-of Series Tasks
Right-click the chosen series and select Delete Series.
Press the DELETE key on the keyboard.
To edit a Series Notes
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions menu, click Best-of Series Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Best-of Series Competitions.
Press CTRL + B keys together.
2.
Highlight the series to be edited.
3.
Right-click the chosen series and select Edit Notes.
13.13.5 Run number of Birdies, Twos, etc Competition
A "Number of 'good' holes played" report is a report of the players scoring the most number of 'good'
holes (such as Birdies (or better)) over a series of competitions.
HandicapMaster supports up to six series to be run at any one time.
To run a Good Holes Competition
1.
Do one of the following:
From the Reports menu, click Competition Reports, then Number of 'Good' Holes Played.
In the Reports list, select Competition Reports tab, then double-click Number of 'Good' Holes
Played.
Select Report
2.
Choose one of six Series to use.
3.
In the applicable Series x titled box, enter a name for this Series.
4.
Click Next >
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
212
HandicapMaster®
Type of Report
5.
In the Type of scores to report list, select Birdies (or other choice of scoring). This is the level at
which scores will be considered to be 'Good'. There is a further option later to include scores better
than this if required.
6.
Click Next >
Which Competitions
7.
Tick the Box alongside each Competition that you would like to include in this Series.
Click Select All to quickly tick all listed Competitions.
Click Clear All to quickly remove the ticks from all listed Competitions.
8.
Click Next >
Who to include in the Report
9.
Choose which members to be included in the report..
10. Tick the Include Past Members box if Past Members are to be included in the results.
11. Tick the Include Visitors box if Visitors are to be included in the results.
12. Click Next >
Options
13. Tick the Limit Report to Players with Current (Exact) Handicap box to restrict the report to players
either below or above a certain Handicap value. HandicapMaster will use Player's current handicaps at
the time the Wizard is run.
14. Tick the Show Winners Down to Position box to restrict the report to only the leading players
(players scoring the most Birdies). HandicapMaster will include all players tying for the position
chosen.
15. Tick the Include on MasterScoreboard.co.uk box to allow this series to be uploaded to the
MasterScoreboard service (when publishing to the MasterScoreboard web site).
16. Tick the Include any scores Better than <various> in Report box to include scores better than
Birdies (or other choice of scoring) in the counts in the report. This option is not displayed if the choice
of scoring is Holes in One
17. Tick the Show when and where achieved box to include details at which holes, (and date and
competition), each Birdie (or other 'Good' Hole) was achieved.
Note: This additional information is not included in the report when published to, and
displayed on, Master Scoreboard.
18. In the Add Notes to Report box, enter any text that you would like to display at the bottom of the
results report.
19. Click Next >
Completing the 'Number of Good Holes Played' Wizard
20. Click Finish to run the report.
How to run a Birdie Tree for two separate Handicap ranges (say "Silver" and "Bronze")
In this situation, effectively two separate Birdie Tree's are run. Create two separate series, and limit
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
213
each one to either below or above chosen handicap values.
For example, say "Silver" and "Bronze" Tree's are being run with a handicap split at 28. Here select
series 1 and provide a title like "Birdie Tree - Silver Division". Choose the applicable competitions. In
the options section, tick Limit Report to Players with Current (Exact) Handicap box and select
"Below" and "28.0". Create this report.
Now re-run the wizard and select series 2. Provide a title like "Birdie Tree - Bronze Division". Choose
the applicable competitions. In the options section, tick Limit Report to Players with Current (Exact)
Handicap box and select "Above" and "27.9". Create this report.
Don't forgot to ensure all players fall into one or other of the series, b y choosing handicap values 0.1
different from each other.
13.13.6 Gross and Nett Results from multiple round competitions
For example: Your club championship is a 36 holes scratch medal. However the first 18 holes is also a
Nett competition.
If you run the main competition as a handicap competition in HandicapMaster and aggregate both
rounds of the 36 hole competition, HandicapMaster will automatically generate the scratch results too.
You will automatically have the choice of choosing whether to view Gross Results (each separate
round), Nett Results (each separate round), Gross results (overall 36 hole result) or Nett results
(overall 36 hole result).
To View Results
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions menu, click View Competition Results, or
In the Closed Competitions list, select a one of the rounds of the multiple round competition
and double-click or press Enter
In a Player's Handicap Record (Table format), select a competition and double-click or press
Enter
The View Competition Results window will be displayed.
You may choose which competition results reports to view. HandicapMaster will create a list of
available reports that can be generated from the competition. You may select any number of these
reports to view, by checking the appropriate box.
For multiple round competitions you will see a section Aggregated Results for the overall results.
Select Nett or Gross Scores Result as appropriate
The section Selected Round Only will allow you to obtain results from the round you selected from the
closed competitions list.
If this was the first round and you want scratch results, select the Nett Scores Result option. To view
results of subsequent rounds return to the Closed Competitions list and select the required round
Notes:
If you are viewing multiple reports, then please use the big green BACK and FORWARD buttons on
the main HandicapMaster toolbar near the top left of the HandicapMaster window to navigate
through the reports.
The back and forward arrow buttons in the report toolbar allow you to move forward and back within
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
214
HandicapMaster®
the pages of an individual report
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
215
13.14 Suspending Players from Competitions
The Suspending Players from Competitions facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-
Premier and EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster
In some circumstances, it may be desirable to suspend players from having the right to compete in
competitions. This is often seen as a less severe punishment for breaches of responsibility by the
player than suspending their handicap.
To suspend a player from competitions
1.
On the Competitions menu, click Suspend Player from Competitions... and select a Member
from the list displayed.
2.
Enter a date for the last day of suspension for the player.
The player will be displayed as "Banned" in the All Members list and will not be available for entering
competitions.
To remove the suspension of a player from competitions
1.
On the Competitions menu, click Suspend Player from Competitions... and select the Member
from the list displayed.
If the player already has a suspension in place, you will be offered the option to cancel the suspension.
Alternatively, the suspension will be cancelled automatically once the suspension date has passed.
Note: In the situation where you would like to cancel a suspension that has already passed its end
date (for example, to enter a scorecard into a past competition), suspend the player from competitions
once again (using a future date), then cancel this new suspension. This will clear all previous
suspension records.
To print a list of Players who are currently suspended from Competitions
Do one of the following:
1.
On the Reports menu, select Competition Reports and click Players suspended from
Competitions, or
2.
In the Reports List, click Competitions tab, then double-click Players suspended from
Competitions.
Notes:
For more serious breaches of rules regarding Handicaps, it may be more appropriate to suspend
the player's Handicap.
The option to suspend players from competitions is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier
and EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
216
HandicapMaster®
13.15 Managing Competition Entry Fees
13.15.1 Introduction
It is possible to set entry fees for competitions and have these fees recorded by HandicapMaster.
These records may then viewed and either
Processed by an external accounting/ or till system.
Be processed by the Subscriptions Option
Notes:
The Competition Fees option is only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGANetwork Editions of HandicapMaster.
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
How fees are recorded
When a competition is applied, a record is maintained of each player who has a score recorded, along
with the fees and amounts payable. Fees are configured through the Competition Template.
These fees may be viewed and/or exported to a CSV format file using the Manage Competition Fees
window.
Once the fees have been processed (viewed and/or exported to the accounting system), then may be
marked as processed. Once fees have been marked as processed, they no longer appear on the
reports or export files.
When fees are processed in conjunction with the Subscriptions Option Invoices will be raised for each
fee for each member and the member's account balance will be reduced.
Note: When using the Subscriptions Option and when a competition is applied and a start sheet is
available for the competition and if there are players listed on a start sheet, but these did NOT sign in or
enter a score then you will be offered the option to raise a "mandatory" Entry fee for these "no show"
players.
If a competition is Undone (Refunds)
If a competition is undone, then any fee records that have not been marked as processed will
subsequently be ignored.
If the fees for this competition have already been marked as processed, then these fee records for this
competition will be flagged as “refundable”.
Fees due for refunding may also be viewed and/or exported to a CSV format file using the Manage
Competition Fees window.
If the competition is re-applied, new competition fee records are created.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
217
In summary:
If a competition that has had its fee records processed is undone and re-applied, all previous fee
records will appear on the “refundable” list. A new set of ‘payable’ fee records will be created.
Notes: When using the Subscriptions Option and where entry fees were raised for "no show" players
these will not be refunded or listed under the refunds but will remain so that when the competition is
reapplied these fees will be included.
When using the Subscriptions Option if you cancel the competition these "no show" player entry fees
will be deleted and associated invoices will be voided.
“Optional” Fee Items
When setting up fees for a competition, up to five separate accountable items may be selected.
The first item is called “Entry Fee” and will be recorded for each player.
Second, third, fourth and fifth items may be added, each with its own description. These items may be
marked as either “Mandatory” or “Optional”. Mandatory items will be recorded for each player. Optional
items will only b e recorded if the player selects the item as they sign-in to a competition through the
Player Entry system.
Contents
Set a fee structure for a competition
The Manage Competition Fees window
Prevent entry to competition if insufficient funds in member's account
13.15.2 Set a Fee Structure for a Competition
To Set a Fee Structure and record Competition Fees
1.
On the left hand task pane, select Competitions place. On the right hand pane, double-click
Templates. Select a Template and press ENTER Key.
2.
Modify the template Information using the Competition Template Wizard provided.
Alternatively, once a competition has been opened, use the Fees tab of the Configure Competition
window to adjust the Fee settings.
Note:
The Competition Fees option is only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGANetwork Editions of HandicapMaster.
13.15.3 View and process Fees
To view and process Fees to be collected
1. On the Competitions menu, select Manage Competition Fees.
2. Process the fees through the Manage Competition Fees window.
Note:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
218
HandicapMaster®
The Competition Fees option is only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGANetwork Editions of HandicapMaster.
13.15.4 The Manage Competition Fees window
Manage Competition Fees
The Manage Competition Fees window allows you to view unprocessed Fees and, once processed,
mark all fees as processed.
You may choose one of four options available:
View Unprocessed Fees payable
Select this option to view (or export to CSV File) all outstanding competition fees that have not been
marked as processed.
View Unprocessed Fees due for Refund
Select this option to view (or export to CSV File) all outstanding competition fees that are due to be
refunded and have not been marked as processed.
Fees due to refunded are those fees from competitions where the fee records have previously
been marked as processed, but where the competition was subsequently undone.
Either
- Mark all Fees as processed
Select this option when using an external accounting system to flag all fee records (Payable
and refundable) as having been processed. These records will no longer appear on reports.
- Process Fees and Refunds (Refunds will be marked as 'void')
Select this option when using Subscriptions Option to flag all fee records (Payable and
refundable) as having been processed. These records will no longer appear on reports. The
invoices raised or refunds (marked as 'void') will be available within the Subscriptions Option.
View Summary of fees for closed competitions
Select this option to view a summary of the fees relating to a selection of closed competitions.
The summary shows the total fees accrued for each category of fee, both as a summary for each
competition in a selected time period and also across all competitions in the time period.
Notes:
The Competition Fees option is only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and
EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster.
Competition Fee records are retained in the system for six months after the competition
was Applied. However, the Summary report may be run against closed competitions from
any date in the system. (See Note below for "no show" player fees.)
You may choose to pre-set the folder where export files are created using Global Options.
When set, Export files will be named "Comp_Fees_Sales_yyyy_mm_dd_nn.csv" or
"Comp_Fees_Refunds_yyyy_mm_dd_nn.csv" depending whether unprocessed fees payable or
unprocessed refunds are being exported (where yyyy_mm_dd is the date the file is created and
nn a sequence number from 01 upwards for that day).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
219
NOTE
When using the Subscriptions Option and where Entry fee for "no show" players have been recorded
these will no longer be included on the summary report after 6 months. The invoices raised for these
players will remain in the player's transaction history.
13.15.5 Prevent entry to competition if insufficient funds in member's account
Introduction
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
When combined with the Subscriptions Option it is possible to configure Player Entry to check a
member's account balance, and prevent entry to the competition if the member has insufficient funds
when signing-in or when booking in using Player Entry.
When a player either sign’s in or books into to a competition using the HandicapMaster Player Entry
screens, the member's account balance is accessed to check the account has sufficient funds to enter
the competition. If the account has sufficient funds, then the player is signed in or booked in to the
competition. When the competition fees are processed after the competition is closed invoices will be
raised for the fees.
An account is deemed as having sufficient funds if the Competition Fee is less than or equal to the
current Balance plus Overdraft Limit.
Note that when a player books in using Player Entry, only mandatory fees are processed.
Configuration when a player Signs in
The following entries should be configured through the Player Entry Settings for the settings profile
being used for sign-in.
Key
Details
ServiceID
Identifies the facility(s) to
be activated.
Default Value
Use value 57 for this to
prevent entry to
competition if insufficient
funds in Account facility
when signing in
Overdraft
An overdraft limit, allowing 0.00
players to go overdrawn by
up to this amount.
Specified as a decimal
amount, such as “5.00” for
5 pounds.
ReportAllCallbacks
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
True or False. Indicates
whether balance checks
False
220
HandicapMaster®
where players have
sufficient funds are
included in the 'C allback
Log' report.
StopIfC allbackFails1
True or False. Indicates
whether the current
processing in
HandicapMaster should be
allowed to continue if one
ore more team members
has insufficient funds.
False
(processing
continues even if
some team
members have
insufficient funds)
Use
StopIfCallbackFails1=Tr
ue
to prevent players signing
in if any members of the
team has insufficient funds.
AllowPaymentWithoutFunds
True or False. Indicates
False
whether the player is to be
permitted entry, even when
the player has insufficient
funds to cover the fee (I.e.
OK to go overdrawn
without authorisation).
To configure these settings, do the following:
1. In HandicapMaster, select COMPETITIONS place in the left hand pane.
2. Double-click SETTINGS PROFILES in the right-hand pane.
3. Double-click the applicable settings or click CREATE A NEW PROFILE template to start a new
profile.
4. On the “Options” page, tick USE CALLBACK TO EXTERNAL SYSTEM AS PLAYERS BOOK/SIGN-IN
box.
5. On the “Link to External System” page, select CALLBACK 57 in the USE CALLBACK list.
6. Click CONFIGURE CALLBACK SETTINGS button and enter the applicable values. Complete the
wizard.
Configuration when a player Books in
The following entries should be configured through the Player Entry Settings for the settings profile
being used for booking in.
Key
Details
ServiceID
Identifies the facility(s) to
be activated.
Default Value
Use value 58 for this to
prevent entry to
competition if insufficient
funds in Account facility
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Working with Competitions
221
when booking in
Overdraft
An overdraft limit, allowing 0.00
players to go overdrawn by
up to this amount.
Specified as a decimal
amount, such as “5.00” for
5 pounds.
ReportAllCallbacks
True or False. Indicates
whether balance checks
where players have
sufficient funds are
included in the 'C allback
Log' report.
False
StopIfC allbackFails1
True or False. Indicates
whether the current
processing in
HandicapMaster should be
allowed to continue if one
ore more team members
has insufficient funds.
False
(processing
continues even if
some team
members have
insufficient funds)
Use
StopIfCallbackFails1=Tr
ue
to prevent players booking
in if any members of the
team has insufficient funds.
AllowPaymentWithoutFunds
True or False. Indicates
False
whether the player is to be
permitted entry, even when
the player has insufficient
funds to cover the fee (I.e.
OK to go overdrawn
without authorisation).
To configure these settings, do the following:
7.
In HandicapMaster, select COMPETITIONS place in the left hand pane.
8.
Double-click SETTINGS PROFILES in the right-hand pane.
9.
Double-click the applicable settings or click CREATE A NEW PROFILE template to start a new
profile.
10. On the “Options” page, tick USE CALLBACK TO EXTERNAL SYSTEM AS PLAYERS BOOK/SIGN-IN
box.
11. On the “Link to External System” page, select CALLBACK 58 in the USE CALLBACK list.
Click CONFIGURE CALLBACK SETTINGS button and enter the applicable values. Complete the wizard.
Notes:
The following should be noted about the Sign-in Callback service:
Connection errors and the like will be logged in the Callback log, available through the
HandicapMaster main program.
Errors will not be propagated back to the user and will not stop Sign-in from completing, unless the
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
222
HandicapMaster®
“StopIfCallbackFails1” is set to TRUE.
When Visitors sign-in, no callback will be invoked.
An account is deemed as having sufficient funds if the Competition Fee is less than or equal to the
current Balance plus Overdraft Limit.
If online booking is being used NO competition fees are deducted.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
223
Chapter
14
The Player Entry System
224
HandicapMaster®
14
The Player Entry System
14.1
Introduction
Running the public Player Entry system in HandicapMaster
HandicapMaster offers two alternatives for entering player's scores. These are
the built-in Enter Scores windows available by clicking the ENTER SCORES button on the Toolbar, or
the separate 'Player Entry' system.
The built-in windows have been optimised for Competition Administrators to enter scores, providing
options such as editing a scorecard already entered. The Player Entry system is designed for Player's
to enter their own scores, typically at a publicly available PC.
This chapter discusses entering scores (and more) using the Player Entry system.
See Enter Scores for information about entering scores and managing competitions as a Competition
Official.
The Player Entry System
The Player Entry system is designed to allow Players to enter their own scores into the Computer after
a Competition, typically using a publicly-accessible Computer.
The Player Entry system adds support for a wide range of equipment to be used, including Keypads,
Card Readers, Touch-sensitive screens, etc. A leader board is available, along with options such as
printing scorecards as players prepare to play in a Competition.
In the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster, the Player Entry
system may also be used to ask players to sign-in before play, book future competitions and more.
Notes:
The Player Entry system is available as an option when registering some editions of
HandicapMaster.
Contents
Run the Player Entry System
Change the way Player Entry system works
Entry of Competition Scores
Enter a card as 'Missing Card'
Set Player Entry system to automatically login when starting
Run a Leader board
Change the choice of Profile used on a specific computer
Add Visitors when they enter their National ID
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
The Player Entry System
14.2
225
Run the Player Entry System
To run the Player Entry System
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Windows Desktop, double-click the Player Entry Program Icon
On the Competitions menu, click Run Player Entry Program
On the Competitions menu, click Enter Scores, then for an Opened Competition, click
Access button on the toolbar.
Press the F5 Function key on the Keyboard
2.
If you have more than one Player Entry profile, select the profile to be used. Tick the Always use
this choice on this computer box for this selection to be remembered whenever Player Entry is started
on the same computer. At a later date, you may change which profile is used on this computer.
3.
If you have dual monitor support or Scorecard Printer (with more than one device configured),
select the applicable devices as prompted.
Notes:
The Player Entry program is available as an option when registering some editions of
HandicapMaster. If these options are not available, then the Player Entry system may not be
installed.
See Also
Change the way Player Entry system works
Automatic Login to the Player Entry System
Setting a Password to Exit Player Entry
Command line options when running Player Entry
Run a Leader Board
Change the choice of Profile used on a specific computer
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
226
14.3
HandicapMaster®
Change the way Player Entry system works
It is possible to configure the way the Player Entry screens operate, and choose the equipment used.
To change how the Enter Scores screen works
1. On the left hand task pane, select Competitions place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Settings Profiles.
3. Do one of the following:
Select a Profile and press ENTER Key, or
Double-click the Profile entry in the list.
To add a new Profile, click Create a new Profile in the Player Entry Tasks box (or press the
INSERT key).
4. Configure Player Entry using the Configure Player Entry Wizard.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
The Player Entry System
14.4
227
The Configure Player Entry Wizard
The Configure Player Entry Wizard allows the behaviour of the Player Entry screens to be changed.
Title of Profile
In the Name box, enter a suitable name for this settings profile. Examples may be "Pro Shop", "Locker
Room", etc.
In the Description box, enter a suitable description for the use of this profile, to help with indexing
different profiles.
Equipment
In the Players will use which device? list, choose the equipment you wish to use. This may be a
Standard Keyboard, Keypad, Terminal or Touchscreen, for example.
Tick the Use Magnetic Card Reader box (*) if you would like players to be selectable using Magnetic
Swipe Cards.
Magnetic Card Reader
If using a Magnetic Card Reader (and the Use Magnetic Card Reader box was ticked on the Equipment
page), enter the settings required for Magnetic Swipe Cards. These will depend upon the equipment
and cards being used. Please contact support for further help.
Identify Players
In the Players will identify themselves by list, choose whether the players will be selected by List, PIN
number, Club Membership number, National ID's or Swipe Cards. In the Players will identify their
Playing Partners by list, choose whether players shall use a list of names, PIN numbers, etc to select
their Playing Partners.
Tick the When Visitors type their GOLFnet number, find them from Downloaded List of Players box if
you wish visitors to be able to type their Ireland GOLFnet number into the Player Entry system and have
their name, club and handicap automatically added to the database. This option is only available in the
CONGU handicapping editions for clubs in Ireland. For more information about this facility, see Using
GOLFnet Player Files with Player Entry.
Services
Tick the Sign In (*) box if you wish players to be able to sign in to competitions before play through the
Player Entry screens.
Tick the Enter Scores box if you wish players to be able to enter their competition scores (along with
options for displaying a Leader board, etc) through the Player Entry screens.
Tick the Enter Knock-Out Match Result box (*) if you wish players to be able to enter the results of their
matches in match-play knock-out competitions through the Player Entry screens.
Tick the Book into Future Competitions box (*) if you wish players to be able to book into forthcoming
competitions through the Player Entry screens. See also Global Options.
Tick the View Information (*) box if you wish players to be able to view information about their
handicaps and view a Handicap List through the Player Entry screens. If you choose to offer the
Information services, you may then choose which services to offer:
My Golf
Tick this box to offer the option for players to check their own (current) handicap, view the
upcoming competitions they have booked into and view the recent entries in their Handicap
record.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
228
HandicapMaster®
Handicap List
Tick this box to offer the option for players to view a full listing of handicaps of all members.
My Account
( Note: This item is only available when the Subscriptions Option has been
installed as a registered option.)
Tick this box to offer the option for players to view their account balance and recent transactions.
Tick the Run an external program (*) box if you wish players to be able to run a program outside of this
system, such as an external booking system, for example. Player Entry will stop and wait for the
external program to complete before continuing, When ticked, supply the following information:
Screen Title
Enter a description for this option to be displayed on the Player Entry screen
(maximum 30 characters). Required.
Program to
Execute
Enter the full path and file name of the external program to be run. E.g. "C:
\MyFolder\MyProgram.exe". Required.
Program
Parameters
Enter any runtime (e.g. "Command Line") parameters to be passed to the
external program. Optional.
Window
Start-up
Select how windows should create the initial window when it starts this
external program.
Options
Tick the Allow Switching between List of Names and PIN Numbers box if you wish players to be able
to switch between List and PIN number entry. This may be helpful where PIN numbers are being used
and a player has forgotten their PIN number.
Tick the Show Current Handicaps in List of Names box if you wish HandicapMaster to include player's
current Handicaps alongside their names in the Enter Scores selection list.
Tick the Show Male/Female Symbols alongside Competition Names box if you wish HandicapMaster
to display a Male, Female or both Male and Female icon alongside competition names, when a list of
competitions is displayed for selection. The Icons will indicate whether the competition is open to Male
and/or Female entrants.
Tick the Turn on NUMLOCK key when entering Numbers box, if using a Keyboard or Keypad and you
wish to ensure the Numlock key is on each time a number is to be entered.
Tick the Enable Logging (troubleshooting) box if you wish HandicapMaster to log the messages
issued to Players at Score Entry Time to be logged to a file called "ScoresEntered.txt". This file is
located here.
Tick the Show Playing Handicap in confirmation message when signing In (*) box if you wish to have
entrant's Playing Handicaps displayed on the confirmation message when they Sign In.
Tick the Ask for confirmation from player when offering optional competition fees (*) box if you wish
players to confirm which optional competition fees they have chosen to enter when signing in.
Tick the Show Confirmation Message when Scores are entered box if you wish a 'Your Score has
been recorded' confirmation message to be displayed when a score is successfully entered.
Tick the Allow players to reduce their handicap for competition (CONGU Clause 20.11) box if you wish
to allow your members to comply with the Unified Handicapping System regulation 20.11 and reduce
their handicap if they believe their Handicap is not up to date on the system (CONGU Handicapping
editions only). Any handicap adjustment applies for that competition only.
Tick the Allow players to adjust their handicap for competition (EGA Clause 3.5.7) box if you wish to
allow your members to comply with EGA Handicap System regulation 3.5.7 and correct their handicap if
they believe their Exact Handicap is not up to date on the system (EGA Handicapping editions only). Any
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
The Player Entry System
229
handicap adjustment applies for that competition only.
Tick the Allow players to record KO match results as 'Other' or 'No Report' box if you wish to allow
your members to be able to enter a result of 'Other' or 'No Report' when reporting Match-play Knock-out
match results.
Enter the minimum number of minutes that must pass between the time a player signs in and the time
they may enter their score card in the Minutes (minimum) between Sign-in and Score entry box. (*)
Tick the Use callback to external system as players Book/Sign-in box to configure HandicapMaster to
communicate to an external system (such as a Bar Till system for competition fee processing) when
players sign-in to (or book) a competition. For information about available 'callback' facilities, please
contact HandicapMaster support staff.
Competition Leader board (Enter Scores service)
Tick the Show leading scores on a leaderboard during idle time box to display a competition leader
board during idle moments. The leader board will display the scores for the round currently being
entered. Combined scores from multiple round competitions are not supported. If the competition has
been set up to be run within divisions, HandicapMaster will show the players split into their divisions.
In the Seconds Idle Time required before Leaderboard is displayed box, enter the time delay before
the Leader board is displayed, from the last time a key was pressed. This time interval may be
between 5 and 60 seconds inclusive.
In the Seconds between each Scroll of Leaderboard box, enter the time delay between each scroll of
the Leader board. This time interval may be between 2 and 15 seconds inclusive.
Tick the Only show Leaderboard when one or more competitions are underway box to limit when the
Leader board is displayed. The leader board will only be displayed when one or more competitions
selected to show on the leader board are underway (available for Sign-in or Score Entry).
Tick the Only show Leaderboard after ... box to limit when the Leader board is displayed. The leader
board will only be displayed after a chosen time, on any day.
Tick the Display Leading Scores only box to configure the Leader board display. The leader board may
be restricted to only 'good' scores.
Notes:
In qualifying competitions the full Playing Handicap is used (where applicable) for handicapping
purposes but the Strokes Received is applied for competition ranking purposes only when the
competition is closed. For this reason, scores displayed on the Leader board may be based on
full handicap even when the competition is being played off a restricted handicap allowance.
When the leader board is displayed on the screen, it is possible to hide the buttons alongside
the leader board by pressing the F6 key (Function Key 6). Pressing this key again re-displays the
buttons. By hiding the buttons, the display of the leader board when being fed through to a large
display (such as a TV display) can be improved.
In the CONGU handicapping editions, once at least 10 cards have been entered into handicap
qualifying competitions, the bottom line of the leader board will display an estimate of the
Competition Scratch Score, based on those cards already entered. This estimate assumes that
there will be no separate 'home' and 'visitor' CSS's.
Print Score Cards or Labels (Sign In service)
Tick the Print Score Cards or Labels as Players Sign In box (*) if you would like to print the
Competition Name, Player's Name, Player's Membership Number, Handicap, Strokes Received and
Score Card Issue Number and a number of other items directly on to a Score Card (or a label) as
players sign-in.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
230
HandicapMaster®
Click the Font... button to select the font to be used when printing.
Click the Position Data on Scorecards button to choose the positions where the information will be
printed on the Scorecard/Label.
Select each item to be printed on the label. Tick Include to include this item when printing. Enter the
distance from top left corner of the label (in Millimetres) to position the item, or drag and drop it on the
example layout.
Tick the Include Titling when Printing box if you would like titling to be added to the items included on
the label to be printed. For Example with this option ticked, handicaps will be printed as "H'cap: 24"
instead of "24", Strokes received will be printed "Strokes: 24" instead of "24" etc. This can improve the
appearance when printing to Labels.
Click the Perform a test print using this layout link to print some test data to the selected printer.
Click OK to save any changes to the design, or cancel to abandon any changes.
Link to External System
If using a callback to an external Accounting or Till system for fee deduction or the HandicapMaster
Subscriptions Option, select the callback number in the Use Callback box.
Click Configure Callback Settings button to enter the callback parameters.
If fees are being deducted at sign in to a competition then there is an option to Display Account
Balance at sign in.
Tick this if you wish members who successfully sign in to have their balance displayed in the sign in
confirmation message.
Notes
Callback parameters may also be configured through the HandicapMaster INI file in the users
application data folder. When configured through the INI file, these take precedence over the
settings in the Player Entry profile.
Configuration of this facility is specific to the external Accounting or Till system. Please contact
HandicapMaster Limited or your Accounting or Till (EPOS) system supplier for specific details.
When using the HandicapMaster Subscriptions Option the account balance does not include
any unprocessed competition fees. Competition fees when using the Subscriptions Option are
only processed when the competition is closed.
Screen Colours and Language
Select the preferred Colour Scheme from the Colour Scheme list, to be used on screen.
You may choose the time that informational messages are displayed on the Player Entry screens by
setting the number of seconds for the messages to be displayed in the Display informational
messages on screen for ... seconds box (*). Players may clear the message early by pressing ENTER
on the keyboard or tapping or clicking the message on screen.
Tick the Allow display on secondary monitor (when available) box (*) if you are likely to be running the
Player Entry system on a computer with dual or multiple Monitors attached, and you would like the
option to run the Player Entry screens on one of the alternative Monitors. When this option is ticked, and
Player Entry is started, a check will be made for 2 or more monitors on the computer. If there are, you
will be offered the choice of which Monitor to send the Player Entry screens to.
Finish
Click Finish to complete the Configure Player Entry Wizard and save the chosen settings
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
The Player Entry System
231
Note:
(*) The following services and options are only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and
EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster.
Sign In,
Enter Knock-Out Match Results,
Book into Future Competitions,
View Information,
Use Magnetic Card Reader,
Print Score Cards as Players Sign In,
Display informational messages on screen for ... seconds option and
Allow secondary monitor
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
232
14.5
HandicapMaster®
Choose Competitors
The Enter Scores window is used to select the members who have been competitors in the
competition, and to enter their scores.
To enter scores returned by competitors
1. Select a name from the list, or type their PIN of Club Membership number, or swipe their
Card
2.
Enter the scores for this competitor using the Score Entry window.
3.
Repeat for all cards returned.
4.
Click the Administration button to exit the Player Entry system.
TIPS:
When selecting names from the List by Surname, it is possible to type the leading
characters from the players' surname in order to locate the required player.
When using Golfing Union of Ireland GOLFnet cards, HandicapMaster will automatically
select the player from the list if it recognises the player's membership number on the Card. If
the card number has not been recognised and is a card from another club, the player will
assumed to be a Visitor and will automatically be registered to HandicapMaster, if the
GOLFnet player file download is being used.
To change how the Enter Scores screen operates
1. The way the Enter Scores screen behaves may be configured using the Configure Player Entry
wizard.
2. If you have more than one Player Entry profile configured, you may Change the choice of Profile used
on a specific computer.
Notes:
The Enter Scores screen displays a list of all members registered with ACTIVE handicaps. If one or
more of the open competitions allows Visitors to play, Visitors will also be included.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
The Player Entry System
14.6
233
Entry of competitors scores
Competitors scores are entered using the Score Entry window.
To enter the scores for a competitor (or team)
1.
Check that the Handicap indicated in the Strokes Received box is correct for the competitor.
Should this be a Stroke-play competition, the number of strokes can be adjusted to suit (such as when
a competitor claims a lower handicap than that to which (s)he is entitled, or in a multi-round
competition on a subsequent day when the conditions of competition require the player to play off the
same handicap throughout and his handicap has changed as a result of an earlier round).
2.
Enter the player's scores hole-by-hole. The Nett score, number of Stableford points or Par result
for each hole are shown.
3.
Press ENTER or OK key to save the scores, as indicated by the Accept Score button.
Entering a Hole in One
Press 1 key followed by ENTER or OK key.
Entering a score for a hole over 9 strokes
Press 1 then the second digit. For example, to enter a score of 12, press the 1 key followed by
2.
Entering a No Return for a hole
If the player does not complete a hole, use the ZERO (0) or FULL STOP (.) key to enter a No
Return.
To correct a mistake
Use the keys highlighted for MOVE UP and MOVE DOWN to correct previous holes entered, as
indicated alongside the buttons on the right of the screen. Over-type a score with a revised number as
appropriate.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
234
14.7
HandicapMaster®
Enter a Missing Card as 'No Return'
On some occasions, players do not return their Score Card to the Committee after play. Typically, these
scores are reported as 'No Return' in the Competition Results, and in the player's Handicap Record.
To enter a missing card as 'No Return'
1.
Choose the applicable Player or Team using Enter Scores, in the same way as entering a card
that has been returned.
2.
Enter every hole as NR using Zero or FULL STOP keys.
HandicapMaster will confirm the score as 'Score not Entered'.
TIP
Provided at least one Hole has been entered onto the Score card, HandicapMaster will auto-complete
any un-entered holes as NR when the Accept Score button is selected. Therefore to quickly enter a
missing card for a Player, enter hole 1 as NR, then press Accept Score.
Automatic entry of missing cards as 'No Return'
Where the Players to Sign In before play option is used, it is not necessary to manually enter missing
cards. HandicapMaster will automatically convert players who have signed in but not entered their
score card to 'No Return' when the competition is closed using Apply Scores.
Note:
The Players to Sign In before play option is only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and
EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
The Player Entry System
14.8
235
Automatic Login to the Player Entry System
The PlayerEntry program may be configured so that it always starts up as a particular
HandicapMaster user, without displaying the Login screen.
This may be beneficial in allowing the PlayerEntry program to automatically be started when a
computer is switched on, for example.
To set up PlayerEntry to automatically login as a User
An automatic login may be specified by passing selected command line arguments to
HandicapMaster when starting the program. This can be achieved by the use of Windows
Shortcuts.
PlayerEntry recognises the following Command Line switch for this purpose.
Switch
/user
Function
Automatically login as a specified
user.
1.
Create a Windows Shortcut to PlayerEntry on the desktop.
2.
Right-click over the desktop Icon and select 'Properties'.
3.
Select the 'Shortcut' Tab and add the following text to the end of the 'Target' field: /user
<UserID> where <UserID> is the name of a HandicapMaster User.
For example, to require PlayerEntry to automatically login as User COMPS, the shortcut may be
set up like:
"C:\Program Files\HandicapMaster\PlayerEntry.exe" /user COMPS
COMPS could equally be ADMIN or any other pre-selected user name.
Notes:
This option is only available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions of
HandicapMaster.
The UserID name used after the /user switch must not contain any spaces.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
236
14.9
HandicapMaster®
Setting a Password to exit Player Entry System
The Administration Button Password is the password that prevents exit from the Player Entry system.
It may be appropriate to set an Administration Button password if players are entering their own scores
and the Computer is likely to be left unattended by Competition Officials.
Note
The Administration Button password is used by all Player Entry computers and is not a separate
setting for each individual computer.
To set or change the Administration Button Password
1.
From the Competition menu, click Administration Button Password.
2.
In the Old Password box, type the current (existing) password, if one exists.
3.
In the New Password box, enter the new password.
4.
In the Confirm New Password box, repeat the new password.
5.
Click OK
Note
The following rules apply to Passwords:
Passwords must be at least 4 characters long
Any character, number or symbol can be used
Passwords are not case-sensitive.
Default Password
When HandicapMaster is first installed, there is no password
To Remove (clear) the Administration Button Password
It is possible to reset or remove the password by:
1.
In the Old Password box, type the current (existing) password, if one exists.
2.
Clear (leave empty) the New Password and Confirm New Password boxes.
If you have lost the Password
In the event of a lost or forgotten password, please contact the supplier.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
The Player Entry System
237
14.10 Command Line Options
The following command line options may be used with the Player Entry program ("PlayerEntry.exe"):
Switch
Function
/user <username>
Automatically login as a specified user.
<username> may not contain any spaces.
/i <iniFile>
Full path and filename of INI file (currently unused). May not contain
any spaces in the path or file name.
Defaults to "{app}\HandicapMaster.ini" (where {app} = app.path of this
program).
/instance <name>
When more than one database instance has been configured, start
Player Entry using instance with name of <name>.
<name> may not contain any spaces.
/nosplash
Skips display of the Player Entry banner ('splash') window on start-up.
/profile <pname>
Use Player Entry settings profile with the name <pname>.
<pname> may not contain any spaces, and therefore cannot work with
any profile given a name containing spaces.
/monitor <number>
Use monitor <number> from the list of available monitors (when
using a dual-monitor card, etc).
1 = The topmost monitor from the list offered when starting Player
Entry,
2 = The second monitor from the top in the list, etc.
/U
Skip running any check for program updates on Start-up.
/F6
On first time start-up of the leader board display full width without the
buttons alongside the leader board as if F6 has been pressed.
For example, the following command line starts Player Entry for a database instance called
"MensDatabase" using a userid of "ProShop".
"C:\Program Files\HandicapMaster8\PlayerEntry.exe" /instance MensDatabase /user Proshop
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
238
HandicapMaster®
14.11 Run a Leader Board
It is possible to configure the Player Entry screens to operate a running leader board for competitions
that are currently underway.
To run a Leader board
On the left hand task pane, select Competitions place.
1. On the right hand pane, double-click Settings Profiles.
2. Do one of the following:
Select a Profile and press ENTER Key, or
Double-click the Profile entry in the list.
To add a new Profile, click Create a new Profile in the Player Entry Tasks box (or press the
INSERT key).
3. Configure Player Entry using the Configure Player Entry Wizard, setting the applicable settings for
showing the Leader board.
Notes:
For a competition to be displayed on the Leader board, the option Show on Leaderboard must be
ticked in the configuration of the opened competition.
If you have a multiple-round competition (such as a 36-hole competition), ensure that you set the
aggregation of rounds with Open a New Competition for the second round. If you have already
opened the second round, you may link the rounds by changing the way the opened competition is
being played. You can also set an overall name for the competition.
If the leader board is displaying the leading scores for a multiple-round competition, it will only show
the scores for those players who have completed all rounds to date (i.e. all players with the
maximum number of rounds so far completed).
You may choose whether to show Nett or Gross scores for a chosen competition when configuring
an open competition (where the format of the competition is a singles stroke-play (medal)
competition).
If displaying a leader board on the Player Entry computer the Windows Screen Saver will activate if
configured.
When the leader board is displayed on the screen, it is possible to hide the buttons alongside the
leader board by pressing the F6 key (Function Key 6). Pressing this key again re-displays the
buttons. By hiding the buttons, the display of the leader board when being fed through to a large
display (such as a TV display) can be improved. This option can also be activated on start-up please
see Command Line Options
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
The Player Entry System
239
14.12 Display Messages on the Player Entry Terminal
The Display Messages facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-
Network Editions of HandicapMaster
It is possible to configure the Player Entry screens to display one or more messages to your members
when there are no competitions running.
These messages may contain formatted text, including different fonts and colours and may also
include images such as clip art.
A sequence of messages may be displayed and the messages may also be defined to be displayed
within a given range of dates (or all dates).
You may also configure different messages for separate Player Entry terminals.
Note: If you have a leader board configured to be displayed, this will be shown in place of any
configured messages.
To create a message
1.
In the main HandicapMaster program, in the left hand task pane, select Competitions place.
2.
On the right hand pane, double-click Messages.
3.
Do one of the following:
Click Create a New Message in the Player Entry Messages Tasks.
Press the INSERT key.
4.
Enter the Name of this message.
5.
Enter the Message text that you wish to display to members, the Font and colours may be
adjusted using the tool bar
Tip: Size the message text to fill the box on the screen. The message will be displayed in Player
Entry as it shows in this box.
6.
Select when you would like the message to be displayed:
Display for all dates, or
Display from (to display the message for a given range of dates; select the start and end dates
you require).
Don't display (allows you to retain the message but prevent it being displayed, perhaps you
have a message you wish to display when the course is closed, you would normally select the
Don't display option and change this when the course is closed).
7.
Select the Player Entry profile that will be used to display this message. This allow you to restrict
the display of the message to only those computers running a specific Player Entry profile.
To edit an existing message
1.
In the main HandicapMaster program, in the left hand task pane, select Competitions place.
2.
On the right hand pane, double-click Messages.
3.
Do one of the following:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
240
HandicapMaster®
Select a message and press ENTER Key, or
Double-click the message entry in the list.
You may then edit the details as required.
Tip: Size the message text to fill the box on the screen. The message will be displayed in Player Entry
as it shows in this box.
To delete a message
1.
In the main HandicapMaster program, in the left hand task pane, select Competitions place.
2.
On the right hand pane, double-click Messages.
3.
Select a message in the list and do one of the following:
Click Delete a Message in the Player Entry Messages Tasks.
Press the DELETE key.
To create a message with a mixture of text and images
You may create a message with a mixture of text and images. To so this,
a) Start Microsoft Word and create the message in Word, adding pictures as required.
b) Select all of the document (text and pictures) and select EDIT, then COPY.
c) In HandicapMaster, PASTE the message into the message box.
If the message is too large to fit into the message box, delete the contents and resize the message in
Word. Then try again.
Notes:
For best results, use "clip-art" images (such as WMF format files).
You may also directly paste bitmap files (.BMP) into the letter text. There is a file size limit of
512KB.
Notes:
If displaying messages to your members on the Player Entry computer the Windows Screen Saver
will activate if configured.
You may use the tool bar to adjust the colour of text , and adjust the alignment.
You may mix fonts and colours within a message.
The number of lines in the Message text box is the limit of the message that will be displayed on the
Player Entry terminals.
If you have multiple messages enabled either for a given date range or for all dates these messages
will be displayed in rotation with short delay between each message
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
The Player Entry System
241
14.13 Change choice of Profile for a specific computer
If you have more than one Player Entry profile configured, you will be prompted to choose the profile to
use when you start Player Entry. At this time, you may choose to Always use this choice on this
computer.
At a later date, it is possible to reset this selection so that an alternative profile can be used on that
computer.
To reset the choice of profile for a computer
To clear the automatic choice of Player Entry profile (and equipment) for a specific computer, do the
following:
1. On the left hand task pane, select Competitions place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Assignments.
3. Do one of the following:
Select the applicable computer and press DELETE Key, or
Click Clear an Assignment in the Assignment Tasks.
When next starting Player Entry on the applicable computer, you will be able to choose which profile to
use.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
242
HandicapMaster®
14.14 Adding Visitors
If you have HandicapMaster linked to a Central Database of Handicaps (England, Scotland, Wales and
Ireland), you may configure Player Entry so that when a Visitor types their national ID or swipes a
magnetic card with their National ID on it, they can automatically be added to the HandicapMaster
database using the CDH service.
See Add Visitors through Player Entry for further details.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
243
Chapter
Bookings
15
244
HandicapMaster®
15
Bookings
15.1
Competition Entry
15.1.1 Introduction
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
The Bookings facility allows players to book into future opened competitions (automating the
Competition Entry sheet on the Clubhouse wall).
The booking list can, if required, be incorporated into a start list once bookings for a competition has
closed.
You may allow bookings to be accepted through the Player Entry system and/or Master Scoreboard
web site.
A Bookings Template allows you to set the format of the bookings list (and use this for future
competitions).
You may specify:
The block of tee times available for booking,
Unavailable tee times from within this block, and
The time frame within which bookings may be accepted.
Players may book:
a specific tee time or
a place within a block from which a specific tee time will then be drawn.
Collecting Bookings for a Competition
Bookings may be collected through the HandicapMaster Player Entry system, or Master Scoreboard
web site, or through external Booking Systems.
In addition, if you have an account with BRS Golf, you may download competition bookings from the
BRS system onto Start Sheets.
A broadband internet connection between HandicapMaster and Master Scoreboard web site is
required, along with an account on Master Scoreboard.
If Bookings are being collected through the HandicapMaster Player Entry system, bookings may be
made by a club official or by the player themselves using the score entry screen Access is identical as
for score entry, i.e. either by Name or PIN. In addition, users with direct access to the computer can
book via the standard HandicapMaster windows.
The booking entry screen may be configured to show names of players already booked in, or else as a
slot that is taken, without identification of player.
The Score entry/bookings screen offers a choice of, either or both, score entry, or booking into a future
opened competition. If the latter is selected, then future opened competitions, available for advance
booking, are displayed.
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions of
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Bookings
245
HandicapMaster
Contents
Bookings Templates
Prepare a Competition to receive Bookings
Opens Competitions; Players paying online to enter competition
Manage Bookings within HandicapMaster
Manage Bookings using Player Entry System
Enable the Bookings Function in Player Entry System
Online Bookings
View a History of the Bookings received
Cancellation of Bookings
See Also
Import Competition Bookings from BRS Golf
15.1.2 Bookings Templates
15.1.2.1 Introduction to Bookings Templates
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
'Setting Up' of a Booking Template requires you to identify certain characteristics of how players will
book into a competition (such as will they choose their own Tee Time?).
Once a Booking Template has been set up, the format is held on the database for future reference. If
you choose the Template at a later date, the same settings will be used again; providing a level of
consistency when running re-occurring competitions such as Medals.
You will need at least one Bookings Template before you may configure HandicapMaster to receive
bookings into a competition.
See Also
Create a Bookings Template
Modify a Bookings Template
Delete a Bookings Template
The Bookings Template Wizard
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
246
HandicapMaster®
15.1.2.2 Create a Bookings Template
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To create a new Bookings Template
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions drop-down menu, click Set up a Bookings Template, then New.
On the left hand task pane, select Bookings place. On the right hand pane, double-click
Templates (Bookings). In the left hand column, click Create a new Template task.
2.
Select the template Information using the Bookings Template Wizard provided.
15.1.2.3 Modify a Bookings Template
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To modify the details of an existing Bookings Template
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions drop-down menu, click Set up a Bookings Template and select a
Template from the list displayed.
On the left hand task pane, select Bookings place. On the right hand pane, double-click
Templates (Bookings). Select a Template and press ENTER Key.
2.
Modify the template Information using the Bookings Template Wizard provided.
Note
When a competition is opened through the Open a New Competition wizard, the Bookings Template
properties applied to that competition cannot be varied by subsequently modifying the template.
The Booking properties applied to an opened (or undone closed competition) can be modified through
the Config button on the Enter Scores Toolbar.
15.1.2.4 Delete a Bookings Template
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To delete an existing Bookings Template
1. On the left hand task pane, select Bookings place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Templates (Bookings).
3. Do one of the following:
Select a Template and press DELETE Key, or
Right-click over a selected Template, then select Delete.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Bookings
247
15.1.2.5 The Bookings Template Wizard
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
The Bookings Templates Wizard steps through the stages of setting up a template for Bookings.
How will Players Book In?
1. In the Name box, enter a name for this Template. It is suggested that the name should be descriptive
of the type of Bookings being configured, so that the correct template may more easily be chosen
when configuring a competition for Bookings.
2. Select either A Tee Time or A Place in a Block of Times.
Where players enter into a block of tee times, this allows the organising committee to draw tee times
(e.g. draw partners) once the bookings has closed.
3. Click Next
Tee Times
4. Select the Tee the players will start from in the Games Start from list and select the first and last tee
times available for this competition.
5. In the Interval list, select the minutes between each Tee time.
6. In the Players per Tee Time list, select whether play will be in twos, threes or fours.
7. Tick the Use Two Tees box if a second Tee is to be used. For example, where play will be from the
1st and 10th Tees.
If a second Tee is to be used, select the Second Tee the players will start from and select the first
and last tee times available for this Tee.
8. If players are to enter in Blocks of times, select either the number of blocks to offer for players to book
in to, or select how many tee times will make up each block (and HandicapMaster will automatically
calculate the number of blocks required).
9. Click Next
Booking available to Players
10.In the Bookings to be accepted ... boxes, select the time and date when bookings is to be opened
and the time and date when bookings is to close for this competition.
11.In the Players may book ... section, tick In the Clubhouse if you wish players to be able to book
through Player Entry, and tick Online if you wish players to be able to book through the Master
Scoreboard web site.
12.If you have selected players may book online only, in the Online Booking section, tick the Players to
Pay by Debit/Credit Card when booking box if you wish players to only be able to enter if they pay
online at the time of entry.
Options
Selected options will b e availab le depending upon your previous selections...
13.Tick the Allow players without Handicaps box if you wish to allow players who do not have a
Handicap to be able to book into the competition.
14.Tick the Show names of players already booked In box if you wish players to be able to see which
other players have booked into the competition.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
248
HandicapMaster®
15.If booking into blocks of times, tick the Show Tee times associated with each Block box if you wish
to define blocks as groups of times (for example, "9.00 to 9.50", "10.00 to 10:50", etc) for players to
select from.
16.If bookings are being received on Master Scoreboard web site and through Player Entry, and you
wish players to be able to book through Player Entry ahead of being able to book online, tick the
Delay accepting bookings via web site by... box and set a delay.
17.If the competition is a team competition, tick the Players must book their partners into the
competition (Team Competitions) box if you wish players to be able to book all of the players in their
team into the competition.
18.If the competition is a singles competition, and players are choosing their own tee time, tick the
Players may book others into the same Tee Time (Singles competitions) box if you wish to allow
players to book their “friends” into the same tee time as themselves.This option is only operational
for singles, not team, competitions.
19.If players are being asked to pay online when booking, tick the Visitors booking online must supply
CDH numbers box if you wish all players to provide a CDH number when booking.
20.Click Next
Tee Availability
21.If you have a section of tee times that are not available for this competition, un-tick the box alongside
the times displayed. This will prevent these times from being used for Bookings.
22.Click Next
Public Notice
23.If you are using the Master Scoreboard service, you may display a message on the booking page for
this competition on the web site. Enter the message in the Web Site Public Notice box.
Note: You may emphasise sections of the message by wrapping the emphasised text with '<b>' and
'</b>'. For example. to display the following message "Payment for entry to this competition must be
paid on the day of the competition." enter "Payment for entry to this competition <b>must be paid</b>
on the day of the competition."
24.Click Next then Finish
15.1.3 Prepare a Competition to receive Bookings
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To configure a Competition to receive Bookings
1. If you do not already have a Bookings Template suitable for this competition, create a Bookings
Template.
2. Do one of the following:
When Opening a New Competition, tick the Use Bookings box and then choose the required
Bookings Template, or
If the competition has already been opened, either
i. Highlight the competition in the Opened Competitions list and select Bookings in the
Competition Tasks.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Bookings
249
or
a. Select Enter Scores and choose the applicable competition.
b. Click the Config button on the Enter Scores Toolbar.
c. Click the Bookings tab.
d. Click Configure Bookings button.
3. Choose the required Bookings Template.
15.1.4 Modify Booking Arrangements
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To modify booking arrangements already configured for a competition
1. Do one of the following:
Highlight the competition in the Opened Competitions list and select Bookings Received in the
Competition Tasks. Click Re-configure Bookings Arrangements in the Bookings Tasks
On the left hand task pane, select Bookings place. On the right hand pane, double-click
Competitions. Double-click the applicable competition in the list. Click Re-configure Bookings
Arrangements in the Bookings Tasks.
Select Enter Scores and choose the applicable competition. Click the Config button on the Enter
Scores Toolbar. Click the Bookings tab. Click Amend Bookings button.
2. Modify the Bookings arrangements using the Bookings Wizard.
To add additional Tee Times to the booking sheet
If you need to add additional Tee times to an existing bookings arrangement, do the following:
1. Do one of the following:
On the left hand task pane, select Bookings place. On the right hand pane, double-click
Competitions. Double-click the applicable competition in the list. Click Re-configure Bookings
Arrangements in the Bookings Tasks.
Select Enter Scores and choose the applicable competition. Click the Config button on the Enter
Scores Toolbar. Click the Bookings tab. Click Amend Bookings button.
2. In the Bookings Wizard, click Next, then Next again
3. On the Available Tee Times page, click Add button.
Click Before First Tee Time to add the Tee time to before the current set of times, or
Click After Last Tee Time to add the Tee time to the end of the current set of times.
Repeat if more than one additional Tee time is required.
4. Complete the wizard to apply the additional Tee time(s).
Note:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
250
HandicapMaster®
Adding Tee times after booking arrangements have previously been created for a competition is only
available when players are booking into Tee Times (not into blocks of times).
15.1.5 Cancel Booking Arrangements
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To cancel booking into a competition (cancel all bookings arrangements for the
competition)
1. To cancel taking bookings into a competition (deleting any bookings already received), do one of
the following
On the left hand task pane, select Bookings place. On the right hand pane, double-click
Competitions. Double-click the applicable competition in the list. Click Cancel Bookings
Arrangements in the Bookings Tasks.
Select Enter Scores and choose the applicable competition. Click the Config button on the Enter
Scores Toolbar. Click the Bookings tab. Click Cancel Bookings button.
15.1.6 The Bookings Wizard
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
The Bookings Wizard steps through the stages of modifying bookings arrangements for a competition.
Booking available to Players
1. In the Bookings to be accepted ... boxes, select the time and date when bookings is to be opened
and the time and date when bookings is to close for this competition.
2. In the Players may book ... section, tick In the Clubhouse if you wish players to be able to book
through Player Entry, and tick Online if you wish players to be able to book through the Master
Scoreboard web site.
3. If you have selected players may book online only, in the 'Opens' Competitions section, tick the This
is a club 'Open'; Players must Pay when booking box if you wish players to only be able to enter if
they pay online at the time of entry.
Options
Selected options will b e availab le depending upon your previous selections...
4. Tick the Allow players without Handicaps box if you wish to allow players who do not have a
Handicap to be able to book into the competition.
5. Tick the Show names of players already booked In box if you wish players to be able to see which
other players have booked into the competition.
6. If booking into blocks of times, tick the Show Tee times associated with each Block box if you wish
to define blocks as groups of times (for example, "9.00 to 9.50", "10.00 to 10:50", etc) for players to
select from.
7. If bookings are being received on Master Scoreboard web site and through Player Entry, and you
wish players to be able to book through Player Entry ahead of being able to book online, tick the
Delay accepting bookings via web site by... box and set a delay.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Bookings
251
8. If the competition is a team competition, tick the Players must book their partners into the
competition (Team Competitions) box if you wish players to be able to book all of the players in their
team into the competition.
9. If the competition is a singles competition, and players are choosing their own tee time, tick the
Players may book others into the same Tee Time (Singles competitions) box if you wish to allow
players to book their “friends” into the same tee time as themselves.This option is only operational
for singles, not team, competitions.
10.If players are being asked to pay online when booking, tick the Visitors booking online must supply
CDH numbers box if you wish all players to provide a CDH number when booking.
Tee Availability
11.If you have a section of tee times that are not available for this competition, un-tick the box alongside
the times displayed. This will prevent these times from being used for Bookings.
12.Click Next
Public Notice
13.If you are using the Master Scoreboard service, you may display a message on the booking page for
this competition on the web site. Enter the message in the Web Site Public Notice box.
Note: You may emphasise sections of the message by wrapping the emphasised text with '<b>' and
'</b>'. For example. to display the following message "Payment for entry to this competition must be
paid on the day of the competition." enter "Payment for entry to this competition <b>must be paid</b>
on the day of the competition."
14.Click Next then Finish
15.1.7 Opens Competitions; Players paying online to enter competition
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
You may use the HandicapMaster bookings facility to offer players (including visitors) the option to book
into future club “Opens” online, with payment taken online at the time the player books.
This may also be used to require members to Pay online to book Members-only competitions.
To do this, you will need
1. An account with an online payment provider (such as SagePay, Paypal, etc) to process card
payments in a secure manner, and
2. A subscription to the HandicapMaster Bookings Payments service.
3. One or more bookings templates set for Online booking only, with option Players to Pay by Debit/
Credit Card when booking ticked.
The HandicapMaster Bookings Payments service
When you sign up for the Bookings Payments service, HandicapMaster Ltd will configure details of your
online payment provider to the Master Scoreboard website, along with your chosen screen and email
text (such as your preferred “Terms and Conditions” that players will see when booking).
Once this information has been configured and successfully commissioned, you will be ready to start
accepting entries to Opens competitions online. At this stage, you may wish to place a link or embed a
link to the available Opens from your club website. Please contact HandicapMaster Ltd for further
details about this.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
252
HandicapMaster®
15.1.8 Manage Bookings within HandicapMaster
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To Book a specific tee time or a slot within a block.
Select an Opened Competition:
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings Place.
2. Select Competitions.
3. Highlight the required competition with a single click.
Configure Booking Criteria:
1. If not previously configured, prepare the competition to receive bookings.
Book a Player into the Competition
Once the booking criteria for a competition have been completed the bookings function on the left hand
pane has a new function.
1. Click on Bookings Received in the Bookings or Competitions Tasks (in the left hand pane). The right
hand pane shows the times available for booking, including the Bookings Toolbar.
2. Click on a specific time or slot then either
click Book Player In from the Bookings tasks menu, or
double-click on the selected line or cell, or
start typing the surname of the player to be booked.
The list of players is displayed. The list will be restricted to the names of the players who are
eligible to enter the competition only.
3. Choose the Player and click OK, or double-click the Player name.
To move a player's booking
1. Click on Bookings Received in the Bookings Tasks (in the left hand pane). The right hand pane
shows the times available for booking.
2. Click on a specific time or slot then click Book Player In from the competition tasks menu.
Alternatively double-click on the selected tee time.
The list of players is displayed. The list will be restricted to the names of the players who are eligible to
enter the competition only.
3. Choose the Player and then either click OK, or double-click the Players name
4. If the player is already booked in then you will be asked to confirm that you wish the player's booking
to be moved.
To remove player from bookings list.
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings Place
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Bookings
253
2. Select Competitions
3. Highlight the required competition with a single click.
4. Click on Bookings Received in the Bookings Tasks (in the left hand pane). The right hand pane
shows the times available for booking and the players booked into the Competition.
5. Select player. then either
click Remove Player in the left hand pane, or
right-click over the Player's name and select Remove Player from Competition, or
press the DELETE key on the keyboard.
15.1.9 The Bookings Toolbar
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
When the Bookings list for a future competition is requested, the following Toolbar is displayed above
the bookings:
Bookings Buttons
On the bar are the buttons as follows:
Button
Type
Description
Hide / ShowHide or Show the left hand pane.
List or
Sheet
Switch the layout of the display between List (a players shown in a list,
along with the date and time when they booked in) or Sheet (a display of
the bookings in a "spread sheet" style layout).
Report
Display a printable report of the bookings received.
Config
Re-configure the arrangements for players to book into this competition.
Refresh
Refresh the screen, updating the screen to display the latest bookings
received.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
254
HandicapMaster®
15.1.10 Manage Bookings using Player Entry System
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To Book a specific tee time or a slot within a block.
1. Enable the Bookings Function in Player Entry System with appropriate player entry setting as above.
The option "Book a Future Competition" will be made available on the first screen in the Player Entry
system.
2. Prepare competitions to receive Bookings using the Bookings wizard.
Players will be able to select any available competition and book into a time slot or into a block of
times.
To allow Players to view the Bookings they have made through Player Entry
Enable the View Information service in the Player Entry system, and select the My Golf service. Up to
the next four forthcoming bookings a player has made will be displayed on the My Golf screen.
15.1.11 Online Bookings
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To offer Members the option to book competitions online
You may offer members the option to book online through the Master Scoreboard web site. This may
be in place of, or in association with, taking bookings through the Player Entry system.
To offer booking into competitions online you will need to
1. Request an account on Master Scoreboard
2. Amend the Master Scoreboard account through the Control Panel so that each member logs in
individually into Master Scoreboard
3. Prepare competitions to receive Bookings using the Bookings wizard (including setting the bookings
to be accepted online)
Players will be able to select any available competition and book into a time slot or into a block of
times.
15.1.12 Enable the Bookings Function in Player Entry System
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To Enable the Bookings Function in the Player Entry System
1.
Configure Player Entry using the Configure Player Entry Wizard.
Tick the Allow Players to Cancel their Bookings in Future Competitions box to allow Players to
be able to cancel bookings through the Player Entry system.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Bookings
255
Tick the Book into Future Competitions box to turn on Bookings in the Player Entry system.
Tick the View Information service box, then My Bookings box to allow players the option to
check the bookings they have made into future competitions.
15.1.13 View History of Bookings Received
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
You may view the history of bookings received into a chosen competition, This report shows who
booked in (by whom), when and how they booked in.
To view the history of bookings received into a competition
If the competition is currently open:
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings Place
2. Select Competitions
3. Right-click over the required competition and select History of Bookings
Alternatively,
1. On the Reports menu, select Bookings Reports, then click History of Bookings (Opened
competition)
If the competition has been closed:
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings Place
2. Select Competitions
3. Right-click over the required competition and select History of Bookings (Closed competition)
15.1.14 Cancellation of Bookings
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
If the Bookings is configured to allow players to cancel their bookings into competitions, the following
policy will be applied to requests for cancellations:
Cancellation policy
1. Players cancelling their own booking
For players to be able to request removal from a competition booking, the setting in FILE->OPTIONS>BOOKING tab must be turned on. Then...
a) Players can request their booking cancelled through Player Entry or Master Scoreboard (as
applicable).
b) If a player requests a cancellation in a team competition, then the whole team entry will be cancelled
(partners and all).
c) Players cannot cancel their booking if another player booked them in (as a partner for a team). I.e.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
256
HandicapMaster®
only the player who originated the booking may affect the cancellation.
2. Administrators cancelling a player's booking
This must be performed through the main HandicapMaster program (not through Player Entry and not
via MasterScoreboard.co.uk web site).
Administrators may remove a single player, even when this player was booked as part of a team.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Bookings
15.2
257
Group Bookings
15.2.1 Introduction
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
The Group Bookings facility enables you to manage Golf and Clubhouse bookings. For example,
bookings received from Golf Societies may be recorded and managed, including Food reservations
and Function Room reservations.
You may record bookings for golf, recording number of players, number of tee times, times of play and
number of Buggies pre-booked.
You may also record bookings for food and refreshments, as well as bookings for function rooms.
Bookings recorded may be tracked on a Calendar view for quick analysis, much like a Diary. You may
also add ad-hoc notes to the Calendar using Calendar Notes.
Contents
Record a Group Booking
Modify a Group Booking
Update payment status for Group Booking
Delete a Group Booking
The Group Bookings Wizard
Create a booking confirmation report
Create a report of Catering reservations
Create a copy of (duplicate) a Group Booking
Stop a Group Booking showing on Fixture Lists
See Also
Calendar Notes
Create a Fixture List
15.2.2 Record a Group Booking
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To record a new Group Booking
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings place.
2. On the right hand pane, do one of the following:
Double-click Calendar, select the applicable date in the calendar and then click the Group
Bookings button on the toolbar, or
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
258
HandicapMaster®
Double-click Group Bookings and then in the left hand pane, click New Booking.
3. Record the Booking using the Group Booking wizard.
15.2.3 Modify a Group Booking
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To modify a Group Booking
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings place.
2. On the right hand pane, do one of the following:
Double-click Calendar, select the applicable date in the calendar and then click the link to the
group booking, or
Double-click Group Bookings and then double-click the applicable booking in the list.
3. Edit the Booking using the Group Booking wizard.
15.2.4 Update payment status for Group Booking
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To update the payment status of a Group Booking after receiving payment
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Group Bookings.
3. Do one of the following:
Click the applicable booking in the list and then, in the left hand column, click Update Payment
Status.
Right-click over the applicable booking in the list, then select Update Payment Status in the
pop-up menu.
15.2.5 Delete a Group Booking
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To delete a Group Booking
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Group Bookings.
3. Do one of the following:
Click the applicable booking in the list and then, in the left hand column, click Delete a Booking.
Right-click over the applicable booking in the list, then select Delete Group Booking in the pop-
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Bookings
259
up menu.
15.2.6 The Group Bookings Wizard
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
The Group Bookings Wizard steps through the stages of recording a Golf or Clubhouse booking, such
as from a Golf Society.
Booking Details
1. In the Organisation box, enter the name of the group placing the booking (for example, the name of
the Golf Society).
2. In the Is Booking section, tick the items that will make up the booking.
3. In the For Date box, select the date of the booking.
Details of who has placed the booking
4. In the Name box, enter the name of the person placing the booking for the group.
5. In the Telephone box, enter this person’s telephone number, if known.
6. In the E-mail Address box, enter this person’s email address, if known.
Golf
7. In the Number of Players box, enter the number of players that this group is booking.
8. Click the Set Green Fees button to record a charge for the golf (i.e. Green Fees).
9. In the Number of Tee Times box, enter the number of Tee Times being reserved for this group
booking.
10.In the Number of Buggies box, record the number of Golf Buggies that are being pre-ordered with
this booking.
11.If one or more buggies are being ordered, click the Set Buggy Fees button to record a charge for the
buggies.
12.In the First Tee Time and Last Tee Time boxes, enter the range of times being reserved for this
group.
Green Fee Charges
13.Confirm that the charges for Green Fees and associated golf elements of the booking are correct.
To add additional fee items (for example, adding a charge for ‘Prizes’), click Add button.
To edit a fee listed, double-click the fee item in the list.
To delete a fee listed, highlight the fee in the list with a single click. Then click Remove button.
Catering
14.In the Catering Notes box, enter any notes relating to food and refreshments.
Catering Charges
15.Click the Add button to add any charges for Food and Refreshments.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
260
HandicapMaster®
To edit a fee listed, double-click the fee item in the list.
To delete a fee listed, highlight the fee in the list with a single click. Then click Remove button.
Function Room Charges
16.Click the Add button to add any charges for Room Bookings.
To edit a fee listed, double-click the fee item in the list.
To delete a fee listed, highlight the fee in the list with a single click. Then click Remove button.
Notes
17.In the Notes box, enter any general notes about this booking.
Payment Details
18.In the Deposit box, enter any amount that is due for payment by the customer to secure the booking.
19.In the Status list, select the current status of payment for this booking.
20.Tick the Include on Fixture Lists box if you wish this booking to show when creating a Fixture List
report and when publishing to Master Scoreboard website.
21.Click Finish button to save the booking details.
15.2.7 Create a booking confirmation report
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To create a 'Confirmation of Reservation' report for a Group Booking
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Group Bookings.
3. Do one of the following:
Click the applicable booking in the list and then, in the left hand column, click Report
(Confirmation of Reservation).
Right-click over the applicable booking in the list, then select Report (Confirmation of
Reservation) in the pop-up menu.
15.2.8 Create a report of Catering reservations
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To create a report of forthcoming catering reservations for Group Bookings
1. Do one of the following:
a) On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings place.
b) On the right hand pane, double-click Group Bookings.
c) In the left hand column, click Report (Catering) task.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Bookings
261
or
a) On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Reports place.
b) Above the list of reports, select Bookings tab.
c) In the list of reports, double-click Catering.
2. In the Restrict report to entries dated box, choose the time period to be covered by the report. Click
OK.
15.2.9 Create a copy of (duplicate) a Group Booking
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To create a copy of an existing Group Booking
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Group Bookings.
3. Right-click over the applicable Booking in the list, then select Create Copy in the pop-up menu.
4. Select a Date for the new copy. Click OK.
15.2.10 Stop a Group Booking showing on Fixture Lists
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To stop a Booking from being included on Fixture Lists (Report and Master Scoreboard
website)
1.
Do one of the following:
Edit the Booking and, on the last page of the wizard, untick Include on Fixture Lists box, or
On the Left Hand Task Pane..
1. Select Bookings place
2. Double-click Group Bookings
3. Select the Booking to be included or excluded from Fixture Lists and right-click.
4. On the pop-up menu, select Fixture List.
Notes:
Repeat this action to reverse whether HandicapMaster will include the Booking in Fixture List
reports.
See Also
Create a Fixture List
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
262
15.3
HandicapMaster®
Calendar Notes
15.3.1 Introduction
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
Calendar Notes are additional entries that you may add to the Bookings Calendar as memo's, etc.
These may cover any topic that you like and will be visible to all users that have access to the Bookings
system.These may also be included on a Fixture List that you may create from the Calendar.
You may also record Golf Society, etc., bookings using the Group Bookings facility.
Contents
Add a note to the Bookings Calendar
Edit a note on the Bookings Calendar
Remove a note from the Bookings Calendar
Print a Calendar Note
Create a copy of (i.e. duplicate) a note
Stop a note showing on Fixture Lists
See Also
Group Bookings
Create a Fixture List
15.3.2 Add a note to the Bookings Calendar
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To record a new Calendar Note
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings place.
2. On the right hand pane, do one of the following:
Double-click Calendar, select the applicable date in the calendar and then click the New
Calendar Note button on the toolbar, or
Double-click Calendar Notes and then in the left hand pane, click New Note.
3. Record the Note, adding a Title, Date and Details.
4. Tick the Include on Fixture Lists box if you wish this note to show when creating a Fixture List report
and when publishing to Master Scoreboard website.
5. Click OK.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Bookings
263
15.3.3 Edit a note on the Bookings Calendar
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To modify an existing Calendar Note
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings place.
2. On the right hand pane, do one of the following:
Double-click Calendar, select the applicable date in the calendar and then click the entry for this
note in the Calendar, or
Double-click Calendar Notes and then in the right hand pane, double-click the applicable Note.
3. Edit the Note, amending the Title, Date, Details and Include on Fixture Lists as applicable. Click OK.
15.3.4 Remove a note from the Bookings Calendar
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To delete a Calendar Note
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Calendar Notes.
3. Do one of the following:
Click the applicable note in the list and then, in the left hand column, click Delete a Note task.
Right-click over the applicable note in the list, then select Delete Note in the pop-up menu.
15.3.5 Print a note
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To print the contents of a Calendar Note
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Calendar Notes.
3. Do one of the following:
Click the applicable note in the list and then, in the left hand column, click Report (Calendar
Note) task.
Right-click over the applicable note in the list, then select Report (Calendar Note) in the pop-up
menu.
See Also
Create a Fixture List
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
264
HandicapMaster®
15.3.6 Create a copy of (duplicate) a note
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To create a copy of an existing Calendar Note
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Calendar Notes.
3. Right-click over the applicable note in the list, then select Create Copy in the pop-up menu.
4. Select a Date for the new copy. Click OK.
15.3.7 Stop a note showing on Fixture Lists
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
To stop a Calendar Note being included on Fixture Lists (Report and Master Scoreboard
website)
1.
Do one of the following:
Edit the note and untick Include on Fixture Lists box, or
On the Left Hand Task Pane..
1. Select Bookings place
2. Double-click Calendar Notes
3. Select the note to be included or excluded from Fixture Lists and right-click.
4. On the pop-up menu, select Fixture List.
Notes:
Repeat this action to reverse whether HandicapMaster will include the note in Fixture List reports.
See Also
Create a Fixture List
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Bookings
15.4
265
Create a Fixture List report
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
Using the Bookings Calendar, you may create a Fixture List from the entries you have added to the
calendar.
You may create a Fixture List report (see below).
The Fixture List will also be published to Master Scoreboard automatically, covering the period from the
publish date through to the end of the following year.
To create a Fixture List report
1. On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Bookings place.
2. On the right hand pane, double-click Calendar.
3. Do one of the following:
In the left hand column, click Report (Fixture List) task.
Click the Create Fixture List Report button on the Toolbar above the Calendar.
To add addition items to the Fixture List
You may add ad-hoc items to the Fixture List by creating Calender Notes.
See Also
Stop a future competition being included in a Fixture List
Stop a Group Booking being included in a Fixture List
Stop a Calendar Note being included in a Fixture List
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Chapter
16
Match-Play Competitions
Match-Play Competitions
16
Match-Play Competitions
16.1
Introduction
267
Entering and processing Match-play Knock out Competitions.
HandicapMaster can allow you to manage club Knockout competitions. You may prepare a Match Play
competition, by producing a draw from a list of entrants (at random or in the order the entrants are
chosen) and then keep the draw sheet up to date by entering results as matches and rounds
progress.
The draw is presented in the shape of a chart (using the traditional box structure).
When match results are entered, winners are automatically propagated to the next round enabling the
draw sheet to be reprinted with the updated results.
Singles and Pairs competitions may be operated. For pairs events, the pairings are drawn as entered.
That is, HandicapMaster does not choose partners at random.
More than one Knockout competition may be maintained simultaneously.
This Chapter shows how to prepare and maintain Knockout competitions.
Contents
Performing a Draw
Adding, changing and removing players in a Draw
Players to book into the Draw
The Draw Chart
Re-running a draw
Enter results of a Match
Clear results of a Match
Re-print the Draw
Change a Player listed in the Draw
Change the last date for a round to be played by
Delete a Draw
See Also
Stop a Knockout Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
268
16.2
HandicapMaster®
Performing a Knockout Draw
A draw for a new Knockout competition is made using the Match Play Draw window. The entrants are
identified and then a random draw is made, placing any byes towards the 'edge' of the draw (as in the
best traditions of Club Golf).
To perform a Knockout Draw
1.
Do one of the following:
From the Competitions menu, click Match Play Knockout Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Knockout Competitions.
Press CTRL + K keys together.
2.
Select the Create a New Draw task, or press the INSERT key on the keyboard.
3.
In the Name of Competition box, enter the title of the Knockout.
4.
For Format of Competition, choose either Singles or Pairs competition (E.g. Pairs competitions
are Foursomes, Four Ball Better Ball, etc.).
5.
In the Eligibility by gender section both genders are selected by default. You may limit the draw to
a single gender by un-ticking one gender.
6.
Tick the Include Visitors box if you wish to include Visitors in the Draw.
7.
Click Next >
8.
Add players to the draw. See add, change or remove players from draw for assistance with
selecting players into the draw.
Use the Find button to locate a player who is already entered in the draw, in the list of players
entered.
Use the Auto-Fill button to populate the Choose Entrants list with players either from
leading players in a qualifying Stroke-play competition (singles Knock-out Draws only), or
players who have booked into an opened competition (Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and
EGA-Network Editions only).
Selecting qualifiers from qualifying round
In the Number of Qualifiers box, select the number of players who qualified for the Knock-out.
You may select up to 64 players to qualify.
In the Based on list, identify whether the qualifying players are the leading players based on
Nett or Gross scores.
Tick the Use aggregated scores for multi-round competitions box if you wish to select the
qualifiers from the competition based on overall scores from a multiple-round or alternative
day competition.
Click Next.
Select the qualifying competition to be used from the list of closed competitions and click OK.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Match-Play Competitions
269
For Pairs competitions, use the Reorder button to randomise the pairings for each team, if
required.
8.
Once all of the entrants have been listed, click Next >
The Number Of Entrants box on the Match Play Draw (draw) window identifies the number of
players or teams who have been entered into the draw.
The Anticipated Number Of Rounds box identifies the number of rounds that will be necessary for
the competition to proceed to a conclusion.
9.
In the Start Competition at box, choose the appropriate title of the first round. When there are
more than three rounds to be played, HandicapMaster offers the choice of '1st Round' or 'Preliminary
Round'.
10. Select the Order of Draw (order in which the entrants are drawn) as either in random, in General
Numerical Order or retain the order the entrants were chosen. See Ordering of Players in Knock Out
Draw for further details.
Note: The General Numerical Draw option is only available if there are 64 or fewer entrants.
11. Click Next >
12. Unless you have selected to order the draw into a General Numeric Draw (where any required
Byes will be placed at the positions for the lowest qualifying places automatically), you may choose
where any Byes required to complete the draw are positioned in the draw.
Select Top if you wish to place all of the byes at the top of the draw.
Select Bottom if you wish to place all of the byes at the bottom of the draw.
Select Top and Bottom (recommended) if you wish to place the byes in the traditional positions
of top and bottom edges of the draw.
Select Custom if you wish to configure a different layout of byes within the draw. By default, byes
will be placed in the same matches as the 'Top and Bottom' selection, from which you may then
move the byes around.
To move a bye, select a match in the Switch Bye from box (or click a Bye in the graphical list).
Next, select the match where you would like this bye to be moved to in the to box (or click a
match in the graphical list). Then click Switch.
13. Click Next >
14. Enter the final play date for each round. These dates will be included on the draw sheet.
15. Enter the Last date for match results to be received date to set a last date that players may enter
the match results through the Player Entry system (which is available in the Premier, Network, EGAPremier and EGA-Network Editions editions of HandicapMaster). I.e. Set this to the last date that you
would expect the result of the Final for this competition to be reported through the Player Entry
system.
16. Tick the Include on MasterScoreboard.co.uk box if you wish to allow this Draw to be published to
the MasterScoreboard web site.
17. Click Next >
18. Enter any notes that you wish to append to the end of the report in the Notes (displayed on
Report) box.
19. Click Next >
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
270
HandicapMaster®
20. Click Finish button to perform the draw.
See printing considerations for gaining the best results when printing the Draw Sheet.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Match-Play Competitions
16.3
271
Add, change or remove players from the Draw
Add a player to the Draw
1. Move the highlight to the row or cell either by
a. Using the Up and Down buttons, or
b. Using the UP or DOWN keys on the keyboard, or
c. Clicking in the required cell.
2. Do one of the following:
a. Start typing the name of the player to be added, or
b. Click the highlighted cell, or
c. Press the ENTER key, or
d. Click the Find button, or
e. Click the Auto Fill button.
Change a player in the Draw
1. Move the highlight to the row or cell either by
d. Using the Up and Down buttons, or
e. Using the UP or DOWN keys on the keyboard, or
f. Clicking in the required cell.
2. Select the player to be added to the Draw (see above).
3. Confirm that the player to be added is to replace the existing player.
Remove a player from the Draw
Remove entrants from the list by moving to the entry using the Up, Down or Find buttons, then pressing
either the BACKSPACE or DELETE keys on the Keyboard.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
272
16.4
HandicapMaster®
Players booking into a KO Draw
The Bookings facility is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster
You may ask players to "Book into a Future Competition" (either through Player Entry screens or online
through Master Scoreboard) and import the players who have booked to a Knock-out Draw.
The booking system in HandicapMaster does not natively support booking Knock-out competitions, but
with the right combination of Booking Template settings and an opened stroke-play competition,
bookings to a Knock out competition can be collected.
To collect bookings into a K.O. Draw
1. Create a Booking Template with an appropriate name and the following settings (recommended):
As the Method of Booking, select A Place in a Block of Tee Times.
Depending upon the maximum number of places available in the draw, use these selections:
Singles KO Competitions
Maximum places in the
Draw
Games Start From
Interval
Players Per Tee
Time
8
09:00 to 09:30
10 Minutes
2
16
09:00 to 10:10
10 Minutes
2
32
09:00 to 11:30
10 Minutes
2
64
09:00 to 11:30
10 Minutes
4
128
09:00 to 14:10
10 Minutes
4
Maximum teams in the
Draw
Games Start From
Interval
Players Per Tee
Time
8
09:00 to 09:30
10 Minutes
4
16
09:00 to 10:10
10 Minutes
4
32
09:00 to 11:30
10 Minutes
4
64
09:00 to 14:10
10 Minutes
4
128
09:00 to 19:30
10 Minutes
4
Pairs KO Competitions
Select Use 1 Block(s) (each Tee Used).
2. Open a stroke-play competition
Use an appropriate Template (either a singles competition for a singles KO draw, or a Pairs
competition for a Paris KO Draw).
For Name of Competition, use a name that clarifies the competition is a Knock-out competition.
For Played (or to be played) on, use the date when the draw is to be made.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Match-Play Competitions
273
Select Use Bookings and choose the Booking Template created for this draw.
3. When performing the K.O. Draw, use the Auto-Fill button to import the players booked in to the draw.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
274
16.5
HandicapMaster®
Ordering of Players in KO Draw
When creating a new Knock-out Draw, there are three options for how HandicapMaster will allocate
players to the draw. These are
1. In a random order
This option will randomly distribute the selected players throughout the draw.
2. Into a General Numerical Draw
This option will use the order of the players, as selected into the entrants list, and allocate them to
the draw as recommended by the R&A in the Rules of Golf (Appendix I, section C, subsection 11).
See page 145 of the small R&A Rules book (2012 Edition).
This is intended to be used where matches have been determined by a qualifying round. In this
case, ensure the players are listed in the entrants list in order of qualification (I.e. with the highest
placed qualifier listed at the top, the second place qualifier second, and so on). HandicapMaster will
then draw the players into the order as recommended by the R&A.
This option is only available when the number of entrants does not exceed 64.
3. In order as originally selected (placed top to bottom)
This option will use the order of the players in the entrants list to fill out the draw sheet, filling slots
from top to bottom on the chart. Use this option to ensure players are drawn in a previously
determined order.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Match-Play Competitions
16.6
275
The Knockout Draw Chart
When a Match Play draw is completed, a chart is produced showing the matches. This chart is drawn
in the familiar 'box' format identifying the progress of the winners of each match. The chart is sized
according to the settings of the default printer. The following should be noted:
The chart is designed to be printed on an A3 or A4 printer. The larger the paper the better will
be the results. By default, the Chart will be created for A4 paper. You may change the paper
size to A3 (but you will need a printer that can print A3 paper to be available).
When there are more than 5 rounds to play (i.e. more than 32 entrants or pairs) or six if
printing to A3 paper, the chart is printed on two sheets (top and bottom half of the draw). In this
circumstance, it will be necessary to join the two halves together prior to publishing.
If the maximum paper size being used is A4, it is not recommended to produce a draw with
more than 7 rounds in it (i.e. maximum number of entrants or pairs is 128). The scaling of the
entrants names will become too small otherwise. If there are more than 128 entrants (or pairs)
it is suggested that a preliminary competition is held to reduce the field to 128 before a draw is
undertaken.
Likewise, if paper size A3 is being used, it is not recommended that the number of entrants
exceeds 256.
If the option to display Member Telephone Numbers is selected then the chart may take more
than 2 sheets for larger draws.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
276
16.7
HandicapMaster®
Re-run a Knockout Draw
It is possible to re-run the draw for a competition using the existing entrants, perhaps adding one or
more new entrants to the draw.
To re-run a Draw
1.
Do one of the following:
From the Competitions menu, click Match Play Knockout Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Knockout Competitions.
Press CTRL + K keys together.
2.
Select the Knock-out competition and right-click. Select Update Draw.
3.
Amend the details of the Knock-out as required.
The existing entrants are automatically selected from the choose entrants list ready for a new draw to
be performed. At this time it is possible to add new names to the entrants.
Note
It is not possible to change the gender or inclusion of visitors when editing a draw, these may only be
selected when initially setting up the draw.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Match-Play Competitions
16.8
277
Enter results of a Match
The draw sheets for Match Play Knockout competitions are maintained by entering results of the
Matches as they progress. The draw chart can then be reprinted if required.
The results of matches may be entered;
1. By the administrator using the main HandicapMaster program, or
2. By players through the Player Entry system(*)
To enter (or re-enter) the results of a Knock-out match using HandicapMaster
1.
Do one of the following:
From the Competitions menu, click Match Play Knockout Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Knockout Competitions.
Press CTRL + K keys together.
2.
Select the Knock-out competition and press ENTER key, or select the Record Results of Matches
task. This displays each of the matches for this Draw.
3.
Select a match from the list of Matches to enter the result.
4.
Either,
In the Match Play KO Tasks box, click Record Result of Match, or double click the listed match.
Select the player or team won the tie and choose the appropriate score for the match, or
In the Match Play KO Tasks box, click Enter 'No Result' for a Match if there was no winner to this
match. The opponents awaiting the result of this match will automatically be given a bye in the
next round.
The Chart may now be re-printed.
To enable players to be able to enter match results using Player Entry(*)
(*) This option is available in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions editions of
HandicapMaster.
1. Enable the option in the Player Entry system by
a. On the Competitions menu, select Configure Player Entry...
b. Double-click an applicable Player Entry Settings Profile.
c. On the Services page, tick the Enter Knock-Out Match Results box.
2. Ensure that a future Last Date for Match Results has been configured. Only matches for Knock-Out
competitions where the Last date for match results has not passed will be offered to players by the
Player Entry system.
a. Do one of the following:
From the Competitions menu, click Match Play Knockout Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Knockout Competitions.
Press CTRL + K keys together.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
278
HandicapMaster®
The Last Date for Match Results will be displayed in the list alongside each competition (if
configured). To change the configured date for a competition:
b. Right-click over the applicable competition and select Change Last Date for Match Results in
the pop-up menu.
c. Enter a revised date and click OK.
See Also
Deleting a Knockout competition
Displaying (or hiding) the results of Matches on the Draw Chart
Changing the Name of the Competition
Stop a Knock-out Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Clear results of a Match
Re-print the Draw
Change a Player listed in the Draw
Change a Player to a Bye
Change the last date for a round to be played by
Edit Knockout Competition Notes
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Match-Play Competitions
16.9
279
Clear a result from a Match
The draw sheets for Match Play Knockout competitions are maintained by entering results of the
Matches as they progress. The draw chart can then be reprinted if required.
To clear a result of a match previously entered
1.
Do one of the following:
From the Competitions menu, click Match Play Knockout Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Knockout Competitions.
Press CTRL + K keys together.
2.
Select the Knock-out competition and press ENTER key, or select the Record Results of Matches
task. This displays each of the matches for this Draw.
3.
Select a match from the list of Matches to and right-click. Select Clear Result from Match #...
See Also
Deleting a Knockout competition
Displaying (or hiding) the results of Matches on the Draw Chart
Changing the Name of the Competition
Stop a Knock-out Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Enter results of a Match
Re-print the Draw
Change a Player listed in the Draw
Change a Player to a Bye
Change the last date for a round to be played by
Edit Knockout Competition Notes
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
280
HandicapMaster®
16.10 Re-print the Draw
The draw sheets for Match Play Knockout competitions are maintained by entering results of the
Matches as they progress. The draw chart can then be reprinted if required.
To reprint the Draw Chart
1.
Do one of the following:
From the Competitions menu, click Match Play Knockout Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Knockout Competitions.
Press CTRL + K keys together.
2.
Select the Knock-out competition and press ENTER key. This displays each of the matches for this
Draw.
3.
In the Match Play KO Tasks box, click Re-Print Draw Sheet to reprint the draw sheet for the
chosen competition (from the Match play Knockout Results option). See printing considerations.
See Also
Deleting a Knockout competition
Displaying (or hiding) the results of Matches on the Draw Chart
Changing the Name of the Competition
Stop a Knock-out Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Enter results of a Match
Clear results of a Match
Change a Player listed in the Draw
Change a Player to a Bye
Change the last date for a round to be played by
Edit Knockout Competition Notes
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Match-Play Competitions
281
16.11 Change a player listed in the Draw
The draw sheets for Match Play Knockout competitions are maintained by entering results of the
Matches as they progress. The draw chart can then be reprinted if required.
If a wrong player has been drawn in the Knockout Competition, the Player may substituted for another
Player as follows:
To change a Player listed in the Knockout Competition
1.
Do one of the following:
From the Competitions menu, click Match Play Knockout Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Knockout Competitions.
Press CTRL + K keys together.
2.
Select the Knock-out competition and press ENTER key, or select the Record Results of Matches
task. This displays each of the matches for this Draw.
3.
Select any match from the list of Matches that includes the Player to be changed and right-click.
Select Change a Player.
4.
Choose the Player to be changed, then select a new Player.
See Also
Deleting a Knockout competition
Displaying (or hiding) the results of Matches on the Draw Chart
Changing the Name of the Competition
Stop a Knock-out Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Enter results of a Match
Clear results of a Match
Re-print the Draw
Add a player in place of a Bye
Change a Player to a Bye
Change the last date for a round to be played by
Edit Knockout Competition Notes
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
282
HandicapMaster®
16.12 Add a player in place of a Bye
The draw sheets for Match Play Knockout competitions are maintained by entering results of the
Matches as they progress. The draw chart can then be reprinted if required.
If a player has been missed from the draw, say, a Player may substituted for a Bye as follows:
To add a Player in place of a Bye in the Knockout Competition
1.
Do one of the following:
From the Competitions menu, click Match Play Knockout Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Knockout Competitions.
Press CTRL + K keys together.
2.
Select the Knock-out competition and press ENTER key, or select the Record Results of Matches
task. This displays each of the matches for this Draw.
3.
Select a match containing a Bye from the list of Matches and right-click. Select Change a Player.
4.
Choose the Bye as the player to change, then select the replacement Player.
See Also
Deleting a Knockout competition
Displaying (or hiding) the results of Matches on the Draw Chart
Changing the Name of the Competition
Stop a Knock-out Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Enter results of a Match
Clear results of a Match
Re-print the Draw
Change a player listed in the draw
Change a Player to a Bye
Change the last date for a round to be played by
Edit Knockout Competition Notes
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Match-Play Competitions
283
16.13 Change a Player to a Bye
The draw sheets for Match Play Knockout competitions are maintained by entering results of the
Matches as they progress. The draw chart can then be reprinted if required.
If a player has included in error then a Bye may be substituted for a Player as follows:
To add a Player in place of a Bye in the Knockout Competition
1.
Do one of the following:
From the Competitions menu, click Match Play Knockout Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Knockout Competitions.
Press CTRL + K keys together.
2.
Select the Knock-out competition and press ENTER key, or select the Record Results of Matches
task. This displays each of the matches for this Draw.
3.
Select a match containing a Player from the list of Matches and right-click. Select Change Player
to a Bye.
4.
Choose the the player to change to a bye.
Notes:
The following limitations apply:
The player selected must be in the first round.
There must not be a Bye in the same match.
See Also
Deleting a Knockout competition
Displaying (or hiding) the results of Matches on the Draw Chart
Changing the Name of the Competition
Stop a Knock-out Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Enter results of a Match
Clear results of a Match
Re-print the Draw
Change a player listed in the draw
Change the last date for a round to be played by
Edit Knockout Competition Notes
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
284
HandicapMaster®
16.14 Change the last date for a round to be played by
The draw sheets for Match Play Knockout competitions are maintained by entering results of the
Matches as they progress. The draw chart can then be reprinted if required.
To change a previously entered last play date for a round:
To change the date a round has to be played by
1.
Do one of the following:
From the Competitions menu, click Match Play Knockout Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Knockout Competitions.
Press CTRL + K keys together.
2.
Select the Knock-out competition and press ENTER key, or select the Record Results of Matches
task. This displays each of the matches for this Draw.
3.
Select any match from the list of Matches for the round to be amended and right-click. Select
Change Last Date for Round Matches.
4.
Enter a new last date for this round of matches.
See Also
Deleting a Knockout competition
Displaying (or hiding) the results of Matches on the Draw Chart
Changing the Name of the Competition
Stop a Knock-out Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Enter results of a Match
Clear results of a Match
Re-print the Draw
Change a Player to a Bye
Change a Player listed in the Draw
Edit Knockout Competition Notes
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Match-Play Competitions
16.15 Edit Knockout Competition Notes
To edit a Knockout competition notes
1.
Do one of the following:
From the Competitions menu, click Match Play Knockout Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Knockout Competitions.
Press CTRL + K keys together.
2.
Select the Knock-out competition and right-click. Select Edit Notes.
3.
Edit the notes and click OK to save them.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
285
286
HandicapMaster®
16.16 Delete a Knockout competition
When a Knockout competition has been completed, you may delete the draw as follows:
To clear a Knockout competition
1.
Do one of the following:
From the Competitions menu, click Match Play Knockout Competitions.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Knockout Competitions.
Press CTRL + K keys together.
2.
Select the Knock-out competition and press DELETE Key, or right-click and select Delete
Competition.
3.
Confirm the Deletion.
Notes:
After deleting a Knockout competition any details on MasterScoreboard.co.uk will be deleted when
you next publish to MasterScoreboard.co.uk
You do not need to delete an existing knockout draw before starting additional draws.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
287
Chapter
Ladies Medals
17
288
HandicapMaster®
17
Ladies Medals
17.1
Ladies Medals
Up until January 2009,.the Ladies Golf Union of St. Andrews awarded a Silver and Bronze Medal to
each affiliated club for annual competition.
Silver Division
A Silver Medal is awarded for players with Playing Handicaps up to and including 20.
Bronze Division
A Bronze Medal is awarded for players with Playing Handicaps of 21 to 36 inclusive.
The Silver and Bronze Medals were issued by the Ladies' Golf Union.
From 2009 onwards, each of the four Ladies Associations and Unions of England, Scotland, Wales
and Ireland have taken over the running of this competition, within their countries.
These notes do not apply for the Society or EGA Handicap Editions of HandicapMaster.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Ladies Medals
17.2
289
Identify a competition as a Ladies' Medal qualifier
In order that winners of the ladies medals may be determined, it is necessary to identify which
competitions are to be Ladies Medal qualifiers.
To select competitions as Ladies Medal Qualifiers in advance of entering scores
1.
On the Competitions menu, select Set up a Template,
2.
Choose the Competition template or create a New template,
3.
On the Handicap Allowances page, tick the Ladies Medal Competition box.
To select a competition as a Ladies Medal qualifier after the scores have been applied.
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place
2.
Select Closed Competitions
3.
Select the competition to be included or excluded from Ladies Medal calculations and right-click.
4.
On the pop-up menu, select Ladies Medal.
Notes:
Setting the competition as a Ladies Medal qualifier in advance has the benefit of automatically
flagging all competitions using the same competition template as Ladies Medal qualifiers.
See Also
Report Ladies Medal results
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
290
17.3
HandicapMaster®
Report Ladies Medal results
To view results from the previous season or current season for Ladies medals, view the Ladies Medal
report.
To view results for the medal competitions run in our country, view the applicable report.
To view the Ladies Medal report for your Country
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Reports menu, select Competition Reports and click one of England Golf (Ladies)
Medals, SLGA Ladies Medals, GUW Ladies Medals, ILGU Ladies Medals as applicable,or
In the Reports List, click Competitions tab, then double-click England Golf (Ladies) Medals,
SLGA Ladies Medals, GUW Ladies Medals, ILGU Ladies Medals as applicable.
2.
Choose the data to be analysed (i.e. which year) in the Restrict report to entries dated list.
3.
In England only, in the Show Results as box, choose whether to show Leading Scores or
Winners' Best Scores. "Leading Scores" is a current list of all members in leading order for the Medal
prize. "Winners' Best Scores" reports the scores returned by the winning lady, as required by the
England Golf results submission sheet.
See Also
Identify a competition as a Ladies Medal qualifier
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
291
Chapter
18
Order of Merit and Eclectic
Competitions
292
HandicapMaster®
18
Order of Merit and Eclectic Competitions
18.1
Order of Merit Competitions
18.1.1 Introduction
Operating Order of Merit Competitions
An Order of Merit is a calculation of the 'best player or players' from a set of competitions. It is
sometimes called 'Golfer of the Year'.
You may calculate an Order of Merit based upon positions players achieve in Competitions, or the
equivalent number of Stableford points they score in the competitions. Results are based upon
allocating points to each player for each competition they complete.
Up to eight different points 'Plans' may be used, enabling a different number of points to be awarded for
different categories of Competition.
This chapter describes the process of running an Order of Merit competition.
Overview of running an Order of Merit competition in HandicapMaster
The typical stages of running an Order of Merit competition are
1.
Create the Order of Merit competition in HandicapMaster, defining how points will be allocated
(including 'plans').
2.
Run one or more stroke-play competitions
3.
Update the Order of Merit with the competition scores.
4.
Reprint the Order of Merit results.
Contents
Creating an Order of Merit Competition
Setting up an Order of Merit Plan
Adding or Updating scores for an Order of Merit
Changing the format of an existing Order of Merit
Deleting an Order of Merit Competition
Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
18.1.2 Creating an Order of Merit Competition
To start an Order of Merit Competition
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Reports menu, click Competition Reports, then Order of Merit
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Order of Merit Competitions.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Order of Merit and Eclectic Competitions
2.
Select the Create a New Order of Merit task, or press the INSERT key on the keyboard.
3.
Create the Order of Merit competition using the Order of Merit Competition wizard.
293
See Also
Setting up an Order of Merit Plan
Adding or Updating scores for an Order of Merit
Changing the format of an existing Order of Merit
Edit Order of Merit Competition Notes
Deleting an Order of Merit Competition
Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
18.1.3 The Order of Merit Competition Wizard
The Order of Merit Competition Wizard steps through the stages of starting or amending a
competition.
Name and Nature of Order of Merit Competition
1.
In the Name box, enter a title for this Order of Merit.
2.
In the Description box, enter a description for this Order of Merit. The description will be displayed
on the Order of Merit Competitions list.
3.
In the Type of Competition section, chose one of
How many Stableford Points players score. Points will be awarded for each competition the
player plays in, equivalent to the number of Stableford Points their competition scores would
achieve.
Where players finish in competitions. Points will be awarded according to the overall positions
a player achieves in competitions, based on award structures set up in 'plans'.
4.
Click Next >.
Points 'Plans'
5.
Up to eight separate 'Plans' may be configured.
These can be used to award different numbers of points depending on the importance of a
competition. Choose whether you would like to award a minimum number of points to players each
time they play in an Order of Merit qualifying competition. These are known as 'appearance' points. If
you are awarding points based on where players finish in a competition, set up the plan by allocating
points to positions in a competition. See Setting-up the Plan for more details.
6.
Click Next >.
Options
7.
Tick the Limit Players to their Best Scores only box if you wish to limit the number of scores each
player can contribute to their Order of Merit total, using their highest points earning competitions. When
selected, the Order of Merit report includes the individual points scores from each competition for each
player, in ascending order.
8.
Tick the Use Gross Scores rather than Nett Scores box to base the points allocated on their
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
294
HandicapMaster®
position in the competition Gross results rather than Nett results in each competition.
Note: This option is not available when the type of competition has been selected as How many
Stab leford Points players score.
9.
Tick the Place Competitors in Divisions box if you wish players to be split into categories based
on their handicap at the time the Order of Merit results are created.
10. Tick the Where two or more players tie, share available points equally box if you wish to share
points amongst players who tie on the same score in a competition.
11. Tick the Use Overall Results for 'Multiple Round' or 'Alternative Day' competitions box if, for
competitions played over more than one round, you wish to award points on the basis of the overall
result of the competition, rather than the individual rounds. This is only applicable when points are
being awarded on the basis of where players finish in competitions.
Note: This option is not available when Where two or more players tie, share availab le points equally
option has been selected.
12. Tick the Include on MasterScoreboard.co.uk box if you wish this Order of Merit report to be
included when running the publish to Master Scoreboard wizard, so the results will be displayed on the
Master Scoreboard web site.
13. Tick the Include Visitors box if you wish to allocate points to, and show on the report, Visitors who
have played in one or more the competitions this Order of Merit is based on.
14. Tick the Include players with zero points in report box if you wish to show all players from the
qualifying competitions in the report, even those yet to win any Order of Merit points.
15. In the Past Members and Players without a current handicap box, choose how to award Order
of Merit points when players loose their current handicap or are no longer Members. Options are
Allocate Points to these Players and show them in the report
Use this option to keep these players in the Order of Merit report, retaining any points they
have previously won.
Allocate Points to these Players, but don't show them in the report
Use this option to hide these players from the Order of Merit report, but do not strip them of
their points and do not reallocate their points to any other player in their absence.
Ignore these Players (re-allocating any Points previously awarded to them)
Use this option to remove these players from the report, and reallocate their points to other
players. The reallocation will be on the basis that they never competed in any of the Order of
Merit competitions.
16. Click Next >.
Divisions
If you have selected Place Competitors in Divisions box in the options, choose how to configure the
divisions for the report:
17. Tick the Show Overall Winners taken from any Division box if you wish to separate out the
leading players in the Order of Merit (irrespective of the Division they are placed in). Enter the number of
overall winners to be separated out.
18. Identify the maximum handicap for each of the first three divisions in the Division 1, Division 2,
and Division 3 boxes. Competitors whose handicaps are greater than the ' Division 3' box will
automatically fall into Division 4.
TIP:
HandicapMaster splits the field into four divisions. It is possible, however, to simulate only two
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Order of Merit and Eclectic Competitions
295
or three divisions by setting the Maximum Handicap In Division 2 and/or 3 value higher than
the highest handicap allowed in the competition. This will cause no competitors to fall into the
higher divisions and these Divisions will therefore not be displayed.
19. Click Next >.
Notes
20. Enter any Notes that you would like to be displayed at the bottom of the Order of Merit report, when
printed.
21. Click Next >.
22. Click Finish to create or update the Order of Merit.
See Also
Setting up an Order of Merit Plan
Adding or Updating scores for an Order of Merit
Changing the format of an existing Order of Merit
Edit Order of Merit Competition Notes
Deleting an Order of Merit Competition
Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
18.1.4 Set up an Order of Merit Plan
To set up or amend a Plan
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Reports menu, click Competition Reports, then Order of Merit
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Order of Merit Competitions.
2.
Choose Configure Order of Merit.
3.
Click Plans Tab
4.
In the Plan box, choose a plan number
Tick the Award 'Appearance Points' to players in the Competition box, if you wish to allocate a
set number of points to each player for playing in a competition.
Tick the Include 'Appearance Points' to players who were disqualified box, if you wish the
Appearance Points to also be allocated to players who have been disqualified in a competition.
If you have chosen to allocate points based on the position a player finishes in, in a competition,
then
Click Add button to allocate a set number of points for finishing in a particular position in the
competition,
Select a 'position' in the list and click Amend button to change the points allocated for that
position,
Select a 'position' in the list and click Delete button to no longer allocate any points for that
position,
Click Defaults button to pre allocate points based on factory defaults.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
296
HandicapMaster®
Tick the Include Descending Points for each place box to cause the plan to award 1 point for
the last placed competitor, 2 points for the last-but-one competitor, up to <number> points for
the first place competitor (where <number> is the number of competitors in the competition).
These points are in addition to any that are identified in the list.
See Also
Creating an Order of Merit Competition
Adding or Updating scores for an Order of Merit
Changing the format of an existing Order of Merit
Edit Order of Merit Competition Notes
Deleting an Order of Merit Competition
Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
18.1.5 Adding or updating scores to an Order of Merit
You must add competition scores to the Order of Merit, so they are included in the analysis. These
scores may be from stroke-play competitions that have been closed.
To add (or update) scores to an Order of Merit
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Reports menu, click Competition Reports, then Order of Merit
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Order of Merit Competitions.
2.
Do one of the following:
Double-click the chosen Order of Merit Competition
Highlight the chosen Order of Merit Competition and click Update an Order of Merit in the Order
of Merit Tasks
Right-click the chosen Order of Merit Competition and select Update an Order of Merit.
3.
The Update Order of Merit Scores window is displayed. Use this window to add or update scores
included in the Order of Merit.
See Also
Creating an Order of Merit Competition
Setting up an Order of Merit Plan
Changing the format of an existing Order of Merit
Edit Order of Merit Competition Notes
Deleting an Order of Merit Competition
Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Order of Merit and Eclectic Competitions
297
18.1.6 The Update Order of Merit Scores window
The Update Order of Merit Scores window defines which scores are included in an Order of Merit
analysis.
Tip:
The size of this window may be increased by dragging the edges of the window to form a larger
window.
To add a competition to the Order of Merit
1. Select the Competitions tab
2. Place a tick in the box alongside the competition.
To remove a competition from the Order of Merit
1. Select the Competitions tab
2. Remove the tick from the box alongside the competition
To change a Plan number for a competition included in the Order of Merit
Select the competition from the list (so that it is highlighted) and either
1. Press the number of the Plan required (keys 1 to 8), or
2. Use the + (Plus) or - (Minus) keys to increase or decrease the plan number shown.
To remove all of the competitions from the current Order of Merit
Click Clear All.
To award additional points to a Player
1. Select the Other Points tab
2. Click Add button
3. Chose a player from the list and click OK
4. In the Points box, enter the number of points to award the player
5. In the Description box, enter a description of the reason for the additional points
6. Click OK.
To change additional points already allocated to a player
1. Select the Other Points tab
2. Do one of the following
Highlight the entry in the list with a single click and click Edit button, or
Double-click the entry in the list
3. In the Points box, enter the number of points to award the player
4. In the Description box, enter a description of the reason for the additional points
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
298
HandicapMaster®
5. Click OK.
To remove additional points already allocated to a player
1. Select the Other Points tab
2. Highlight the entry in the list with a single click and do one of the following
Click Remove button, or
Press the DELETE key on the keyboard
To remove all additional points allocated
1. Select the Other Points tab.
2. Click Remove All button.
Notes:
Any additional points awarded to players will be added to the players' points total without affecting the
number of competitions counting for that player. As a result, additional points are outside of any "Best
Scores" limit placed upon them.
See Also
Creating an Order of Merit Competition
Setting up an Order of Merit Plan
Adding or Updating scores for an Order of Merit
Changing the format of an existing Order of Merit
Edit Order of Merit Competition Notes
Deleting an Order of Merit Competition
Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
18.1.7 Change format of an Order of Merit Competition
To change the format of an Order of Merit competition already created
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Reports menu, click Competition Reports, then Order of Merit
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Order of Merit Competitions.
2.
Highlight the Order of Merit competition to be changed.
3.
Do one of the following:
Click Amend Order of Merit Format in the Order of Merit Tasks
Right-click the chosen Order of Merit Competition and select Amend Order of Merit Format.
See Also
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Order of Merit and Eclectic Competitions
Creating an Order of Merit Competition
Setting up an Order of Merit Plan
Adding or Updating scores for an Order of Merit
Edit Order of Merit Competition Notes
Deleting an Order of Merit Competition
Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
18.1.8 Edit Order of Merit Competition Notes
To edit the notes of an Order Of Merit competition
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Reports menu, click Competition Reports, then Order of Merit
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Order of Merit Competitions.
2.
Highlight the Order of Merit competition to be changed.
3.
Right-click the chosen Order of Merit Competition and select Edit Notes.
4.
Edit the notes and click OK to save them.
See Also
Creating an Order of Merit Competition
Setting up an Order of Merit Plan
Adding or Updating scores for an Order of Merit
Changing the format of an existing Order of Merit
Deleting an Order of Merit Competition
Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
18.1.9 Delete an Order of Merit Competition
To delete an Order of Merit competition
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Reports menu, click Competition Reports, then Order of Merit
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Order of Merit Competitions.
2.
Highlight the Order of Merit competition to be deleted.
3.
Do one of the following:
Click Delete an Order of Merit in the Order of Merit Tasks
Right-click the chosen Order of Merit Competition and select Delete Order of Merit.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
299
300
HandicapMaster®
See Also
Creating an Order of Merit Competition
Setting up an Order of Merit Plan
Adding or Updating scores for an Order of Merit
Changing the format of an existing Order of Merit
Edit Order of Merit Competition Notes
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Order of Merit and Eclectic Competitions
18.2
301
Eclectic Competitions
18.2.1 Introduction
Operating Eclectic Competitions
An Eclectic Competition is defined as being played under stroke-play conditions and is where
competitors play two or more rounds, and the eclectic score is the players' choice score of each hole in
all of the rounds.
This chapter describes the process of running Eclectic Competitions.
Contents
Creating an Eclectic competition
Adding or updating scores used in an Eclectic
Changing the format of an existing Eclectic
Deleting an existing Eclectic
Stop an Eclectic showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
18.2.2 Eclectic Competitions
Overview of running an Eclectic competition in HandicapMaster
The typical stages of running an eclectic competition are
1.
Create the eclectic competition in HandicapMaster.
2.
Run one or more stroke-play competitions or ask players to return casual cards for the purpose of
the eclectic
3.
Update the eclectic with the competition scores or the casual cards.
4.
Reprint the eclectic results.
The features of Eclectic competitions supported by HandicapMaster
The following features are available when creating an Eclectic competition in HandicapMaster:
Type of 'best score'
A player's eclectic score is their best score of each hole in all of the rounds. HandicapMaster supports
two choices for "best score"; either
Fewest strokes taken on the hole, or
Most Stableford Points won on the hole.
Players entering the Eclectic before the competition starts
If the eclectic competition is one where players can choose whether to enter before the eclectic starts,
you may pre-selected those players who enter in advance. This allows for quick addition of scores from
stroke-play competitions to be added to the eclectic analysis, simply by adding the stroke-play
competitions to the eclectic. In this situation, HandicapMaster will automatically only include scores
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
302
HandicapMaster®
from those players pre-selected.
How the scores for the Eclectic are to be entered
There are two ways to enter a player's score into an eclectic:
The player's score could already be entered as part of a stroke-play competition (that has been
closed), or
The player's score could be entered especially for the eclectic. These type of scores are called
"Casual Cards" in HandicapMaster.
It is also possible to mix competition scores and casual cards in the same eclectic.
Handicap Allowance
Where the eclectic results are based on the fewest strokes taken on each hole by each player, you may
allocate a handicap allowance for each player. This allowance is applied to the handicap of the player
at the time the results of the eclectic are generated, or from a chosen date.
Where the handicap of the player is the handicap at the time the results are generated, then effectively
this uses the handicaps of players as at the end of the eclectic. This matches the previous
recommendation of the Ladies Golf Union in their Ladies Handicap system (prior to ladies
handicapping being merged with the CONGU handicapping system).
See Also
Disqualified Scores
18.2.3 Creating an Eclectic Competition
An Eclectic Competition is defined as being played under stroke-play conditions and is where
competitors play two or more rounds, and the eclectic score is the players' choice score of each hole in
all of the rounds.
HandicapMaster uses hole-by-hole scores to calculate an Eclectic result.
The following is supported for Eclectic results:
A choice of fewest strokes taken per hole or most Stableford points scored on each hole.
Rounds can be any combinations of 9 to 18 holes,
Scores returned in singles Stroke-play competitions may be used as the basis of the Eclectic
results, and/or scorecards returned especially for the Eclectic competition may be recorded.
To start an Eclectic Competition Report
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions menu, click Eclectics
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Eclectics
2.
Select the Create a new Eclectic task, or press the INSERT key on the keyboard.
3.
Create the Eclectic competition using the Eclectic Competition Wizard.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Order of Merit and Eclectic Competitions
303
See Also
Adding or updating scores used in an Eclectic
Changing the format of an existing Eclectic
Deleting an existing Eclectic
Stop an Eclectic showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
18.2.4 The Eclectic Competition Wizard
The Eclectic Competition Wizard steps through the stages of starting or amending a competition.
Name and Nature of Eclectic Competition
1.
In the Name box, enter a title for this Eclectic.
2.
In the Description box, enter a description for this Eclectic. The description will be displayed on
the Eclectic Competitions list.
3.
In the Type of Eclectic Scores section, chose one of
Fewest Strokes on each Hole. This is a traditional eclectic using the player's best gross score
on each hole towards their Eclectic result.
Most Stableford Points on each hole. This is an amalgamation of the most number of points
won on each hole.
4.
Click Next >.
How Players have entered this Competition
5.
If players have been asked to sign-up for the Eclectic in advance of any stroke-play competitions
being played or casual cards being returned, tick the Players have signed up in Advance box.
6.
Click Next >.
7.
If "Players have signed up in Advance" is selected, identify which players have entered by ticking
the box alongside their names. Then click OK.
Nature of Eclectic Competition
8.
Choose whether scores from stroke-play competitions or cards returned especially for the
Eclectic ("Casual Cards") (or a mixture of the both) are to be used as the basis of the Eclectic
competition.
9.
Click Next >.
Casual Cards
If scores are to be collected for the Eclectic from 'casual cards', then identify the golf course and tees to
be used by players when returning casual cards.
10. Click the Played At button to choose the golf course to be used by players when returning casual
cards.
11. Choose which tees the men and ladies will play from when returning casual cards.
12. In the Holes Played box, choose whether the casual cards will be scores played over eighteen
holes, or the front or back nine holes only.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
304
HandicapMaster®
13. Click Next >.
Select Handicap Allowance
If the eclectic is to be based on players gross scores (not Stableford points) on each hole, then choose
any Handicap allowance the player's will receive. This handicap allowance will use the players current
handicaps at the time the results are published (effectively their handicaps at the end of the Eclectic).
14. Choose a Handicap Allowance for the Eclectic.
15. If you select an allowance other than none, choose the date to be used for handicaps of the
players in the Based upon Handicaps as at section.
To allocate handicap allowances based upon player's current handicap (in effect the handicap
at the end of the eclectic), select Date when results calculated.
If you prefer to set a specific date and use the handicaps players held on this date, select Date
of and enter the date. In the event that a player's handicap record does not start until after the
selected date, the first handicap they held after this date will be used instead.
16. Tick the Handicap Allowance to one Decimal Place box if you wish the nett scores for players to
be based upon their handicap allowance being calculated to one decimal place.
17. Click Next >.
Options
18. Tick the Include on MasterScoreboard.co.uk box if you wish this Eclectic to be included when
running the publish to Master Scoreboard wizard, so the results will be displayed on the Master
Scoreboard web site.
19. Tick the Include Visitors box if you wish to include Visitors, who have played in one or more the
competitions this Eclectic is based on, in the results.
20. Tick the Countback &Scores (display scores in small font) to include 'countback' scores on the
report. Un-tick this option to prevent the countback details being displayed and for the results to be
displayed in a larger font size.
21. Tick the Place Competitors in Divisions box if you wish players to be split into categories based
on their handicap at the time the Eclectic results are created.
Identify the maximum handicap for each of the first three divisions in the Division 1, Division 2,
and Division 3 boxes. Competitors whose handicaps are greater than the ' Division 3' box will
automatically fall into Division 4.
TIP:
HandicapMaster splits the field into four divisions. It is possible, however, to simulate only two
or three divisions by setting the Maximum Handicap In Division 2 and/or 3 value higher than
the highest handicap allowed in the competition. This will cause no competitors to fall into the
higher divisions and these Divisions will therefore not be displayed.
Tick the New Page for each Division in Report box if you would like each division to be
reported on its own page in the report.
22. Click Next >.
Notes
23. Enter any notes that you wish to append to the end of the report in the Notes (displayed on
Report) box.
24. Click Next >.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Order of Merit and Eclectic Competitions
305
25. Click Finish to create or update the Eclectic.
See Also
Creating an Eclectic competition
Adding or updating scores used in an Eclectic
Changing the format of an existing Eclectic
Edit Eclectic Competition Notes
Deleting an existing Eclectic
Disqualified Scores
18.2.5 Adding or updating scores to an Eclectic
You must add scores to the Eclectic, so they are included in the analysis. These scores may be from
Stroke-play Competitions, or
'Casual Cards'
Whether you are able to add scores from stroke-play competitions and/or casual cards will depend
upon how the Eclectic competition was configured when it was created. See The Eclectic Competition
Wizard.
To add (or update) scores to an Eclectic
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions menu, click Eclectics
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Eclectics
2.
Do one of the following:
Double-click the chosen Eclectic Competition
Highlight the chosen Eclectic Competition and click Update an Eclectic in the Eclectic Tasks
Right-click the chosen Eclectic Competition and select Update an Eclectic.
3.
The Update Eclectic Scores window is displayed. Use this window to add or update scores
included in the Eclectic.
See Also
Creating an Eclectic competition
Changing the format of an existing Eclectic
Deleting an existing Eclectic
Disqualified Scores
Stop an Eclectic showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
306
HandicapMaster®
18.2.6 The Update Eclectic Scores window
The Update Eclectic Scores window defines which scores are included in an Eclectic analysis.
Tip:
The size of this window may be increased by dragging the edges of the window to form a larger
window.
The window will display either one or two tabs, depending on the configuration of the Eclectic.
To include scores from a stroke-play competition in an Eclectic report
1.
Click the Scores from Competitions tab.
If using scores from stroke-play competitions has not been configured for the eclectic, click
the Amend Eclectic Format button to reconfigure the eclectic using the Eclectic Competition
Wizard to allow stroke-play competition scores.
2.
Tick the boxes alongside all competitions where scores should be included in the Eclectic.
3.
Click OK.
Note:
If the option "When adding Scores from Stroke-play competitions... Add Selected Cards Only" was
chosen when creating the Eclectic competition, then as you tick a competition to be added to the
Eclectic, HandicapMaster will display a list of the entrants for that competition. Tick the boxes alongside
those players whose scores are to be included in the Eclectic and then click OK. To quickly locate a
player in the list, just type the first letters of the player's Surname.
To include a casual card in an Eclectic report
1.
Click the Casual Scorecards tab.
If using casual scorecards has not been configured for the eclectic, click the Amend Eclectic
Format button and reconfigure the eclectic using the Eclectic Competition Wizard to allow
Casual Cards.
2.
In the Date Round Played box, select the date when the casual card was played.
3.
Click the Add Casual Card button.
Notes:
To view or edit a card previously entered, highlight the player in the list of cards added and click the
Edit button.
To remove a card previously entered, highlight the player in the list of cards added and click the
Remove button.
See Also
Creating an Eclectic competition
Changing the format of an existing Eclectic
Deleting an existing Eclectic
Disqualified Scores
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Order of Merit and Eclectic Competitions
18.2.7 Edit Eclectic Competition Notes
To edit the notes of an Eclectic competition
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions menu, click Eclectics
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Eclectics
2.
Highlight the Eclectic competition to be changed.
3.
Right-click the chosen Eclectic Competition and select Edit Notes.
4.
Edit the notes and click OK to save them.
See Also
Creating an Eclectic competition
Adding or updating scores used in an Eclectic
Deleting an existing Eclectic
Stop an Eclectic showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
18.2.8 Change format of an Eclectic Competition
To change the format of an Eclectic competition already created
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions menu, click Eclectics
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Eclectics
2.
Highlight the Eclectic competition to be changed.
3.
Do one of the following:
Click Amend Eclectic Format in the Eclectic Tasks
Right-click the chosen Eclectic Competition and select Amend Eclectic Format.
See Also
Creating an Eclectic competition
Adding or updating scores used in an Eclectic
Deleting an existing Eclectic
Stop an Eclectic showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
307
308
HandicapMaster®
18.2.9 Delete an Eclectic Competition
To delete an Eclectic competition
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions menu, click Eclectics
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Eclectics.
2.
Highlight the Eclectic competition to be deleted.
3.
Do one of the following:
Click Delete an Eclectic in the Eclectic Tasks
Right-click the chosen Eclectic Competition and select Delete Eclectic.
Press the DELETE key on the keyboard.
See Also
Creating an Eclectic competition
Adding or updating scores used in an Eclectic
Changing the format of an existing Eclectic
Stop an Eclectic showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
18.2.10 Disqualified Scores and Eclectics
Where a player's score is marked as Disqualified from a competition, their hole-by-hole scores for that
competition will not be included in any Eclectic calculations.
The exception to this is if the disqualification is for a breach of rule of golf 3-2 ("failure to hole out").
Where a player scores a "No Return" for the competition, then their hole-by-hole scores will be included
in the analysis. For the scores to be included in the Eclectic analysis in this situation, the reason for
disqualification must be identified as breach of rule 3-2.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
309
Chapter
Handicapping
19
310
HandicapMaster®
19
Handicapping
19.1
General Play and other Handicap amendments
19.1.1 Introduction
General Play changes and 'Away' Competition scores
An individual's handicap may be changed other than as a result of a local competition. This will typically
occur either as a result of a change under 'General Play' or as a result of a score returned in a
competition away from their club.
Whenever the Handicap Committee of a player's Home Club considers that a player's handicap is
too high or too low they must adjust his handicap accordingly.
This chapter describes how to apply changes or competition results of these kinds.
Contents
General Play Changes
Updating HandicapMaster with changes to AWAY Member's Playing Handicaps
Competition Scores returned at other clubs
Late reporting of Competition Scratch Score for Away Score
19.1.2 Change a Player's Handicap under General Play
To apply a General Play change to a Member's handicap
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Handicapping Menu, choose General Play Adjustment and select the name of
the Member, or
In the Members List, select the member and right-click. Click General Play Adjustment
.
2.
In the Date in Handicap Record box, enter the date from when the adjustment is to be
applied. Choose the order the score is entered in the handicap record by selecting AM or
PM (see discussion on ordering events in handicap records ).
3.
In the New Handicap box, enter the player's revised handicap.
4.
In the Comments for insertion in Member's Handicap Record box, enter a description
as to why the player's handicap has been adjusted.
5.
Do one of the following
Click Save and More if you wish to save the current adjustment and then enter an
adjustment for another player, or
Click OK to save this adjustment.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
311
Notes:
In some circumstances, a password will be required to complete the General Play adjustment. This
password may be obtained from your local 'Area Authority'.
HandicapMaster will automatically produce a letter to advise the member of the change in his/her
handicap. Refer to the Letterheads on Letters section of the System-Wide Options if you wish
HandicapMaster to automatically generate a Letterhead on the Letter. The font attributes used when
viewing and printing the Letter are those last chosen on the Letters Window. To reprint the letter,
double-click over the appropriate entry in the events window. See Turn off General Play Letters to
stop creation of the letters.
The font selected for the salutation is also used for text of the General Play Letter this may be
changed by adjusting the Salutation font
You may reprint a letter for a Handicap adjustment already recorded.
19.1.3 Turn off General Play and Handicap First Award Letters
To turn on or turn off the creation of letters to players after General Play changes or a
handicap First Award are made:
1.
On the Reports menu, click Layout and Options.
2.
Click the Handicap Reports tab.
3.
Under the General Play Changes and Handicap First Awards section, tick the Generate Letter to
Player box to cause letters to be created, clear the box to cancel creation of letters.
19.1.4 Reprint a General Play, Handicap First Award or Annual Review Letter
To reprint a General Play, Handicap First Award or Annual Review letter
1. Click Handicapping Place, double-click General Play Changes, First Awards or Annual Review
Changes to display the applicable list of recorded changes.
2. Locate the entry in the list relating to the adjustment required to be reprinted and double-click this
entry.
19.1.5 Print Exceptional Scoring Reduction Letter
To print an Exceptional Scoring Reduction letter
1. Click Handicapping Place, double-click Exceptional Scoring Reductions to display the applicable
list of recorded changes.
2. Locate the entry in the list relating to the adjustment required to be printed and double-click this entry.
Notes:
Exceptional Scoring Reductions are only applicable in the CONGU® Handicapping editions of
HandicapMaster
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
312
HandicapMaster®
19.1.6 Update the Handicap of an Away Player
On occasions, it is necessary to update HandicapMaster with the latest Handicap of a member when
the member has their Home Club other than this club (they are an 'AWAY' member).
Indeed, CONGU require players to inform all clubs they are a member of when their Playing Handicap
is revised by their Home Club (clause 13.4(b)).
For the EGA Handicap ediions, this Handicap is the player's Exact Handicap. Other editions of
HandicapMaster this is Playing Handicap.
To update an AWAY member's Playing Handicap
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Handicapping Menu, choose Update AWAY Player's Handicap and select the
name of the Member, or
In the Members List, select the member and right-click. Click Update AWAY Player's
Handicap.
2.
In the Date in Handicap Record box. enter the date when the adjustment is to be applied
from. Choose the order the score is entered in the handicap record by selecting AM or PM
(see discussion on ordering events in handicap records ).
3.
In the New Handicap box, enter the player's revised handicap.
4.
In the Comments for insertion in Member's Handicap Record box, enter a description
as to why the player's handicap has been adjusted.
5.
Do one of the following
Click Save and More if you wish to save the current adjustment and then enter an
adjustment for another player, or
Click OK to save this adjustment.
Notes:
When entering Competition scores, HandicapMaster will always ask for conformation of an AWAY
member's handicap. Should the handicap require changing, a Correction change will be entered
automatically.
19.1.7 Enter an Away score for a Player
Players must return Handicap Qualifying scores from competitions played at clubs other than their
Home Club. These are known as 'Away' competition scores.
CONGU require the player to report these scores to their Home Club. The club must then include these
in the players' Handicap Record.
To record a score returned from another club
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Handicapping Menu, choose Record Away Scores and select the name of the Member,
or
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
313
In the Handicapping Tasks, Record Away Scores.
2.
In the Competition Name box, enter the name of the Competition.
3.
In the Played On box, enter the date when the qualifying score was returned. Choose the order the
score is entered in the handicap record by selecting AM or PM (see discussion on ordering events in
handicap records).
4.
Identify the round of the competition and how many rounds in total made up this competition, by
selecting the appropriate values in Round x of y boxes.
5.
In the Format boxes, choose the number of holes played and appropriate format for the
competition (Stroke Play, Stableford or Par (Bogey, vPar)).
6.
Click the Played at... button to select the Club where the competition was played.
7.
Enter the Handicapping information into the Handicapping section:
Club, Premier and Network Editions, and Society edition
Select the handicapping status of the Competition in the Qualifier Status box.
In the Standard Scratch Score box, enter the Scratch Score of the course.
In the Competition Scratch Score box, enter the Competition Scratch Score for the
competition. If this is not known, enter the Scratch Score of the course instead.
If the format of the competition was Stableford or Par, in the Course Par box, enter the Par
value for the course .
EGA Handicap editions
Select the handicapping status of the Competition in the Qualifier box.
In the Competition Stableford Adjustment box, enter the Competition Stableford
Adjustment for the competition. If this is not known, or not applicable, enter 0.
8.
For each player who has returned a Score in this Away Competition:
Click Add Player... button
Select the Player from the list
Enter the Player's score as applicable (for Stroke-play competitions, enter the Player's
Gross score and, if required, Adjusted Gross Score).
9.
Importing away scores from a file [Club, Premier and Network Editions only]
To enter multiple away scores, the values may be imported from a file by clicking the Import
button. See Importing Away Scores for details.
To record a "Reductions Only" Away Score
If the Competition Scratch Score was reported as "Reductions Only", select "Qualifier - Reductions
Only" in the Qualifier Status box.
To remove a Player entered in error
1.
Select the Player in the Scores Grid
2.
Click Remove button
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
314
HandicapMaster®
Notes:
For CONGU 9 Hole competitions, entry of scores from qualifying competitions only is supported. It
is not possible to enter a 9 hole away score for a non-qualifying competition.
See Also
Undo a previously entered Away Score
Importing Away Scores
19.1.8 Adjusted Gross Scores
For CONGU Handicapping, the “Adjusted Gross Score” is the player’s gross score, adjusted to take
account of any particularly bad holes (in accordance with Clause 19 of the CONGU Unified
Handicapping System).
Note: This is NOT the player’s Nett Score.
CONGU Unified Handicapping System Clause 19
“Unions shall direct clubs within their jurisdiction that scores returned in stroke play Qualifying
Competitions at a Home Club, whether or not all 18 holes have been completed, shall be adjusted to
the Nett Differential which would have applied if the competition had been a Stableford Qualifying
Competition. No points shall be recorded on a hole where there is no score. This adjustment is for
handicap purposes only.”
The Adjusted Gross Score is the player’s Gross Score, reduced by as many strokes as the player took
more than Nett Double Bogey on any holes.
Example
Consider a player with 15 Handicap scoring a gross 90, but taking a 10 on a Par 5 hole where the
Stroke Index was 5.
For this player, a Nett Doub le Bogey is (Par + Handicap Strokes + 2) = 5 + 1 + 2 = 8.
That is, an 8 is a double bogey after deduction of the handicap stroke this player is entitled to on this
hole.
As the player scored 10 (two higher than the Nett Doub le Bogey), his Gross score (for handicapping
purposes only) is reduced by two strokes. His Adjusted Gross Score becomes 90 – 2 = 88.
Away Scores - If the adjusted gross score cannot be calculated from the information
provided
When entering away scores manually if the adjusted gross score has not been provided or cannot be
calculated then it is recommended that in this situation the Adjusted Gross Score is entered the same
as the Gross Score (90 in our example above). It should b e noted, though, that the handicapping for
this player may not b e correct in this situation.
Notes:
HandicapMaster will automatically apply the clause 19 adjustment to player’s scores for stroke play
handicap qualifier competitions.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
315
19.1.9 Importing Away Scores
19.1.9.1 About Importing Away Scores
Importing
Away scores may be added from an external file in one operation using the Away Score Import facility.
This option is only available using Club, Premier and Network Editions in those countries that operate
a Central Database of Handicaps.
The players are identified by their National Numbers.
If a player record can be found with the specified National Number, the away score is recorded as if the
score had been entered manually. Player details are also updated from the CDH [England, Scotland
and Wales only].
If a player cannot be found with the specified National Number, player details are requested from the
CDH [England, Scotland and Wales only]. If the player details are retrieved successfully, a Visitor
record is added before processing the scores.
Past visitors are “undeleted” as part of the score processing.
This feature can also be used as a way to register Visitor details in bulk using information from the
CDH [England, Scotland and Wales only]. By importing a list of National Numbers with no scores,
Visitors can be added for entry into future competitions. An active internet connection is required to use
the CDH.
Importing from a spreadsheet
You may import away scores from a file by following the steps for Entering Away Competition Scores
and selecting the Import button.
When importing from files it is critical to enter your records precisely. HandicapMaster will reject or
ignore any items which are invalid.
Reasons for rejecting or ignoring data include:
Invalid or unmatched National Number
Non-numeric characters in scores (with certain exceptions)
Incorrect score type for the competition
HandicapMaster will tell you which records are rejected or where data is ignored, giving the reason and
the number of the line in the import file.
19.1.9.2 Import Away Scores from a file
To import away score records
1.
Using an external product such as Microsoft Excel, create an import file conforming to the required
layout.
2.
Follow the steps for Entering Away Competition Scores and click the Import button.
3.
Navigate to the folder containing the import file and select the file name. Click Open.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
316
HandicapMaster®
The import will begin. A progress counter below the Import button shows the number of the file
record being processed.
When import from the file completes, a summary message is displayed giving the number of
records processed and the number of records which have been ignored (rejected). Click OK to
cancel this message.
4.
Successfully imported scores are shown on the main display (in addition to any previously
entered). To see a report of the import processing, click on View Report.
5.
The Import Report shows the total number of records processed and the number of away scores
which have been recorded. The number of files imported is also displayed, if more than one
import operation has been performed.
The next section gives the number of import records which were rejected, shown in red. Details of
each rejection are given with the number of line in the import file, the national number of the player
and the reason why the record was rejected.
Click the Player Records Updated tab to show the Visitor records which were updated (past
visitors “undeleted” or visitors imported from the CDH). Details of each action are also given, with
the number of the line in the import file, the national number and name of the player.
6.
To print the report, click Print Report. A separate report page is produced for the visitor records
updated and the visitors or scores which have been skipped. If the report contains no data, it is
omitted. The reports are visible when the Away Scores processing is completed or cancelled.
7.
To clear the report and the counters, click Clear Report.
8.
To return to the scores entry page, click Back.
9.
If required, the import operation can be repeated to import multiple files or to retry records which
have been rejected.
See also
Format of the Import File
19.1.9.3 Format of the Import File
Required format of the Import File
The file must be a "Comma-Separated File" which is typically suffixed .CSV. This format can, for
example, be saved from a spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel.
The file must be an ASCII text file,
There must be one score record per record in the file,
There must be a special 'Header' record as the first record in the file (see below).
Each field within each record must be separated by a comma.
The Header Record
The first record in the file must be a Header record. This consists of the names of each of the columns
(fields) within the file. Not all the columns are required, depending on the competition format. The
PlayerID (National Number) is always required.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
317
The fields supported are as follows:
PlayerID
The National Number (lifetime ID) of the player, allocated by the player’s National Union.
Gross Score
The total number of strokes played. This column is ignored for Stableford or Par competitions.
Possible values are:
a numeric value
“NR” for a No Return
“NA” if not applicable or not available
Adjusted Gross
The number of strokes played after adjustment using CONGU Clause 19 (Nett Double Bogey).
This column is ignored for Stableford or Par competitions. Possible values are:
a numeric value
“NR” for a No Return
“NA” if not applicable or not available
Stableford Points
The player’s Stableford score. This column is ignored for Stroke-play (Medal) or Par competitions.
Possible values are:
a numeric value
“NR” for a No Return
“NA” if not applicable or not available
Par Result
The player’s Par result. This column is ignored for Stroke-play (Medal) or Stableford competitions.
Possible values are:
a numeric value (a positive value represents a "Holes Up" result, a negative value
represents a "Holes down" result and zero represents "all square")
“NR” for a No Return
“NA” if not applicable or not available
19.1.10 Late reporting of Away CSS (CONGU Handicapping Only)
Occasionally, a player who reports an Away Competition Score to his/her Home club may not know the
Competition Scratch Score (CSS) at the time. In this circumstance, the Away Score should be entered
into the players' Handicap Record using the Standard Scratch Score as the CSS.
When the true CSS becomes known, the Club should amend the players' Handicap Record to reflect
the new value and adjust all subsequent entries in the players' record to reflect any changes in their
handicap.
To amend the CSS for an Away Score already entered into a Handicap Record.
1.
On the Handicapping menu, click Amend Away Score CSS
2.
Choose which Away Score to update and click OK
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
318
HandicapMaster®
3.
In the Handicapping section, update the Qualifier and C.S.S. boxes accordingly.
4.
Click OK
HandicapMaster will update the CSS for the Away Score and recalculate the players' Handicap Record
as required.
19.1.11 Order of events in members' handicap records
Consideration has to be given to the order in which events are entered into a member's handicap
record when two events occur on the same day. HandicapMaster establishes a recognised and
predictable order by applying a 'priority' to each event. This priority governs the ordering to which
HandicapMaster considers qualifying scores and other events when calculating handicap records.
For competitions and other scores, you have the option to identify the score as being AM or PM.
HandicapMaster will treat any entry identified as AM first in a handicap record ahead of a PM
entry, when both entries occur on the same day.
The full priority ordering adopted is as follows (first to last in handicap record when on same
day).
1. First Award / Handicap Brought Forward / Reinstate Suspended Handicap
2. General Play, Correction, Annual Review or Note (AM)
3. Competition Score (AM)
4. General Play, Correction, Annual Review or Note (PM)
5. Competition Score (PM)
6. Handicap becoming Lapsed
7. Handicap Suspension
Notes:
HandicapMaster does not prevent two scores being identified as being on the same day with the
same AM or PM. However, if there are two the same, HandicapMaster cannot guarantee the order
they are processed.
19.1.12 Record a Handicapping Note for a Player
"Handicap Notes" are entries allowing notes and comments to be recorded for a player, for example, to
maintain data for consideration during a General Play review.
To record a Handicap Note for a Player
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Handicapping Menu, choose Handicap Note and select the name of the
Member, or
In the Members List, select the member and right-click. Click Handicap Note.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
319
2.
In the Date in Handicap Record box, enter the date you wish the note to be recorded
against.
3.
In the Comments box, enter the note details.
4.
Do one of the following
Click Save and More if you wish to save the current note and then enter a note for
another player, or
Click OK to save this note.
To list or print the recorded Handicap Notes
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Reports Menu, choose Handicapping Reports, then Handicapping Notes, or
In the Reports place, select Handicapping tab, then Handicap Notes.
To Delete a Handicap Note
1.
In the Handicapping place, select Handicap Notes.
2.
Do one of the following:
Highlight the note to be deleted and press the DELETE key on the keyboard.
Highlight the note to be deleted, right-click and select UNDO.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
320
19.2
HandicapMaster®
The CONGU® Unified Handicapping System
19.2.1 Introduction
Considerations for administering the CONGU Unified Handicapping System
The following chapter describes considerations that are applicable to the CONGU® Unified
Handicapping System.
Contents
Setting CONGU Handicapping Options
Supplementary Scores
The Annual Handicap Review
Reporting Qualifying scores by 'AWAY' Members to their Home Clubs
'Exceptional Scoring' handicap reductions
Reporting Handicap Records at end of Season
Issue a Disability Handicap
Running a CONGU 9 Hole Handicap Competition
19.2.2 Setting CONGU® Handicapping Options
The CONGU® Handicapping system has a number of aspects that may vary from region to region and
one from club to club. Most of these are regional differences (differences set by the National Unions),
but one may be chosen by clubs themselves.
To Configure CONGU Handicapping
1.
On the Handicapping menu, click Configure Handicapping Rules...
Restrict to One Supplementary Score per Week
Your club may decide whether to allow or disallow players from returning more than one
Supplementary Score per week. This is CONGU Unified Handicapping System clause 21.6. This
may be set separately for Men's and Ladies handicapping, if required.
Note: HandicapMaster treats "a week" as being Monday to Sunday.
Settings chosen by the [Men's Union] and [Ladies Union]
HandicapMaster displays the regional settings applicable for your area, as defined by the local Men's
and Ladies Unions and Associations. These items are not configurable as they are mandatory for
clubs in the local region.
19.2.3 Supplementary Scores
Players with Handicaps may return extra scores (outside of competitions) to count as Handicap scores.
These are known as "Supplementary Scores" and is referred to as clause 21 of the CONGU® Unified
Handicapping System.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
321
To record a Supplementary Score
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Handicapping Menu, choose Record Supplementary Scores, or
In the Handicapping Tasks, click Record Supplementary Scores.
2.
In the Played On box, enter the date when the scores were played. Choose the order the score is
entered in the handicap record by selecting AM or PM (see discussion on ordering events in
handicap records).
3.
In the Format box, choose whether the Supplementary Score was played as a Stroke-play or
Stableford score.
4.
In the Course Played box, choose which of the home courses was played along with the Tees
used (see Operating two or more courses at the Home Club, if applicable).
5.
For each player who has returned a Supplementary Score that day:
a.
Click Add Player... button
b.
Select the Player from the list
c.
Enter the Player's score.
To remove a Player entered in error
1.
Select the Player in the Scores Grid
2.
Click Remove button
See Also
Undoing a Supplementary Score
19.2.4 CONGU® Annual Handicap Review
19.2.4.1 Introduction
CONGU describe the Annual Review of Handicaps as follows.
The Annual Review is an important element of the handicapping system. It is the process b y which the
Handicap Committee reviews, and adjusts as necessary, the handicaps of all Memb ers to ensure that,
as far as practicab le, they reflect current playing ab ility.
To assist committees with the process of running the Annual Review, CONGU provide a report that
aims to help identify those players who may need an adjustment in their handicap.
Contents
Annual Review of Handicaps
Identify Players for Annual Review
Adjust Players' Handicaps after Annual Review
View adjustments recorded at Annual Review
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
322
HandicapMaster®
19.2.4.2 CONGU® Annual Review of Handicaps
Manage Annual Review
Manage Annual Review allows you to perform an Annual Review of CONGU Handicaps.
You may choose one of the 3 options available.
Run Annual Review Report.
This report is specified by CONGU to help committee's identify those players who may need a
Handicap Adjustment at Annual Review.
Tick the Include Handicap Records of those players listed on Report box to append the handicap
records of those players listed in the report, to the end of the report.
Adjust Handicaps
This option allows adjustments made as part of the Annual Review to be entered. Adjustments so
entered are given an "ARA" identifier in CONGU handicap records.
View Adjustments
This option will allow you to view and print a report of recorded handicap changes that have been
made as part of the Annual Review.
19.2.4.3 Identifying Players for Annual Review
The Council of National Golf Unions wishes to assist Club Secretaries administer the Annual Review.
To this end, they specified a report to assist this process.
This report is designed to assess the performance of all players who have returned three or more
Qualifying Scores in the review period and is based on the expected playing performance of players
with respect to their Handicap Category. The report will ‘flag-up’ players who require consideration as
detailed in Appendix M. It should be emphasised that it is not the intention that any player ‘flagged-up’
qualifies automatically for an increase or decrease in handicap. Any adjustment should only be made
when all the evidence available on the player has been considered.
To identify players who may need to have their Handicaps reviewed at Annual Review
1.
On the Handicapping drop-down menu, click Annual Review. Then choose Run Annual Review
Report option.
2.
Choose the category of players and the period of time to analyse then click OK.
19.2.4.4 Adjust Players' Handicaps after Annual Review
To record adjustments of Handicaps as a result of the Annual Review
1.
On the Handicapping drop-down menu, click Annual Review.
2.
Select Adjust Handicaps option and click Next >.
3.
Select the name of a Member who has had their Handicap adjusted and click OK
4.
In the Date in Handicap Record box, enter the date from when the Annual Review took place.
5.
In the New Handicap box, enter the player's revised handicap.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
6.
323
In the Comments for insertion in Member's Handicap Record box, enter any description that you
would like to record in the player's records relating to his adjustment.
7.
If you have more than one Player's handicap to adjust, click Save and More. Repeat steps 3 to 6
until all adjustments have been recorded.
Notes:
In some circumstances, a password will be required to complete the Annual Review adjustment.
This password may be obtained from your local 'Area Authority'.
HandicapMaster will automatically produce a letter to advise the member of the change in his/her
handicap. Refer to the Letterheads on Letters section of the System-Wide Options if you wish
HandicapMaster to automatically generate a Letterhead on the Letter. The font attributes used when
viewing and printing the Letter are those last chosen on the Letters Window.
You may turn off the production of Letters by selecting Reports menu, then Layout and Options.
Click Handicap Reports and un-tick Generate Letter to Player box.
You may reprint a letter for a Handicap adjustment already recorded.
19.2.4.5 Print a report of Handicap adjustments made at Annual Review
To view and print a report of Handicap adjustments as a result of the Annual Review
1.
On the Handicapping drop-down menu, click Annual Review.
2.
Select View Adjustments option and click Next >.
3.
Chose which members to include in the report and from which date to include adjustments made.
19.2.5 'Competition' Handicap Status
19.2.5.1 ENGLAND and WALES
19.2.5.1.1 Introduction (England & Wales)
Some Golfing Unions (notably England, Scotland and Wales) have introduced a system to identify the
competitive nature of an individual.
An identifier is added to a players' handicap to indicate whether an individual has competed in
qualifying competitions and as a result returned information on their playing ability.
We have all heard of the so-called ‘Bandit’ who wins competitions with very low scores. These people
generally avoid playing in qualifying competitions in order to keep their handicap artificially high.
The system (started in January 2010) requires all members with CONGU® handicaps to have returned
at least three qualifying scores each year to ensure they have a competitive handicap.
Scores returned in 9 hole qualifying competitions and Supplementary Scores are accepted as part of
the player’s qualifying competitions.
Qualifying scores of less than 3 are not be carried forward to the next year. The players' handicap
status is changed as soon as three qualifying scores have been returned during the current year. An
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
324
HandicapMaster®
inactive/non-competition handicap may still be used for social golf and the like and in competitions not
stipulating an active/competition handicap as entry criteria.
So what is the benefit of such a system? Well firstly and perhaps most importantly it will enable event
organisers to run competitions, both Club and Opens, without the fear of players taking part who have
‘false’ handicaps.
This can be achieved by adopting a condition of the competition that requires an entrant to have an
active handicap. Clubs may adopt this condition providing it does not cover all events and that
opportunity is given to players with inactive/non-competition handicaps being permitted to return the
three qualifying scores needed to ensure an active/competition handicap. The system should also
encourage more individuals to submit qualifying scores and this in turn will help to improve the
accuracy of members’ handicaps.
Note: For Clubs in regions where their Unions have not sanctioned active/competition Handicap status,
the following items do not apply.
See Handicap Status Regulations for further details.
Updating Handicap Status
HandicapMaster will automatically update the status of players’ Handicaps the first time
HandicapMaster is run after the start of a new year. Any player with less than the stipulated number of
qualifying scores returned in the previous year will have their handicap automatically marked as such.
Handicap Lists will show the handicap status alongside their handicap.
Any handicap with an “inactive/non-competition/non-competitive” status will automatically be reset to
“active/competition/competitive” when the necessary number of qualifying scores is returned during the
year.
To view a report of players who may have an Inactive(non-competition/non-competitive)
handicap in the following season
On the Reports menu, click Handicapping Reports, then Non-Competition Handicaps (Possible
Candidates).
To view a report of players with Inactive/Non-Competition/Non-Competitive Handicap
Status
1. On the Reports menu, click Handicapping Reports.
2. Select Non-Competition Handicaps (List of Players).
See Also
Override Handicap Status
Players Exempt from Non-Competition Handicaps
19.2.5.1.2 Handicap Status Regulations (Wales)
CONGU Handicap Status Regulations
Competition / Non-Competition CONGU® Handicap Status Regulations are only sanctioned b y
England Golf for club s in England and b y Golf Union of Wales for club s in Wales.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
325
General (Wales)
Players (includes men & ladies) will have handicaps identified with a (c) if they have returned 3
qualifying scores (including Supplementary Scores, Away qualifying scores and 9 hole qualifying
competitions) during the previous calendar year.
"Competition" handicap status is added once 3 qualifying scores have been returned during the current
calendar year. Scores are NOT ‘rolled over’ from one year to the next. 3 scores required each year.
A player who received a CONGU® Handicap for the first time will be marked as “competition” for a
period of 12 months from the date of allocation.
Only applies to CONGU® handicaps. Does not apply to Junior Club Handicaps or other handicaps
issued by the Club.
Manual Override
A facility is provided in handicapping software for the club official to manually override the current
handicap status of a Player’s Handicap, and also to remove this override at a later date.
Whilst a handicap is manually overridden, additional entries to the player’s handicap record do not
affect their handicap status until the override is manually removed.
All manual overrides are cancelled at the commencement of a new calendar year.
Qualifying Scores
All qualifying scores will adjust handicap status in the normal manner. No new allotment of handicap
will apply.
"No Returns" (NR's) shall count towards an Active/Competition handicap. (A Committee is responsible
to manually override the status this if they consider that the NR is a deliberate attempt to gain an Active/
Competition handicap).
These notes b ased on English Golf Union Active / Inactive Handicaps specification Version 4,
Septemb er 2009 as supplied b y CONGU®, and sub sequently modified b y England Golf and GUW
January 2010.
See Also
Players Exempt from Non-Competition Handicaps
19.2.5.1.3 Override Handicap Status (Wales)
Competition / Non-Competition CONGU® Handicap Status Regulations are only sanctioned b y
England Golf for club s in England and b y Golf Union of Wales for club s in Wales.
In some circumstances, Handicap Committees may have a genuine reason to overrule the current
handicap status of a player. In this situation, an override may be applied to the player’s handicap.
If the current status is "non-competition", the override will cause the player’s handicap status to
become “competition”. Likewise, the handicap has a status of “competition”, the override will cause the
players handicap status to become “non-competition”.
This override will remain in force until the end of the year (unless cancelled earlier).
When an override has been applied, the Handicap Status for the player displayed in the All Members
list will be shown with "(OVERRIDE)" suffix.
To override the Handicap Status of a player
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
326
HandicapMaster®
To override the handicap status of a player:
1.
On the Handicapping menu, click Override Competition/Non-Competition Handicap Status...
2.
Select the required Player, if requested and click OK.
To cancel an override of a Handicap Status
1.
On the Handicapping menu, click Override Competition/Non-Competition Handicap Status...
2.
Select the required Player, if requested and click OK.
To view a report of all current players with an override applied to their Handicap
1.
On the Reports menu, click Handicapping Reports, then Non-Competition Handicaps (Overrides
applied)
See Also
Players Exempt from Non-Competition Handicaps
19.2.5.1.4 Players Exempt from Non-Competition Handicaps (Wales)
Competition / Non-Competition CONGU® Handicap Status Regulations are only sanctioned b y
England Golf for club s in England and b y Golf Union of Wales for club s in Wales.
Players who are exempt from having their Handicap marked as 'non-competition'
The following players will have their Handicap status marked as 'competition' (irrespective of the
number of qualifying scores returned):
Players who have had their first CONGU® Handicap awarded in the last 12 months.
Juniors with "Club" Handicaps (Handicaps above 28 for Boys and above 36 for Girls).
Juniors who have gained a CONGU® Handicap for the first time in the last 12 months.
Note
"Away" members (members who have their handicaps managed by another club) will not
automatically have their handicap marked as non-competition.
It is necessary for away clubs to manually override their handicap status as applicable.
19.2.5.1.5 Stop players w ith Non-Competition Handicaps entering a competition (Wales)
Competition / Non-Competition CONGU® Handicap Status Regulations are only sanctioned b y
England Golf for club s in England and b y Golf Union of Wales for club s in Wales.
To disallow players with non-competition handicaps from entering a competition
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions drop-down menu, click Set up a Template and select a Template from the
list displayed.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
327
On the left hand task pane, select Competitions place. On the right hand pane, double-click
Templates. Select a Template and press ENTER Key.
2.
Modify the template Information using the Competition Template Wizard provided. On the
applicable page, select 'Players with 'non-competition' Handicaps may not enter'.
Note
If you wish to allow players to enter a competition, but not be eligible to win any prizes, you may select
option Enter, but not win prizes. This option is available for singles competitions only.
19.2.5.2 SCOTLAND
19.2.5.2.1 Reassessing Handicap Statuses after 1st March (Scotland)
Competition / Non-Competition CONGU® Handicap Status Regulations are only sanctioned b y
Scottish Golf Union and Scottish Ladies Golf Association for club s in Scotland.
The Unified Handicapping System clause 25 states;
"A Union may direct that the handicap of any player, in whatever Category:
a. who returns a stipulated minimum number of Qualifying Scores in a period between Annual
Reviews, or during the previous calendar year, shall be marked as a ‘Competition Handicap’ or
b. who fails to return a stipulated minimum number of Qualifying Scores in the previous calendar
year shall be marked as an ‘Inactive Handicap’.."
In 2014, this was amended so that the activation of "competition" status would be on 1st March each
year.
To mark Handicaps as "non-competition" after an Annual Review
1.
On the Handicapping menu, click 'Competition' Handicaps, then Reassess all handicaps (1st
March review)...
2.
Click Next >>
HandicapMaster will calculate the number of qualifying scores returned by each player between
the review dates.
Those players who have returned insufficient scores are listed.
3.
Review the list of players. Any players who, for special reasons should not have their handicap
marked as non-competition, remove the tick from alongside their name.
4.
Click Next >>
5.
Click OK>>
19.2.5.2.2 Restoring a Handicap to Competition status (Scotland)
Competition / Non-Competition CONGU® Handicap Status Regulations are only sanctioned b y
Scottish Golf Union and Scottish Ladies Golf Association for club s in Scotland.
To restore a Handicap to 'Competition' status
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
328
HandicapMaster®
1.
On the Handicapping Menu, choose 'Competition' Handicaps, then Restore competition
handicap for player and select the applicable Player.
2.
Enter the revised handicap (if required) and click OK.
19.2.6 Reporting Qualifying scores by 'AWAY' Members to their Home Clubs
At times, it may be necessary for the Handicap Secretary to submit a report to the Handicap Secretaries
of other clubs whenever any member who has their Home Club away from this club returns a
Qualifying Score. This report is called "Report Away Players' Scores to their Home Clubs".
HandicapMaster will produce a Report Away Players' Scores to their Home Clubs report upon
demand.
To produce a Report Away Players' Scores to their Home Clubs report
Do one of the following:
On the Reports menu, click Handicapping Reports, then Report Away Players' Scores to their
Home Clubs, or
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Reports. Select Handicapping tab, then
Report Away Players' Scores to their Home Clubs and either double-click or press Enter key.
See Also
E-mailing the Report Away Players' Scores to their Home Clubs report
Note
The Report Away Players' Scores to their Home Clubs report inserts any available contact details for
a Golf Club into the report (in letter format ready for posting to another club). To set up the Names,
Addresses, see Enter Contact Details and Addresses.
19.2.7 'Exceptional Scoring' Reductions
Whilst the Unified Handicapping System works well for most players, the handicaps of rapidly
improving golfers may not fully reflect their playing ability.
Handicap Authorities have the option to introduce on a trial basis an exceptional score review.
In a calendar year where a player records two Nett Differential scores of -4 or better, on the occurrence
of the second such score the number of qualifying scores between the scores will be determined, the
scores will be averaged and a proposed adjustment will be determined based on Clause 23.10 of the
Unified Handicapping System.
This adjustment is not automatic but is indicated by HandicapMaster at the time the low score is
recorded.
How to reduce a Handicap for “Exceptional Scoring”
You may not enter an Exceptional Scoring reduction (ESR) other than at the time the score is first
processed into the player’s handicap record.
This is a limitation imposed by the Council of National Golf Unions (CONGU).
The system will recognise when a second low score is added to a player’s record in the same
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
329
calendar year and offer the option for applying an ESR at that time. This will be when
a) A qualifying competition is closed, or
b) An away score is entered (or received from a Central Database of Handicaps), or
c) A supplementary score is recorded.
If you decide not to apply the reduction at this time, you cannot subsequently apply it without undoing
the score/competition and re-entering it.
The reduction in the player’s handicap will be in line with Clause 23.10 of the Unified Handicapping
System.
Note:
Member clubs of the GUI and ILGU (I.e. Ireland) are mandated to accept any ESR recommendation
offered, by the GUI and ILGU. The option to not apply the ESR in this region is disabled.
How to apply an Exceptional Scoring reduction retrospectively
CONGU do not allow this. An ESR may only be applied at the time a competition or score is added to
the player’s record.
If it had been decided not to apply the reduction originally, it would be necessary to undo the player’s
score and re-enter it to force the offer of an ESR once again.
This is a limitation imposed by the Council of National Golf Unions (CONGU).
How to cancel an ESR after previously being applied
1. On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Exceptional Scoring Reductions
2. Select the Exceptional Scoring Reduction to be cancelled and right-click. Select Undo.
Notes:
For clubs in regions where their National Union has NOT sanctioned the Exceptional Scoring
reductions trial, these facilities will not be available.
19.2.8 Low Handicap Players Audit
Many National Unions and Area Authorities (such as County Unions) request copies of the Handicap
Records of the lowest handicapped players. This report enables you to report the handicap records for
players within a specific handicap range as requested by your Area Authority (e.g. County Union),
National Golf Union or National Association.
To product a report of Low Handicap Golfers' handicap records
1. In the Report Handicap records for handicaps from box, enter the lower handicap for Handicaps to
include within the report. In the to box enter the upper handicap for Handicaps to include within the
report.
Notes:
The minimum handicap that may be entered is -10. The maximum handicap that may be entered is
54 for Club, Premier and Network Editions (to allow for Juniors). For the EGA edition the maximum is
36.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
330
HandicapMaster®
19.2.9 Issue a Disability Handicap
The Rules of Golf recognise five categories of disability:
Blind golfers
Amputee golfers
Golfers requiring Canes or Crutches
Golfers requiring Wheelchairs
Golfers with Learning Disabilities
The CONGU® Unified Handicapping System suggests that players may be awarded 'disability'
handicaps above the CONGU maximums when appropriate.
For further details of the Disability Handicap please view Appendix K of the CONGU® Unified
Handicapping System.
To Award a Player a Disability Handicap
1.
Do one of the following:
In the Players list, select a Member and press Enter Key, or
In the Players list, select a Member, then on the Players menu, click Edit Member, or
On the Players menu, click Edit Member and select a Member from the list displayed.
2.
Select the Handicapping tab
3.
Tick the Player is Eligible for a Disability Handicap box.
You may now award a disability handicap up to a maximum of 54.
Notes:
Disability Handicaps are displayed with a prefix of "D" in the Handicap List.
19.2.10 Competition Scratch Scores - Decision 3(a)
Decision 3(a) of the CONGU® Unified Handicapping System states:
Dec. 3(a) Calculation of the Competition Scratch Score When a Club Runs Two Separate
Competitions On the Same Day
When a club holds two or more separate competitions on the same day in which all
competitors play only one round, a separate Competition Scratch Score shall be
calculated for each competition unless all competitors play from the same tees and use
the same format.
If any of the competitions are over more than one round on the same day, then a
separate Competition Scratch Score calculation shall be made for each round.
In a Qualifying Competition where players compete for prizes in different classes,
divisions or Handicap Categories only one CSS shall be calculated for the overall field.
How to combine Competitions for the purpose of calculating a common CSS
When running Apply Scores, HandicapMaster will identify if there are any existing competitions already
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
331
processed that could meet the requirement to have a common CSS calculated with the competition
being applied. In this situation, a page in the Apply Scores wizard will offer the option to combine
competitions for this purpose.
To create a separate CSS for a competition previously combined with other competitions, undo the
competition and re-apply it.
How to combine Competitions when one has been processed on another handicapping
system
If some of the scores that you need to combine together to calculate the Competition Scratch Score
were entered on a different handicapping system (e.g. different computer), then it will be necessary to
enter the relevant details from those scores into HandicapMaster.
When running Apply Scores, tick box Some Competition Scores have been kept on a different
database. You may then enter the necessary numbers from scores entered on the other system to
enable a common CSS to be calculated.
19.2.11 Running a CONGU® 9 Hole Handicap Competition
The CONGU® Unified Handicapping System 2012 includes the option for committees to run 9 Hole
qualifying competitions for its ‘Home’ members.
The format for Nine-Hole Qualifying Competitions is Stableford with a ‘neutral’ 18 points for the nine
un-played holes being added to the Nine-Hole Stableford score.
How to run a CONGU® 9 Hole Qualifying competition
1. Obtain a “9 Hole Standard Scratch Score” for your course from your local “Area Authority” or National
Union.
2. In HandicapMaster, enter the 9 Hole SSS into the Course Details window for your course.
3. Set-up a competition template with the following attributes:
Singles
Stableford
Played over 9 holes
Handicap Allowance “CONGU 9 Hole Handicapping”
4. Open a New competition using this template.
5. Create a “CONGU 9 Hole Competition Handicaps” report, so that your members may convert their
existing handicaps to 9 hole competition handicap allowances. This report will automatically be
created when the new competition is opened.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
332
19.3
HandicapMaster®
The EGA Handicap System
19.3.1 Introduction
Considerations for administering the European (EGA) Handicap System
The following chapter describes considerations that are applicable to the EGA Handicap System (http://
www.ega-golf.ch/)
Contents
Enter an Extra Day Score
Run Annual Handicap Review
Restoring an Inactive Handicap
Enter a Handicap Score
19.3.2 Enter an Extra Day Score
This topic relates to the European Golf Association (EGA) Handicap editions of
HandicapMaster only.
layers with Handicaps in categories 2 to 5 may return extra scores (outside of competitions) to count
as Handicap scores. These are known as ''Extra Day' scores.
P
To record an Extra Day Score
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Handicapping Menu, choose Record Extra Day Scores, or
In the Handicapping Tasks, click Record Extra Day Scores.
2.
In the Played On box, enter the date when the round was played. Choose the order the
score is entered in the handicap record by selecting AM or PM (see discussion on ordering
events in handicap records ).
3.
In the Holes Played box, choose whether the Extra Day Score was played over 9 or 18
holes.
4.
Click the Played at... button to select the Club where the Extra Day Score was played.
5.
For each player who has returned an Extra Day Score matching the above details:
a.
Click Add Player... button
b.
Select the Player from the list
c.
Enter the Player's Stableford score.
To remove a Player entered in error
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
1.
Select the Player in the Scores Grid
2.
Click Remove button
333
19.3.3 EGA Annual Handicap Reviews and Inactive Handicaps
19.3.3.1 Annual Handicap Review
This topic relates to the European Golf Association (EGA) Handicap editions of
HandicapMaster only.
About the Annual Handicap Review
The European Golf Association include the following explanatory notes in the EGA Handicap System,
regarding the Annual Handicap Review (AHR):
The Annual Handicap Review has two main objectives:
To identify those players who have returned enough scores to be assessed effectively
To assess whether the scoring performance of all such players in handicap categories 1 to 5
is representative of the players’ ability as indicated by their current exact handicap.
The AHR is an essential procedure within the EGA Handicap System and therefore mandatory.
It is designed to check that players have handicaps that reasonably reflect their ability as would
be anticipated from their performance. It is accepted that the committee’s ability to apply the
process objectively varies widely from club to club as it is heavily dependent on the experience
and knowledge of the committee. After considerable statistical research, an algorithm has been
designed that will enable committees to carry out the AHR in a uniformly objective manner.
Active and Inactive handicaps
As part of that research it was determined that it was necessary for a player to return more than
4 scores in the period between AHRs for an effective assessment to be made of his
performance against handicap. Such players have active handicaps and are included in the
AHR assessment. Players that have returned fewer than four scores are excluded from the
performance assessment process within the AHR and are regarded as having inactive
handicaps. Such players retain an exact handicap but it cannot be definitely verified as the
committee has been presented with too little information to make that judgement. However an
inactive handicap can be taken as a general indication of the player’s competence and is
perfectly acceptable for any form of play where such an indication is all that is required.
Notes:
The analysis uses scores recorded by each player in the past calendar year, and therefore is best
run towards the end of the calendar year, or early in the following year.
The review process will automatically mark player’s handicaps as “inactive” and/or adjust handicaps
according to analysis of the scores returned.
The Annual Review cannot be run if it has already been run in the last 9 months. It should only be run
once at the end of each season.
When run, the Annual Handicap Review will generate a report of the adjustments made to players'
Handicaps.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
334
HandicapMaster®
To run the Annual Handicap Review
1.
On the Handicapping menu, select Annual Review...
To reprint the Annual Handicap Review report
You may reprint the report from the last run of the Annual Review.
Do one of the following:
On the Reports menu, click Handicapping Reports, then Annual Handicap Review, or
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Reports. Select Handicapping tab, then Annual
Handicap Review and either double-click or press Enter key.
19.3.3.2 Restoring an Inactive Handicap
This topic relates to the European Golf Association (EGA) Handicap editions of
HandicapMaster only.
To re-activate an inactive Handicap
A Player's Inactive Handicap will automatically be restored when 4 qualifying scores are entered onto
their Handicap record during the current calendar year. There are three ways that qualifying scores can
be entered for players with inactive handicaps:
These players may return competition scores (but without being eligible to win prizes). They will be
competing 'Hors Concours'.
Some Players may return Extra Day Scores (where their Handicaps are in the applicable categories).
See Enter an Extra Day Score.
Casual scores (called "Handicap Scores" in HandicapMaster) may be recorded in their records. See
Enter a Handicap Score.
19.3.3.3 Enter a Handicap Score (Inactive Handicaps)
This topic relates to the European Golf Association (EGA) Handicap editions of
HandicapMaster only.
Players who return less than four qualifying scores in a season will typically have their handicap
marked as "inactive" (no asterisk alongside the handicap). Once a handicap is "inactive", it cannot be
used in a competition to play for competition prizes.
In order to re-attain their Handicap, a player is able to return scores outside of competitions. For the
purpose of HandicapMaster Handicap records, where these are not 'Extra Day Scores' (such as for
Category 1 players), these are called "Handicap Scores".
To record a Handicap Score
1.
On the Handicapping Menu, choose Record Scores to re-activate Handicaps. The member's
Handicap must be inactive at the time.
2.
In the Played On box, enter the date when the round was played. Choose the order the score is
entered in the handicap record by selecting AM or PM (see discussion on ordering events in handicap
records).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
335
3.
In the Holes Played box, choose whether the Extra Day Score was played over 9 or 18 holes.
4.
Click the Played at... button to select the Club where the round was played.
5.
For each player who has returned a Handicap Score matching the above details:
a.
Click Add Player... button
b.
Select the Player from the list
c.
Enter the Player's Stableford score.
To remove a Player entered in error
1.
Select the Player in the Scores Grid
2.
Click Remove button
19.3.3.4 View Players with Inactive handicaps
This topic relates to the European Golf Association (EGA) Handicap editions of
HandicapMaster only.
To view a report of players with Inactive Handicap Status
1.
On the Reports menu, click Handicapping Reports, then Inactive Handicaps.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
336
19.4
HandicapMaster®
List Players within a Handicap Range
You may create a cut-down Handicap List report, listing only players who currently have a handicap
within a specified range, such as for reviewing players for selection for a team match.
To list players holding a current handicap within a chosen range
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Reports menu, click Handicap List (Selected Range of Handicaps), or
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Reports. Select Handicapping tab, then
Handicap List (Selected Range of Handicaps) and either double-click or press Enter key.
2.
Choose the Players that you would like to include in the report and click OK.
3.
Choose the Handicap range to use in the report:
In the From box, enter the lower handicap for handicaps to include within the report. In the to
box enter the upper handicap for Handicaps to include within the report.
Notes:
The minimum handicap that may be entered is -10. The maximum handicap that may
be entered is 54 for Club, Premier and Network Editions (to allow for Juniors). For the
EGA edition the maximum is 36.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
19.5
337
Handicap Records for Players within a Handicap Range
You may create a report detailing the handicap records of players who currently have a handicap within
a specified range, such as for reviewing players for selection for a team match.
To report Handicap Records for Players within a Handicap Range
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Reports menu, click Handicap Records (Selected Range of Handicaps), or
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Reports. Select Handicapping tab, then
Handicap Records (Selected Range of Handicaps) and either double-click or press Enter key.
2.
Choose the Players and date range that you would like to include in the report and click OK.
3.
Choose the Handicap range to use in the report:
In the From box, enter the lower handicap for handicaps to include within the report. In the to
box enter the upper handicap for Handicaps to include within the report.
Notes:
The minimum handicap that may be entered is -10. The maximum handicap that may
be entered is 54 for Club, Premier and Network Editions (to allow for Juniors). For the
EGA edition the maximum is 36.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
338
19.6
HandicapMaster®
Suspending Players' Handicaps
In some circumstances, such as after a serious breach of handicapping rules, it may be necessary to
suspend a players' Handicap.
Note: For less serious offences, suspending players from entering competitions may be more
applicable.
To suspend a players' Handicap
1.
On the Handicapping menu, click Suspend and Reinstate Handicaps..., then Suspend Handicap
and select a Member from the list displayed.
The players' Handicap will be displayed as "Suspended" in the All Members list and handicap
reports, and the player will not be available for entering competitions.
To remove the suspension of a players' Handicap
1.
On the Handicapping menu, click Suspend and Reinstate Handicaps..., then Reinstate Handicap
and select a Member from the list displayed.
If the player already has a suspension in place, you will be offered the option to cancel the
suspension.
Note:
The option to suspend Handicaps is available in the CONGU and EGA handicapping editions of
HandicapMaster.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
19.7
339
Golf Society Handicapping (Society Edition Only)
19.7.1 Introduction
How to configure Handicapping rules for your Society
The following chapter describes considerations that are applicable to the Society Edition of
HandicapMaster only.
Contents
Change the Handicapping Rules used
The Configure Handicapping Rules Wizard
19.7.2 Change the Handicapping Rules used
Users of the Society Edition of HandicapMaster may select their own rules for Handicapping. These
rules can be based on:
where the player finishes in a competition
how the player scores in a competition
These rules allow for varying adjustments to the Handicaps, and can be used individually or in
combination. If both methods are selected, the handicap adjustment after the competition is the
combined value of the two adjustments. Different adjustments are configured for each category of
player, so that smaller adjustments can made to low handicaps and larger adjustments to high
handicaps.
Maximum values to be applied to the Handicaps of the Society's players may also be defined.
Adjustments based on the Player’s Position in a competition
These rules allow for adjustments to handicaps based on the overall position of the player in the
competition, regardless of their score.
Players who are “placed” have their handicap reduced by a fixed amount. Different adjustments may
be configured for First to Ninth place, although only those rules which are activated are applied.
Players who are “unplaced” have their handicap increased by a fixed amount. An “unplaced” player is
one where there is no selected rule for his/her position in the competition. For example, if rules are
active for the Overall Winner, Runner-Up and Third places, the player in Fourth Place is “unplaced” for
handicap adjustments.
Competitions played over more than one round
For Alternative Day or Multiple Round competitions, the players’ overall positions in the aggregated
results are used. Any handicap adjustments are made on the last round of the competition. If a player
does not play the last round, the adjustment is made in the last round in which he/she played.
Note: As the overall positions (and handicap adjustments) are calculated as each round is closed,
handicap adjustments may initially be applied to an intermediate round. When the next round is
closed, handicap adjustments will be removed from the earlier rounds and recalculated using the new
aggregate positions. Between the first and last rounds of a competition played over multiple rounds, a
player’s handicap may not be accurate, as the adjustment and its timing are likely to change until the
final round is closed.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
340
HandicapMaster®
Adjustments based on the Player’s Score
These rules, based on the ideas used in club golf, allow for varying adjustments based on the
performance of players against their handicap.
If a player has played better that his/her handicap, the handicap can be reduced according the number
of strokes by which the player bettered his/her handicap.
If the player has played worse than his/her handicap, the handicap is increased by a fixed amount.
Safe zones may be defined where the player’s handicap is not increased if they fail to play to handicap
by a small margin.
A range of options is available for choosing how the Competition Scratch Score is calculated after a
competition
To Configure Handicapping for your Society
1.
On the Handicapping menu, click Configure Handicapping Rules
2.
This will start the Configure Handicapping Rules Wizard.
19.7.3 The Configure Handicapping Rules Wizard
The Configure Handicapping Rules Wizard allows Handicapping for a Golf Society to be set up.
1.
Select the method(s) used for handicap adjustments. This can be based on how a players
scores (like club golf) or on the position in which a player comes in a competition. If both
methods are selected, the handicap adjustment after the competition is the combined value of the
two adjustments.
2.
In the Men and Ladies boxes, enter the maximum Handicaps allowed in your Society. The
Maximum values may range from 28 to 54.
3.
Click Next >>
4.
In the Maximum Playing Handicap in Category boxes, enter the upper Handicap for five different
'categories' of Players. Each Category of Players may have different handicapping arrangements.
That is, it is possible to configure up to five separate sets of handicapping rules. This may be
useful if use wish to reduce handicaps of high-handicapped players more than low-handicapped
players when good scores are returned. Use 54 as the Maximum for any Category that you do not
wish to operate.
5.
Click Next >>
Adjustments based on competition positions (if method selected)
6.
Configure the rules which adjust players' handicaps based on their overall position in the
competition. Only rules which are ticked are active and used to calculate adjustments.
7.
To activate a rule, click on the box at the left side of the rule. This will also display the
amendment form to set the adjustment values.
8.
To deactivate a rule, click on the box at the left side to remove the tick (the adjustment values are
not changed).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
9.
341
To change the adjustment values, click on the rule and then click the Amend button. Set the
required adjustment values for each category of player and click OK. You may also activate/
deactivate a rule using this method.
Note: The “Unplaced” rule applies to any position for which there is no other rule active.
10. Click Next >>
Adjustments based on scores (if method selected)
11. In the Score above Handicap; Adjust Once: boxes, enter the amount of increase in Handicap the
Players who have failed to match or better their Handicap in a competition should receive.
12. In the Score below Handicap; Adjust for each stroke below: boxes, enter the amount of
reduction in Handicap the Players who have bettered their Handicap in a competition should
receive. At the conclusion of a competition, this amount is repeatedly taken from the Player's
Handicaps for every stroke they are better than their Handicap.
13. Click Next >>
14. In the Safe Zone boxes, enter the number of strokes a Player may 'miss' playing to their Handicap
by, but still avoid having the Handicaps increased. Any Player who returns a score in their Safe
Zone will not have their Handicap altered. For example, enter "5" if a player is allowed to return a
Nett Score within 5 strokes of their handicap and avoid a Handicap increase.
15. Click Next >>
16. In the Set CSS as: list, choose how the 'Competition Scratch Score' for a competition is to be
chosen. The Competition Scratch Score is the Nett score at which a Player is deemed to have
played equal to their Handicap. For example, if a Player has an 18 handicap and he plays in a
Competition where the Competition Scratch Score is calculated to be 70 strokes, He will need to
score 70 + 18 = 88 to equal his handicap.
17. Click Next >>
Complete the Configure Handicapping Rules Wizard
18. Click Finish
Note: When the Wizard is completed, the Handicap Records of Players may be recalculated.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
342
19.8
HandicapMaster®
Handicapping of Competitions played over less than 18 holes
19.8.1 How number of Strokes Received is calculated
Handicapping based on 18-hole Handicaps
Where the number of holes being played in a competition is less than 18 holes (say a 9 hole
competition for example), HandicapMaster will base the number of strokes a player or team receives
on each player’s “18 hole” handicap (I.e. their normal handicap). The number of Stroke Received by the
player will then automatically be reduced for the Competition (in proportion to the number of holes
being played).
How HandicapMaster calculates the number of strokes a player receives
Initially, HandicapMaster will calculate the number of strokes received based on the player’s 18 hole
handicap, then reduce this proportionally for the number of holes being played. The following formula
is used:
(18 hole Handicap) x (Proportion of Handicap for competition) x (Proportion of 18 hole course being
played)
Examples:
1. Nine Hole Competition played off “Full handicap”
Strokes Received is “(Handicap) x 1 x 9/18” .
I.e. Each player will receive ½ of their 18-hole Handicap.
2. Twelve Hole Competition played off “7/8ths Handicap”
Strokes Received is “(Handicap) x 7/8 x 12/18”.
I.e. Each player will receive 7/12ths of their 18-hole Handicap.
Limits set on number of strokes that may be received
If a limit is set on the number of strokes that may be received by any player or team, this limit is applied
after calculating the strokes to be received.
In our two examples above, the limit would be applied after calculating either ½ of 18 hole Handicap
(example 1) or after calculating 7/12ths of 18 hole handicap (example 2).
See Also
Stroke Index allocation and where Handicap Strokes are received
19.8.2 Stroke Index allocation and where Handicap Strokes are received
Where Strokes are taken on the Scorecard
When less than 18 holes are being played, then some Stroke Indexes on the Scorecard will not come
into play. For example, for a 9 hole competition, it may be that only the odd numbered Stroke Indexes or
only the even numbered Stroke Indexes will come into play.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Handicapping
343
When deciding on which holes a player will receive strokes, HandicapMaster will refer to only the
Stroke Indexes being played and allocate the strokes received to the appropriate holes.
For example, suppose a 9 hole competition is being played over holes with the following Stroke
Indexes:
3, 4, 6, 10, 11, 13, 15, 16, 18
If a player is due to receive 5 strokes, these will be allocated to the 5 holes with the lowest stroke
indexes (I.e. holes with indexes 3, 4, 6, 10 and 11 in this example).
Likewise, if a player is due to receive 12 strokes he will be allocated 2 strokes on the holes with the
three lowest Stroke Indexes, and one stroke on the rest.
Players with “Plus” handicaps will give strokes to the course starting with the holes with the highest
Stroke Indexes being played.
Allocation of Stroke Indexes
In the example where the holes with the following Stroke Indexes are being played...
3, 4, 6, 10, 11, 13, 15, 16, 18
...it would be possible to re-allocate the Indexes as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9.
Providing index 1 is allocated to the same hole as the lowest Stroke Index on the original numbers (3 in
this example), 2 to the same hole as the second lowest original Stroke Index, etc, then this will not
make any difference.
In this situation, it's optional whether to allocate new Stroke Indexes for the "short" course being played,
or whether to stick with the existing Stroke Indexes for the course, as printed on the 18 hole Scorecard.
See Also
How number of Strokes Received is calculated
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Chapter
20
Subscriptions, Invoices and
Payments
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
20
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
20.1
Introduction
345
This is an option for HandicapMaster that allows your organization to manage membership
subscriptions and issue subscription renewal letters, create invoices and record payments. It includes
a number of reports to help you manage subscriptions and membership income. The membership
option has been designed with the same look and feel of the HandicapMaster software.
In addition to the details in this help information there is a Quick Start guide to the Subscriptions option
and a more detailed help document. These are available from the HandicapMaster website
Additional Subscriptions Option Documention
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
Subscriptions are designed around the concept of an annual subscription period with one or more
payments in the period. By use of scheduled payments is it possible to manage overdue subscriptions
and raise overdue letters, emails using the Overdue Subscriptions wizard.
Invoices can allow one off items to be raised against members and alter their balance. Examples
would be a Bar levy.
Invoices may also be used for subscriptions where irregular payments are to be processed. Use in
this manner some of the features specific to subscriptions such as overdue processing are not
applicable.
Subscriptions and Invoices are designed to adjust a member’s “account balance” by reducing the
balance.
Payments recorded will also adjust a member’s “account balance” by increasing the balance.
Competition Fees may also be processed by the Subscriptions Option. These will raise invoices and
adjust a member's account balance.
A Transaction History facility allows all transactions for a member to be viewed
Recommended Use
Where an organization has a requirement for management of overdue subscriptions and has one or
more subscription payments per annum then it is recommended that Subscriptions are used.
Note: Different members can have different payment schedules.
Where an organization has a subscription requirement for various payments at irregular periods
through the year we recommend the use of an invoice rather than a subscription and then record Adhoc Payments as required.
Note: This will mean that it is not possible to automatically manage overdue subscriptions using the
facilities within HandicapMaster but you are still able to view account balance details.
Contents
Preparation
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
346
HandicapMaster®
Subscriptions
Invoices
Payments
See also
Accounting Options
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
20.2
347
Preparation - Payment Items
20.2.1 Introduction
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To manage subscriptions and invoices for members, HandicapMaster makes use of the concept of a
"Template". Each Template consists of a list of Payment Items.
A Payment Item describes a billable item and its cost or charge.
Payment Categories allow you to group together Payment Items that are used to create a Template.
Methods of Payment define how a payment is made, a number of default value are defined may you
may define additional ones.
To create a Template you choose the items required from a list of Payment Items.
Before the Payment Items are defined it is suggested that you customize the HandicapMaster
Membership Option to your organization's requirements.
Contents
Configure additional Methods of Payment
Configure additional Payment Categories
Configure Payment Item
See Also
Configure Payment Options
Create a Subscription Template
Create an Invoice Template
20.2.2 Methods of Payment
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
Methods of Payment define how a payment is made to your organization by the payee. A number of
initial values are defined.
To add a Method of Payment
1. On the Accounting menu click Configure and then click Methods of Payment item.
2. Click the New button and enter the new Method of Payment.
To edit a Method of Payment
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
348
HandicapMaster®
1. On the Accounting menu click Configure and then click Methods of Payment item.
2. Click on the appropriate Method of Payment in the list to highlight it.
3. Click the Edit button and edit the name as required.
To delete a Method of payment
1. On the Accounting menu click Configure and then click Methods of Payment item.
2. Click on the appropriate Method of Payment in the list to highlight it.
3. Click the Delete button.
4. Confirm the deletion
Notes:
It is not possible to delete the initially defined values, however they may be edited.
20.2.3 Payment Categories
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
Payment Categories allow you to group Payment Items together. A number of initial values are defined.
To add a Payment Category
1. On the Accounting menu click Configure and then click Payment Categories item.
2. Click the New button and enter the new Payment Category.
To edit a Payment Category
1. On the Accounting menu click Configure and then click Payment Categories item.
2. Click on the appropriate Payment Category in the list to highlight it.
3. Click the Edit button and edit the name as required.
To delete a Payment Category
1. On the Accounting menu click Configure and then click Payment Categories item.
2. Click on the appropriate Payment Category in the list to highlight it.
3. Click the Delete button.
4. Confirm the deletion
Notes:
It is not possible to delete the initially defined values, however they may be edited.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
349
20.2.4 Payment Items
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
Payment Items are used when you create a Subscription or Invoice Template. Payment Items consist
of at least 3 elements:
Payment Category
Description
Default Amount
To add a Payment Item
1. On the Accounting menu click Configure and then click Add New Payment Item.
2. Create a Payment Item using the Payment Item Window.
To edit a Payment Item
1. On the Accounting menu click Configure and then click Edit Payment Item.
2. Select a Payment Item in the list and click OK.
3. Edit the Payment Item using the Payment Item Window.
To delete a Payment Item
1. On the Accounting menu click Configure and then click Delete Payment Item.
2. Select a Payment Item in the list and click OK.
3. Confirm the deletion.
20.2.5 The Payment Item Window
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
The Payment Item window allows a Payment Item to be added or edited.
The Payment Item Window
1. In the Payment Category list click the appropriate Payment Category to highlight it.
2. In the Description box enter a suitable description for the Payment Item.
3. The Notes box may be used to record any details you wish to record.
4. In the Nett Amount box enter the cost of this Payment Item.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
350
HandicapMaster®
5. Tick the Add VAT box to add VAT to the cost of the Payment Item.
This is only visible if you have configured VAT.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
20.3
351
Subscriptions
20.3.1 Introduction
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To manage subscriptions for members, HandicapMaster makes use of the concept of a "Subscription
Template".
Each "Subscription Template" consists of a list of Payment Items.
A Payment Item describes a billable item and its cost or charge.
This flexible approach allows you to define different templates for different memberships. A
Subscription Template can be assigned to one or more members.
A Raise Subscription Wizard guides you through the process of raising membership Subscriptions.
Subscriptions are designed around the concept of an annual subscription period with one or more
payments in the period. By use of scheduled payments is it possible to manage overdue subscriptions
and raise overdue letters, emails using the Overdue Subscriptions wizard.
If you require irregular payments then please review the Invoices section of this document.
Note: some of the features specific to subscriptions such as overdue processing are not applicable
when using Invoices to manage irregular payment subscriptions.
Contents
Create a Subscription Template
Assign a Subscription Template to a Member or Members
Edit a Subscription Template
Copy a Subscription Template
Delete a Subscription Template
Raise a Subscription
View a Member's Subscription
Amend Subscription Notes
Find Overdue Subscriptions
Reprint a Subscription Invoice
Resend a Subscription Invoice by E-mail
Raise an Overdue Subscription Invoice or Letter
20.3.2 Create a Subscription Template
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
352
HandicapMaster®
To create a Subscription Template
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu click Subscriptions, then Set up a Template.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select
Subscription Templates. On the list displayed right click with the mouse and select Set
up a Template.
2.
Create a Template using the Subscription and Invoice Templates Window
20.3.3 Assign a Subscription Template to a Member
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
A Subscription Template may be assigned to a single member or a number of members at the same
time.
To assign a single member to a Subscription
1. Do one of the following:
In the Players list, select a Member and press Enter Key, or
In the Players list, select a Member, then on the Players menu, click Edit Member, or
On the Players menu, click Edit Member and select a Member from the list displayed.
1. Click the Subscriptions Tab.
2. In the Subscription Template list click one of the templates to associate it with the member.
To Assign a Template to a number of Members
1. On the Accounting menu click Subscriptions and then click Assign Template to Members.
2. Select a Subscription Template in the list and click OK.
3. You will be prompted “Assign Template to All memb ers with the same Memb ership Category?
Selecting No will display a list of members and their current Subscription Template, if any. Tick
the box along side each member you wish to assign to the (previously selected) Subscription
Template.
Selecting Yes will display a list of membership categories. Tick the box along side each
membership category to choose the members in those membership categories that you wish to
assign to the (previously selected) Subscription Template.
4. Click OK when you have finished selecting the members or membership categories and all the
members will be will be assigned the selected Subscription Template.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
353
To find members who do not have a template assigned
1.
On the Reports menu, click Accounting Reports, then Members Without A Subscription
Template.
Notes:
To remove a Subscription Template from a member select the None template.
When assigning multiple members to a Subscription Template, if you select members who are
assigned a different template, you will be prompted to confirm that if you wish to continue to assign
members to the new subscription template. If you select No then none of the members will be
assigned to the new subscription template.
When assigning membership categories to a Subscription Template, if you select membership
categories which contain members who are assigned a different template, you will be prompted to
confirm that you wish to continue to assign members to the new subscription template. If you select
No then none of the members in the membership categories will be assigned to the new
subscription template.
20.3.4 Edit a Subscription Template
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
You may wish to edit a Subscription Template perhaps to add or delete a Payment Item.
To edit a Subscription Template
1. Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu click Subscriptions, then Edit Template. A list of Subscription
Templates is displayed, click one of the Templates to highlight it and then click OK
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select
Subscription Templates. On the list displayed right click with the mouse and select Edit
a Template.
2. Enter the Template information using the Subscription and Invoice Template window.
Notes:
Editing a Subscription Template will not affect any subscriptions already raised, but will affect future
subscriptions.
20.3.5 Copy a Subscription Template
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
354
HandicapMaster®
You may wish to copy a Subscription Template perhaps to save time setting up a number of similar
templates.
To copy a Subscription Template
1. Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu click Subscriptions and then click Copy Template. A list of
Subscription Templates is displayed, click one of the templates to highlight it and then click OK
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select
Subscription Templates. Highlight the template you wish to copy. Then right click with the
mouse and select Copy Template.
2. You will be offered the choice to change the copied template to an Invoice template.
3. Confirmation of the new type and name of template will be displayed.
Notes:
Copying a Subscription Template will not affect any subscriptions already raised.
20.3.6 Delete a Subscription Template
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To delete a Subscription Template
1. Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu click Subscriptions and then click Delete Template. A list of
Subscription Templates is displayed, click one of the templates to highlight it and then click OK
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select
Subscription Templates. Highlight the template you wish to delete. Then right click with the
mouse and select Delete Template or press the DELETE key
2. Confirm the deletion
Notes:
If a template is assigned to one or more members you will not be able to delete it and a message
will be displayed. In this case you must assign another template to those members.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
355
20.3.7 Raise a Subscription
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To Raise a Subscription
1. On the Accounting menu, click Subscriptions then click Raise Subscriptions.
2. Raise the Subscription using The Raise Subscription Wizard
20.3.8 The Raise Subscription Wizard
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
The Raise Subscription Wizard guides you through the process of raising membership subscription
renewals.
The Raise Subscription Wizard
This briefly describes how the Raise Subscription Wizard operates
1.
Click Next > to review or raise subscriptions
You will now be offered the choice of Review Subscription Details or Raise Subscriptions.
It is recommended that your review the subscriptions before raising the subscriptions.
Note: You may click Remember as future default if you wish the Raise Subscriptions action to be
the default every time you run this wizard. If you have already selected this as the default you may
click Cancel as future default to cancel this.
A count of the number of members who have not yet been assigned a subscription template will
be displayed with the option to list those members.
Note: If you do review subscriptions or list members without a template then you will need to
restart the wizard and select Raise Subscriptions to proceed with raising the subscriptions.
2.
Select Raise Subscriptions and click Next > to select the method of raising renewals
Select method of Raising Renewals
3.
Select one of the following methods for Create a Subscription Renewal
One or more Members
This will allow you to select one or more specific members for whom subscription renewals
are to be produced.
One or more Subscription Templates
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
356
HandicapMaster®
This will allow you to select one or more Subscription Templates, and thus the associated
members for whom subscription renewals are to be produced.
Members assigned to Membership Categories
This will allow you to select one or more membership Categories, and thus the associated
members for whom subscription renewals are to be produced.
Members assigned to Member Subscription Pools
This will allow you to select one or more Member subscription Pools, and thus the
associated members for whom subscription renewals are to be produced. Choose this
option if you wish to send subscriptions by e-mail to Member Subscription Pool Contacts.
All Members
This will allow you to select members who have been assigned a Subscription Template,
and for whom subscription renewals are to be produced.
4.
Click Next >
Select Members, Templates, Categories or Member Subscription Pools
5.
Do one of the following:
If selecting Members, tick the box next to one or more member's name to raise a subscription
renewal for this member.
If selecting Subscription Templates, tick the box next to one or more Subscription Templates for
which you wish to raise subscription renewals.
If selecting Membership Categories, tick the box next to one or more Membership Categories
for which you wish to raise subscription renewals.
If selecting Members assigned to Member Subscription Pools, tick the box next to one or more
Member Subscription Pools for which you wish to raise subscription renewals.
6.
Click Next >
Letters
7.
Tick the Issue Subscriptions as Letter box if you wish the Wizard to generate Renewal letters
rather than using the standard invoice layout. A list of existing letters is displayed.
Do one of the following:
Select an existing Letter, or
Select an existing Letter and click Edit Letter to edit this letter, or
Click New Letter to create a new letter. You now use the standard Letter Writer to create the
letter.
Note: Within the Letter Writer additional text fields have been added to allow for subscription
related letters to be generated. See Subscription Related Fields in Letters for further details.
8.
Click Next >
Options
9. If you wish to include a member's positive account balance to be used as a contribution to
their subscription tick this box. This will then use the member's account balance to reduce the
amount that they have to pay.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
357
10. If you will be sending subscriptions by E-mail you may configure the subject of the e-mail,
and the text that will be placed in the e-mail. The subscription details will automatically be
attached to the e-mail. If you do not intend to e-mail Subscriptions leave these at the default
values.
Completing the Raise Subscription Wizard
11. Click Finish to generate the Subscription renewals
E-mailing Subscriptions
When the Wizard has finished you may click the E-mail button
in the reports toolbar to
send subscriptions by e-mail to those members who have opted to receive subscriptions by email.
You will be prompted to add an attachment file in addition to the subscription. Click Yes and then
browse and select the file you wish to attach. This may be a document of any format.
At the end of the sending of the e-mails if there are any members who either do not have an e-mail
address or who have not opted to receive subscriptions by e-mail click Yes at the prompt that will be
displayed and select the required printer to print the subscriptions.
A summary of the e-mails sent will then be displayed.
Notes:
If a member is not assigned a Subscription Template then they will NOT have a subscription raised.
Depending on the number of subscriptions being generated it may take a short time for the wizard to
complete raising the subscriptions.
Only members who have a valid e-mail address and have been selected to receive subscriptions by
e-mail will receive subscriptions by e-mail.
When raising subscriptions for Members assigned to Member Subscription Pools and where the
Pool Contact is a member then e-mails will only be sent if the member has been selected to receive
subscriptions by e-mail. If the Pool Contact is not a member then the e-mail address must be valid
to receive the subscriptions by e-mail.
When you finish the wizard you may see the message:
"There are outstanding Subscription Invoices raised within the last 45 days for some
members.
Do you wish to VOID these and for new invoices to be raised for those members?
Selecting No will raise subscriptions for members (if any) who do not have subscriptions
raised within the last 45 days."
This indicates the wizard has identified that some of the selected members have recently had
subscriptions raised, but there have been no payments recorded. If you select ‘Yes’ then these
subscription invoices will be voided. Typically this message will appear if you re-run the
subscription wizard after noticing some changes are required.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
358
HandicapMaster®
If you select No then subscriptions will only be raised for those members who have not recently
had subscriptions raised.
This may be useful if you have for example raised some subscriptions by Member Subscription
Pool and then raise subscriptions by Subscription template where some of the Member
Subscription Pool members are assigned the subscription template.
When you finish the wizard you may see the message:
"Some of the selected Members have valid Subscriptions that expire in more than 45 days. Raise
Subscriptions for those Members as well as those with expired or about expire memberships?".
This indicates the wizard has identified that some of the members selected have got valid paid
subscriptions. Perhaps you have some members that paid previously and their subscriptions are
not due to expire for some time. Selecting NO will stop the wizard raising new subscriptions for
those members.
When raising subscriptions for Members assigned to Member Subscription Pools and you send
the subscriptions by e-mail, and there is more than one subscription for the Member Subscription
Pool then additional text is added to the end of the text of the e-mail indicating the number of
subscriptions in the attachment.
20.3.9 View a Member's Subscription
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To view a Member's subscription details
1. Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu click Subscriptions and then click View . A list of Subscriptions is
displayed, click one of the Subscriptions to highlight it and click OK to display the details.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select
Subscriptions. Highlight the Suhbscription you wish to view. Then right click with the
mouse and select View.
Notes:
You may also get a list of Subscriptions from the Accounting Places by clicking All Subscriptions or
Subscriptions in Current Year. Then if you click on the appropriate subscription in the list to highlight
it you may then right click with the mouse and select the View option.
20.3.10 Amend Subscription Notes
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
359
To amend Subscription Notes
1. Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu click Subscriptions and then click Amend Note . A list of
Subscriptions is displayed, click one of the Subscriptions to highlight it and click OK to display
the notes which may be amended.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select
Subscriptions. Highlight the subscription with the note you wish to amend. Then right click
with the mouse and select Amend Note.
2. Edit the note as required.
Notes:
You may also get a list of Subscriptions from the Accounting Places by clicking All Subscriptions or
Subscriptions in Current Year. Then if you click on the appropriate subscription in the list to highlight
it you may then right click with the mouse and select the Amend Note option.
In the list of subscriptions displayed when selecting Accounting menu -> Subscriptions you may
scroll to the right of the list to see the current notes
20.3.11 Find Overdue Subscriptions
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To obtain a list of members with overdue subscriptions:
1. On the Reports Menu click the Accounting Reports option and then Overdue Subscriptions.
2. On the Report Selection screen, select who to include in the report and then click OK to view the
Overdue Subscriptions report.
20.3.12 Reprint Subscription Invoices
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option has been
installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions Option may not be
installed.
Reprint a single subscription
If a member requires a copy of a subscription invoice previously sent you can print a copy as follows.
1. On the Accounting Menu click Subscriptions then click Print.
2. Click one of the Subscriptions to highlight it and click OK to print the Subscription on the default
printer.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
360
HandicapMaster®
Notes:
You may also get a list of Subscriptions from the Accounting Places by clicking All Subscriptions or
Subscriptions in Current Year. Then if you click on the appropriate subscription in the list to highlight
it you may then right click with the mouse and select the Print option and a copy of the subscription
will be printed to your default printer.
The status of the payments at the time of the print will be displayed. For example: a member is
paying monthly and has paid a couple of payments these will show as paid and the remaining will
be displayed as outstanding (or overdue if appropriate).
Reprint a range of subscriptions
To reprint a range of subscriptions do the following:
1. On the Accounting menu, click Subscriptions then click Reprint Subscriptions.
2. Select the subscription at the start of the range to be reprinted in the list. You may change the list sort
order by clicking on a column header.
3. Click Next >.
4. Select the subscription at the end of the range to be reprinted in the list. You may change the list sort
order by clicking on a column header.
5. Click Finish.
Notes:
The report of subscriptions may be reprinted or e-mailed in the normal manner.
When e-mailing there is an option to "Limit reprint to members who do NOT receive subscriptions by
e-mail", allowing the reprinting of those member's subscriptions when there was for example: a
printer fault at the time of the initial subscription run.
20.3.13 Address Labels for Subscriptions
Address labels may be produced for subscriptions that have previously been raised.
These labels may be printed to sheets of labels and then placed on envelopes removing the need for
windowed envelopes.
Note.
The facility to print Address Labels is included in the Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions of HandicapMaster.
To produce address labels from existing subscriptions
1. On the Accounting drop-down menu, click Subscriptions then click Address Labels.
2. Select the subscription at the start of the range to be selected for address labels. You may change
the list sort order by clicking on a column header.
3. Click Next >.
4. Select the subscription at the end of the range to be selected for address labels. You may change
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
361
the list sort order by clicking on a column header.
5. Click Finish.
6. Choose the type of Label you will be using in the Label Type box.
7. In the Start at Label boxes, select a Row and Column where the labels are to be printed from. This
can be useful if a partially used page of labels is to be re-used, as it allows position of used labels to
be skipped. Not applicable where labels on rolls are being used.
8. Click OK.
Notes:
The start subscription number must be equal or less than the end subscription number.
If a member does not have a postal address then no label will be printed
Where one or more subscriptions are for a Member Subscription Pool, a single label will be created
for the Member Subscription Pool contact, if a valid address is available.
Where smaller sized labels are used such as the PLL-36, you may need to adjust your printer
settings to use options such as 'borderless printing' to ensure good placement of the text within the
labels.
20.3.14 Resend a Subscription Invoice by E-mail
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
If a member requires an e-mail copy of a subscription invoice previously sent you can e-mail a copy as
follows.
1. On the Accounting Menu click Subscriptions then click E-mail.
2. Click one of the Subscriptions to highlight it and click OK.
3. Now confirm the E-mail recipient details and enter a suitable message. Click Send and the e-mail
will be sent with the subscription invoice added as Portable Document File attachment.
Notes:
You may also get a list of Subscriptions from the Accounting Places by clicking All Subscriptions or
Subscriptions in Current Year. Then if you click on the appropriate subscription in the list to highlight
it you may then right click with the mouse and select the E-mail option and then you may confirm the
E-mail recipient details and enter a suitable message. Click Send and the e-mail will be sent with
the subscription invoice added as Portable Document File attachment.
The status of the payments at the time of the e-mail will be updated. For example: a member is
paying monthly and has paid a couple of payments these will show as paid and the remaining will
be displayed in the attachment as outstanding (or overdue if appropriate).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
362
HandicapMaster®
20.3.15 Raise an Overdue Subscription
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To Raise an Overdue Subscription Invoice or Letter
1. On the Accounting menu, click Subscriptions then click Overdue Subscriptions.
2. Raise the Overdue Subscription using The Overdue Subscriptions Wizard
20.3.16 The Overdue Subscriptions Wizard
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
The Overdue Subscription Wizard guides you through the process of creating letters or invoices for
overdue membership subscription renewals.
The Overdue Subscription Wizard
This briefly describes how the Overdue Subscription Wizard operates
1. Click Next > to select the method of managing overdue renewals
Select method of managing Overdue Renewals
2. Select one of the following methods for Manage Overdue Subscriptions
One or more Members
This will allow you to select one or more specific members for whom overdue subscriptions
letters are to be produced.
One or more Subscription Templates
This will allow you to select one or more Subscription Templates, and thus the associated
members for whom overdue subscription letters are to be produced.
Members assigned to Membership Categories
This will allow you to select one or more membership Categories, and thus the associated
members for whom overdue subscription letters are to be produced
Members assigned to Member Subscription Pools
This will allow you to select one or more Member Subscription Pools, and thus the associated
members for whom overdue subscription letters are to be produced.
All Members
This will allow you to select members who have been assigned a Subscription Template, and
for whom overdue subscription letters are to be produced.
3. Click Next >
Select Members, Templates,Categories or Member Subscription Pools
4. Do one of the following:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
363
If selecting Members, tick the box next to one or more member's name to produce an overdue
subscription letter for this member.
If selecting Subscription Templates, tick the box next to one or more Subscription Templates for
which you wish to produce overdue subscription letters.
If selecting Members assigned to Member Subscription Pools, tick the box next to one or more
Member Subscription Pools for which you wish to produce overdue subscription letters.
5. Click Next >
Letters
6. Tick the Issue Letters with Overdue Subscription box if you wish to the Wizard to generate overdue
letters in addition to invoices. A list of existing letters is displayed.
Do one of the following:
Select an existing Letter, or
Select an existing Letter and click Edit Letter to edit this letter, or
Click New Letter to create a new letter. You now use the standard Letter Writer to create the
letter.
Note: Within the Letter Writer additional text fields have been added to allow for subscription
related letters to be generated. See Subscription Related Fields in Letters for further details.
7. Click Next >
Options
8. If sending overdue subscriptions by E-mail you may configure the subject of the e-mail, and
the text that will be placed in the e-mail. The overdue subscription details will automatically be
attached to the e-mail. If you do not intend to e-mail overdue subscriptions leave these at the
default values.
Completing the Overdue Subscription Wizard
9. Click Finish to generate the overdue Subscription letters
E-mailing Overdue Subscriptions
When the Wizard has finished you may click the E-mail button
in the reports toolbar to
send overdue subscriptions by e-mail to those members who have opted to receive subscriptions
by e-mail.
You will be prompted to add an attachment file in addition to the overdue subscription. Click Yes and
then browse and select the file you wish to attach. This may be a document of any format.
At the end of the sending of the e-mails if there are any members who either do not have an e-mail
address or who have not opted to receive subscriptions by e-mail click Yes at the prompt that will be
displayed and select the required printer to print the subscriptions.
A summary of the e-mails sent will then be displayed.
At the end of the sending of the e-mails there is an option to print the overdue subscriptions for those
members who either do not have an e-mail address or who have not opted to receive subscriptions by
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
364
HandicapMaster®
e-mail.
A summary of the e-mails sent will then be displayed.
Notes:
If a member is up to date with their subscription then no overdue letter is produced for that member.
Depending on the number of overdue subscriptions being generated it may take a short time for the
wizard to produce the overdue subscription letters.
Only members who have a valid e-mail address and have been selected to receive subscriptions by
e-mail will receive the overdue subscriptions by e-mail.
Only members who have a valid e-mail address and have been selected to receive overdue
subscriptions by e-mail will receive subscriptions by e-mail.
For Members assigned to Member Subscription Pools where the Pool Contact is a member then emails will only be sent if that member has been selected to receive subscriptions by e-mail. If the
Pool Contact is not a member then the contact e-mail address must be valid to receive the overdue
subscriptions by e-mail.
20.3.17 Void Multiple Subscriptions
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
In some cases it may be necessary to void a range of subscriptions.
To void multiple subscriptions
1. On the Accounting drop-down menu, click Subscriptions then click Void Multiple Subscriptions.
2. Select the subscription at the start of the range to be selected for voiding. You may change the list
sort order by clicking on a column header.
3. Click Next >.
4. Select the subscription at the end of the range to be selected for voiding. You may change the list
sort order by clicking on a column header.
5. Click Finish.
Notes:
There may be gaps in the list of subscriptions displayed, as some subscriptions may be in a status
that means they are not suitable to be voided, e.g. they are already voided.
20.3.18 Managing Annual Subscription Run
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
Before an annual subscription run you may need to consider the following:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
1.
365
Payment Item adjustments
You may need to adjust the values of a number of payment items.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select
Payment Items. On the list displayed double click with the mouse to Edit a Payment Item.
You may now adjust the value and then click OK.
Repeat this for any other payment items that need to be adjusted.
The new values will be automatically included in any subscriptions raised after these edits.
2.
Review the templates that are assigned to members and change if required.
Typically most members will retain the template from the previous year, but in some cases
a change may be required where a member is changing membership category. E.g. A junior
becoming an adult etc.
On the Reports menu, click Accounting Reports
Select Subscriptions (Summary) or Subscriptions (Full Details)
To change an individual's subscription template click EDIT MEMBER in the toolbar and then select the
Subscriptions tab and select a new template within the Subscription Template box.
3.
Raise the subscriptions
On the Accounting menu, click Subscriptions then click Raise Subscriptions.
Raise the Subscription using The Raise Subscription Wizard
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
366
20.4
HandicapMaster®
Invoices
20.4.1 Introduction
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To manage invoices for members, HandicapMaster makes use of the concept of an "Invoice
Template".
Each "Invoice Template" consists of a list of Payment Items.
A Payment Item describes a billable item and its cost or charge.
This flexible approach allows you to define different templates for different invoices. An Invoice
Template can be assigned to one or more members.
Contents
Create an Invoice Template
Edit an Invoice Template
Copy an Invoice Template
Delete an Invoice Template
Raise an Invoice
View an Invoice
Amend Invoice Notes
Find Overdue Invoices
Reprint an Invoice
Resend an Invoice by E-mail
20.4.2 Create an Invoice Template
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To create an Invoice Template
1. Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu click Invoices, then Set up a Template.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select
Invoice Templates. On the list displayed right click with the mouse and select Set up a
Template.
2. Create a Template using the Subscription and Invoice Templates Window
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
367
20.4.3 Edit an Invoice Template
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
You may wish to edit an Invoice Template perhaps to add or delete a Payment Item.
To edit an Invoice Template
1. Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu click Invoices, then Edit Template. A list of Invoice Templates is
displayed, click one of the Templates to highlight it and then click OK
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select
Invoice Templates. On the list displayed right click with the mouse and select Edit a
Template.
2. Enter the Template information using the Subscription and Invoice Template window.
Notes:
Editing an Invoice Template will not affect any invoices already raised, but will affect future invoices.
20.4.4 Copy an Invoice Template
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
You may wish to copy an Invoice Template perhaps to save time setting up a number of similar
templates.
To copy an Invoice Template
1. Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu click Invoices and then click Copy Template. A list of Invoice
Templates is displayed, click one of the templates to highlight it and then click OK
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select
Invoice Templates. Highlight the template you wish to copy. Then right click with the
mouse and select Copy Template.
2. You will be offered the choice to change the copied template to a SUBSCRIPTION template.
3. Confirmation of the new type and name of template will be displayed.
Notes:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
368
HandicapMaster®
Copying an Invoice Template will not affect any Invoices already raised.
20.4.5 Delete an Invoice Template
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To delete an Invoice Template
1. Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu click Invoices and then click Delete Template. A list of Invoice
Templates is displayed, click one of the templates to highlight it and then click OK
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select
Invoices Templates. Highlight the template you wish to delete. Then right click with the
mouse and select Delete Template or press the DELETE key
2. Confirm the deletion
20.4.6 Raise an Invoice
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To raise an Invoice
1. On the Accounting menu, click Invoices then click Raise Invoices.
2. Raise the Invoices using The Raise Invoice Wizard
20.4.7 The Raise Invoices Wizard
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
The Raise Invoice Wizard guides you through the process of raising invoices.
The Raise Invoices Wizard
This briefly describes how the Raise Invoices Wizard operates
1.
Click Next > to select the method of raising invoices
Select method of Raising Invoices
3.
Select one of the following methods for Create an Invoice for
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
369
One or more Members
This will allow you to select one or more specific members for whom subscription renewals
are to be produced.
Members assigned to Membership Categories
This will allow you to select one or more membership Categories, and thus the associated
members for whom subscription renewals are to be produced.
Members assigned to Member Subscription Pools
This will allow you to select one or more Member Subscription Pools, and thus the
associated members for whom subscription renewals are to be produced. Choose this
option if you wish to send subscriptions by e-mail to Member Subscription Pool Contacts.
All Members
This will allow you to select members who have been assigned a Subscription Template,
and for whom subscription renewals are to be produced.
4.
Click Next >
Select Members, Categories or Member Subscription Poolss
5.
Do one of the following:
If selecting Members, tick the box next to one or more member's name to raise an invoice for
this member.
If selecting Membership Categories, tick the box next to one or more Membership Categories
for which you wish to raise invoices.
If selecting Members assigned to Member Subscription Pools, tick the box next to one or more
Member Subscription Pools for which you wish to raise invoices.
6.
Click Next >
Invoice Details
7.
In the Name and Description box enter a suitable name and descriptions.
8.
From the Template select the template you wish to use as the basis for the Invoice. Click New if
you wish to create a new invoice template. The 1st Payment Due Date will then be updated to reflect
the settings in the selected template.
9.
Change the 1st Payment Due Date if required.
10. The Notes box may be used to record any details you wish to record.
11. If required, click Add button to add Payment Items to the invoice. Select the appropriate items from
the list. If the list does not contain a suitable item then click New button if you need to create a new
Payment Item.
12. To delete a Payment Item click on it to highlight it and click the Delete button to remove it from the
Invoice.
13. Click Next >
Options
14. Select the option for sending of the invoices from one of the following.
Print Invoices
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
370
HandicapMaster®
No printing of Invoices
E-mail Invoices with option to print for members not configured to receive e-mails
If you select “E-mail Invoices with option to print for members not configured to receive e-mails” the email details are displayed.
You may then modify the E-mail options. These are the Subject of e-mail and Text to include with email. The Invoice details will be added as an attachment to the e-mail.
In addition an extra attachment may be added by clicking the Add Attachment button. You may then
browse to the file to be added.
To delete the attachment click the Add Attachment button again.
15. Click Next > to continue.
Printers
16. If you have selected an option where there may be printed invoices then you are asked to select
the printer to which any invoices that are printed will be sent. Select the appropriate printer and then
click Next > .
Completing the Raise Subscription Wizard
17. Click Finish to generate the Invoices.
Notes:
Depending on the number of Invoices being generated it may take a short time for the wizard to
complete raising the invoices.
Only members who have a valid e-mail address and have been selected to receive subscriptions by
e-mail will receive subscriptions by e-mail.
When raising invoices for Members assigned to Member Subscription Pools and where the Pool
Contact is a member then e-mails will only be sent if the member has been selected to receive
subscriptions by e-mail. If the Pool Contact is not a member then the e-mail address must be valid
to receive the subscriptions by e-mail.
20.4.8 View an Invoice
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To view details of an Invoice
1. Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu click Invoices and then click View . A list of Invoices is displayed, click
one of the Invoices to highlight it and click OK to display the details.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
371
Invoices. Highlight the Invoice you wish to view. Then right click with the mouse and
select View.
2. Click on View Payments to view the payment details.
Notes:
You may also get a list of Invoices from the Accounting Places by clicking All Invoices or Invoices in
Current Year. Then if you click on the appropriate Invoice in the list to highlight it you may then right
click with the mouse and select the View option.
20.4.9 Amend Invoice Notes
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To amend Invoice Notes
1. Do one of the following:
On the Accounting menu click Invoices and then click Amend Note . A list of Invoices is
displayed, click one of the Invoices to highlight it and click OK to display the notes which may be
amended.
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select
Invoices. Highlight the Invoices with the note you wish to amend. Then right click with the
mouse and select Amend Note.
2. Edit the note as required.
Notes:
You may also get a list of Invoices from the Accounting Places by clicking All Invoices or Invoices in
Current Year. Then if you click on the appropriate Invoice in the list to highlight it you may then right
click with the mouse and select the Amend Note option.
In the list of subscriptions displayed when selecting Accounting menu -> Invoices you may scroll to
the right of the list to see the current notes
20.4.10 Find Overdue Invoices
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To obtain a list of members with overdue Invoices:
1. On the Reports Menu click the Accounting Reports option and then Overdue Invoices.
2. On the Report Selection screen, select who to include in the report and then click OK to view the
Overdue Invoices report.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
372
HandicapMaster®
20.4.11 Reprint an Invoice
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
If a member requires a copy of an invoice previously sent you can print a copy as follows.
1. On the Accounting Menu click Invoices then click Print.
2. Click one of the Invoices to highlight it and click OK to print the Invoice on the default printer.
Notes:
You may also get a list of Invoices from the Accounting Places by clicking All Invoices or Invoices in
Current Year. Then if you click on the appropriate Invoice in the list to highlight it you may then right
click with the mouse and select the Print option and a copy of the Invoice will be printed to your
default printer.
The status of the payments at the time of the print will be displayed.
For example: a member is paying monthly and has paid a couple of payments these will show as
paid and the remaining will be displayed as outstanding (or overdue if appropriate).
20.4.12 Resend an Invoice by E-mail
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
If a member requires an e-mail copy of an invoice previously sent you can e-mail a copy as follows.
1. On the Accounting Menu click Invoices then click E-mail.
2. Click one of the Invoices to highlight it and click OK.
3. Now confirm the E-mail recipient details and enter a suitable message. Click Send and the e-mail
will be sent with the invoice added as Portable Document File attachment.
Notes:
You may also get a list of Invoices from the Accounting Places by clicking All Invoices or Invoices in
Current Year. Then if you click on the appropriate Invoice in the list to highlight it you may then right
click with the mouse and select the E-mail option and then you may confirm the E-mail recipient
details and enter a suitable message. Click Send and the e-mail will be sent with the invoice added
as Portable Document File attachment.
The status of the payments at the time of the e-mail will be updated. For example: a member is
paying monthly and has paid a couple of payments these will show as paid and the remaining will
be displayed in the attachment as outstanding (or overdue if appropriate).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
373
20.4.13 Void Multiple Invoices
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
In some cases it may be necessary to void a range of invoices.
To void multiple invoices
1. On the Accounting drop-down menu, click Invoices then click Void Multiple Invoicess.
2. Select the invoice at the start of the range to be selected for voiding. You may change the list sort
order by clicking on a column header.
3. Click Next >.
4. Select the invoice at the end of the range to be selected for voiding. You may change the list sort
order by clicking on a column header.
5. Click Finish.
Notes:
There may be gaps in the list of invoices displayed, as some invoices may be in a status that means
they are not suitable to be voided, e.g. they are already voided.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
374
20.5
HandicapMaster®
Subscription and Invoice Templates Window
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
The Subscription and Invoice Template window allows you to define a new Subscription or Invoice
Template.
In the Template Name box enter the name to be given to the Template.
In the Template Description box you may enter a description, this is optional.
Select from the Payment Schedule list one of the payment schedules.
Payment Schedule
Description
Annual
1 payment per year
Monthly
12 payments, one each month
10 Months
10 payments over the year, each month for 10 months
from start date
6 Months 6 month gap
6 payments one per month followed by 6 month gap
Quarterly
4 payments per year, 3 months apart
Two 6 Monthly
2 payments per year, 6 months apart
Three per year
3 payments per year, 4 months apart
4 Months 8 month gap
4 payments one per month followed by 8 month gap
Choose the First Payment Due date, this may either be
1. The Invoice Date meaning the date the Subscription or Invoice is raised.
2. Click on Other Date to select a specific date. The default is today's date.
Click Add button to add Payment Items to the template. Select the appropriate items from the list. If the
list does not contain a suitable item then click New button if you need to create a new Payment Item.
Click on a Payment Item and click Delete button to remove a Payment Item from the template.
Click Delete All button to remove all Payment Items from the template.
Notes:
If you select an 'other date' for the First Payment Due, this can be a date in the past.
If you wish the Invoices or subscriptions to be overdue immediately from the date of issue, then set
in the Accounting Options the Days before an Invoice or Subscription is Overdue to be 0, before
raising invoices or subscriptions.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
20.6
375
Payments
20.6.1 Introduction
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
The Payments area of Membership allows you to record payments for Subscriptions and Invoices.
In addition you may record payments for items that have not been invoiced. This type of ad hoc payment
recording may be useful for recording items such as competition fees, bar levy etc.
All Payments recorded adjust a member’s account balance by increasing the balance.
Notes:
You do need to select a suitable Payment Item to allow you to create the payment record.
Contents
Record a Subscription or Invoice Payment
View a Payment
Reprint a Receipt
Reprint a range of Receipts
Resend a Receipt by E-mail
20.6.2 Record a single Subscription or Invoice Payment
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To record a payment of a Subscription or Invoice
1. On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then , then select the Accounting item and select All
Subscriptions or All Invoices lists, select a Subscription or Invoice and press Enter.
2. The Pay a Subscription or Pay an Invoice window will be displayed
The Pay a Subscription or Pay an Invoice Window
The Pay a Subscription or Pay an Invoice window allows you to record the payment of a Subscription or
Invoice.
In the Date of Payment box select the date of the payment (this defaults to Today's date).
In the Payment Method box select the appropriate means of payment from the list.
Tick the Print Receipt box if you wish to have a receipt printed.
Tick the E-mail Receipt box if you wish to have a receipt e-mailed.
The Notes box can be use to record any details you wish, e.g. Cheque number.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
376
HandicapMaster®
If a monthly paid subscription or invoice is being paid, in the Payments list click on the specific
payment that is to be recorded as paid.
The Gross payment to be recorded value will be automatically filled in when you select a payment.
Partial payments
To record a partial payment you may adjust the Gross payment to be recorded value. It is possible to
enter a value that is less than a specific payment or greater than one payment. The amount is limited to
the maximum outstanding for the invoice or subscription and will automatically be reduced if a larger
payment value is entered.
When a partial payment is recorded HandicapMaster will use the partial payment amount to pay as
many payments as possible, starting with the oldest due payment.
If a payment value does not exactly match an outstanding payment then a new payment for the
remaining outstanding amount will be created automatically and the original outstanding payment will
be adjusted to match the payment.
Example:
If there are 12 payments monthly each of 10 units of currency.
If you were to record a payment of 25 units of currency then payments 1 and 2 would be marked as
paid, payment 3 would be adjusted to 5 units of currency and be paid, and an additional payment for 5
units of currency would be added as payment 13, but with the same due date as payment 3.
Notes:
The oldest payment that is due is selected by default and the gross amount to be paid is filled in
automatically.
The Print Receipt box will be ticked if you have ticked the Automatically Print Receipt for Payment
Transactions box in the Accounting Options.
The E-mail Receipt box will be ticked if you have ticked the E-mail Receipts box in the Accounting
Options.
20.6.3 The Subscriptions, Invoices and Ad-hoc Payments Wizard
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
The Payments Wizard guides you through the process of recording Subscription, Invoice or Ad-hoc
payments.
The Subscriptions or Invoice Payments Wizard
1. Do one of the following:
Click the Payment icon in the toolbar or
On the Accounting menu select Payments Received.
2. Click Next > to step over the introduction to the wizard.
Type of Payments to be recorded
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
377
3. Select the type of payments to be recorded from
Subscription payments
Invoice payments
Ad-hoc payments
4. Click Next >
Record Payments for
5. Select who the payments are to be recorded for from:
One or More Members
This will allow you to select one or more specific members for whom payments are to be recorded.
One or More Membership Categories
This will allow you to select one or more Membership Categories, and thus the associated
members for whom payments are to be recorded.
Members with a Default Method of Payment
This will allow you to select one or more default Methods of Payment, and thus the associated
members for whom payments are to be recorded.
All Members
This will allow you to select all members who have a subscription or invoice, and for whom
payments are to be recorded.
Click Next >
Select Members, Categories or Default Method of payment
6. Do one of the following:
If selecting Members, tick the box next to one or more member's name to record a payment for
this member.
If selecting Membership Categories, tick the box next to one or more Membership Categories for
which you wish to record payments.
If selecting Members with Default method of Payment, tick the box next to one or more Methods
of Payment for which you wish to record payments.
7. Click Next >
Methods of Payment (optionally displayed)
If any of the selected members do not have default method of payment assigned to them this screen is
displayed to allow the selection of the method of payment to be recorded for those members.
Click to highlight and select the required Method of Payment to be recorded for the payment for those
members without a default Method of Payment.
8. Click Next >
Partial payment options (optionally displayed)
For Subscription or Invoice Payments it is possible to record a partial payment.
9. Tick the Record partial payment box to record a partial payment
10.Enter the value of the Gross payment to be recorded
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
378
HandicapMaster®
11.Select a payment option for managing the partial payments
Skip members with due amount less than gross payment
or
Discard any remaining over payment
The Skip option will prevent any members who have a total due amount less than the value of the
Gross payment to be recorded from being listed.
The Discard option will result in any subscriptions or invoices that are overpaid as being marked as
paid and any over payment will NOT added to the member's balance.
At this point the page displayed depends on the type of payment initially selected.
Subscriptions - Confirm Payments
A list of members and their next due payment are displayed. Please note depending on the number of
outstanding payments it may take a short time for the wizard to produce the list of payments.
Note: If the partial payment option was chosen then the total amount due is displayed rather than the
next due payment amount.
In the Date of Payment box select the date of the payment (this defaults to Today's date).
Select the Print Receipts option if receipts are required to be printed
Select the E-mail Receipts with option to print for members not configured to receive e-mails option
if the receipts are to be sent by e-mail
Select the No Receipts if you do not wish to create receipts, but just record the payments.
Review the list of payments that are to be recorded and remove the tick from those payments that are
NOT to be recorded.
12. Click Next >
Invoices - Confirm Payments
A list of members and all outstanding invoices are displayed. Please note depending on the number of
outstanding payments it may take a short time for the wizard to produce the list of payments.
Note: If the partial payment option was chosen then the total amount due is displayed rather than the
next due payment amount.
In the Date of Payment box select the date of the payment (this defaults to Today's date).
Select the Print Receipts option if receipts are required to be printed
Select the E-mail Receipts with option to print for members not configured to receive e-mails option
if the receipts are to be sent by e-mail
Select the No Receipts if you do not wish to create receipts, but just record the payments.
Review the list of payments that are to be recorded and remove the tick from those payments that are
NOT to be recorded.
13. Click Next >
Ad-hoc Payment
The Ad-hoc payment page allow you to define what items are to be recorded as paid.
In the Date of Payment box select the date of the payment (this defaults to Today's date).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
379
In the Payment Description you may enter a description of the payment e.g. Bar Levy
Select the Print Receipts option if receipts are required to be printed
Select the E-mail Receipts with option to print for members not configured to receive e-mails option
if the receipts are to be sent by e-mail
Select the No Receipts if you do not wish to create receipts, but just record the payments.
You may optionally record notes with the payment.
14. Click Next >
Receipt Printer (optionally displayed)
If you have chosen previous to Print Receipts or E-mail Receipts with option to print for members not
configured to receive e-mails then you will be asked to select the printer to which receipts should be
printed.
Click on the required printer to highlight and select it.
15. Click Next >
Completing the Subscriptions, Invoice or Ad-Hoc Payments Wizard
16. Click Finish to record the payments and print or e-mail receipts if selected.
Notes:
The Print Receipts option will be select if you have ticked the Automatically Print Receipts for
Payment Transactions box in the Accounting Options.
The E-mail Receipts with option to print for members not configured to receive e-mails option
will be selected if you have ticked the E-mail Receipts box in the Accounting Options. This will
override the Automatically Print Receipts for Payment Transactions box in the Accounting Options.
If the E-mail Receipts with option to print for members not configured to receive e-mails option is
selected and some of the recipients are not configured to receive invoices by e-mail, you will be
offered the option to confirm that you wish to print those receipts.
If a member has a number of outstanding subscription payments then only the most overdue
subscription payment is recorded.
If you select the One or More Members option to select members and a member has no
outstanding payments then they will not be listed.
Depending on the number of outstanding payments it may take a short time for the wizard to produce
the list of payments.
If Record partial payments has been selected HandicapMaster will use the partial payment amount
to pay as many payments as possible, starting with the oldest due payment.
If a payment value does not exactly match an outstanding payment then a new payment for the
remaining outstanding amount will be created automatically and the original outstanding payment
will be adjusted to match the payment.
Example:
If there are 12 payments monthly each of 10 units of currency.
If you were to record a payment of 25 units of currency then payments 1 and 2 would be marked as
paid, payment 3 would be adjusted to 5 and be paid, and an additional payment for 5 units of
currency would be added as payment 13, but with the same due date as payment 3.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
380
HandicapMaster®
20.6.4 Adding Payment Items to an Ad Hoc Payment
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
Adding a Payment Item to an Ad Hoc Payment
1. Choose a Payment Category.
2. Click on one of the Payment Descriptions.
3. In the Nett Amount box enter a value (if the default is not correct).
4. Tick the Add VAT box to add VAT to the cost of the Payment Item.
This is only visible if you have configured VAT.
5. Click OK to return to the Add a New payment Window
If there is no suitable Payment Item available
If there is no suitable Payment Item already available, click the New button and add a new Payment
Item.
20.6.5 View a Payment
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
The View Payment window allows you to see details of a selected payment.
To view details of a Payment
1. On the Accounting Menu click Payments then click View.
2. Click one of the Payments to highlight it and click OK to display the details.
3. Tick the Print Receipt box if you wish to reprint a receipt for this payment, and click OK.
4. Tick the E-mail Receipt box if you wish to have a receipt e-mailed, and click OK
Notes:
The Print Receipt and E-mail Receipt boxes by default are not ticked even if Automatically Print
Receipt for Payment Transactions box or the E-mail Receipts box in the Accounting Options have
been ticked.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
381
20.6.6 Amend Payment Notes
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
The View Payment window allows you to see details of a selected payment.
To amend Payment Notes
1. On the Accounting Menu click Payments then click Amend Note.
2. Click one of the Payments to highlight it and click OK to display the current note.
3. Edit the note as required.
Notes:
You may also get a list of Payments from the Accounting Places by clicking All payments or
Payments in Current Year. Then if you click on the appropriate payment in the list to highlight it you
may then right click with the mouse and select the Amend Note option.
20.6.7 Reprint a Receipt
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option has been
installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions Option may not be
installed.
If a member requires a copy of a payment receipt previously sent you can print a copy as follows.
1. On the Accounting Menu click Payments then click Print Receipt
2. Click one of the payments to highlight it and click OK to print the Receipt on the default printer.
Notes:
You may also get a list of Payments from the Accounting Places by clicking All payments or
Payments in Current Year. Then if you click on the appropriate payment in the list to highlight it you
may then right click with the mouse and select the Print Receipt option and a copy of the receipt will
be printed to your default printer.
The status of the payments at the time of the print will be displayed. For example: a member is
paying monthly and has paid a couple of payments these will show as paid and the remaining will
be displayed as outstanding (or overdue if appropriate).
See Also
Reprint a range of receipts
20.6.8 Reprint a range of Receipts
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option has been
installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions Option may not be
installed.
If you wish to print or re-print a set of receipts, you may print all receipts in a selected range.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
382
HandicapMaster®
Reprint a range of payment receipts
To reprint a range of receipts do the following:
1. On the Accounting menu, click Payments then click Reprint a Range of Receipts.
2. Select the receipt at the start of the range to be reprinted in the list. You may change the list sort order
by clicking on a column header.
3. Click Next >.
4. Select the receipt at the end of the range to be reprinted in the list. You may change the list sort order
by clicking on a column header.
5. Click Finish.
6. Choose the Printer to be used.
Notes:
The status of the payments at the time of the print will be displayed. For example: a member is
paying monthly and has paid a couple of payments these will show as paid and the remaining will
be displayed as outstanding (or overdue if appropriate).
20.6.9 Resend a Receipt by E-mail
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
If a member requires an e-mail copy of a receipt previously sent you can e-mail a copy as follows.
1. On the Accounting Menu click Payments then click E-mail Receipt.
2. Click one of the payments to highlight it and click OK.
3. Now confirm the E-mail recipient details and enter a suitable message. Click Send and the e-mail
will be sent with the receipt added as Portable Document File attachment.
Notes:
You may also get a list of Payments from the Accounting Places by clicking All payments or
Payments in Current Year. Then if you click on the appropriate payment in the list to highlight it you
may then right click with the mouse and select the E-mail Receipt option and then you may confirm
the E-mail recipient details and enter a suitable message. Click Send and the e-mail will be sent
with the receipt added as Portable Document File attachment.
The status of the payments at the time of the print will be displayed. For example: a member is
paying monthly and has paid a couple of payments these will show as paid and the remaining will
be displayed as outstanding (or overdue if appropriate).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
20.7
383
Refunds and Cancellations
20.7.1 Refund a Subscription or Invoice Payment
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
To refund a payment of Subscription or Invoice
1. Do one of the following:
Click Accounting menu, then Subscriptions or Invoices, then Refund. Select a Subscription or
Invoice to refund.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Accounting place, then In the All Subscriptions or All Invoices
lists, select a Subscription or Invoice, Right-click and select Refund.
2. The Refund a Subscription or Invoice window will be displayed
20.7.2 The Refund a Subscription or Invoice Window
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
If an Invoice has been paid in full or in part then you may refund it.
In other cases you may need to refund part of an Invoice for some reason.
To Refund a whole Subscription or Invoice
1. In the Payment Method list choose the method being used to make the refund payment.
2. Tick the Print Receipt box if a receipt is required.
3. Tick the E-mail Receipt box if the receipt is to be sent by e-mail.
4. The Notes box can be use to record any details you wish, e.g. reason for the refund.
Refund part of a Subscription or Invoice
1. In the Payment Method list choose the method being used to make the refund payment.
2. Tick the Receipt Required box if a receipt is required.
3. Enter in the Amount to Refund box the amount to be refunded. This may be any value up to the total
of the amount paid.
4. The Notes box can be use to record any details you wish, e.g. reason for the refund.
Notes:
The Print Receipt box will be ticked if you have ticked the Automatically Print Receipt for Payment
Transactions box in the Accounting Options.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
384
HandicapMaster®
The E-mail Receipt box will be ticked if you have ticked the E-mail Receipts box in the Accounting
Options.
20.7.3 Refund a Payment
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
If a Payment needs to be refunded proceed as follows:
To Refund a Payment
1. Do one of the following:
Click Accounting menu, then Payments, then Refund. Select a payment to refund.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Accounting place, then in the All Payments or Payments in
Current Year list, select the payment, right-click and select Refund.
2. Details of the Payment are displayed
3. In the Payment Method list choose the method being used to make the refund payment.
4. Tick the Print Receipt box if you require a receipt to be printed.
5. Tick the E-mail Receipt box if if the receipt is to be sent by e-mail.
6. The Notes box can be use to record any details you wish, e.g. reason for the refund.
Notes:
The Print Receipt box will be ticked if you have ticked the Automatically Print Receipt for Payment
Transactions box in the Accounting Options.
The E-mail Receipt box will be ticked if you have ticked the E-mail Receipts box in the Accounting
Options.
20.7.4 Cancel (Void) a Payment
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
If a Payment has been recorded in error then you may void it. For Example if a payment has been
recorded against the wrong member.
To Void a Payment
1. Do one of the following:
Click Accounting menu, then Payments, then Void. Select a payment to refund.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Accounting place, then in the All Payments or Payments in
Current Year list, select the payment, right-click and select Void.
2. Details of the Payment are displayed
3. Tick the Print Receipt box if you require a receipt to be printed.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
385
4. Tick the E-mail Receipt box if if the receipt is to be sent by e-mail.
Notes:
The Print Receipt box will be ticked if you have ticked the Automatically Print Receipt for Payment
Transactions box in the Accounting Options.
The E-mail Receipt box will be ticked if you have ticked the E-mail Receipts box in the Accounting
Options.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
386
20.8
HandicapMaster®
Account Balance and Transaction History
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
Each member is initially allocated an account balance of zero.
When a Subscription or Invoice is raised for a member their account balance is reduced and may then
be a negative value.
When a payment is recorded the amount paid is added to the account balance. Once all outstanding
subscriptions and/or invoices are paid a member’s balance will be zero provided no ad-hoc payments
have been recorded.
An ad-hoc payment may be used to increase a member's account balance. It is possible to include a
positive account balance as a contribution to Subscriptions.
Where an organization has a subscription requirement for various payments at irregular periods
through the year we recommend the use of an invoice rather than a subscription and then record Adhoc Payments as required.
Then by examining the member’s account balance it is possible to determine if a member still has an
outstanding amount to pay.
It is possible to adjust a member's account balance select Edit Member from the toolbar and then
select the member in question, then click on the Subscriptions tab and enter the balance adjustment.
Transaction History
A member's transaction History may be viewed as follows:
From the Players Places click on All Members. Then if you click on the appropriate member in the list
to highlight them you may then right click with the mouse and select the Transaction History option and
a list of transactions for the member will be displayed.
You may then highlight an entry and right click and select a number of options.
Note
Some of the available options may not be applicable to the type of item selected. For example you
cannot mark a payment as "paid". In these cases a message is displayed.
Transaction History report
A Transaction History report is also available. On the Reports menu select Accounting Reports then
select Transaction History.
You may then select a single member. Then click OK
If you wish to view multiple records you may now change the selection criteria before viewing the report.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
20.9
387
Exporting Subscriptions, Invoices or Payments
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
Accounting records that are currently held within the HandicapMaster database can be exported to an
external file using the Export facility.
The external file will be created in a 'Comma-separated file', suitable for importing into Microsoft Word
or Excel.
Format of the Export File
The export file will be:
an ASCII text file,
one accounting entry per record in the file,
a special 'Header' record will be the first record in the file (see below).
each field within each record will be separated by a comma.
Header Records
There are three types of accounting data that may be exported. Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments.
Each has a different ‘Header’ record.
The Subscription Header Record
The first record in the file will be a Header record. This consists of the names of each of the
columns (fields) within the file. The fields will be ordered as follows:
Surname
Member's Surname
Middle Initials
Member's Middle Initials
First Name
Member's Given Name
Club Number
The Membership number or code for this member.
Subscription Number
Unique number identifying the Subscription
Date Raised
The date the subscription was issued
Name
Descriptive name of the Subscription
Nett
Nett Amount
VAT
VAT amount
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
388
HandicapMaster®
Gross Total
Total of Nett + VAT
Status
Status of the Subscription e.g. Paid, Void, Overdue, etc.
Payment Start Date
Due date of the first (possible only) payment.
Number of Payments
The number of payments required to fully pay the Subscription
Notes
Notes (if any) added to the Subscription
The Invoice Header Record
The first record in the file will be a Header record. This consists of the names of each of the
columns (fields) within the file. The fields will be ordered as follows:
Surname
Member's Surname
Middle Initials
Member's Middle Initials
First Name
Member's Given Name
Club Number
The Membership number or code for this member.
Invoice Number
Unique number identifying the Invoice
Date Raised
The date the Invoice was issued
Name
Descriptive name of the Invoice
Nett
Nett Amount
VAT
VAT amount
Gross Total
Total of Nett + VAT
Status
Status of the Invoice e.g. Paid, Void, Overdue, etc,
Payment Start Date
Due date of the first (possible only) payment.
Number of Payments
The number of payments required to fully pay the Invoice
Notes
Notes (if any) added to the Invoice
The Payments Header Record
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments
The first record in the file will be a Header record. This consists of the names of each of the
columns (fields) within the file. The fields will be ordered as follows:
Surname
Member's Surname
Middle Initials
Member's Middle Initials
First Name
Member's Given Name
Club Number
The Membership number or code for this member.
Receipt Number
Unique number identifying the Payment
Date Paid
The date the Payment was recorded.
Payment Method
How the payment was paid e.g. Cheque, standing order, etc.
Name
Descriptive name of the Payment
Nett
Nett Amount
VAT
VAT amount
Gross Total
Total of Nett + VAT
Status
Status of the Payment e.g. Paid, Refund, Void, Cancelled.
Notes
Notes (if any) added to the Payment
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
389
390
HandicapMaster®
20.10 Reports
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments are only available when the Subscriptions Option
has been installed as a registered option. If these are not available, then the Subscriptions
Option may not be installed.
A number of reports relating to subscriptions, Invoices and Payment are available.
Either:
1.
On the Reports menu, click Accounting Reports
or
2.
You may also get a list of reports from the Reports Places by clicking on the Accounting tab
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
391
Chapter
21
Correcting Mistakes
392
HandicapMaster®
21
Correcting Mistakes
21.1
Introduction
Correcting errors and amending the presentation of competitions
Mistakes do happen. It is possible to select the wrong Member for the General play change.
Alternatively, the wrong handicap adjustment could be applied. Also, it is possible to apply the results
of a competition, adjusting all of the competitors handicaps, then realise that a scorecard had been
missed. Perhaps this scorecard was from a competitor whose CONGU handicap was in a category
below four and his score would have influenced the Competition Scratch Score for the day, resulting in
all of the adjustments being different!
This chapter describes how mistakes can be amended by using the 'Undo' option.
Also, the 'Undo' option provides a powerful way of replaying competition results so that the presentation
of the results can be varied. For example, the results could be changed in order to order competitors in
divisions or increase the number of overall winners, etc. The chapter describes the changes that can
be made by replaying the results (without re-entering all of the scores!).
Contents
The Undo Option
Undoing and amending Handicap Brought Forward or First Award
Undoing a Supplementary Score
Undoing a General Play, Annual Review Adjustment or Exceptional Scoring Reduction
Undoing and amending competition results
Undoing an Away Score
Change the name of a Closed Competition
Related Topics
Delete a score from an Opened Competition
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Correcting Mistakes
21.2
393
Undo
HandicapMaster provides an Undo option. Selecting this option causes HandicapMaster to reverse out
changes from the database. HandicapMaster will reverse out the item as chosen from the Events
window. The type of changes which can be 'undone' are:Competitions
General Play changes
Scores returned from external clubs
Corrections to AWAY members playing handicaps
First Handicap awards and 'Handicap Brought Forward' entries (provided there are no subsequent
entries in the Handicap Record Sheet / Handicap Register)
'First Award' and 'Handicap Brought Forward' descriptions may also be reversed in handicap records
for individual players by using this option.
When undoing a competition, HandicapMaster deletes any scores partially entered for another
competition (entered but not applied) and replaces them with the scores for this competition. This
gives the User a powerful tool by which to change the appearance of the competition results, perhaps
by changing the number of winners highlighted. Other corrections can be made such as disqualifying a
player's score, marking the competition as a non-Handicap Qualifier, etc.
It should be noted that when undoing competitions, only the scores to one competition could be
retained at any one time. Therefore, should two competitions be 'undone' together, all of the scores for
the first of these will be lost.
When undoing First Handicap awards, HandicapMaster retains the information regarding the new
member (such as address and telephone numbers) but changes the status of the member to "No
Handicap".
To undo an event
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions Menu, choose Undo and select the event to Undo, or
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then All Handicapping Events. Select the
event and press Delete key.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
394
21.3
HandicapMaster®
Undoing and amending Handicap Brought Forward or First
Award
To Undo a Handicap Brought Forward or First Award.
1. Do one of the following:
In the Places box, choose Handicapping and select All Handicapping Events, or
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then All Handicapping Events.
2. Select the First Award or Handicap Brought Forward for this player, right-click and select Undo in
the pop-up menu.
3. Select Change or Remove the 'FIRST AWARD/Handicap Brought Forward' Entry and click OK.
The following fields are required to change a previously allocated Handicap for a player:
Exact Handicap or Playing Handicap
Used to enter the first handicap awarded to this member.
Note: You may type the player's Handicap directly into this box.
Awarded on
Enter the date when a first handicap is awarded.
Document as
Identifies the first entry in the Handicap Record for this member as either 'First Award' or
'Handicap Brought Forward'.
For Handicap Brought Forward entries, the handicap may be marked as Lapsed, or previous
qualifying scores in the current season may be identified.
Notes:
A Handicap Brought Forward or a First Award record can be removed only when there are no
subsequent entries in the player’s handicap record.
The Awarded on date specifies the Starting date for the Handicap Records for the player. It should be
noted that competition scores from competitions prior to the starting date cannot be entered for a
player, as the Handicap of the player at the date of the competition will not be known.
Use an Awarded on date prior to the first competition that you intend to enter for this Player.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Correcting Mistakes
21.4
395
Undoing a Supplementary Score
To Undo a Supplementary Score.
1. On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Supplementary Scores.
2. Select the Supplementary Score and press the Delete key on the Keyboard (or right-click and
select Undo).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
396
21.5
HandicapMaster®
Undoing a General Play, Annual Review or Exceptional Scoring
Reduction
To Undo a General Play, Annual Review Adjustment or an Exceptional Scoring
Reduction.
1. On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then General Play Changes/Annual Review Changes/
Exceptional Scoring Reductions.
2. Select the player from the list and press the Delete key on the Keyboard (or right-click and select
Undo).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Correcting Mistakes
21.6
397
Undoing and amending competition results
It is possible to undo a competition which has previously been applied. This reverts the competition to
the opened state. The competition is now found in the 'Opened Competitions' list. This gives you the
following options:1. Selecting Enter Scores and entering additional scores (or amending ones already entered).
Examples when this may be applicable would be to disqualify a competitor, or amending incorrectly
entered scores.
2. Selecting Config allows you to change the template and competition set up attributes, including the
name and date of the competition.
Having amended the competition scores or format, choose Apply Scores once again to reapply the
competition scores to the database.
A closed competition can also be reversed into 'opened status' by using the right mouse click. Highlight
a competition from the closed competitions list, right click and select undo option.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
398
21.7
HandicapMaster®
Undoing an Away Score
To undo an Away Score previously entered
1.
Do one of the following:
On the Competitions Menu, choose Undo and select the Away Score to Undo, or
On the Task/Explorer tab, click Explorer and then Away Competition Scores.
2.
Select the Away Score and press Delete key on the Keyboard (or right-click and select Undo).
See Also
Enter an Away Score for a Player
Late reporting of Away Score CSS
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Correcting Mistakes
21.8
399
Change the Name of a Competition
To change the name of a closed (applied) competition - Stroke Play
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place
2.
Select Closed Competitions
3.
Select the competition to have its name changed and right-click.
4.
On the pop-up menu, select Change Competition Name.
If the competition is part of a multi-round or alternative day competition, the names of both the individual
round and the overall competition may be changed.
To change the name of a Match Play Knock-Out competition
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place
2.
Select Knock-out Competitions
3.
Select the competition to have its name changed and right-click.
4.
On the pop-up menu, select Change Competition Name.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Chapter
22
Publishing to Internet
Publishing to Internet
22
Publishing to Internet
22.1
Introduction
401
A guide to connecting to, updating and using the HandicapMaster Master Scoreb oard service, and
National Handicap Datab ase Systems.
The following section describes how to update National systems, for those clubs connected to Central
systems, and to Master Scoreboard web site for all customers.
Contents
The Publish to Internet Wizard
Master Scoreboard
UK and Ireland Central Database of Handicaps Systems
Kenya Golf Network
My Golf Ranking
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
402
22.2
HandicapMaster®
The Publish to Internet Wizard
The Publish to Internet Wizard steps through the stages of publishing competition results and/or
handicapping information to National web sites and Master Scoreboard.
Choose Internet Services
In the CONGU Handicapping editions of HandicapMaster, the Publish to Internet wizard will display the
'Choose Internet Services' page when there is a choice of more than one internet service to publish to.
1. In the Choose Internet Services section select which internet service(s) you wish to publish to. Select
from:
"England Golf Central Database of Handicaps" [for golf clubs in England]
"GOLFnet (GUI/ILGU Central Database of Handicaps)" [for golf clubs in Ireland]
"Kenya Golf Network" [for golf clubs in Kenya]
"Master Scoreboard"
2. Tick the Download and install any program updates whilst online box if you wish HandicapMaster to
check for program updates whilst online. This option will use an Internet link to check the
HandicapMaster web site to see if any program updates have been released. If so, they will be
downloaded and HandicapMaster will be updated. For support purposes, the registered
Organisation Name and Program Version number currently used will be passed to the web
site.
3. Click Next >.
Publish to England Golf / SGU / GUW / Ireland (GOLFnet) Central Database of Handicaps server
1. Choose the options that you wish to use when publishing to the England Golf / SGU / GUW / Ireland
Central Database of Handicaps. See Publish the latest records to the CDH for more details.
2. Click Next >.
3. Start your Internet connection, then click Next > to start the publishing to the England Golf / SGU /
GUW Central Database of Handicaps.
Publish to Kenya Golf Network server
1. Click Next >.
2. Start your Internet connection, then click Next > to start the publishing to Kenya Golf Network.
Publish Results and Handicaps to MasterScoreboard.co.uk
1. Choose the options that you wish to use when publishing to Master Scoreboard. See Publish data to
MasterScoreboard for more details.
2. Click Next >.
3. Start your Internet connection, then click Next > to start the publishing to Master Scoreboard.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Publishing to Internet
22.3
403
MasterScoreboard.co.uk
22.3.1 Introduction
The MasterScoreb oard.co.uk web site is the online extension of HandicapMaster that helps you
publish Handicaps, Competition Results and Handicap Records online.
The following section describes the MasterScoreboard.co.uk service.
Contents
About MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Request set up on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Upload data to MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Member's Name showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Reset a member's password on Master Scoreboard
Stop a Competition showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Knock Out Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop an Eclectic showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
See Also
Accept Bookings into future competitions through Master Scoreboard ("Online Bookings")
Stop a Group Booking being included in a Fixture List
Stop a Calendar Note being included in a Fixture List
22.3.2 About MasterScoreboard.co.uk
The MasterScoreboard.co.uk service offers Users the opportunity to publish Handicaps, Competition
Results and Handicap Records to the Internet.
Through the central web site at http://www.MasterScoreboard.co.uk, Users may publish results and
handicaps directly from HandicapMaster to the central web site. This allows members to see results
from competitions and latest handicap lists without having to visit the Clubhouse to read printed
notices on a board.
The pages on the MasterScoreboard.co.uk web site may be password protected (making them
'Member-only' pages)*.
Events and Notices may be added to the central web site, allowing Secretaries to contact those
members who do not visit the clubhouse and do not see the notices listed there. Events may be
flagged as 'Open' allowing all MasterScoreboard.co.uk web site visitors to read the details. An email
address can optionally be supplied allowing web site visitors to contact the organising official.
Individual members names may be masked should a member wish not to have their names listed on
the web site.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
404
HandicapMaster®
* Pages for HandicapMaster Society Edition users are automatically password-protected.
22.3.3 Request set up on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
In order to upload from HandicapMaster to MasterScoreboard.co.uk, it is necessary to request being
set up on the MasterScoreboard.co.uk service.
As a result of being set up on MasterScoreboard.co.uk, an ID and Passcode will be provided that must
be used in HandicapMaster to connect to MasterScoreboard.co.uk.
To request setup on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
1. Do one of the following:
On the main Toolbar, click the Publish button, or
On the File menu, click Publish to Internet...
2. Click Next > button.
3. Tick Master Scoreboard box and click Next.
4. In the Connection Settings section, click on the Request Set-up button to start the registration
request form. If the ID in the Connection Settings is not "0", your club has already published to
MasterScoreboard.co.uk and a registration request is not required. In this case, the Request Set-up
button is not shown.
5. On the request form, enter the contact name and email address for the registration and the name of
the club to use on MasterScoreboard.co.uk (this will be initially set to the registered club name, but
may be amended if necessary). These fields cannot be left blank.
6. If your club uses multiple databases for different sections, a separate registration is required for
each section. In this case, tick the box to indicate a section registration and then enter the section
name in the additional field that is now shown. The section name will be incorporated into the
MasterScoreboard.co.uk name during set-up. If a section registration is selected, the section name
cannot be left blank.
7. If you have any further information which is relevant to the registration process, enter details in the
Notes field.
8. Click the Send button. This will send an email message to HandicapMaster Support staff containing
the details entered on the form. The name and code from the HandicapMaster registration details
are also included, along with an indication of the handicapping type (to ensure the correct set-up on
MasterScoreboard.co.uk). A copy of the request email is sent to the contact email address.
9. The registration request is now complete. In the Publish to Internet wizard, click the Cancel button to
abort publishing to MasterScoreboard.co.uk.
10.When the registration request has been processed by HandicapMaster Support staff, the specified
contact will receive a "Welcome" message giving the ID and Passcode for MasterScoreboard.co.uk
and further instructions for using the service. The ID and Passcode are required when running the
Publish to Internet wizard to upload data from HandicapMaster .
Notes:
If your club has already published to MasterScoreboard.co.uk, but the ID and Passcode have been
lost or forgotten, please contact HandicapMaster Support staff..
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Publishing to Internet
405
22.3.4 Publish data to MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Before uploading data to MasterScoreboard.co.uk it is necessary for an ID and Passcode to be
supplied. For more information, see Request set up on MasterScoreboard.co.uk.
To upload to MasterScoreboard.co.uk
1. Do one of the following:
On the main Toolbar, click the Publish button, or
On the File menu, click Publish to Internet...
2. Click Next > button.
3. Tick Master Scoreboard box and click Next.
4. In the Connection Settings section, enter the ID and Passcode that have been supplied for the
service.
5. In the Options section, tick the Declare Information was correct up to date box if the information you
are publishing may not be fully up to date.
6. In the Options section, tick the Publish Start Sheets box if you wish to publish any existing Start
Sheets for Opened Competitions to MasterScoreboard.co.uk.
If you wish to select which Start Sheets are published, click the Choose which Start Sheets to
publish link and tick those competition Start Sheets to be included.
7. in the Options section, tick the Publish competition scores to MyGolfRanking website box if you
wish the competition scores to be made available to the MyGolfRanking system. For more
information about this external service, see About My Golf Ranking.
8. Click Next > button.
9. Start your Internet connection and, once you have verified that your Computer is connected to the
Internet, click Next > button.
10.Click Finish button.
Notes:
Each time data is uploaded to MasterScoreboard.co.uk, all of the previous competition and handicap
data is deleted and replaced with new data being uploaded.
See Also
Request set up on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
About My Golf Ranking
22.3.5 Stop a Member's Name showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Where a Member would prefer their name not to be displayed on the MasterScoreboard.co.uk web site,
it is possible for to mask their name using their membership number.
To stop a member's name being displayed on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
1. On the Players menu, click Edit Member and select the applicable Member:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
406
HandicapMaster®
2. Click the MasterScoreboard.co.uk tab.
3. Tick the Hide Name of Member using Member's Membership Number or 'Name
Withheld' box.
See Also
Reset a member's password on Master Scoreboard
22.3.6 Reset a Member's Password on Master Scoreboard
You may reset (clear) a member's password for the MasterScoreboard.co.uk web site, where you have
the Master Scoreboard 'Individual Passwords' feature activated.
To reset a member's password on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
1. On the Players menu, click Edit Member and select the applicable Member:
2. Click the MasterScoreboard.co.uk tab.
3. Click the Reset player's password on Master Scoreboard link.
See Also
Stop a Member's Name showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
22.3.7 Stop a Competition showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
To stop a stroke-play competition being displayed in results list on MasterScoreboard.co.
uk
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place
2.
Select Closed Competitions
3.
Select the competition to be included or excluded from MasterScoreboard.co.uk and right-click.
4.
On the pop-up menu, select MasterScoreboard.co.uk.
To stop a future stroke-play competition being included in a Fixture List
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place
2.
Select Opened Competitions
3.
Select the competition to be included or excluded from MasterScoreboard.co.uk and right-click.
4.
On the pop-up menu, select Fixture List.
Notes:
Repeat this action to reverse whether HandicapMaster will publish this competition to
MasterScoreboard.co.uk.
Where all handicap information is being uploaded (see options section in Upload data to
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Publishing to Internet
407
MasterScoreboard.co.uk) stopping the competition being published will only prevent the competition
being displayed as a link to the competition results. Individual Player History records will still show
the competition score for the player.
See Also
Stop a Knock-out Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop an Eclectic showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Best of Series Showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Group Booking being included in a Fixture List
Stop a Calendar Note being included in a Fixture List
22.3.8 Stop a Knock Out Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
To stop a Knock-out Draw being displayed on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place
2.
Select Knock-out Competitions
3.
Select the competition to be included or excluded from MasterScoreboard.co.uk and right-click.
4.
On the pop-up menu, select MasterScoreboard.co.uk.
Notes:
Repeat this action to reverse whether HandicapMaster will publish this K.O. draw to
MasterScoreboard.co.uk.
See Also
Stop a Competition showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop an Eclectic showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Best of Series Showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Competition being included in a Fixture List
Stop a Group Booking being included in a Fixture List
Stop a Calendar Note being included in a Fixture List
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
408
HandicapMaster®
22.3.9 Stop an Eclectic showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
To stop an Eclectic Competition being displayed on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place
2.
Select Eclectic Competitions
3.
Select the competition to be included or excluded from MasterScoreboard.co.uk and right-click.
4.
On the pop-up menu, select MasterScoreboard.co.uk.
Notes:
Repeat this action to reverse whether HandicapMaster will publish this Eclectic to
MasterScoreboard.co.uk
See Also
Stop a Competition showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Knock-out Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Best of Series Showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Competition being included in a Fixture List
Stop a Group Booking being included in a Fixture List
Stop a Calendar Note being included in a Fixture List
22.3.10 Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
To stop an Order of Merit Competition being displayed on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place
2.
Select Order of Merit Competitions
3.
Select the competition to be included or excluded from MasterScoreboard.co.uk and right-click.
4.
On the pop-up menu, select MasterScoreboard.co.uk.
Notes:
Repeat this action to reverse whether HandicapMaster will publish this Order of Merit to
MasterScoreboard.co.uk.
See Also
Stop a Competition showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Knock-out Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Publishing to Internet
409
Stop an Eclectic showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Best of Series Showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Competition being included in a Fixture List
Stop a Group Booking being included in a Fixture List
Stop a Calendar Note being included in a Fixture List
22.3.11 Stop a Best of Series Showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
To stop a Best of Series being displayed on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
1.
On the Left Hand Task Pane, select Competitions place
2.
Select Best of Series
3.
Select the competition to be included or excluded from MasterScoreboard.co.uk and right-click.
4.
On the pop-up menu, select MasterScoreboard.co.uk.
Notes:
Repeat this action to reverse whether HandicapMaster will publish this Order of Merit to
MasterScoreboard.co.uk.
See Also
Stop a Competition showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Knock-out Draw showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop an Eclectic showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop an Order of Merit showing on MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Stop a Competition being included in a Fixture List
Stop a Group Booking being included in a Fixture List
Stop a Calendar Note being included in a Fixture List
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
410
22.4
HandicapMaster®
UK and Ireland CDH services
22.4.1 Introduction
The English,Scottish and Welsh Golf Union's Central Database of Handicaps (CDH) systems,
and Ireland's GOLFnet system, are central web sites for reporting Handicap Records, in
operation in these countries.
Handicap Records for players are transmitted to the web site of the National Union and are made
available to Club, County and National Officials to help them administer the Handicapping system in
the country.
There are three national systems.
The English "England Golf CDH" was introduced in March 2009 and covers clubs in England.
The Scottish and Welsh CDH was introduced in 2011 and covers clubs in Scotland and Wales.
The Irish "GOLFnet" system was introduced in 2004 and updated in 2015 and covers clubs in Ireland
and Northern Ireland.
Some of the benefits that these services provide are
Automatic reporting of Away scores from other clubs in the same country,
Facility to verify a player’s Handicap online (say for a Visiting golfer), and
Easier administration of County and National golf.
Club officials are requested to update the CDH server on a regular basis, especially after each
qualifying competition.
Summary of the CDH
England, Scotland & Wales
Each player in England, Scotland and Wales is granted a National Number. It is possible to obtain
these numbers directly through HandicapMaster, although an Internet connection is required. The
number is intended to stay with the golfer even in the event that the player moves Home club.
Once a player has a National Number, and this number is logged into the membership record for the
player in HandicapMaster, his handicap records may be published to the CDH. At the same time, any
Away scores for players at this club may be received.
Ireland
Each player in Ireland is allocated a number and receives a "swipe" card. Clubs are requested by
their national union to maintain lists of members on the GOLFnet website.
Each player may view their handicap record through the GOLFnet website.
What Personal information is held about each player on the CDH?
England, Scotland & Wales
Only the following information is published to the CDH for each Home player:
Name
Gender (Male or Female)
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Publishing to Internet
411
Year of Birth (when known)
Membership number at Home Club (when known)
Membership Status (“Current”, ”Resigned”, “Deceased”, “Non-player”)
List of other clubs the player is a member of
It should be noted that no other personal information is sent to the CDH (no Address details,
no Telephone details, etc).
The CDH Web sites
The English CDH website may be accessed at http://cdh.egu.org.uk.
The Scottish CDH website may be accessed at http://www.scottishgolf.org/go/cdh_members.
The Welsh CDH website may be accessed at http://wales.cdh.golfbox.dk/.
The Irish GOLFnet website may be accessed at http://www.golfnet.ie.
Note: HandicapMaster Ltd, developer of HandicapMaster software, is not responsib le for the design or
operation of any of the CDH web sites.
What you will need to use the CDH Service
Internet Connection
The CDH services are web services and therefore you will need an Internet connection from the PC
running HandicapMaster, and an Internet connection from any PC from which you wish to be able to
access the web site.
Firewall Configuration
The Firewall on the PC from which you intend to publish to the CDH using HandicapMaster will need to
allow the “HandicapMaster.exe” program to access the Internet (using port 80).
Contents
Using the CDH for the first time
Obtain a National Number for a Member
Publish the latest records to the CDH
Away Members
Visitors
Find a player on the CDH
Player with National Number joins club
Adding Visitors through the Player Entry system
Verify a handicap of a Visitor
CDH Validation; Removing unknown records from the CDH
Reporting Problems with the CDH service
Common error codes returned by the CDH
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
412
HandicapMaster®
See Also
'Unrecognised' Golf Courses
22.4.2 Using the CDH for the first time
Step 1 – Obtain Access to the CDH Web site
England
Request activation for your club on the England Golf CDH:
Before proceeding, you will need to request activation for your club on the CDH (Central Database
of Handicaps), if your club has not previously used the CDH. Activating your club on the CDH will
give you a Userid and password for accessing the web site, as well as enabling data to be
published to the CDH. To do this....
1. Visit the applicable CDH web site at http://cdh.egu.org.uk
Note: Your club only needs to complete activation once on the system. If you need additional
Userids on the CDH web sites, these can be set up after the first activation. See the CDH web
sites for details.
2. Log on to this web site using the following credentials:
Please refer to the corresponding Help topic in HandicapMaster (HELP -> HandicapMaster
Help) for details.
Select the Register menu (only menu available) and follow the instructions.
3. Once your activation is confirmed, you will receive an email confirming this.
If you have difficulty with the Activation process
If you have difficulty with the activation process, telephone England Golf (Tel. 01526 354500) and
ask for Club Services department for assistance.
Error 48 (“Handicapping Authority is Suspended”)
If your club has not been activated on the CDH and you publish to the CDH from HandicapMaster,
error 48 (“Handicapping Authority is Suspended”) will be reported and no data will be saved to the
central server.
Scotland
Request a Username and Password from the Scottish Golf Union or Scottish Ladies Golf
Association.
Wales
Request a Username and Password from the Golf Union of Wales.
Step 2 – Confirm “System Home Club” setting in HandicapMaster
In order that HandicapMaster is able to communicate with the server successfully, the
HandicapMaster “System Home Club” must be set to a club with a recognised ID Number on the
server.
1. Click File menu, then Options.
2. Check that Current chosen Home Club shows with a yellow flag and a 7 digit National club ID.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Publishing to Internet
413
If it does not, click Change Home Club button and ensure that the chosen Home club is your club as
shown with a Yellow flag and with a 7 digit number listed in the “National ID” column.
3. Click OK to set the System Home Club.
Step 3 – Publish to CDH for one or two of your members.
England, Scotland & Wales
The service is based on the premise that each player will be allocated a 10 digit number.
In an innovative approach, the CDH has been designed so that the handicapping software may
request these numbers from the CDH and update the local databases, without the need for club
secretaries to enter 10 digit numbers for each of their members into their local handicapping
software by hand!
We recommend that for the first connection, numbers are requested for only one or two members,
to ensure the system is operational.
1. Click the Publish button on the main Toolbar to run the “Publish to Internet” wizard and click Next
.
2. Tick the Central Database of Handicaps box (and optionally Master Scoreboard if you are
already using the Master Scoreboard service) and click Next.
3. Amend the Publish Handicap Records and Away Scores for box as required, to select data for
which gender of players is to be published.
4. Amend the For Period date to the earliest date that you would like handicap records to be
available on the CDH (the earliest possible is 1st January 2008).
5. Click Next to initiate the publishing to the CDH.
6. On the Request New Player ID's window, tick the box alongside a couple of your members and
click OK.
At the end of the process, a report may be viewed. This will detail warnings and errors from the
process. Warnings will be issued for every player with a handicap and without a 10 digit number.
The ALL MEMBERS list should display the 10 digit number now allocated to the selected player(s).
Note: Whilst uploading handicap records to the CDH, it is possible that HandicapMaster may
encounter references to golf courses that are not mapped to courses listed on the CDH itself. In
this situation, you will be prompted to make a best-selection from the list of courses that are
recognised by the CDH. Please see Unrecognised Golf Courses for further details.
Ireland
Enter Player's GOLFnet numbers into their records in HandicapMaster.
1. Select Edit Member and choose the applicable member.
2. Click Cards and Lockers tab and tick the Has National Number (GOLFnet) box.
3. Enter the player’s 8 digit number in the Player National Number box. Click OK to save the
record.
Step 4 – Request numbers for remaining “Home” players.
England, Scotland & Wales
Once you have confidence that the CDH service is operational for your club, you may register the
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
414
HandicapMaster®
remaining Home club members onto the CDH, and be allocated their 10 digit numbers.
1. Click the Publish button on the main Toolbar to run the “Publish to Internet” wizard and click Next
.
2. Tick the Central Database of Handicaps box (and optionally Master Scoreboard if you are
already using the Master Scoreboard service) and click Next.
3. Amend the For Period date to the earliest date that you would like handicap records to be
available on the CDH.
4. Click Next to initiate the publishing to the CDH.
5. On the Request New Player ID's window, tick Select All button. This will tick the box alongside all
of the players listed. Click OK.
At the end of the process, a report may be viewed.
Note:
When allocating the players to the system in bulk, this may take a few minutes to complete.
See Also
Reporting Problems with the CDH service
Common error codes returned by the CDH
Unrecognised Golf Courses
22.4.3 Obtain a National Number for a Player
England, Scotland & Wales
Note: This topic is not applicab le in Ireland.
Please ask the member if they have previously had a national number. It is important that the
player’s number passes with him as he changes Home clubs.
If the player already has a National Number
1. Do one of the following:
In the Players list, select a Member and press Enter Key, or
In the Players list, select a Member, then on the Players menu, click Edit Member, or
On the Players menu, click Edit Member and select a Member from the list displayed.
2. Click Cards & Locker tab
3. Tick the Has National Number box and enter the 10 digit number in the Player National Number box.
4. Click OK.
If the player requires a National Number for the first time
1. Do one of the following:
On the File menu, click Publish to Internet,
On the main toolbar, click the Publish button.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Publishing to Internet
415
Proceed to publish to the CDH.
2. On the Request New Player ID's window, tick the box alongside the player's name. Click OK.
A number will then be allocated to the player.
How to advise a player of their national number
In addition to material that your club may receive from the National Union, to provide to your members,
you may also create a letter in HandicapMaster and include their National Number in the letter. To
achieve this, add a field code of "<National Number>" to the letter body.
The national numbers allocated to your members are listed in the "Player Card Numbers" report.
The national numbers are exported when you create an export file of your members.
See Also
Reporting Problems with the CDH service
CDH Validation; Removing unknown records from the CDH
Common error codes returned by the CDH
22.4.4 Publish the latest records to the CDH
You may update the information on the CDH at any time, by selecting the Publish button on the main
toolbar. This will allow you to refresh player’s details and handicap records on the CDH, as well as
send and receive Away Scores.
It is recommended that your club publishes to the CDH on a regular basis, including after each
handicap qualifying competition, or when player’s handicaps have been updated.
“For Period” Date
When publishing to the CDH, Handicap Records for players from a specified date are removed from
the central server and replaced with the latest data being uploaded.
The specified date is the date that is chosen in the “Publish to Internet” wizard.
After all Home Club players have had numbers allocated to them, when publishing to the CDH on a
regular basis, the “Upload Handicap Records” date may be left to “last 3 months” (provided the last
upload was less than 3 months earlier!). This will ensure the time taken to upload to the CDH is kept to
a minimum.
To update the CDH
1. Do one of the following:
On the main Toolbar, click the Publish button, or
On the File menu, click Publish to Internet...
2. Click Next >
3. Tick the Central Database of Handicaps box and click Next >
4. If you wish to receive Away scores for your Home members, tick the Receive Away Scores for box,
and select a time frame for when these scores were played.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
416
HandicapMaster®
5. If you wish to update any 'Away' members Handicaps in HandicapMaster using the handicaps
reported on the CDH, tick the Update Handicaps of Away Members box.
6. Tick the Enable Logging (Troubleshooting) box if you are asked to collect diagnostic information by
HandicapMaster support staff.
7. Click Next > and Next > again to start the communication with the CDH server.
England, Scotland & Wales
If you wish to request National Numbers for new members, on the Request new player ID's
window, tick the box alongside the player(s) names and click OK. See Obtain a National
Number for a Member.
HandicapMaster will perform a check for any players listed as members on the CDH, but not
in the local database. If one or more players are found, the Unknown members found on CDH
window will be displayed.
8. In the event that warnings or errors occur when uploading to the CDH, you are recommended to
View Connection Report (on the 'Finished' Page) to identify the nature of any problems encountered.
Note:
To be able to publish to the CDH, you will need an active Internet connection from the computer running
HandicapMaster.
See Also
Reporting Problems with the CDH service
CDH Validation; Removing unknown records from the CDH
Common error codes returned by the CDH
22.4.5 CDH Validation; Removing unknown records from CDH
England, Scotland & Wales
Note: This topic is not applicab le in Ireland.
Whilst publishing to the CDH, HandicapMaster will perform a check for any players listed as Home
players, but whose National ID is not recognised.
This can be the case when more than one lifetime ID has accidently been requested from the
CDH, for example.
If one or more players are registered as home members for your club on the CDH, but no
corresponding record exists with the same ID’s in HandicapMaster, then you will be given to option
to remove these records from the CDH.
When selected for removal, HandicapMaster will request that the records are marked as “resigned
from the club” on the CDH.
To remove unwanted records from the CDH
1. When the list of unknown member records is displayed, tick the box alongside the player(s) names
for those you wish to remove from the CDH and click OK.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Publishing to Internet
417
22.4.6 Releasing Members who have resigned their membership
There are no special actions required to "release" members on the CDH when they resign their
membership of the club.
Please delete the member in HandicapMaster.
Repeat for any other members who have resigned.
England, Scotland & Wales
When all the membership changes have been completed please publish the latest records to the
CDH.
This will update the CDH system and the member will no longer be identified as a home member
at your club on the CDH.
NOTE
Some CDH systems may send an e-mail to the registered club contact advising them of the
change of membership status.
22.4.7 Away Members
Obtaining national numbers for your ‘Away’ members
Each player is expected to have one record on the CDH, irrespective of the number of golf clubs of
which they are a member. For the system to operate successfully, it is necessary for your “away”
members to be asked to provide you with their 10 digit number which has been allocated to them
at their Home Club. This number must then be added to the HandicapMaster record for this player:
1. Select Edit Member and choose any member without a National Number. Ensure this player is a
“Away” player.
2. Click Cards and Lockers tab and tick the Has National Number (Central Database of
Handicaps) box.
3. Enter the player’s 10 digit number in the Player National Number box. Click OK to save the
record.
Scores for this player will be reported back to their Home Club, when you next publish to the CDH.
This process may be completed piecemeal, Away member by Away member, as and when your
Away members become aware of their CDH numbers.
When you have Away players' National Numbers in their HandicapMaster records, the player's
Handicaps can automatically be kept up to date as you Publish to the CDH.
Members of Golf Clubs outside of your Country
The English and Scottish/Welsh CDH services are linked together. You may refer to English players
from Scotland/Wales or Scottish/Welsh players from England.
Neither systems have an interface to the Irish "GOLFnet" CDH Service.
If you have Home Away Members that have their home club outside of "England, Scotland and
Wales" or "Ireland", it will be necessary to leave their national number blank. These players cannot
be included in the CDH system.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
418
HandicapMaster®
See Also
Reporting Problems with the CDH service
22.4.8 Visitors
Entry forms for Open Competitions
The CDH provide facilities for easing the administration of Open competitions.
It is recommended that your club considers amending their entry forms for open competitions to
request the player’s National Number.
Having the national number for a Visitor will enable the CDH to be used to simplify the preparation and
checking of Visitors details for the Open competitions.
Registering Visitors to HandicapMaster using their National Number
If you need to add a visitor record to HandicapMaster as part of a player’s entry to an Open competition,
this may be simplified if you know their national number.
When the visitor’s national number is known, the latest player details and handicap may be read into
HandicapMaster using the CDH service.
1. Select Players drop-down menu, then New Visitor
2. Tick the Has National Number (Central Database of Handicaps) box and enter the player’s 8 digit
number (Ireland) or 10 digit number (England, Scotland and Wales) in the National Number box.
3. Click Look Up Players Details... button. The CDH will confirm the player details and the latest
handicap (including the date when this handicap was published to the CDH) and update all of the
other fields in the window.
4. Confirm the information filled in is all OK and click OK button.
See Also
Verify a handicap of a Visitor
Find a player on the CDH
Reporting Problems with the CDH service
Adding Visitors through the Player Entry system
22.4.9 Find a player on the CDH
To find a player on the CDH
1. Do one of the following:
On the Players menu, click Find a Player on CDH
Open the Visitors folder and on the Visitor Tasks click Find a Player on CDH
2. Select how to find the player
Select Find by Name where the name of the Player is known
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Publishing to Internet
419
Select Find by Number where the National Number of the Player is known
If you select Find by Number go to step 7
3. In the Surname (or part Surname) box, enter the last name of the player you wish to locate. You may
use part of their last name if this helps (minimum 2 characters) and these do not need to be at the
start of the player's name.
4. In the First name / Initial box, enter the player's first name or their initial. Alternatively, leave this box
blank to search for all players matching the Surname selection.
5. Select the Home club for this player by clicking the < Click to select club > link.
6. Click the Find button to perform the search on the CDH for this player.
HandicapMaster will request a list of all members at the selected club whose names match the search
criteria from the CDH. These will be listed on screen in the results box.
Skip step 7 when you Find by Name. Searching by name may be restricted to players of one gender
only. See notes below.
7. Enter the National Number of the player in one of the following ways:
type the number using the keyboard and click the FIND button
Swipe a magnetic swipe card and HandicapMaster will automatically FIND the details.
To add a player found by Name on the CDH to HandicapMaster
1. Highlight the player to be added to HandicapMaster in the results list (with a single click)
2. Click the Add Player to Database button to add the selected player to the list of Visitors in
HandicapMaster.
To add a player found by Number on the CDH to HandicapMaster
1. Click the Add Player to Database button to add the selected player to the list of Visitors in
HandicapMaster.
Notes:
When searching for players by name, the results will be limited to players with the same gender last
selected when publishing to the CDH.
Where a player details are already recorded in HandicapMaster the Add Player to Database will be
displayed, but cannot be clicked.
When using the Find by Number option if there is an error obtaining the Player details then the Add
Player to Database button is not displayed.
When swiping magnetic cards you may swipe a number of cards in sequence provided you do not
wish to add a player. This is useful when checking player details.
22.4.10 Player with National Number joins club
How to enter a player into HandicapMaster when they join with an existing National
Number?
If a player joins the club who already has a lifetime ID on the CDH, then
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
420
HandicapMaster®
1. Select Edit Member and choose the membership record set up for this player.
2. Click the Handicapping tab and issue the player with a handicap.
3. Click the Cards & Locker tab, then tick Has National Number box and enter their existing ID.
Click OK.
When you next publish to the CDH, the player's record will be updated accordingly on the CDH.
See also
Find a player on the CDH
CDH Validation; Removing unknown records from the CDH
22.4.11 Add Visitors through Player Entry
You may configure the Player Entry system so that when a Visitor enters their National ID, their details
are checked with the CDH and added to the HandicapMaster database.
To configure Player Entry to add Visitors when national ID's are entered
Configure Player Entry to use this facility.:
1. On the left hand task pane, select Competitions place.
a) On the right hand pane, double-click Settings Profiles.
b) Do one of the following:
Select a Profile and press ENTER Key, or
Double-click the Profile entry in the list.
To add a new Profile, click Create a new Profile in the Player Entry Tasks box (or press the
INSERT key).
2. Configure Player Entry using the Configure Player Entry Wizard.
On the Identify Players page..
England, Scotland & Wales
1. Select option Entering a PIN number or CDH Lifetime ID or option Entering a Club
Membership Number or CDH Lifetime ID.
2. Tick Add Visitors to system, using CDH, when their National ID is entered box.
Ireland
1. Select option Entering a PIN number or GOLFnet Card/Number or option Entering a
Club Membership Number or GOLFnet Card/Number.
2. Tick Add Visitors to system, using GOLFnet, when their GOLFnet number is entered
box.
Complete the Configure Player Entry wizard.
3. Start Player Entry and agree to download the GOLFnet Player files.
Note:
You will need an active internet connection when the visitors are entering their numbers.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Publishing to Internet
421
22.4.12 Verify a Handicap of a Visitor
To look up the Handicap of a Visitor who is already added to HandicapMaster
1. Do one of the following:
In the Visitors list, select a Visitor and press Enter Key, or
In the Visitors list, select a Visitor, then on the Players menu, click Edit Visitor, or
On the Players menu, click Edit Visitor and select a Member from the list displayed.
2. Tick the Has National Number box and enter the 8 digit number (Ireland) or 10 digit number
(England, Scotland and Wales) for this player in the Player National Number box.
3. Click the Look up Player Details button. HandicapMaster will access the CDH and update
the Visitor record with the latest handicap (and details) for the Visitor.
To look up the Handicaps of multiple Visitors in a single operation
See Verify the handicaps of multiple visitors
To look up the Handicap (and player details) of a Visitor not already known to
HandicapMaster
1. On the Players menu, click New Visitor.
2. Tick the Has National Number box and enter the 10 digit number for this player in the Player National
Number box (no need to enter name or any other details about the player!).
3. Click the Look up Player Details button. HandicapMaster will access the CDH and update
the Visitor record with the latest handicap (and details) for the Visitor.
4. Click OK to save the Visitor record.
See Also
Find a player on the CDH
Reporting Problems with the CDH service
22.4.13 Verify the Handicaps of Multiple Visitors
You may update the handicaps and other details for a number of visitors from the Central Database of
Handicaps in a single operation.
To update multiple visitors
1. Do one of the following:
On the Players menu, click Update Visitors from CDH
Open the Visitors folder and on the Visitor Tasks click Update Visitor records from CDH
2. Select the visitors to be updated by ticking or unticking the box against their names. Click the Select
All button to tick all visitors, or the Clear All button to untick all visitors.
Tip: To group all the visitors from a single club (e.g. before an inter-club competition), click on the
Home Club column heading to sort the list by club.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
422
HandicapMaster®
3. Click on OK to process the selected visitors. If a large number of visitors have been selected, a
warning message is displayed as the updates may take some time (depending on the speed of the
connection to the CDH). The display changes to show only the selected Visitors along with status
and other information as the updates proceed.
4. At the end of processing, a summary of the number of updates is displayed.
5. To complete processing, click Print to produce a report (which can be saved or printed) or click
Finish to exit without producing a report.
See also
Find a player on the CDH
22.4.14 Reporting Problems with the CDH service
If you experience problems using the CDH Service, with either
Publishing to the CDH using the Publish to Internet wizard, or
Using the CDH web site itself,
please report the problem as follows:
England
Log on to the England Golf CDH web site and raise a Enquiry through the England Golf CDH web
site.
Scotland or Wales
Log into the SGU/SLGA or GUW CDH web site and click Help to report the problem.
Please complete this before contacting HandicapMaster Support.
See Also
Common error codes returned by the CDH
CDH Validation; Removing unknown records from the CDH
22.4.15 Common Error codes returned by the CDH
The following common codes and messages may be returned by the CDH when running the
Publishing to Internet wizard.
Error 45 ("Club Id and local player ID combination Already Used")
Cause:
You have requested national numbers for two or more members who share the same Membership
Number in HandicapMaster. More than one member with the same Local ID is not allowed by the CDH
Solution:
Amend the records of your members and remove duplicate membership numbers.
Error 48 (“Handicapping Authority is Suspended”)
Cause:
Your club, as chosen in the "System Home Club" setting in HandicapMaster, has not been activated on
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Publishing to Internet
423
the CDH.
Solution:
Check your System Home Club is correctly set, then activate your account on the CDH.
22.4.16 Reviewing Away Scores Received
The Central Databases of Handicaps will return Away scores from competitions played away from the
player's Home Club.
Each Away score record received will be displayed on screen in turn. Provided the information received
passes basic checking, you will be able to decide whether to apply the score to the handicap records of
the player, or ignore it.
You are strongly advised to review the contents of each record, before applying the score.
HandicapMaster displays it's interpretation of the away score record, in descriptive text.
'BLOCKED' Away Scores
Where HandicapMaster identifies the content of the information as incorrect, inappropriate or the record
cannot be applied because the Member Number is not currently listed in the database, the Away Score
will be 'Blocked'.
In this case, the data that is considered unreliable is displayed in red. Click Details... button for further
information.
The information will be treated as 'Unsafe' and HandicapMaster will not allow the record to be
processed.
In the event of receiving a 'Blocked' score, you are recommended to try to locate the missing or incorrect
information by some means other that through the Central Database system.
Notes:
Where scores are blocked or are ignored, the Central Database systems will continue to present the
Away Scores.
See Also
Deleting an Away Score previously entered
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
424
22.5
HandicapMaster®
Kenya Golf Network
22.5.1 Introduction
The Kenya Golf Network web site is a central system for reporting Handicap Records, in
operation in Kenya.
Handicap Records and Competition Results for players are transmitted to the Kenya Golf Network web
site and are made available to Players and Officials to help them administer golf in Kenya.
An Internet connection from the PC running HandicapMaster will be required to publish to the Kenya
Golf Network.
Contents
Using the Kenya Golf Network for the first time
22.5.2 Using the Kenya Golf Network for the first time
Step 1 – Confirm “System Home Club” setting in HandicapMaster
In order that HandicapMaster is able to communicate with the server successfully, the
HandicapMaster “System Home Club” must be set to a club with a recognised ID Number on the
server.
1. Click File menu, then Options.
2. Check that Current chosen Home Club shows with a yellow flag and a 3 digit National club ID.
If it does not, click Change Home Club button and ensure that the chosen Home club is your club as
shown with a Yellow flag and with a 3 digit number listed in the “National ID” column.
3. Click OK to set the System Home Club.
Step 2 – Publish to Kenya Golf Network web site
1. Click the Publish button on the main Toolbar to run the “Publish to Internet” wizard and click Next.
2. Tick the Kenya Golf Network box (and optionally Master Scoreboard if you are already using the
Master Scoreboard service) and click Next.
3. Click Next to initiate the publishing to the Kenya Golf Network.
At the end of the process, a report may be viewed. This will detail warnings and errors from the
process.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Publishing to Internet
22.6
425
'Unrecognised' Golf Courses
Each of the National Systems (England, Scotland and Wales Central Database of Handicaps and
Ireland GOLFnet) uses its own numbering scheme to represent golf courses when receiving uploaded
Handicap Records.
We make this process of referring to golf courses by their respective national numbers easy in
HandicapMaster by managing the respective numbering systems through program updates. We attach
the national number to the respective golf course record in the database, and then use these numbers
when publishing to the national systems.
'Unrecognised Golf Course' error
Most clubs in the respective lists of clubs have their numbers available. However, from time to time, it is
necessary for users to add additional golf courses to the database. These courses do not have the
necessary national numbers.
In this situation, when publishing to the national system, an error like the following may be
experienced:
Unrecognised Golf Course: 'MyGolfCourse'
This golf course is not a recognised CDH course.
This venue is used in a record for Member 'Joe Bloggs', dated 1st June 2008.
Select the Golf Club this course relates to from the following list..
In this situation, it is necessary to identify the corresponding golf course in the database that has a
national number.
To enable HandicapMaster to report an appropriate club name
1. When the above message is displayed, click OK.
2. A list of golf courses known to the national system will be displayed. Select the appropriate entry
from the list and click OK.
HandicapMaster will now be able to proceed with publishing to the National system, as the applicable
club will now be known to HandicapMaster.
Note:
The selection will be displayed in the Notes column of the Golf Courses list in HandicapMaster.
If you click Cancel to the list of courses, the applicable entry in the player's record will be omitted from
being published to the Nation System.
To change which club is used when publishing to the National System
If you wish to reset the choice of club to be used when reporting this course to the national system then
1. In the Golf Courses list, locate the course in question and right-click.
2. Select Edit in the pop-up menu.
3. Click Reset button and click OK.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
426
HandicapMaster®
The next time that you publish to the national system and this club is referenced in handicap records,
you will be able to choose an alternative club.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Publishing to Internet
22.7
427
My Golf Ranking
22.7.1 About My Golf Ranking
The My Golf Rank ing web site is an external web site that rank s players based upon their
competition results, within their club, county and nationally.
You may publish competition results from HandicapMaster to this service.
Your club will need an account on the My Golf Ranking system before it can publish competition results
to the service, and have it's players ranked.
Visit the www.MyGolfRanking.net web site to register your club on the system.
About My Golf Ranking
MyGolfRanking provides players at participating golf clubs with a ranking based on their performance in
counting events nominated by their club.
MyGolfRanking is the concept of David Moir, past president of the Scottish Golf Union, who was
instrumental in devising the R&A/USGA World Amateur Golf Ranking for men and women.
How My Golf Ranking works
Each golf club must inform its members in advance which Stroke play and Stableford club events
during the year are Counting Events and players earn Ranking Points based on their net scores and
Bonus Points for finishing in a high position in an event.
Each competition is rated for strength on the basis of the number of competitors in the starting field.
The larger the field, the more Bonus Points can be won.
Each player's Ranking Points and Bonus Points are added together and divided by the Divisor, which
equates to the number of Counting Rounds that the player has played. This figure is multiplied by 100
to give the player's MyGolfRanking Points.
The MyGolfRanking Points are then used to rank each player at Club, County and National level.
The MyGolfRanking lists will be updated each week and posted on the www.MyGolfRanking.net
website
Notes
The My Golf Ranking web site is an external web site and is not operated by HandicapMaster Ltd.
See Also
Publish results to My Golf Ranking
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
428
HandicapMaster®
22.7.2 Publish results to My Golf Ranking
You may update the information on the My Golf Ranking at any time. This will allow you to add new
scores to the system.
To update My Golf Ranking
1. Publish to the Master Scoreboard web site by running the Publish to Internet wizard.
2. When running the Pub lish to Internet wizard, tick Publish competition scores to MyGolfRanking
website box.
Notes:
The data published to Master Scoreboard will be collected and processed by My Golf Ranking
overnight.
The following competition formats are NOT supported by the MyGolfRanking system and results for
these types of competitions cannot be published:
Par/Bogey format competitions
Team Competitions
Overall results from Multiple Round competitions (I.e. 36 hole, 72 hole, etc)
Competitions with less than three competitors
See Also
About My Golf Ranking
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
429
Chapter
23
Managing the Database
430
HandicapMaster®
23
Managing the Database
23.1
Introduction
Daily and 'End-of-Year' functions for the successful operation of HandicapMaster.
This Chapter deals with two opposite but vital functions of running the HandicapMaster system. These
are
1. Removal of out-of-date data (a process called 'Housekeeping')
2. Preservation of current, valid, data avoiding accidental loss.
Housekeeping is required when the HandicapMaster database is becoming too large to manage
efficiently. Often, this function is performed as an 'end-of-year' task.
Preservation of the important data involves regular backups to ensure against hardware or
software malfunction. Typically, this function is performed each time HandicapMaster is operated.
Contents
The function of Housekeeping
Protection of the data
Backing up the Database
Restoring the Database
Automatic Backups
Using more than one copy of HandicapMaster on the same computer
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Managing the Database
23.2
431
The function of Housekeeping
Housekeeping is a necessary function of running HandicapMaster. Housekeeping involves removing
out-of-date data in order that the database is maintained at a size that is practical to use.
Housekeeping involves four different functions. These are
1. Removing the competition scores entered hole-by-hole. Any scores entered by hole are maintained
separate from the main records. These can be used historically to generate reports such as 'Twos
returned in Competition'. However, these require a large amount of database space and are best
deleted on a regular basis. Deleting these does not alter the playing or handicap records of any
member, but will prevent a competition from being Undone and re-applied.
2. Removing the Record Sheet Entries. This removes the playing records of members up to a predescribed date. This option is typically used at the end of each season.
3. Removing Accounting Entries. This removes the accounting and subscriptions records of members
up to a pre-described date (if this option is in use in HandicapMaster).
4. Removing any Deleted Members or Visitors from the database. This removes the names of past
members which have been marked as deleted or Visitors which no longer have any references
within the database. Names can only be deleted if there are no Record Sheet Entries referring to
them.
To perform Housekeeping
1.
On the File menu, click Housekeeping.
2.
Choose between housekeeping your data using the recommended settings or custom
choices of your own.
Recommended
The recommended settings will remove the following data from HandicapMaster:
Handicap/Competition Entries (and Accounting entries if used) older than two years plus
the current season
'Hole-by-Hole' data older than 12 months.
In addition, all past Members and Visitors left with no Handicap/Competition data or
accounting data will also be removed.
Custom
To perform any one of the housekeeping functions described above, follow the instructions
detailed below:
Deleted Members or Visitors
1. Check the Remove Past Members and Past Visitors box.
Hole-by-Hole Scores
1. Tick the Remove Hole-by-Hole Scores up to a chosen Date box.
2. On the next page of the Housekeeping Wizard, set the Remove all selected data
to the the end of to the date the deletions should be up to.
Handicap Record Entries
1. Check the Remove Handicap Record Entries up to a chosen Date box.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
432
HandicapMaster®
2. On the next page of the Housekeeping Wizard, set the Remove all selected data
to the the end of box to the date the deletions should be up to.
Accounting Record Entries
3. Check the Remove Voided Transactions up to a chosen Date box if you wish to
remove void transactions. For example after a running the Raise Subscription Wizard
you may find some changes required. When you re-run the Raise Subscription
Wizard the previous subscriptions will be voided. This option allows you to remove
these 'voided' records if required.
4. Check the Remove Subscription and Payment Records up to a chosen Date
box.
5. On the next page of the Housekeeping Wizard, set the Remove all selected data
to the the end of box to the date the deletions should be up to.
NOTE
in Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions the accounting data will only be available
to be removed if the user in HandicapMaster has full access or if Custom access is enabled then
'update' access to the accounting data is required.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Managing the Database
23.3
433
Protection of the data
All computer data is liable to loss or corruption either from hardware failure (such as a disk drive
failing) or from software errors (causing the program or operating system to 'crash') that can result in
the database becoming corrupt. Another example of protection is the mis-entry of data that
subsequently requires removal. HandicapMaster provides four levels of protection against all of these
types of problems. These are
1. Correcting mistakes made by the User,
2. Recovery of data following a system crash whilst processing competition scores and
3. Physical Backup of data to another drive or directory and Restore of data from another drive or
directory.
4. Online backup and restore of data to/from HM-SAFE online storage
The first of these has already been discussed in the section Correcting Mistakes previously in this
guide. The rest of this section deals with the second and third of these.
Processing Competition Scores
Competition processing is the most regular and processing-intensive operation that HandicapMaster
has to perform. For this reason, this is the most likely scenario when a system (hardware) crash or
software failure would leave the database corrupt. HandicapMaster has been designed in a way that
ensures the changes made as a result of competition processing are protected by being backed up
whilst the changes are processed. These backups are automatically deleted once the changes have
been completed. This enables HandicapMaster to recognize when scores have not been completed
(since the backups will exist) and backup out the changes if necessary. HandicapMaster automatically
checks whether a competition backup was underway when HandicapMaster stopped each time it is
started.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
434
23.4
HandicapMaster®
Backing up the Database
HandicapMaster will automatically prompt the User to backup the database at the end of each session.
In addition, HandicapMaster will copy the database to a 'backup' directory on the same drive as
HandicapMaster itself every time HandicapMaster is exited. It is recommended that you do not rely on
the automatic backups in case of the event of a failure of the disk HandicapMaster is installed on. In
this circumstance, the automatic backups will also be lost.
To backup the database
1.
On the File menu, click Backup Database.
2.
Click Change Folder to locate a suitable folder for the Backup File. A compressed copy of
the database will be written to this folder.
3.
Tick the Remind To Back Up On Close box to cause this window to automatically be
displayed when exiting from HandicapMaster (Not applicable for Network Edition of
HandicapMaster.
4.
Click Yes to perform the backup, or No to bypass the backup operation.
HandicapMaster creates a backup file called HandicapMaster.BAK.
Notes:
It is strongly recommended that the Folder is on a different Drive to where HandicapMaster is
installed.
The database is written in a format that is unique to HandicapMaster an cannot be restored
other than using HandicapMaster.
If you are in the process of exiting from HandicapMaster, selecting Cancel will also cancel
the exit and return you to HandicapMaster.
Click the Online Backup button if you wish to perform an Online Backup.
TIP: It is recommended that the backup be performed to an alternative disk such as a floppy
disk. This will ensure you have the maximum likelihood of protecting data from loss (such as theft
of the computer, etc.).
See Also
Protection of the Database
Restore of the Database
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Managing the Database
23.5
435
Restoring the Database
To recover the database from a previous backup
1.
On the File menu, click Restore Database.
2.
Click Change Folder to locate the disk and folder containing the backup file.
3.
Click Yes to perform the restore, or No to bypass the restore operation.
Notes:
HandicapMaster expects to find a backup of the database which has been taken using
HandicapMaster itself (i.e. a compressed copy). The file is called HandicapMaster.BAK.
Where the Backup spans more than one disk, additional files will be called HandicapMaster-01.BIN (or
similar).
Click the Online Restore button if you wish to perform an Online Restore.
See Also
Protection of the Database
Backing up the Database
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
436
23.6
HandicapMaster®
Automatic Backups
23.6.1 Introduction
In addition to the Backup Database option available, HandicapMaster also retains copies of the
database file each time HandicapMaster is exited (if the data has changed).
On exit, and at other selected times, HandicapMaster copies the database to a directory called
BACKUP created within the folder where HandicapMaster has been installed.
Note: For the Network Edition of HandicapMaster automatic backups when exiting are taken on a
periodic basis. If when exiting HandicapMaster the previous automatic backup was taken more
than 3 days earlier then a fresh automatic backup is taken.
HandicapMaster copies the database file (Handicap.Mdb) to a file of name "Handic<nn>.Mdb" where
<nn> is an increasing sequential number. By default, this number is up to 5. Once all five have been
created, copy number 1 is overwritten on the next occasion (and so forth).
These copies can then be used to recover HandicapMaster in the situation that the database file is lost
or becomes damaged.
These copies are called 'Automatic Backups'.
Important Note
The 'automatic backups' must not be relied on to safe store your HandicapMaster data. The automatic
backup files are saved to the same hard disk as HandicapMaster itself. In the event of a hard drive
failure, or loss of the PC, your data will be lost.
Always ensure you take regular backups away from the HandicapMaster PC using Backup Database
option.
Contents
Restoring the Database from an Automatic Backup
Change the number of Automatic Backups retained
23.6.2 Restoring the Database from an Automatic Backup
To recover the database from an Automatic Backup
1.
On the File menu, click Options.
2.
Click the Database tab.
3.
Click Restore from Automatic Backups button.
4.
Select the applicable backup you wish to restore from in the Available Backup Files list.
5.
Click Restore Database .
Important Note
The 'automatic backups' must not be relied on to safe store your HandicapMaster data. The automatic
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Managing the Database
437
backup files are saved to the same hard disk as HandicapMaster itself. In the event of a hard drive
failure, or loss of the PC, your data will be lost.
Always ensure you take regular backups away from the HandicapMaster PC using Backup Database
option.
23.6.3 Change the number of Automatic Backups retained
To change the number of Automatic Backups retained by the system
(Not applicable for Network Edition of HandicapMaster)
1.
On the File menu, click Options.
2.
Click the Database tab.
3.
In the Number of Automatic Backups held in BACKUP directory box, enter the required
number. The valid range for this setting is from 0 (zero - no automatic copies) to 99 inclusive.
Important Note
The 'automatic backups' must not be relied on to safe store your HandicapMaster data. The automatic
backup files are saved to the same hard disk as HandicapMaster itself. In the event of a hard drive
failure, or loss of the PC, your data will be lost.
Always ensure you take regular backups away from the HandicapMaster PC using Backup Database
option.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
438
23.7
HandicapMaster®
Using more than one copy of HandicapMaster
23.7.1 Introduction
This facility allows you to manage multiple HandicapMaster databases, in affect running more than one
copy of HandicapMaster on the same computer.
HandicapMaster from Version 7 onwards supports a range of database products.
For each database an entry is defined that contains the information required to access that database.
This information is used at the start up of HandicapMaster to present the user with a list of databases
to access, when two or more are configured.
Contents
Create two copies of HandicapMaster on the same Computer.
Add or modify the Databases used
Share a Database between different Users on the Computer
23.7.2 Create two copies of HandicapMaster on the same Computer
To create a second copy of HandicapMaster
Society. Club, Premier and EGA Handicap Editions
1.
On the File menu, click Options.
2.
Click the Database tab.
3.
Click the Configure... button.
4.
Click New... button and run the The Database Wizard.
Network Edition
1.
It is assumed that a new instance of the HandicapMaster database has been created in the local
SQL Server, or the Hosted SQL server. Please contact HandicapMaster support for further advice and
assistance in creating a new SQL server database.
2.
On the File menu, click Options.
3.
Click the Database tab.
4.
Click the Configure... button.
5.
Click New... button and run the The Database Wizard.
6.
Select Network Edition and configure the SQL Server database information.
23.7.3 Add or modify the Databases
To add to the list of Databases available
1.
On the File menu, click Options.
2.
Click the Database tab.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Managing the Database
3.
Click the Configure... button.
4.
Click New... button and run the The Database Wizard.
439
To modify the list of Databases available
1.
On the File menu, click Options.
2.
Click the Database tab.
3.
Click the Configure... button.
4.
Click Settings... or Remove buttons as required.
23.7.4 Share a Database between different Users
If you wish to share access to a HandicapMaster database file between different Windows Users on
the same Computer, then create a shared database, then add this shared database to the
configuration of other HandicapMaster Users on the Computer.
To configure a shared Database file
1.
On the File menu, click Options.
2.
Click the Database tab.
3.
Click the Configure... button.
4.
Click New... button and run the The Database Wizard. Use the option to Share a database when
creating the new Database file. Complete the Database Wizard to create the Shared Database.
5.
For each of the other users on the computer who require access to this Database, start
HandicapMaster and configure the Shared database as follows:
a.
On the File menu, click Options.
b.
Click the Database tab.
c.
Click the Configure... button.
d.
Click New... button and run the The Database Wizard.
i.
Use the option None (Locate existing Database).
ii.
Highlight the shared database in the list. This will be a database in the "All Users" or
"Public" folder.
iii.
Complete the Database Wizard to create the Shared Database.
23.7.5 Database Configuration
The Database Configuration Utility allows you to manage multiple HandicapMaster databases, in effect
running more than one copy of HandicapMaster on the same computer.
New button
This allows you to add a new Database entry to the list.
Settings button
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
440
HandicapMaster®
This allows you to amend details of the currently selected entry in the list.
Remove button
This allows you to remove the currently selected Database entry from the list.
Note removal from the list does NOT delete the underlying Database file, except in some
circumstances.
Up and Down buttons
These buttons, represented by Up and Down arrows, allow the ordering of databases in the list to be
modified.
23.7.6 The Database Wizard
HandicapMaster Edition
Choose either Society, Club or Premier edition or Network edition.
Society, Club or Premier edition will create an Access Database file.
Network edition will allow an SQL Server Database to be configured to HandicapMaster (see SQL
Server Database Configuration below).
Type of Database to Create
Choose the type of Database to create. Select
New to create a new, empty database file. Tis will allow you to start afresh with an empty
HandicapMaster database.
Copy Existing Database to make a copy of a HandicapMaster Database you are already using. On
the Database to Copy page, select the existing database to be used.
None (Locate existing Database) to configure a database file that already exists. On the Locate
existing Database page, highlight the Database file to be used. If the file is not listed, click Find
button to locate and add the required database file to the list.
Share Database
Choose whether to allow other Windows Users on the (same) computer shall be able to use the
Database file.
Settings
In the Description box, enter a title for this copy of the database. This title will be displayed in the list of
databases displayed when HandicapMaster is started.
In the Icon box, select an Icon to be displayed alongside the description.
Finish
Click Finish to create the Database file.
SQL Server Database Configuration
If Network edition database has been selected, then on the SQL Server Database information page,
enter the details of the Database to be used, as provided by your Database Administrator.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Managing the Database
441
In the SQL Catalog box, enter the SQL server database catalog name. For example, this may be
"MYSERVER\SQLEXPRESS".
In the SQL Database box, enter the name of the SQL server database, as it is catalogued in
SQL Server.
23.7.7 Choosing a copy of HandicapMaster to use
When more that one HandicapMaster database has been added through the Database Configuration
utility, the "Choose a copy of HandicapMaster to run" window is displayed when HandicapMaster is first
started.
To select the database you wish to use
Highlight the required database in the list and click OK.
To manage the list of Databases displayed
Use the Database Configuration utility to add to or modify the list of databases displayed when
HandicapMaster starts.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
442
23.8
HandicapMaster®
Online Backup and Restore
23.8.1 Introduction
The online backup and restore facility provides an extra level of protection to users of HandicapMaster.
This facility is a subscription based service which allows users to store HandicapMaster data in a
secure off site location. The data stored may be used to restore a customer's data after a total loss of
data.
To use this facility a valid subscription and working broadband internet connection is required.
If you have any queries regarding this online service please review the product information on
HandicapMaster website here:
http://www.handicapmaster.org/products/onlinebackups.php
Subscription for the HM-SAFE online storage service.
An annual subscription fee is payable to us this service. This helps to cover costs of providing the
service and providing support to customers.
For HandicapMaster Club, Premier and Network Editions customers who pay an annual renewal
charge an extra item may be added to your invoice for this service.
For HandicapMaster Society edition users an online-payment facility may be used to pay for your
subscription.
Current prices are available from the HandicapMaster website shop.
http://www.handicapmaster.org/shop
Where you may order online.
If you have any any further queries regarding this service please e-mail our support department
[email protected]
Notes:
Use of a dial up connection is not suitable for the HM-SAFE online storage service as the speed of
transfer will be too slow to be usable. Please note use of this service over a dial-up connection will
not be supported.
Data is encrypted before being sent to the HM-SAFE online storage service.
The HM-SAFE online storage service does not replace the need to take backups to local disks and
removable media.
While every effort is made to ensure the HM-SAFE online storage service is operational.
HandicapMaster Limited cannot guarantee data that is posted to the HM-SAFE online storage
service can be recovered in the event of loss following a technical problem with the service.
23.8.2 Online Backup
To backup the database
1.
On the File menu, click Backup Database.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Managing the Database
443
2.
Click the Online Backup button if you wish to perform an Online Backup for the first time.
3.
The first time you use this facility to must enter your HM-SAFE online storage service Identity Code
as supplied when you registered for the service.
4.
Tick the View Log option to view a log. This may be useful if the backup is not successful.
5.
You may enter notes to be associated with the backup which may be useful for a future
restore.
6.
Click Yes to perform the backup, or No to bypass the backup operation.
HandicapMaster will now send the encrypted data to the HM-SAFE online storage service, this can take
from a few seconds to a few minutes depending on the size of your database and the speed of your
internet connection
When the backup has been sent click the Finish button. If the View Log option was ticked then the log
will be displayed.
Notes:
Click the Local Backup button if you wish to perform a database Database Backup to local media.
Data is encrypted before being sent to the HM-SAFE online storage service.
When the data transfer is completed a check is made to ensure that the data was transmitted
without errors. If there is a transmission error due to a communciations failure the backup will NOT
be stored, and the backup must be sent again.
23.8.3 Online Restore
To restore the database
1.
On the File menu, click Restore Database.
2.
Click the Online Restore button if you wish to perform an Online Restore for the first time.
3.
The first time you use this facility to must enter your HM-SAFE online storage service Identity Code
as supplied when you registered for the service.
4.
Tick the View Log option to view a log. This may be useful if the restore is not successful.
5.
Click Yes to list the backups that may be restored, perform the backup, or No to bypass the
restore operation.
Selecting the backup to restore
A list of available backups that may be restored is displayed with the most recent backup first. If you
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
444
HandicapMaster®
added any notes when a backup was taken these are displayed alongside the backup.
1.
Select the backup to be restored by clicking on that entry in the list.
2.
Click Yes to restore the backup, or No to bypass the restore operation.
Confirm the restore of the database
A progress bar is displayed showing the downloading of data from the HM-SAFE online storage
service.
Once the download has completed you must confirm that you wish to restore the backup.
Click Yes to confirm that you wish to restore the backup.
A message will be displayed confirming the status of the restoration, click OK. If the View Log option
was ticked then the log will be displayed.
Notes:
Click the Local Restore button if you wish to perform a database Database Restore from local
media.
Your data is encrypted before being sent to the HM-SAFE online storage service.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
445
Chapter
24
Keeping HandicapMaster Software up
to date
446
HandicapMaster®
24
Keeping HandicapMaster Software up to date
24.1
Introduction
The HandicapMaster Update service is an online extension of HandicapMaster that helps you keep
your HandicapMaster product up-to-date. Product updates are created b y HandicapMaster to b ring you
the highest levels of stab ility. Updates are also issued when additional facilities are added to
HandicapMaster. These may b e the result of Customer feedb ack, or part of ongoing product
development. Occasionally updates are also required to deal with changes to the handicapping rules.
Users with an Internet connection can check for program updates. If any are found, they can be
downloaded and installed by HandicapMaster automatically.
Those running HandicapMaster on a computer with a broadband Internet connection (an 'always-on'
connection) may like to configure HandicapMaster to automatically check for updates each time
HandicapMaster is started.
Contents
Check for Program Updates
Automatically update software
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Keeping HandicapMaster Software up to date
24.2
447
Check for Program Updates
To run a check for Program Updates
1.
On the Help menu, select Check for Updates Online
Note
The first time this option is selected, HandicapMaster will download and install a utility program
called "HMupdater" that manages downloading and installing program updates.
Click Download and Install HMupdater Now button to prepare HandicapMaster for automatic
installation of program updates.
2.
If you wish HandicapMaster to check for available updates automatically each time
HandicapMaster is started, tick the Check each time HandicapMaster is started on this
Computer box.
3.
Click Check for Updates Now button to check, download and install any program updates
available.
Notes:
This option requires an active Internet Connection.
For support purposes, the registered Organisation Name and Program Version number currently
being used will be passed to the HandicapMaster web site when the check for updates is run.
Access to the Check each time HandicapMaster is started on this Computer option may be
restricted in Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions of HandicapMaster using
Custom Access.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
448
24.3
HandicapMaster®
Automatically update HandicapMaster software
HandicapMasterTo configure HandicapMaster to automatically install program updates
when available
1.
On the Help menu, select Check for Updates Online
2.
Tick the Check each time HandicapMaster is started on this Computer box.
Notes:
This option requires that an Internet connection is available when HandicapMaster is started.
Access to this option may be restricted in Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions
of HandicapMaster using Custom Access
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
449
Chapter
25
Integrating HandicapMaster with
Other Systems
450
HandicapMaster®
25
Integrating HandicapMaster with Other Systems
25.1
Linking to Other Membership Systems
25.1.1 Introduction
HandicapMaster Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions include two options to
integrate memb ership information from an external system. When integrated, Memb ership information
is kept in line with changes made in the external Memb ership system.
The two options allow membership information to be sourced from the external system by
sharing information via a Comma-separated Values (CSV) file, or
using the HandicapMaster 'Remote Requests' facility. For HandicapMaster to receive Remote
Requests the external system MUST have been programmed to use the HandicapMaster supplied
ActiveX DLL interface with the option to use database stored procedures for the Network Edition.
Please contact your software supplier to confirm this before you activate the Remote Request
Integration facility.
When configured in either of these ways, membership information becomes read-only in
HandicapMaster
This chapter describes these Integration facilities and how they can be activated.
Contents
How loading Membership information by CSV file works
How loading Membership information by Remote Requests works
Activating and Configuring the Integration Facility
Report Account ID values in use
25.1.2 How loading Membership information by CSV file works
Matching of Membership Records
Records passed in the CSV load file are matched against records in HandicapMaster.
Where there is a match, the membership details in HandicapMaster are refreshed with the data from
the load file. If the player is currently listed in the Past Members list in HandicapMaster, they are
returned to the active (all) members list.
Where a record is found in the load file that cannot be matched in HandicapMaster, a new
membership record is created in HandicapMaster.
Where a record in HandicapMaster cannot be matched with a record in the load file, the player is
marked as a ‘Past Member’ in HandicapMaster.
To match records between the file and HandicapMaster, an ‘Account ID’ is maintained in the database.
This is the sole item used for the matching and it is essential that a unique account id is maintained
by the membership system for each player.
See Layout of the CSV File topic for an explanation of the membership fields that may be loaded from
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Integrating HandicapMaster with Other Systems
451
the external membership system.
HandicapMaster Start-up
When the CSV Load Facility has been activated (see below), HandicapMaster start-up is modified to
search for a specific file on the PC or Network. If the file is found, a refresh of Membership details is
undertaken.
When a file is located, it is only processed when it is recognised as having different content compared
to the previous time it was processed.
Processing when File is located
Where a file is located, the following sequence of events is initiated:
1. An automatic backup of the HandicapMaster database file is taken (file duplicated to the “Backups”
folder)
2. A temporary Table is created in the HandicapMaster database and records from the Load file are
inserted into this Table.
3. Rows in the existing Membership Table are read and a search for a corresponding row in the
temporary Table undertaken. If a match is found, applicable information from the temporary table row
is used to update the Membership record. If no match is found, the Membership record is marked as
a Past Member.
Visitor rows are excluded from the search.
4. Rows in the temporary Table are read and a search for a corresponding row in membership Table
undertaken. Where no match is found, a New Member record is added.
5. The temporary Table is dropped.
6. The Load File is renamed with “’.BAK” extension.
Reviewing the Audit File
An audit file is created each time the Load Facility runs. This file is named the same as the Load File
itself, but with the addition of a “.LOG” extension. It is located in the same folder as the Load File.
The Audit file details new members added, members marked as Past Members, and duplicate names
being encountered.
The Audit file is recreated each time the Load Facility runs.
Running the Load Facility manually
The Load Facility may be re-run at any time HandicapMaster is running by selecting menu item Load
Membership records… listed under the Players menu.
25.1.3 Layout of the CSV File
Required format of the CSV File
The file must be a "Comma-Separated Values" file which is typically suffixed .CSV. This format can, for
example, be saved from a spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel.
The file must be an ASCII text file,
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
452
HandicapMaster®
There must be one membership record per record in the file,
There must be no header line in the file,
Each field within each record must be separated by a comma.
The fields supported are as follows:
Account ID or Contact ID
This is an identifier used by the external membership system to uniquely identify the member. This
may be a numeric or text
First Name
Member's First Name
Surname
Member's Surname
Middle Initials
Member's Middle Initials
Title
The Title of the member, expressed as one of the recognised abbreviations accepted by
HandicapMaster. These are "Mr", "Mrs", "Miss", "Master", "Ms", "Dr", "Sir", "Lady", "Lord", "Rt.Hon" or "H.
R.H". Default: Mr, Master, Ms or Miss depending upon whether membership record is Male/Female and
whether Junior.
Gender
The gender of the member expressed as 'M' for Male or 'F' for Female. Default: Male.
Date of Birth
Member's Date of Birth. This is used to set the Age Group of the member.
If greater or equal to 18 years sets members age group to JUNIOR
If greater than 18 but less than Senior age (default of 65) sets member’s age group to ADULT.
If equal or greater than Senior age (default of 65) sets member’s age group to SENIOR
Category
The Membership category to which the member belongs to. Default: Category of "Unknown".
Card Number
The player's membership card number. This matches field 'Has Other Membership Card' in
membership record.
Membership No (or Club Number)
The Membership number or code for this member. Default: No Membership Number or Code.
PIN No
Player's PIN number, used for keypad only competition score entry. Default: Random (unique) 3 to 6
digit number. Note: if Visitor PIN's are enabled then the PIN for a Member must NOT be allocated a
value in the Visitor PIN range by the external membership system. If it is within the Visitor PIN range it
then it will be allocated a random PIN number outside the Visitor PIN range.
National Number
The Member's National Number (such as Ireland GOLFnet number).
Note: It is not possible to use this to set an English, Scottish or Welsh CDH national number for a
player, as these numbers have to be allocated through HandicapMaster.
Address 1
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Integrating HandicapMaster with Other Systems
453
The first line of the Member's address.
Address 2
The second line of the Member's address.
Address 3
The third line of the Member's address.
Address 4
The fourth line of the Member's address.
Address 5
Typically the Post Code of the Member's address.
Telephone 1
The Member's first telephone number.
Telephone 2
The Member's second telephone number.
Telephone 3
The Member's third telephone number
Locker No
The Member's Locker Number.
Email
The Member's E-mail Address.
Note:
It is necessary for the Account ID, First Name and Surname fields to be included, as a minimum. The
remainder of the fields are optional.
Including a Comma in the data to import
If the data to be imported in to HandicapMaster includes a comma itself, the field should be enclosed
in double quotes. For example, to import an address field with a comma, the field should be entered
as
"1 High Street,"
This is how Microsoft Excel will export any data containing a comma when a spreadsheet is saved in
"Comma-separated Values" file format.
25.1.4 How loading Membership information by Remote Requests works
The Remote Request Membership loading interface implements an interface that can be used by an
external membership system to manage members within HandicapMaster.
This interface requires the external membership system to be programmed to interface with an ActiveX
DLL, or with the option to use stored database procedures in the Network Edition. Technical details of
integrating your application with this interface are beyond the scope of this document. Please contact
us for further information
This interface supports the following types of request
INSERT member
DELETE member
STATUS of request
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
454
HandicapMaster®
The INSERT member request can either add a new member or update an existing member’s details.
The DELETE member will place the member into the Past Members list.
The STATUS request allows the external membership system to determine if a previously queued
request has been processed, and the results of that processing.
The interface allows individual changes to be made, instead of the CSV membership load where all
records are “bulk” loaded.
Matching of Membership Records
The processing of requests is slightly different from the CSV load facility.
INSERT request received:
Where there is a match with an existing record in HandicapMaster, the membership details
in HandicapMaster are refreshed with the data from the request. If the player is currently
listed in the Past Members list in HandicapMaster, they are returned to the active (all)
members list.
Where a request cannot be matched with existing records in HandicapMaster, a new
membership record is created in HandicapMaster.
DELETE request received:
Where there is a match with an existing record in HandicapMaster, the player is marked as
a ‘Past Member’ in HandicapMaster.
To match records between the external membership system and HandicapMaster, an ‘Account ID’ is
maintained in the database. This is the sole item used for the matching and it is essential that a
unique account id is maintained by the membership system for each player.
HandicapMaster Start-up
When the Remote Request Load Facility has been activated (see below), HandicapMaster start-up is
modified to periodically check for any requests that have been queued. These requests are queued by
the membership system using the Remote Request interface. If a request is found in the queue a
refresh of Membership details is undertaken in HandicapMaster .
Notes:
There can be a short delay between a request being queued by an external membership system and it
being processed in HandicapMaster .
Any computer on the network running HandicapMaster may process any outstanding requests
meaning that if a computer fails you just need to start HandicapMaster on another computer to ensure
continued processing.
Reviewing the Audit File
An audit log file is updated each time a request is processed. This file is named “HMRRImport.log”.
This is located in the folder:
{AppDataDir}\HandicapMaster7
where “{AppDataDir}” is one of the following:
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Integrating HandicapMaster with Other Systems
Version of
Windows
Default Folder
Windows Vista
\Users\{User Name}\AppData\Roaming
Windows 2000
and XP
\Documents and Settings\{User Name}\Application Data
Windows 98/ME
\Windows\Application Data
455
The Audit file details new members added, members marked as Past Members, and duplicate names
being encountered.
The Audit file is appended to as each request is processed.
Once the file reaches a size of reaches a size of 512KBytes the original file is moved to a file with .old
as the extension.
e.g. HMRRImport.log.old and a new “HMRRImport.log” file is created.
Running the Load Facility manually
The Load Facility may be re-run at any time HandicapMaster is running by selecting menu item Load
Membership records… listed under the Players menu.
25.1.5 Activating and Configuring the Integration Facility
The Integration Facility can only be activated and maintained by the ADMIN user of HandicapMaster.
To access the integration facility
1.
On the File menu, click Options.
2.
Click the Integration tab.
3.
Click the Integration Configuration button.
4.
Choose the method of Integration.
Depending on the current configuration any of the three options may be marked indicating the
current active configuration. If the Remote Request load is activated then and additional option is
displayed.
No Membership Load
This option will turn off all membership loading on this computer and any other computers
running HandicapMaster if you are using a networked installation.
CSV Loading
If you chose CSV Load and there are accounting records in the database you will be
prompted to confirm that they should be removed. These records are not applicable if you are
integrating with an external membership system.
If you confirm the removal of these records, or there are no such records the Load
Memberships from CSV File window is displayed.
If you do not confirm the removal of these records then the integration will be cancelled and
returned to the “No Membership Load” state.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
456
HandicapMaster®
Remote Request Loading
If you select Remote Request loading then the following option is displayed:
Pause Membership loading
This option allows you to temporarily pause the loading of membership details. You can
pause the loading on one computer and all other computers running HandicapMaster in the
network will also pause loading.
Recent Requests Log
Click this button to generate a report of the most recent Remote Request messages received
by HandicapMaster. This may be of help to diagnose issues where member details are not
updated.
Notes:
If when you confirm the remote request loading there are accounting records in the database
you will be prompted to confirm that they should be removed. These records are not
applicable if you are integrating with an external membership system.
If you do not confirm the removal of these records then the integration will be cancelled and
returned to the “No Membership Load” state.
The Remote Requests Log file may need to be sent to your supplier's support department for
analysis.
25.1.6 Load Memberships from CSV File window
Click the Browse button to identify the location of the Load File.
Configuring the columns to be used from the CSV File
It is necessary to specific which columns are to be read from the Load File and to which membership
items these relate. Three columns are mandatory:
Account ID
Critically must be the unique Account ID used to match records between the Load File and
HandicapMaster database.
First Name
Surname
The remainder of the columns are optional. Tick an applicable box and enter the column number to
activate processing for that item of data.
CSV load Options
If you click on the options tab then you may:
Choose to ignore some records
Some records in the Load File may, optionally, be skipped when processing the file. Use the
Ignore any Rows where Column … starts with characters … option to specify any exclusion
records.
Treat the Account ID field as Text
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Integrating HandicapMaster with Other Systems
457
Some membership systems when they export data to a CSV file will generate the Account ID
as text rather than as a number, tick this option if that is the case.
Pad Card Number field
Some membership systems when they export data to a CSV file will generate the Card
Number as a number rather than as text. This can cause some card numbers to miss leading
zero's. Use the Pad Card Number with Leading Zero's to ... characters option to ensure
leading zero's are added if this is the case.
Truncate First Names to First Word only
Some membership systems when they export data to a CSV file will include more than one
first name or initials in the 'First Name' field. To limit the first names loaded into
HandicapMaster to the first word or initial only, tick the Truncate First Names to First Word
only box. Any text passed after the first space, comma or full stop in the First Name field will be
discarded.
Restrict whether a load occurs, by logged on UserID
It is possible to restrict whether a Membership File is loaded depending upon which user is
currently logged into HandicapMaster.
Click Restrict Load by Users button to configure the action to be performed when a Load file
is found, by UserID. The Restrict Load of Records by Userids window is displayed:
Select a UserID, then click
Always to require HandicapMaster to automatically perform the load when a file is
found (the default),
Prompt to require HandicapMaster to prompt the User for whether a load should be
performed, or
Never to always skip loading the file, when HandicapMaster is logged on by this
Userid.
Copy current Membership Numbers as Account ID numbers
When setting up the integration, this option allows the Account ID's to be preset the same as
the Membership Numbers for any existing Members.
25.1.7 Report Account ID values in use
In order to diagnose problems matching data between the Membership System and HandicapMaster
there is a report that can be generated.
To create a report of Member records and their Account ID's
1.
On the File menu, click Options.
2.
Click the Integration tab.
3.
Click the Report Current Account ID’s button.
A file called “AccountIDs.txt” listing the values currently in the HandicapMaster database (excluding
“Past Members”) is created.
The Account ID’s are shown as they will be interpreted according to the current integration
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
458
HandicapMaster®
configuration. A message is displayed indicating the location of the output file.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Integrating HandicapMaster with Other Systems
25.2
459
Linking Competition Fees to External Accounting or Till
Systems
25.2.1 Introduction
HandicapMaster Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions includes the option for
competition fees to b e deducted from External Accounting or Till (EPOS) systems as players sign in to
competitions b efore commencing play or b ook into a future competition (b ooking in at the club house
only).
If the HandicapMaster Subscriptions Option is installed further details for fee deduction are
available.
Description
When linked with an external Accounting or Till (EPOS) system it is possible to configure Player Entry to
check a member's account balance, and prevent entry to the competition if the member has insufficient
funds when signing-in or when booking in using Player Entry.
When a player either sign’s in or books into to a competition using the HandicapMaster Player Entry
screens, the member's account balance in the external system is accessed to check the account has
sufficient funds to enter the competition. If the account has sufficient funds, then the player is signed in
or booked in to the competition and the fee(s) deducted from their account.
Configuration of this facility is specific to the external Accounting or Till system. Please contact
HandicapMaster Limited or your Accounting or Till (EPOS) system supplier for specific details.
Notes:
The External fee deduction facility requires that the supplier of the external system has provided an
interface to their system to HandicapMaster Limited. Please contact HandicapMaster Limited or your
Accounting or Till (EPOS) system supplier to check if this is available.
When use of the External fee deduction facility for sign-in is enabled an option is available to display
the player's account balance if they are successfully signed in.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
460
25.3
HandicapMaster®
Linking to BRS, Ez-Runner or MyTeeTime Online Tee Bookings
25.3.1 Introduction
HandicapMaster Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions include the option to
integrate HandicapMaster with partner tee b ooking systems (BRS Online Tee Booking service, 'EzRunner' b ookings or MyTeeTime Bookings).
Where players are asked to book into competitions through one of these services, the player’s names
may be imported onto Start Sheets in HandicapMaster.
This chapter describes these Integration facilities and how they can be activated.
When configured for connection to the BRS system, HandicapMaster will enable names of members
and their Membership Number (or GOLFnet number) to be uploaded to the BRS service.
When configured for connection to the MyTeeTime system, HandicapMaster will enable member
details to be uploaded to the MyTeeTime service.
For information about the BRS Online Tee Booking service, please visit the www.brsgolf.com web site.
For information about the Ez-Runner service, please visit the www.ez-runner.com web site.
For information about the MyTeeTime service, please contact BedfordBeck Ltd.
Notes:
Users must have a valid account with BRS Online or Ez-Runner to be able to use this facility.
The BRS Online Tee Booking service is operated by BRS Systems and is not run by HandicapMaster
Ltd.
The Ez-Runner service is operated by Ez-Runner Systems Ltd and is not run by HandicapMaster Ltd.
The MyTeeTime service is operated by Bedfordbeck Ltd and is not run by HandicapMaster Ltd.
Contents
Configure HandicapMaster to link with BRS Online
Configure HandicapMaster to link with Ez-Runner
Configure HandicapMaster to link with MyTeeTime
Publish members' details to BRS Online
Publish member's details to MyTeeTime
Import Competition Bookings onto a Start Sheet
25.3.2 Configure link with BRS Online
To configure HandicapMaster to link with BRS Online
Note: You will need the Site Code, Folder, Username and Password, as supplied by BRS Golf, to
configure HandicapMaster.
1. Start HandicapMaster and log in using the ADMIN user.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Integrating HandicapMaster with Other Systems
461
2. On the File menu, click Options.
3. Select the Integration tab.
4. In the BRS Golf section, enter the Site Code, Folder, Username and Password, given to you by your
BRS account manager.
5. Restart HandicapMaster.
The option Publish to BRS Online Tee Booking will become available on the Players Menu in
HandicapMaster.
25.3.3 Configure link with Ez-Runner
To configure HandicapMaster to link with Ez-Runner
Note: You will need the site reference, as supplied by Ez-Runner, to configure HandicapMaster.
1. Start HandicapMaster
2. On the File menu, click Options.
3. Select the Bookings tab.
4. Tick Bookings may be downloaded from box and select Ez-Runner.
5. In the Ez-Runner section lower down on the same window, enter the reference, given to you by your
Ez-Runner account manager. This reference is the first section of the web address for your
organisation on the Ez-Runner system.
25.3.4 Configure link with MyTeeTime
To configure HandicapMaster to link with MyTeeTime
Note: You will need the Club Code reference, as supplied by BedfordBeck Ltd, to configure
HandicapMaster.
1. Start HandicapMaster
2. On the File menu, click Options.
3. Select the Bookings tab.
4. Tick Bookings may be downloaded from box and select MyTeeTime.
5. In the MyTeeTime section lower down on the same window, enter the reference, given to you by your
MyTeeTime account manager. This reference is your Club Code for your organisation on the
MyTeeTime system.
Notes:
At the time of writing, downloading bookings from the MyTeeTime service is not possible. It is possible,
however, to publish member details to the booking service.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
462
HandicapMaster®
25.3.5 Publish members' details to BRS Online
To publish (or re-publish) the details of your members on the BRS Online Tee Booking service, names
and Membership Numbers (or GOLFnet numbers for clubs in Ireland) may be sent to BRS Online to be
processed.
Outside of Ireland, where GOLFnet numbers will be published as the members' BRS Userids, values
for Club Member Number in HandicapMaster will be published as the members' Userids on BRS. In
the event that no member records in HandicapMaster have a numeric "Club Member Number", then
members' HandicapMaster PIN numbers will be published instead.
To publish member names and numbers to BRS Online Tee Booking service
1.
On the Players menu, click Publish to BRS Online Tee Booking.
Notes:
This option will only be visible after the details of your account on the BRS Online service has been
configured.
25.3.6 Publish member's details to MyTeeTime
To publish (or re-publish) the details of your members on the MyTeeTime Tee Booking service, names
and membership details may be sent to MyTeeTime to be processed.
To publish member names and numbers to MyTeeTime booking service
1.
On the Players menu, click Publish to MyTeeTime booking service.
Notes:
This option will only be visible after the details of your account on the MyTeeTime service has been
configured.
25.3.7 Import Competition Bookings onto a Start Sheet
You may import bookings from a competition set-up on BRS booking system or the Ez-Runner system
onto a Start Sheet in HandicapMaster.
First, it is necessary to turn on this option in HandicapMaster.
Turn on the option to import bookings from BRS system
1. Start HandicapMaster and log in with the ADMIN user
2. On the File menu, click Options.
3. Select the Integration tab.
4. In the Site Code box, enter your BRS system Site Code (as provided by your BRS account manager).
5. Select the Bookings tab.
6. Tick the Bookings may be downloaded from box and select BRS Golf.
7. Click OK.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Integrating HandicapMaster with Other Systems
463
The next time you create a Start Sheet for a competition, you will be offered the option to import
bookings from BRS system.
Turn on the option to import bookings from Ez-Runner system
1. Start HandicapMaster.
2. On the File menu, click Options.
3. Select the Bookings tab.
4. Tick the Bookings may be downloaded from box and select Ez-Runner.
5. In the Ez-Runner Configuration section, enter your Ez-Runner reference (the first part of your EzRunner web address).
6. Click OK.
The next time you create a Start Sheet for a competition, you will be offered the option to import
bookings from Ez-Runner.
Import Bookings onto a Start Sheet
1. Do one of the following:
On the Competitions Menu, choose Create a Start Sheet and select the opened
competition, or
In the Opened Competitions list, select the competition and click with the right-hand button.
Click Start Sheet.
2. On the Import Players from Bookings page, select Import Bookings from BRS Golf or Import
Bookings from Ez-Runner option and click Next.
3. A list of competitions currently configured on the booking system will be displayed. Highlight the
applicable competition and click OK.
4. The bookings will be imported onto the Start Sheet, where they can be matched to players in the
HandicapMaster database.
At the end of the import, a list of players who have not been matched will be displayed, showing their
Tee Time and any number associated to them on the booking system.
Note
Where the booking for a slot is entered as "*", "X", "XX", "XXX" or starts with "XXXX" on the BRS
system, the booking will be imported as an "Unavailable" slot in the Start Sheet.
How players are matched between BRS Golf or Ez-Runner and HandicapMaster
Where the Player's number on the booking system is recognised, the player will automatically be
imported to the Start Sheet.
A number is checked for a match in the following order:
1. National ID (CDH Number)
2. Club Member Number (*)
3. Other membership Card Number (*)
* For a match against Club Member Number or Card Number to be recognised, the player's Last name
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
464
HandicapMaster®
on the booking system must match the start of the player's Surname in HandicapMaster.
Where the Player's number is not recognised, or the player's name was typed in in freeform text on the
booking system, HandicapMaster will advise that a match has not been located and offer the option to
choose a matching player from a list of players and visitors in HandicapMaster.
Answer Yes to choose a matching player from a list.
Answer No to ignore this player (not importing this player to the Start Sheet).
Answer Cancel to ignore this player and any subsequent players not matched in HandicapMaster
during this import.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
465
Chapter
26
Menu Options and Toolbar Buttons
466
HandicapMaster®
26
Menu Options and Toolbar Buttons
26.1
Introduction
A quick guide to the Menu Options and Toolbar Buttons available.
The following section is intended as a quick summary list of the Menu Options available within
HandicapMaster. Also identified are Toolbar Buttons where these have been provided.
Contents
Table of options and toolbar buttons
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Menu Options and Toolbar Buttons
26.2
467
Menu Options and Toolbar Buttons
The following is a quick guide to the Menu options available in HandicapMaster.
File Me nu
Change Registration
Register your use of HandicapMaster, including setting the title as used on all of the
reports.
Change Password
Change the System Password
Users
Add, amend or delete Userids in HandicapMaster
Options
Set system-wide parameters
Housekeeping
Perform 'Housekeeping' of database, such as removing data older than a chosen date
Print Report
Prints the currently-displayed report
E-mail
Send an e-mail to one or more recipients
Publish to Internet
Upload Competition and handicapping data to the MasterScoreboard.co.uk web site.
Connect to National Handicap Database and deliver or receive Handicap records. (If National
Database provided)
Backup Database
Produce a security copy of the HandicapMaster database
Restore Database
Recover the HandicapMaster database from a previous security copy
Switch Database
Switch to another HandicapMaster database
Exit
Exit HandicapMaster (perform database backup if required)
P la y e rs Me nu
New Member
Add a new member to the membership list.
Edit Member
Edit a members' membership record
Delete Member
Delete (remove) a member from the membership list.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
468
HandicapMaster®
New Visitor
Add a new Visitor (non-member) to the database.
Edit Visitor
Edit a Visitor's record
Delete Visitor
Delete (remove) a Visitor from the Visitor list.
Update Visitors from CDH (If National Database provided and supports feature (Club,
Premier and Network Editions only))
Update Visitor handicaps from National Database.
Find a Player on CDH (If National Database provided and supports feature (Club, Premier
and Network Editions only))
Search for a Player on CDH where name and home club are known.
Undelete
Recover a previously deleted Member or Visitor
Letters
Enable a database of letters to be generated for easy addressing to members.
Letter Of Introduction
Write a letter of introduction for a member.
Import (Import Visitors when integrated with external membership system)
Import Membership (or visitor) records from an external file
Export
Write out Membership records to an external file
Golf Courses
Add and amend Golf Club and course details
Officer Titles
Change the text of a Committee Officer title
Membership Categories
Change the text of a Membership Category.
Membership Groups (Only available when the Subscriptions Option has been installed as a
registered option)
Change the text of a Membership Category.
Subscriptions (Not available when the Subscriptions Option has been installed as a
registered option)
Change the text of Subscriptions and also reset payments made.
Distribution Lists
Manage Distribution Lists to assist with communication by Letter or E-mail.
A c c o unting Me nu (Only available when the Subscriptions Option has been installed as a
registered option)
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Menu Options and Toolbar Buttons
Subscriptions
Manage membership subscriptions menu
The following subscription items are available:Raise Subscriptions...
Overdue Subscriptions...
Reprint Subscriptions...
Address labels
View
Amend Note
Print
E-mail
Refund
Void
Void Multiple Subscriptions
Cancel
Set up a Template...
Edit Template...
Copy Template...
Delete Template...
Assign Template to Members...
Invoices
Manage invoices menu
The following invoice items are available:Raise Invoices...
View
Amend Note
Print
E-mail
Refund
Void
Void Multiple Invoices
Cancel
Mark as Bad Debt
Set up a Template...
Edit Template...
Copy Template...
Delete Template
Payments Received
Record payments received
Payments
Manage payments menu
The following payment items are available:Transaction History...
View
Amend Note
Print Receipt
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
469
470
HandicapMaster®
E-mail Receipt
Refund
Void
Export
Export accounting records
Configure
Configure Accounting
The following configuration items are available:Add New payment Item
Edit payment Item
Delete Payment Item
Payment Categories
Methods of Payment
Members who receive correspondence by e-mail
Options
Manage Accounting settings.
Co mp e titio ns Me nu
Set Up A Template...
Set up the format of a Competition
Set Up A Booking Template... (Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions
only)
Set up the format of a template for future bookings
Open a New Competition...
Start a new competition
Bookings... (Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions only)
View or Configure Bookings for future competitions.
Start Sheets...
Produce a Start Sheet for a competition.
Enter Scores...
Enter scores returned in a competition (player by player).
Analyse Scores Entered...
View and edit scores already entered for a competition. May be displayed for either
Opened Competitions
Closed Competitions
Apply Scores...
Process a set of scores (compute competition results, change handicaps, etc.).
View Results...
View the results from a competition.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Menu Options and Toolbar Buttons
471
Match play Knockout Competitions
Manage match-play knockout draws including entering competitors into a match-play
knockout draw (singles or pairs) and produce a random draw. Also process results in matchplay competitions and produce updated knockout draw.
Best-of Series Competitions
Manage Best-of Series competitions.
Eclectic Competitions
Manage Eclectics
Suspend Player from Competitions... (Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network
Editions only)
Facility to suspend a player from competitions
Manage Competition Fees... (Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions
only)
Manage the collection and processing of competition entry fees.
Undo
Reverse out the most recent competition processed (or general play / first award change). If
competition, scores are returned to the state prior to 'Apply Scores'
Configure Player Entry... (Player Entry Option only)
Configure the way Score Entry screens operate, including which equipment is used
Administration Button Password... (Player Entry Option only)
Set, update or remove a password protecting exit from the Player Entry screens.
Player Entry Message ... (Player Entry Option only) (Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and
EGA-Network Editions only)
Configure one or more messages to be displayed on the Player Entry screen in idle time
between competitions
Run Player Entry Program... (Player Entry Option only)
Run the Player Entry screens.
H a nd ic a p p ing Me nu
General Play Adjustment...
Apply a clause 23 (General play) change to a member
Annual Review... (Club, Premier and Network Editions Only)
Manage a CONGU Handicapping System Annual Review of Handicaps
Update AWAY Player's Handicap...
Manually correct a player's handicap (such as AWAY player's handicap)
Handicap Note...
Record an event or detail relevant to the player's Handicap (or general note).
Record Away Scores...
Record 'Away' scores (e.g. qualifying scores returned from another club).
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
472
HandicapMaster®
Amend Away Score CSS... (Club, Premier and Network Editions Only)
Update the Competition Scratch Score for a previously-entered Away score.
Record Supplementary Scores... (Club, Premier and Network Editions Only) or Record
Extra Day Scores (EGA Handicap Editions)
Record 'Supplementary' scores.
Suspend and Reinstate Handicaps (Not Society edition)
Suspend or reinstate a members' handicap
Reassess Handicap Statuses after Annual Review... (Club, Premier and Network
Editions Only, region dependant SGU and SLGA affiliated clubs only)
Remove 'Competition Handicap' status after Annual Review (Clause 25) for Players
Restore Competition Handicap Status (Club, Premier and Network Editions Only, region
dependant SGU and SLGA affiliated clubs only)
Restore 'Competition Handicap' status for Players
Override Active/Inactive Handicap Status (Club, Premier and Network Editions Only,
region dependant England Golf and GUW affiliated clubs only )
Manually override an Active/Inactive Handicap Status for a Player
Record Scores To Re-activate Handicaps... (EGA Handicap Editions Only)
Record Handicap scores returned by players to reactivate handicaps.
Configure Handicapping Rules... (Not EGA Handicap Editions)
Configure/view how handicaps will be adjusted.
R e p o rts Me nu
Handicap Record
Display a Player's Handicap Record. May be displayed in either
Tabular format
Report format (suitable for printing)
Graphical format
Handicap Records (Select Range of Handicaps) (Not Society Edition)
Handicap List
Create a current Handicap List report
Handicap List (Selected Range of Handicaps)
Create a current Handicap List report, limiting the players listed to only those with a
handicap between a chosen handicap range
Player Handicap Certificate
Create a Handicap Certificate for a player.
Membership Reports
The following reports are available:Membership Summary
Membership Contact Summary
Officer Contact Summary
Names and addresses of the Members
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Menu Options and Toolbar Buttons
473
Telephone Numbers
E-mail Addresses
Player Identification Numbers (PIN Numbers)
National ID's and membership Card Numbers
Locker Numbers
Membership Notes
Joining Dates
Renewal Dates
Expiry Dates
Age of Members
Subscription Paid Dates
Subscription Amounts Paid (Not available with the Subscriptions Option, see
Accounting Reports below for subscription related reports )
Away Members
Visitors
Groups (Only available with the Subscriptions Option)
Groups and Members (Only available with the Subscriptions Option)
Distribution Lists
E-mail Log
Membership Update Problems (when integrated with external membership system
and using Remote Request )
Competition Reports
The following reports are available:View Competition Results
Analysis of Scores Entered (Opened competition)
Analysis of Scores Entered (Closed competition)
Closed Competitions
Scorecards from a Competition
'No Score Recorded' Scores
Competition Scratch Score (Not Society Edition)
Best Scores Analysis
Competition Scoring Analysis
Competition Winners
Ladies Medals (Not Society Edition)
ILGU Silver Spoon (CONGU Editions, Ireland only)
Players suspended from Competitions (Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGANetwork Editions only)
Player Hole-by-Hole Analysis
Order of Merit
Number of 'Good' Holes Played
Callback Log (when integrated with external membership system)
Bookings Reports (Premier, Network, EGA-Premier and EGA-Network Editions only)
The following reports are available:Competition Bookings
History of Bookings (Opened competition)
History of Bookings (Closed competition)
Online Payments Received (Opened competition)
Online Payments Received (Closed competition)
Group Bookings - Confirmation of Reservation
Forthcoming Group Bookings
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
474
HandicapMaster®
Handicapping Reports
The following reports are available:Handicap List
CONGU® 9 Hole Competition Handicaps (Club, Premier and Network Editions)
Create a conversion chart for converting CONGU® 18 Hole Exact Handicaps to 9
Hole Handicaps
Playing Handicap Changes (Not EGA Handicap Editions)
General Play Changes
Annual Review Adjustments (Club, Premier and Network Editions)
First Awards
Away Scores (Report to Home Clubs) (Not Society Edition)
Away Scores (Recorded)
Supplementary Scores (Eligibility) (Club, Premier and Network Editions)
Supplementary Scores (Recorded) (Club, Premier and Network Editions) or Extra Day
Scores (EGA Handicap Editions)
Number of Scores Returned
Inactive Handicaps (List of Players) or Non-Competition Handicaps (List of Players)
(region dependant) (Not Society Edition)
Inactive Handicaps (Possible Candidates) or or Non-Competition Handicaps (Possible
Candidates) (region dependant) (Not Society Edition)
Inactive Handicaps (Overrides applied) (Club, Premier and Network Editions) (region
dependant) (Not Society Edition)
Active/Inactive Handicap Status Overrides (Club, Premier and Network Editions) (region
dependant)
Lowest Handicap Held (Not EGA Editions)
Lowest Handicap Held (Selected Range of Handicaps) (Not EGA Editions)
Handicap Range
Players Not Played Near Handicap
Annual Handicap Review - Computer Analysis (EGA Editions)
Union audit of Low Handicap Players (Not Society Edition) or National Association
Audit of Low handicap Players (EGA Handicap Editions
Summary of Scores
Most Improved Golfer
Handicap Notes
Players without Handicaps
Accounting Reports (Only available when the Subscriptions Option has been installed as a
registered option)
The following reports are available:All Payment Transactions
Payment Transaction Summary
Payment History
Transaction History
Account Balance
Method of Payment
Overdue Invoices
Income Received
Subscription Summary
Subscription Details
Valid Subscriptions
Members Without a Subscription Template
Overdue Subscriptions
Overdue Subscriptions Summary
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Menu Options and Toolbar Buttons
475
Audit Log
Configure layout of Handicap List
Define the look and content of the Handicap List report.
Layout and Options
Define your own fonts and report attributes
V ie w Me nu
First Page
When displaying a report, move to first page of report.
Previous Page
When displaying a report, move to previous page of report.
Next Page
When displaying a report, move to next page of report.
Last Page
When displaying a report, move to last page of report.
Open/Close Task & Explorer Pane
Open or Close (Show or Hide) the Task and Explorer Pane.
H e lp Me nu
HandicapMaster Help
Open this help document.
Welcome
Display Welcome screen.
Training
Information about Training Compact Disc availability.
HandicapMaster on the Web
Display HandicapMaster website in a browser.
MasterScoreboard.co.uk on the Web
Display MasterScoreboard.co.uk website in a browser.
Check for Updates Online...
Keeps HandicapMaster software up to date by downloading and installing the latest program
updates.
Send Diagnostic Files to Support
Sends information about this copy of HandicapMaster to HandicapMaster Support staff
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Chapter
Appendix
27
Appendix
27
Appendix
27.1
Council of National Golf Unions
The Council of National Golf Unions Ltd (CONGU)
Council comprising representatives of the
England Golf,
Golfing Union of Ireland,
Irish Ladies Golf Union,
Scottish Golf Union,
Scottish Ladies Golfing Association,
Golf Union of Wales
together with
Royal and Ancient Golf Club of St. Andrews,
Ladies Golf Union.
This council administers the Unified Handicapping System.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
477
478
27.2
HandicapMaster®
Maximum Handling Capacity of the Software
The maximum handling capacity of this software is
Unlimited
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Appendix
27.3
479
Send Diagnostic Files to Support
The "Send Diagnostic Files to Support" option allows data regarding your copy of HandicapMaster to be
sent to HandicapMaster Support staff for analysis.
The information will be e-mailed to "[email protected]".
When to use this option?
Please only use this option when requested to by HandicapMaster Support.
Sending Diagnostic Files from another PC
You may specify which PC sends the diagnostic files (default: this PC). This allows the log files to be
sent from a Player Entry PC which is located elsewhere in the club (e.g.a locker room), without having
to visit the PC. It is not necessary to stop Player Entry to send the information.
To send the diagnostic logs from another PC, select the name of the PC from which the logs are to be
sent.
Provided that the Player Entry system is running on the designated PC, the diagnostic files will be sent
within a few minutes.
Note: If you have different user accounts, you require System Utilities – Update permissions to be able
to request diagnostic files from another PC. No special permissions are required to send diagnostic
files from the local PC.
What information is sent to HandicapMaster Support?
The information sent consists of the following files (when available on the PC):
Error.Log
This file contains details of all Unexpected Errors encountered by HandicapMaster, including those
that cause HandicapMaster to end prematurely.
DBConfig.xml
This file contains HandicapMaster Database configuration information.
ScoresEntered.txt
This file contains details of actions taken at the Player Entry screens using this Computer, over the
preceding 30 days.
Connect.Log
This file contains details of the connection to MasterScoreboard and/or the Ireland GOLFnet service,
for the most recent run of the Publish to Internet wizard.
EGU_CDH.Log
This file contains details of the data sent to the England Golf CDH service, for the most recent run of
the Publish to Internet wizard (when the Enable Logging (troubleshooting) option has been
selected).
HandicapMasterUpdater.log
This file contains details of online software updates that have been applied and any errors
encountered running the online update process.
HandicapMaster.ini
This file contains HandicapMaster configuration information.
CallBack.log
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
480
HandicapMaster®
Created when HandicapMaster is integrated with an external membership system and customised
processing is implemented. Most HandicapMaster installations will not have this log.
Where can these files be found?
These files can be located in the following folder:
Windows XP Users:
C:\Document and Settings\<User>\Application Data\HandicapMaster8
C:\Document and Settings\<User>\Application Data\HandicapMaster8\National Data
Windows Vista and Windows 7 Users:
C:\Users\<User>\AppData\Roaming\HandicapMaster8
C:\Users\<User>\AppData\Roaming\HandicapMaster8\National Data
where <User> is the name of the Userid used to Log into Windows. Please note this is a "hidden"
folder in Windows.
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Index
Reassesing Handicaps after Annual Review SCOTLAND
327
Index
Annual Handicap Review (CONGU Handicapping)
Adjust Players Handicaps
322
Identify Players who may need a Handicap
Adjustment
322
Introduction
321
Manage the Annual Review
322
View a report of adjustments made
323
-112 Hole Competitions
481
342
-99 Hole Competitions (CONGU Handicapping)
9 Hole Compettiions
342
9 Hole Standard Scratch Score
156
331
-AAccount Balance
230
Accounting
Add Footnote to Receipts
120
E-mailing Invoices
120
E-mailing Receipts
120
Printing Invoices Automatically
120
Printing Receipts Automatically
120
Prompt if subscription overdue when adding player
to start sheet
120
Removing Void records
431
System-wide Options
120
VAT Number
120
VAT Rate
120
Active/Inactive Handicaps (CONGU Handicapping ENGLAND)
63
Active/Inactive Handicaps (CONGU Handicapping)
167
Address Labels
From a Distribution List
111
From existing subscriptions
360
Age Groups
Adjust Automatically
115
Setting Adult and Senior ages
115
Aggregate Scores
167
Align Picture Left
141
Am-Am
167
Annual Handicap Review
Reprint Letter
311
Annual Handicap Review (CONGU Handicapping SCOTLAND)
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Annual Handicap Review (EGA Handicapping)
333
Away Competition Scores
Amend CSS
317
Delete Away Score
398
Enter Away Score
312
Import
315, 316
Reductions Only Away Score
312
Report Away Scores to Home Clubs
91, 328
Undo Away Score
393
Away Handicap changes
Away Member
E-mail
93
312
Away Member Change Home Club
45
Away Member to Home Member
44
-BBackup
Local Backup
434
Managing automatic Backups
437
Online backup
442
Online Database Backup and Restore
442
Balanced Draw
183, 184
Basic Subscriptions
Clearing payments
47
Managing
47
Best of Series
Do not show a Best of Series on
MasterScoreboard
409
Best-of Series
Edit Notes
209
Birdie Tree
211
Book into Future Competitions
244, 248, 254, 462
Add additional Tee Time to existing booking sheet
249
Book a Player into Competition
252
Bookings Template Wizard
247
Cancel a Booking
252
482
HandicapMaster®
Book into Future Competitions
244, 248, 254, 462
Cancel existing arrangements for Booking into a
competition
250
Cancellations
255
Change existing arrangements for Booking into a
competition
249
Club Opens
251
Configure how Bookings are collected
115
Create a Bookings Template
246
Delete a Booking Template
246
Knock-out Draw
272
Match-play competitions
272
Modify a Booking Template
246
Online Bookings
115, 254
Switch between views
253
Templates (Create)
246
Templates (Delete)
246
Templates (Modify)
246
Templates Introduction
245
The Bookings Wizard
250
Toolbar buttons
253
View History
255
-C-
Unrecognised Golf Courses error
425
Central Database of Handicaps (England, Scotland &
Wales)
Adding Visitors through Player Entry
420
Away members
417
Common Error codes returned by the CDH
422
Find a player on the CDH
418
Introduction
410
Obtain National Number
414
Personal Information
410
Player joins with existing ID
419
Publish latest records to the CDH
415
Receiving Away Competition Scores
423
Releasing Members
417
Removing unknown players from CDH
416
Reporting Problems with the CDH service
422
Update Away members latest handicap
415
Update Information
415
Using the CDH for the First time
412
Verify a Handicap of a Visitor
421
Verify the Handicaps of more than one Visitor
421
Visitors
418
Central Database of Handicaps (Ireland)
398
Unrecognised Golf Courses error
425
Certificate
51
Change a previous Handicap Award
43
Change Away Member Home Club
45
Change Away Member to Home Member
44
Change Course details
156
Change format of Member's names in reports
147
Change Home Member to Away Member
46
Change size of Report
138
CDH (England)
410, 412, 414, 415, 417, 418, 419, Change SSS, PAR and Stroke Index values
156
420, 421, 422, 423
Changing Password
132
Releasing Members
417
Choosing a copy of HandicapMaster to use
441
Removing unknown players from CDH
416
Competition Fees
216, 217, 218, 230
CDH (England) Web address
412
Account Balance at Sign in
227
CDH (Scotland)
410, 412, 414, 415, 417, 418, 419,
Prevent entry to competition if insufficient funds
420, 421, 422, 423
219, 459
Releasing Members
417
Competition Scratch Score
Removing unknown players from CDH
416
Amend CSS for late Away Score
317
CDH (Wales)
410, 412, 414, 415, 417, 418, 419,
Reductions only
199
420, 421, 422, 423
Competition/Non-Competition Handicap Status
Releasing Members
417
(CONGU Handicapping - ENGLAND & WALES)
Removing unknown players from CDH
416
323, 324, 325, 326
Central Database of Handicaps (England)
Competition/Non-Competition Handicap Status
Delete Away Score
398
(CONGU Handicapping - SCOTLAND)
63
Calendar Note
Copy existing note
264
Delete a Note
263
Fixture Lists
264
Introduction
262
Modify Note
263
New Note
262
Print
263
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Index
483
How to configure a competition
167
Competition/Non-Competition Handicap Status
Leaderboard
175
(CONGU Handicapping - WALES)
63
Mixed Competition
167
Competitions
115, 156, 165, 201, 206, 267, 268,
271, 272, 274, 275, 276, 277, 279, 280, 281, 282, 283,
Modify a Template
165
284, 286, 312, 397
Multiple Round
175
Abandoned
199
Multiple Round Competitions
206, 207
Add a new Template
165
Multiple Round Competitions Results
213
Add a Visitor at Score Entry time
74
Multi-Round
175
Aggregated results
201
Nett and Gross results
213
Alternative Day Competitions
206, 208
Open a Competition
174
Annotate Competition Report
201
Overall Winners
167
Applying Competition Scores
199
Overview
164
Ban Players from Competitions
215
Presentation of Results
167
Best-of Series Competition
206, 209
Prevent entry to competition if insufficient funds
Birdie Tree Competition
211
219
Change an Opened Competition
174
Reinstate a Player into Competitions who is
Change how scores are entered
198
currently Suspended
215
Change name of closed competition
399
Rename closed competition
399
Change or amend template for opened competition
Restore Hidden Templates
166
195
Results
201
Competition Fees
115, 175, 216, 217, 218, 219
Review Scores entered
194
Competition Fees deducted from external system
Setting-up
165
459
Start Sheets
179
Competition Results
201
Stop players with non-competition handicap
Competition Scratch Score
199
status entering a competition - ENGLAND &
Copy a Template
166
WALES
326
Create a copy of a Closed Competition
205
Suspend Players from Competitions
215
Date and venue
175
Template Wizard
167
Delete a Player's Score
192
Twos
204, 211
Delete a Template
166
Type of Stroke-play Competitions
163
Delete Opened Competition
174
View Hidden Templates
166
Disqualifying a Competitor
199
CONGU Handicap System
320
Divisions
167
9 Hole Competitions
331
Duplicate Score cards from a closed competition
Active/Inactive Handicaps - ENGLAND
63
205
Annual Review
322
Edit a Player's Score previously entered
192
Annual Review - SCOTLAND
327
Enter a Competition Score
190, 191, 193
Away Members and Non-competiion Handicap
Enter a Hole-in-One
193
Status - ENGLAND & WALES
326
Enter a No Return on a Hole
193
Competition Handicaps - SCOTLAND
327
Entering a Competition Score
194
Competition Scratch Score
330
Find a player whilst entering scores
193
Competition/Non-Competition Handicap Status ENGLAND & WALES
323
Find why a player is not eligible for a competition
193
Competition/Non-Competition Handicap Status SCOTLAND
63
Format of 165, 167
Competition/Non-Competition Handicap Status Gross Score Results (seeting format for Stableford
WALES
63
or Par competitions)
115
CSS
330
Handicap Allowances
167
Disability Handicaps
39, 330
Highlighting players on results report
201
Exceptional Scoring Reductions
328
Holes in One
211
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
484
HandicapMaster®
CONGU Handicap System
320
Handicap Status Regulations - ENGLAND &
WALES
324
Importing Handicaps from Another Handicap
System
63
Junior Handicaps
46
Juniors and Non-competition Handicap Status
-ENGLAND & WALES
326
Non-competition Handicaps - SCOTLAND
327
Override Compettiion or Non-competition Handicap
Status - ENGLAND & WALES
325
Players Exempt fromNon-competition Handicap
Status - ENGLAND & WALES
326
Report Away Scores
91, 328
Restore a Competition Handicap status SCOTLAND
327
Stop players with non-competition handicap
status entering a competition - ENGLAND &
WALES
326
Supplementary Scores
320
CONGU Regional Settings
320
Convert Away Member to Home Member
44
Convert Home Member to Away Member
46
Copyright
32
Corrections
310, 392
Change the Name of a Competition
399
Undo an Away Score
398
Undo General Play/Annual Review or Exceptional
Score
396
Undo Handicap Brought Forward or First Award
394
Undo or Amend Competition Results
397
Undo Supplementary Score
395
CSS
317
Custom Start Sheet Labels
Combined handicap for team competitions
187
Custom Scorecard labels from Start Sheets
187
Design Start Sheet labels
187
Scorecard labels from Start Sheets
187
-DData Protection Act
115
Database
430, 434, 435, 438, 442, 443
Accessing the database file directly
32
Add or modify Database(s)
438
Archiving records
431
Backup Database
433, 434
Compacting the Database File
115
Copy a Database File
438
Database Configuration
439
Database File
115
Database Wizard
440
Deleting records
431
Housekeeping
431
Local Backup
434
Local Restore
435
Managing automatic Backups
437
More than one Database
438
Online Database Backup
442
Online Database Backup and Restore
442
Online Database Restore
443
Protecting data
433
Protection of the Database
434, 435, 442, 443
Restore Database
433, 435
Share a Database File
438, 439
Title Bar Description
115
Two or more Database Files
438
Delete Away Member
38
Delete Member
38
Delete Member when Integrated with External
Membership systems
38
Distribution Lists
Add a new Distribution List
106
Add entries to a Distribution List
110
Address Labels
111
Automatically Update
105
By Age
106
By Handicap Range
106
By Handicap Status
106
By Membership Category
106
Change entries in a Distribution List
110
Delete a Distribution List
109
Edit a Distribution List Name
108
Edit a Distribution list selection criteria
108
E-mail Distribution lists
105
Introduction
105
Remove All Members from a Distribution List
110
Remove members from a Distribution List
110
Using for communication with members
105
Draw
Balanced drawn startsheet
Startsheet
184
Drawn startsheet
183, 184
183, 184
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Index
-EEclectic
Notes
307
Eclectics
Add or update Scores
305
Available formats
301
Change the format of an Eclectic competition
307
Create a new Eclectic
302
Delete an Eclectic Competition
308
Disqualified Scores
308
Do not show Eclectic on MasterScoreboard
408
Introduction
301
Selecting Scores
306
Starting or amending an Eclectic
303
Edit
PARS
156
SSS
156
Edit Notes
Best-of Series
209
Eclectic Notes
307
Knockout Notes
285
Order of Merit Notes
299
EGA Handicapping
Annual Handicap Review
333
Extra Day Scores
332
Handicap Scores
334
Inactive EGA Handicaps
333, 334
Introduction
332
Report players with Inactive Handicap Status
335
EGU CDH
398, 425
E-mail
83
Attach a file
86
Attachments
86
Away Member
93
Change covering text in body of e-mails sent
Change FROM e-mail address used
90
Configure E-mail
83, 90
Define a Recipient
86
Delete Other Recipients
86
Distribution Lists
86
Edit Other Recipients
86
E-mail a letter
92
E-mail a Report
137
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
E-mail New Message Window
86
E-mail Reports
93
E-mail Settings
83, 90
Exchange Away Handicaps
91
Footer
86
Golf Clubs
94
Golf Courses
94
Handicap Certificates
90
how to e-mail a Letter
92
Insert Previous E-mail Text
86
Introduction
83
Log of E-mails
88
Member
93
Other Recipients
86
Outgoing Mail Server
83, 90
Overdue Subscription letters
362
Past Member
94
Past Visitor
94
Recipients
86
Reporting Scores to Away Clubs
91
Requirements to send E-mail
83
Resend Invoice
372
Resend Receipt
382
Resend Subscription
361
Results of sending e-mails.
88
Select Members to receive accounting
correspondence by e-mail
91
Send an E-mail
83
Send Away Scores to Home Clubs
91
Send Letters
104
Sending Handicap Certificates
90
Signature
86
Subject
86
Subscription Letters
355
Test E-mail
83, 90
Visitor
93
When raising Overdue Subscriptions
92
When Raising Subscriptions
91
E-mail Footer
86
86
89 E-mail New Message Window
E-mail Signature
86
England Golf Medals
288, 290
Exchange Away Handicaps
91, 157, 328
Export
About
56
Format of Export File
65
Membership records
58
Past Member details
58
485
486
HandicapMaster®
Export Accounting records
387
Extra Day Scores (EGA Handicapping)
Two courses at Home Club
332
-FF6 Key
238
Fees
216, 217, 218
Prevent entry to competition if insufficient funds
219, 459
Find a Player on the CDH by Name
418
Find a Player on the CDH by Number
418
Find reports
150
First Award
Award Handicap
49
Reprint Letter
311
First round Handicaps
175, 207
Fixture List
265
Folder displayed when starting program
115
Fonts
Change Font used in Letters
99
Change Fonts used in Reports
140
Forgotten Password
33
Four ball Best-Ball
167
Foursomes
167
-GGeneral Play Changes
310
Letter created automatically
Reprint Letter
311
Undo General Play Change
Getting Started
Global Options
Golf Clubs
E-mail
94
145
393
33
115
Golf Courses
Add a New Course
155
Change name of region 'Other'
159
Contact names and Addresses
157
Course Details
156
Course Ratings
156
Delete a Course
160
Edit SSS
156
E-mail
94
Length of Holes
156
Slope Ratings
156
Standard Scratch Score
156
158
GOLFnet
410
Configuring to receive Away Scores
115
Delete Away Score
398
Unrecognised Golf Courses error
425
GOLFnet (Ireland)
Adding Visitors through Player Entry
420
Common Error codes returned by GOLFnet
422
Find a player on GOLFnet
418
Introduction
410
Publish latest records to the CDH
415
Receiving Away Competition Scores
423
Update Away members latest handicap
415
Update Information
415
Using the CDH for the First time
412
Verify a Handicap of a Visitor
421
Verify the Handicaps of more than one Visitor
421
Visitors
418
GOLFnet Cards
39
Graph
Handicap Record
50
Greensomes
167
Group Bookings
Catering report
260
Confirmation of booking report
260
Copy existing Group Booking
261
Delete
258
Fixture Lists
261
Group Bookings wizard
259
Introduction
257
Modify booking
258
New booking
257
Update payment status
258
GUW Ladies Medals
GUW Medals
288
290
-HHandicap
Allocate a Handicap to a Player
49
First Award
49
First Award Letter created automatically
145
Print ESR Letter
311
Print Exceptional Scoring Reduction Letter
311
Reprint First Award Letter
311
Handicap Certificate
Handicap Certificates
51, 142
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Index
Handicap Certificates
Copy of E-mail sent
90
E-mail
90
Sending by E-mail to members
90
Handicap Corrections
310
Handicap List
143
Handicap Notes
318
Handicap Record
Graphical Format
50
Report Format
50
Table Format
50
Handicap records
433
Handicapping
Change Handicapping used
339
List of Players with Handicap in chosen range
336
Reporting Handicap Records of Players with
Handicap in chosen range
337
Reporting Low Handicap Records for Union Audit
329
The Configure Handicapping Rules Wizard
340
Handicapping competitions over less than 18 holes
342
Handicaps
First round Handicaps
175, 207
Re-instate a suspended Handicap
338
Suspend a Player's Handicap
338
Highlighting players on results report
201, 202
Highligting players
202
Holes
156
Home Club
34
Home Member to Away Member
46
Housekeeping
Archiving records
431
Deleting records
431
Managing the Database
431
Removing Void records
431
-IILGU Ladies Medals
ILGU Medals
288
Import Away Scores
About
315
How to ...
315
Import file format
About
56
Format of Import File
58
How to...
56
Importing Handicaps from Another Handicap
System
63
Update existing Membership Records
56
Import Visitors
57
Inactive Handicaps (EGA Handicapping)
334
Report players with Inactive Handicap Status
335
Inactive/Active Handicaps (CONGU Handicapping ENGLAND)
63
Inactive/Active Handicaps (CONGU Handicapping)
167
Integration with External Membership systems
450
Activating Integration
455
Audit file for CSV load
450
Audit File for Remote Requester
453
CSV file layout
451
CSV Load diagnosis
457
CSV load options
456
Starting Integration
455
Stopping Integration
455
Internet
403
Invoices
Amend an Invoice Note
371
Copy a Template
367
Create a Template
366
Delete a Template
368
Edit a Template
367
E-mail an Invoice
372
Overdue Invoices
371
Raise an Invoice
368
Refund
383
Reprint an Invoice
372
View an Invoice
370
Void
373
Void Multiple Invoices
373
Issue a Handicap
290
42
-JJuniors
CONGU Handicap System
316
Import Memberships
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
487
-KKenya Golf Network
424
46
488
Key
F6
HandicapMaster®
238
Keyboard Shortcuts
29
Knockout
Add Bye in place of a Player in the Draw
Add Player in place of a Bye in the Draw
Change date a round has to be played by
Change Players in the Draw
281
Changing Play-by Dates
284
Delete Knockout Competition
286
Maintaining Match Results
277, 279
Notes
285
Re-print the Draw
277, 280
Re-running a Knockout Draw
276
Results
277
Knockout Draw
283
282
284
267
-LLabels
187
Address Labels from a Distribution List
111
Address Labels from subscriptions
360
Custom Scorecard labels from Start Sheets
186
Desgin Start Sheet labels
186
Scorecard labels from Start Sheets
186
Ladies Medals
288
Late reporting of CSS
317
Layout of Reports
140, 141, 142, 146, 147
Change format of Member's names
147
Member Name format
147
Leader Board
227
Gross Scores
238
Hide Buttons to dsplay full width
Windows Screen Saver
238
92
289
289
167, 171
-MMagnetic Card
Swiping a card to find a Player on the CDH
Letter of Notification of First Award
Generate Automatically
145
Turn off 311
Letters
100
About
96
Adding a Letterhead to Letters
115
Adding a Picture or Logo to the Letterhead
bit-maps
96
Change "Dear" line
100, 115
Change Font used in Letters
99
LGU Medals
289
Exclude a Competition from LGU Medals
Identify a Competition as an LGU Medal
Introduction
288
Results
290
Licence
32
Limit results to top X positions
List of Available reports
150
238
Letter of notification of General Play changes
Generate automatically
145
Turn off 311
clipart
96
Delete Letter
98
Distribution Lists
96, 97
Email Letters to Members
104
E-mailing
92
Fields
100
Font for Date
99
Font for member's Address
99, 115
Font for Salutation line
100, 115
Fonts
99
Fonts Used for Letters
96
Full name of recipient
115
Images
96
Letter of Introduction
98
Letterheads
103, 115
Paste images
98
Positioning on Letters
99, 115
Printing to members without e-mail address
Resend a Letter
97
Salutation used in Letters
100, 115
Send by E-mail
96
Signatory on Letters
115
Subscription Related Fields
100
Text Substitutions
100
310
103
418
Main Features
25
Marking a competition for Best-of Series reporting
167
MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Do not show a Best of Series
409
Do not show Competition
406
Do not show Eclectic Competition
408
Do not show Knock-out Draw
407
Do not show Member's Name
405
Do not show Order of Merit Competition
408
Fixture List
406
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Index
MasterScoreboard.co.uk
Introduction
403
Online Bookings
254
Password reset for member
Request set up on Web Site
Upload data
405
406
404
Match Play Knockout
A3 Paper Size
146
About
267
Add a player to the Draw
271
Add Bye in place of a Player in the Draw
Add Player in place of a Bye in the Draw
Book into Knockout Draw
272
Bookings
272
Change date a round has to be played by
Change name of Knock-out Competition
Change Players in the Draw
281
Changing Play-by Dates
284
Choose Entrants
268
Delete Knockout Competition
286
DisplayTelephone Numbers
275
Knockout Chart
275
Knockout Draw
268, 274
Maintaining Match Results
277, 279
Notes
285
Rename a Knock-out Competition
399
Re-print the Draw
277, 280
Re-running a Match Play Knockout Draw
Results
277
Show Match Results
146
Show Member Telephone Numbers
146
Member
E-mail
283
282
284
399
Menu Options
467
Mistakes
392
Mixed Competitions
172
Most Improved Golfer
144
My Golf Ranking
427, 428
276
Member Subscription Pools
Add a New Member Subscription Pool
52
Add one or more Members to a Member
Subscription Pool
54
Edit a Member Subscription Pools
52
Introduction
52
Member Subscription Pools Window
53
Remove Members from a Member Subscription
Pool
54
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Change Visitor to Member
80
Delete All Away Members
38
Delete All Members
38
Delete Away Member
38
Delete Member
38
Delete Multiple Away Members
38
Delete Multiple Members
38
Edit Member
37
Edit Past Member
37
Handicap Certificate
51
Juniors
46
Mag Swipe Cards
39
Membership Database Fields
39
New Member
37
Past Member
38, 39
Recover a deleted Membership
39
Social Member
70
Synchronise from external system
71
Membership Groups
Introduction
52
93
Membership
39
Change Away Member Home Club
45
Change Away Member to Home Member
Change Home Member to Away Member
Change Member to No Handicap
70
Change Member to Visitor
69
489
44
46
-NNon-Competition Handicap Status (CONGU
Handicapping - ENGLAND & WALES)
Report players who may have an Inactive handicap
in the following season - ENGLAND & WALES
323
Report players with Inactive Handicap Status ENGLAND & WALES
323
Non-Competition/Competition Handicap Status
(CONGU Handicapping - ENGLAND & WALES)
324, 325, 326
Non-Competition/Competition Handicap Status
(CONGU Handicapping - SCOTLAND)
63
Non-Competition/Competition Handicap Status
(CONGU Handicapping - WALES)
63
Number of Birdies Scored Report
211
-OOpen a New Competition
Options
115
174
490
HandicapMaster®
Order of Merit
Add additional points to players outside of
competitions
297
Add or update scores
296
Change the format of an Order of Merit
competition
298
Create a Golfer of the year Report
292
Create an Order of Merit
292
Delete an Order of Merit
299
Do not show Order of Merit on MasterScoreboard
408
Introduction
292
Notes
299
Selecting Scores
297
Set up Plans for points in Order of Merit
295
Starting or amending an Order of Merit
293
Other Recipients
Delete
86
Edit
86
-PPARS
How to Change
156
Partial Payment
Record a Partial Payment for a single
Subscription or Invoice
375
Partial Payments
Record partial payments for multiple Subscription
and Invoices
376
Password
33, 124, 132, 236
Past Member
Edit Past Member
37
E-mail
94
Handicap Record
50
Recover a deleted Membership
Past Visitor
Edit Past Visitor
76
E-mail
94
Recover a deleted Visitor record
39
78
Pay to book into competitions
251
Payments
Amend a Payment Note
381
E-mail a Receipt
382
Record a Partial Payment against a single
payment
375
Record a single Payment
375
Record multiple Subscription and Invoice
payments
376
Reprint a range of receipts
381
Reprint a Receipt
381
View a Payment
380
Pictures in Reports
141, 142
PIN Numbers
Number of Digits
115
Visitor PIN Numbers
115
Player Entry Services
Handicap List
227
My Account
227
My Golf 227
Player Entry System
225, 233, 234
36-hole Leader Board
238
Account Balance at Sign in
227
Adding Visitors
242
Automatically Login when starting
235
Card not returned by Player
234
Choosing competitors in a Competition
232
Command Line Options
237
Configure Leader Board
227, 238
Configure Magnetic Card Reader
227
Configure Player Entry wizard
227
Display messages to members
239
Enter Scores
233, 234
Introduction
224
Missing Cards
234
No Returns
233, 234
Options for Player Entry Configuration
226
Print Score Cards as Players Sign In
227
Second Monitor
227
Setting an Administration Button Password
236
Show or hide Sign In from Screen
227
Touchscreen
227
Windows Screen Saver
239
Press Release
115
Print
Overdue Subscription letters
Reprint a Subscription
359
Reprint an Invoice
372
Subscription Letters
355
362
Printing
Print a Report
136
Print Labels as Players Sign In
227
Print Score Cards as Players Sign In
227
The Reports Toolbar
135
Turn off Warnings when Printing Reports
148
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Index
Program Updates
446, 447, 448
Publish results to Web Site
403
-RRecipients Window
86
Recover Member when Integrated with External
Membership systems
39
Refunds
Refund a Payment
384
Refund a Subscription or Invoice
383
Void a Payment
384
Registering
34
Registration Code
34
Release Members on the CDH
417
Releasing Members on the CDH
417
Removing unknown players from CDH
416
Rename a Knock-out Competition
399
Rename closed competition
399
Reports
135, 140, 141, 142
Adding a graphic to Reports
141
Adding Picture to Reports
141
Change format of Member's names
147
Changing Fonts used in Reports
140
Changing Report Layout
140, 141, 142
Competition Results - Enlarge Font
146
Customisation of Reports
140, 141, 142
E-mail a Report
137
E-mail Reports
93
End of Season Low Handicap Records
147
Export to Excel
138
Find reports
150
Handicap Record
147
Handicap records of Players with Handicap in
chosen range
337
Layout of Handicap Certificate
142
Layout of Handicap List
143
List of available reports
150
List of Players with Handicap in chosen range
336
Low Handicap Records Audit
329
Member Name format
147
Most Improved Golfer calculation
144
Players Not Played Near Handicap Report
146
Print a Report
136
Removing a graphic from Reports
142
Removing a Picture from Reports
142
Save a Report to Disk File
137
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
491
Summary of available reports
150
Turn off Warnings when Printing Reports
Restore
Local Restore
435
Online Database Backup and Restore
Online Restore
443
Restore from automatic backup
436
148
442
Results
Display All positions where limit has been applied
201
Display All positions where 'top X' limit has been
applied
201
Highligting players
201
Limit results to top X positions
167
Presentation of Results
167
Show top X positions only
167
View Results
201
Reverse Member's name in reports
147
-SSaving Reports
135
Scorecard
233
Scores
233
Screen Font
115
Send Away Scores to Home Clubs
By E-mail
157, 328
By Letter
157, 328
91
Send by E-mail
90
Shortcuts
29
Show top X positions only
167, 171
Sign in
Players to Sign In before play
175
Prevent entry to competition if insufficient funds
219
Singles
167
SLGA Ladies Medals
290
SLGU Medals
288
SSS
How to Change
156
Standard Scratch Score
156
Start Sheets
187
Add Players to Start Sheet
181
Add players to Start Sheet from previous round
182
Balanced Draw
183, 184
Cancel
189
Clear or change 'Unavailable' cells
181
492
HandicapMaster®
Review Subscriptions
355
Start Sheets
187
Review Subscriptions Prior to raising
355
Create
179
Select Members to receive accounting
Custom Start Sheet labels
186
correspondence by e-mail
91
Design Start Sheet labels
186
Send Subscriptions to Members
355
Drag and Drop Players in Grid
183
Subscription
Run
364
Import Bookings
179
View a Subscription
358
Import Competition Bookings from BRS Online
Void
364
462
Void Multiple Subscriptions
364
Import Competition Bookings from Ez-Runner
booking system
462
Subscriptions Invoices and Payments
347, 348,
Print Labels for Scorecards from Start Sheet
349, 351, 352, 353, 354, 355, 358, 359, 366, 367, 368,
186
370, 371, 372, 375, 376, 380, 381, 382, 383, 384
Prompt if subscription overdue when adding player
Account Balance
386
181
Adjust account balance
39, 386
Randomise Start Sheet
183
Export
387
Remove spaces in Grid
183
Export Header Record
387
Reorder Start Sheet
183
Export to CSV
387
Start Sheet Wizard
179
Introduction
345
View Start Sheet Report
185
Overdue Subscriptions
362
Payment Schedule
374
Starting the Software
33
Report Overdue Subscriptions
359
Stroke Index
How to Change
156
Reports
390
Send
Overdue
Subscriptions to members
362
Stroke Indexes
342
Send
Subscriptions
to
Members
355
Strokes Received
342
Templates
374
Subscriptions
Transaction
History
386
Address Labels
360
Transaction History Report
386
Amend a Subscription Note
358
Annual Subscription Run
364
Assign a Subscription Template to a Member
352
Copy a Template
353
Create a Template
351
Delete a Template
354
Edit a Template
353
E-mail a Subscription
361
E-mail Overdue Subscriptions to Members
92
E-mail Subscriptions to Members
91
Fields in Subscription Letters
100
Find Members without a Subscription Template
352
Include Account Balance
355
Limit reprint to members who do noreceive
subscriptions by e-mail
359
Overdue Subscriptions
362
Printing to members without e-mail address
91,
92
Raise a Subscription
355
Refund
383
Reprint a Subscription
359
Subscriptions, Invoices and Payments Configuration
Methods of Payment
347
Payment Categories
348
Payment Items
349
Summary of available reports
150
Supplementary Scores (CONGU Handicapping)
Swipe Magnetic card
To find Player on CDH
418
320
System Home Club
115
System Layout
25
-TTee Bookings
BRS Online Tee Time Manager service
460
Configure to link to BRS Online
460
Ez-Runner booking system
460, 461
Import Competition Bookings from BRS Online
462
Import Competition Bookings from Ez-Runner
booking system
462
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
Index
Tee Bookings
MyTeeTime booking system
460, 461
Publish Member names and numbers to BRS
Online
462
Publish member's details to MyTeeTime booking
system
462
Texas Scramble
167
Till (EPOS)
459
Toolbar Buttons
467
Top X positions only
167, 171
Touchscreen
227
Transaction History
386
Turn off Warnings when Printing Reports
Twos Competition (Sweep)
167
-UUndo
397
Introduction
392
Undo command
393
Updates
447
Users
123
Add a new User
129
Custom Access
125
Grant access to a User
131
Properties of a Userid
124
Remove a User
130
Reset Password
124
Types of Access
125
-VViewing Charts
Viewing Graphs
Viewing Reports
Visitor
E-mail
93
149
149
135
Visitors
About
73
Add a Visitor
74
Add a Visitor at Score Entry time
Change Member to Visitor
69
Change Visitor to Member
80
Delete a Visitor record
77
Delete All Visitors
77
Delete Multiple Visitors
77
Edit Past Visitor
76
© HandicapMaster Limited 2015
74
Import Visitors
74
Modify an existing Visitor record
PIN Numbers
74
Recover a deleted Visitor record
Update Handicap of Visitor
79
-WWarranty
Web Site
Welcome
148
32
403
19
493
76
78
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement